2020 Nissan Armada

2020 ARMADA OWNER’S MANUAL and MAINTENANCE INFORMATION

For your safety, read carefully and keep in this vehicle. CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65 WARNING Foreword

This manual was prepared to help you READ FIRST — THEN DRIVE SAFELY WARNING understand the operation and mainte- Before driving your vehicle, read your nance of your vehicle so that you may Owner’s Manual carefully. This will ensure enjoy many miles of driving pleasure. familiarity with controls and maintenance Operating, servicing and main- Please read through this manual before requirements, assisting you in the safe taining a passenger vehicle or operating your vehicle. operation of your vehicle. off-highway motor vehicle can A separate Warranty Information Book- let explains details about the warranties expose you to chemicals in- covering your vehicle. Additionally, a WARNING cluding engine exhaust, carbon separate Customer Care/Lemon Law monoxide, phthalates, and Booklet (U.S. only) will explain how to IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION resolve any concerns you may have REMINDERS! lead, which are known to the with your vehicle, as well as clarify your Follow these important driving rules State of California to cause rights under your state’s lemon law. to help ensure a safe and comforta- cancer and birth defects or In addition to factory installed options, ble trip for you and your passengers! your vehicle may also be equipped with other reproductive harm. To . NEVER drive under the influence additional accessories installed by NISSAN of alcohol or drugs. or by your NISSAN dealer prior to delivery. minimize exposure, avoid . It is important that you familiarize your- ALWAYS observe posted speed breathing exhaust, do not idle self with all disclosures, warnings, cau- limits and never drive too fast the engine except as neces- tions and instructions concerning proper for conditions. sary, service your vehicle in a use of such accessories prior to operating . ALWAYS give your full attention to the vehicle and/or accessory. It is recom- driving and avoid using vehicle well-ventilated area and wear mended that you see a NISSAN dealer for features or taking other actions gloves or wash your hands details concerning the particular acces- that could distract you. frequently when servicing your sories with which your vehicle is . ALWAYS use your seat belts and equipped. appropriate child restraint sys- vehicle. For more information Your NISSAN dealer knows your vehicle tems. Pre-teen children should go to www.P65Warnings.ca. best. When you require any service or be seated in the rear seat. gov/passenger-vehicle. have any questions, we will be glad to . ALWAYS provide information assist you with the extensive resources about the proper use of vehicle available to us. safety features to all occupants MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHI- WHEN READING THE MANUAL of the vehicle. CLE This manual includes information for all . ALWAYS review this Owner’s Man- features and equipment available on ual for important safety informa- This vehicle should not be modified. this model. Features and equipment in tion. Modification could affect its perfor- your vehicle may vary depending on mance, safety or durability, and may model, trim level, options selected, or- even violate governmental regula- der, date of production, region or avail- ON-PAVEMENT AND OFF-ROAD tions. In addition, damage or perfor- ability. Therefore, you may find DRIVING mance problems resulting from information about features or equip- modification will not be covered under ment that are not included or installed This vehicle will handle and maneuver the NISSAN warranties. on your vehicle. differently from an ordinary passenger car because it has a higher center of All information, specifications and illustra- gravity for off-road use. As with other tions in this manual are those in effect at vehicles with features of this type, WARNING the time of printing. NISSAN reserves the failure to operate this vehicle correctly right to change specifications, perfor- may result in loss of control or an Installing an aftermarket On-Board mance, design or component suppliers accident. Be sure to read “On-pave- Diagnostic (OBD) plug-in device that without notice and without obligation. ment and off-road driving precau- uses the port during normal driving, From time to time, NISSAN may update tions”, “Avoiding collision and rollover” for example remote insurance com- or revise this manual to provide owners and “Driving safety precautions” in the pany monitoring, remote vehicle di- with the most accurate information cur- “5. Starting and driving” section of this agnostics, telematics or engine rently available. Please carefully read and manual. reprogramming, may cause interfer- retain with this manual all revision up- ence or damage to vehicle systems. dates sent to you by NISSAN to ensure We do not recommend or endorse you have access to accurate and up-to- the use of any aftermarket OBD date information regarding your vehicle. plug-in devices, unless specifically Current versions of vehicle Owner’s Man- approved by NISSAN. The vehicle uals and any updates can also be found in warranty may not cover damage the Owner section of the NISSAN website caused by any aftermarket plug-in at https://owners.nissanusa.com/now- device. ners/navigation/manualsGuide. If you have questions concerning any information in your Owner’s Manual, contact NISSAN Consumer Affairs. See the NISSAN those above call attention to an item in CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAM page in this the illustration. Owner’s Manual for contact information. CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATE ADVI- IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT SORY THIS MANUAL Some vehicle parts, such as lithium You will see various symbols in this batteries, may contain perchlorate ma- manual. They are used in the following terial. The following advisory is pro- ways: vided: “Perchlorate Material - special handling may apply, See www.dtsc.ca. WARNING gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.” © 2019 NISSAN MOTOR CO., LTD. This is used to indicate the presence All rights reserved. No part of this Owner’s Manual may be reproduced or stored in a of a hazard that could cause death or SIC0697 serious personal injury. To avoid or retrieval system, or transmitted in any reduce the risk, the procedures must If you see the symbol above, it means “Do form, or by any means, electronic, me- be followed precisely. not do this” or “Do not let this happen”. chanical, photocopying, recording or otherwise, without the prior written per- mission of Nissan Motor Co., Ltd.

CAUTION If you see a symbol similar to those above in an illustration, it means the arrow This is used to indicate the presence points to the front of the vehicle. of a hazard that could cause minor or moderate personal injury or damage to your vehicle. To avoid or Arrows in an illustration that are similar to reduce the risk, the procedures must those above indicate movement or ac- be followed carefully. tion.

Arrows in an illustration that are similar to NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAM NISSAN CARES ... Both NISSAN and your NISSAN dealer are dedicated to serving all your automotive needs. Your satisfaction with your vehicle and your NISSAN dealer are our primary concerns. Your NISSAN dealer is always available to assist you with all your automobile sales and service needs. However, if there is something that your You can write to NISSAN with the infor- If you prefer, visit us at: NISSAN dealer cannot assist you with or mation at: www.nissanusa.com (for U.S. customers) you would like to provide NISSAN directly For U.S. customers or with comments or questions, please con- Nissan North America, Inc. www.nissan.ca (for Canadian customers) tact the NISSAN Consumer Affairs Depart- Consumer Affairs Department ment using our toll-free number: P.O. Box 685003 We appreciate your interest in NISSAN For U.S. customers Franklin, TN 37068-5003 and thank you for buying a quality NISSAN 1-800-NISSAN-1 or via e-mail at: vehicle. (1-800-647-7261) nnaconsumeraffairs@nissan-usa. For Canadian customers com 1-800-387-0122 For Canadian customers The Consumer Affairs Department will Nissan Canada Inc. ask for the following information: 5290 Orbitor Drive Mississauga, Ontario L4W 4Z5 . Your name, address, and telephone or via e-mail at: number . information.centre@nissancana- Vehicle identification number (at- da.com tached to the top of the instrument panel on the driver’s side) . Date of purchase . Current odometer reading . Your NISSAN dealer’s name . Your comments or questions OR

Table of Illustrated table of contents 0 Contents Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 Instruments and controls 2

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4 Starting and driving 5

In case of emergency 6

Appearance and care 7

Do-it-yourself 8

Maintenance and schedules 9

Technical and consumer information 10

Index 11

0 Illustrated table of contents

Seats, seat belts and Supplemental Restraint Instrument panel ...... 0-7 System (SRS)...... 0-2 Meters and gauges ...... 0-8 Exterior front ...... 0-3 Engine compartment ...... 0-9 Exterior rear ...... 0-4 VK56VD engine ...... 0-9 Passenger compartment ...... 0-5 Warning and indicator lights ...... 0-10 Cockpit ...... 0-6 SEATS, SEAT BELTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)

9. LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) system (P.1-35) 10. Armrest (2nd row seat) (P.1-11) 11. 2nd row seats (P.1-5) — Child restraints (P.1-32) 12. Seat belt pretensioner (P.1-69) 13. Front armrest (P.1-11) 14. Front seats (P.1-4) — Occupant classification sensors (weight sensors) (P.1-60) 15. Front passenger air bag status light (P.1-62)

JVC1212X

1. Seat belt for 3rd row center seat (P.1-26) 5. Front seat-mounted side-impact supple- 2. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and mental air bags (P.1-54) rollover supplemental air bags (P.1-54) 6. Supplemental front-impact air bags 3. Head Restraints (P.1-14) (P.1-54) — Front-seat Active Head Restraints 7. Child restraint anchor points (for top (P.1-19) tether strap child restraint) (P.1-46, P.1-50) 4. Seat belts (P.1-20) 8. 3rd row seats (P.1-7) — Child restraints (P.1-32) 0-2 Illustrated table of contents EXTERIOR FRONT

7. Towing hook (P.6-19) 8. Front view camera (if so equipped) (P.4-10) 9. Fog light (if so equipped) (P.2-41) 10. Headlights and turn signal lights (P.2-37) 11. Tires — Wheel and tires (P.8-30, P.10-8) — Flat tire (P.6-3) — Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) (P.2-15, P.5-5) 12. Outside mirrors (P.3-38) — Side view camera (P.4-10) — Welcome light (if so equipped) (P.2-67) 13. Side turn signal lights (P.8-24) 14. Doors — Keys (P.3-2) — Door locks (P.3-4) — Intelligent Key system (P.3-7) — Remote keyless entry system (P.3-15) — Remote engine start (if so equipped) (P.3-19) 15. Child safety rear door locks (P.3-6)

JVC0953X

1. Hood (P.3-21) 4. Power windows (P.2-63) 2. Windshield wiper and washer 5. Roof rack (P.2-60) — Switch operation (P.2-33) 6. Sensors — Window washer fluid (P.8-10) — Camera aiding sonar function (models — Windshield wiper deicer (if so equipped) with Intelligent Around View Monitor) (P.2-36) (P.4-25) 3. Moonroof (if so equipped) (P.2-65) — Sonar system (if so equipped) (P.5-127)

Illustrated table of contents 0-3 EXTERIOR REAR

— Window washer fluid (P.8-10) 11. Spare tire (under the vehicle) (P.6-3) 12. Sensors — Camera aiding sonar function (models with Intelligent Around View Monitor) (P.4-25) — Intelligent Back-up Intervention (I-BI) (if so equipped) (P.5-53) — Sonar system (if so equipped) (P.5-127) 13. Towing hook (P.6-19) 14. Trailer hitch (P.10-22)

JVC1091X

1. Fuel-filler door (P.3-26) 7. Intelligent Rear View Mirror camera (if so — Fuel information (P.10-3) equipped) (P.3-32) 2. Antenna (P.4-43) 8. High-mounted stop light (P.8-24) 3. Rear combination light (P.8-24) 9. Liftgate (P.3-22) 4. Rear window defroster (P.2-36) — Intelligent Key system (P.3-7) 5. Satellite antenna (P.4-44) 10. Rear window wiper and washer 6. Rear view camera (P.4-3, P.4-10) — Switch operation (P.2-36)

0-4 Illustrated table of contents PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

10. Map lights (P.2-68) 11. Moonroof switch (if so equipped) (P.2-65) 12. SOS call switch (if so equipped) (See NissanConnect® Owner’s Manual) 13. Sunglasses holder (P.2-55) 14. Inside mirror (P.3-31) — Intelligent Rear View Mirror (if so equipped) (P.3-32) — HomeLink® universal transceiver (if so equipped) (P.2-70, P.2-74) 15. Cargo area — Power outlet (P.2-50) — Cargo floor box (P.2-60) — Luggage hooks (P.2-59) — Jacking tools (P.6-5) 16. Rear console box (if so equipped) (P.2-57) — Cup holders (2nd row seat) (P.2-53) — Pocket (P.2-57) 17. Cup holders (2nd row seat) (if so equipped) (P.2-53) 18. Mobile Entertainment System (MES) (if so equipped) (See NissanConnect® Owner’s Manual) JVC1211X 19. Console box (P.2-56) 1. Cargo light (P.2-70) — Power window controls (P.2-63) — Power outlet (P.2-50) 2. Cup holders (3rd row seat) (P.2-54) — Power door lock switch (P.3-5) — USB charging connector (P.2-52) 3. Rear ventilators (P.4-34) — Outside mirror remote control switch — Rear Media Interface (See NissanCon- 4. Coat hooks (P.2-59) (driver’s side) (P.3-38) nect® Owner’s Manual) 5. Rear personal lights (P.2-68) 8. Automatic drive positioner switch (if so — Rear automatic air conditioning sys- equipped) (P.3-40) tem (if so equipped) (P.4-39) 6. Tray (P.2-58) 9. Sun visors (P.3-30) 20. Front cup holders (P.2-53)/Tray (P.2-58) 7. Door armrest

Illustrated table of contents 0-5 COCKPIT

— Hands-Free Phone System switch (See NissanConnect® Owner’s Manual) 7. Trip computer switch (P.2-28) 8. Wiper and washer switch (P.2-33) 9. Steering-wheel-mounted controls (right side) — Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) system (P.5-63) 10. Dynamic driver assistance switch (if so equipped) — Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI) system (if so equipped) (P.5-23) — Intelligent Distance Control (I-DC) system (if so equipped) (P.5-85) — Intelligent Blind Spot Intervention (I- BSI) system (if so equipped) (P.5-40) 11. Shift lever (P.5-17) 12. Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) shift switch (if so equipped) (P.5-116)/SNOW mode switch (P.2-46)/TOW MODE switch (P.2-47)/Vehi- cle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF switch (P.5-133) 13. Power liftgate main switch (if so equipped) (P.3-22) WAA0101X 14. Warning systems switch (if so equipped) (P.2-46) 1. Power liftgate switch (if so equipped) 5. Headlight, fog light and turn signal switch — Lane Departure Warning (LDW) (if so (P.3-22) — Headlight (P.2-37) equipped) (P.5-23) 2. Heated steering wheel switch (if so — Turn signal (P.2-41) equipped) (P.2-42) — Blind Spot Warning (BSW) (if so — Fog light (if so equipped) (P.2-41) equipped) (P.5-32) 3. Instrument brightness control switch 6. Steering-wheel-mounted controls (left (P.2-40) 15. Rear door alert switch (P.2-48) side) 4. TRIP/RESET switch for twin trip odometer 16. Electric tilting/telescopic steering wheel — Audio control steering switch (See (P.2-6) switch (P.3-29) NissanConnect® Owner’s Manual) 0-6 Illustrated table of contents INSTRUMENT PANEL

7. Defroster switch (P.2-36)/Deicer switch (if so equipped) (P.2-36) 8. Front passenger supplemental air bag (P.1-54) 9. Fuse box (P.8-20) 10. Parking brake (P.5-22) 11. Hood release handle (P.3-21) 12. Steering wheel — Horn (P.2-42) — Driver supplemental air bag (P.1-54) — Power steering (P.5-130) 13. Push-button ignition switch (P.5-13) 14. Climate controlled seat switch (if so equipped) (P.2-45)/Heated seat switch (if so equipped) (P.2-43) 15. Front passenger air bag status light (P.1-62) 16. Power outlet (P.2-50) 17. USB connection port (See NissanCon- nect® Owner’s Manual) 18. Cup holder (P.2-53)/Tray (P.2-58) 19. Heater and air conditioner (P.4-35) 20. Audio system (See NissanConnect® Own- JVC1093X er’s Manual) 1. Side ventilator (P.4-34) — Intelligent Around View Monitor (if so 21. Glove box (P.2-56) 2. Meters and gauges (P.2-5) equipped) (P.4-10) 3. Center ventilator (P.4-34) — RearView Monitor (if so equipped) (P.4-3) 4. Center multi-function control panel (See NissanConnect® Owner’s Manual) — Navigation system (if so equipped) (See NissanConnect® Owner’s Manual) 5. Center display (See NissanConnect® Own- er’s Manual) 6. Hazard warning flasher switch (P.6-2)

Illustrated table of contents 0-7 METERS AND GAUGES

SIC4368

1. Tachometer (P.2-7) 7. Engine oil pressure gauge (P.2-8) 2. Warning and indicator lights (P.2-10) 8. Fuel gauge (P.2-8) 3. Speedometer (P.2-6) 4. Engine coolant temperature gauge (P.2-7) 5. Voltmeter (P.2-9) 6. Vehicle information display (P.2-20)/Od- ometer/twin trip odometer (P.2-6)

0-8 Illustrated table of contents ENGINE COMPARTMENT

JVC0965X VK56VD ENGINE 7. Fuse/fusible link holder (P.8-18) 1. Window washer fluid reservoir (P.8-10) 8. Battery (P.8-11) 2. Fuse/fusible link holder (P.8-18) 9. Radiator filler cap (P.8-4) 3. Engine oil dipstick (P.8-6) 10. Engine coolant reservoir (P.8-4) 4. Power steering fluid reservoir (P.8-8) 11. Drive belts (P.8-13) 5. Engine oil filler cap (P.8-6) 12. Air cleaner (P.8-15) 6. Brake fluid reservoir (P.8-9) Illustrated table of contents 0-9 WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS

Warning Indica- Warning Name Page Name Page Name Page light tor light light Automatic Transmission Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) 2-14 2-18 warning light (4WD models) (AT) position indicator light Anti-lock Braking System 2-11 (ABS) warning light Intelligent Cruise Control Intelligent Blind Spot Inter- (ICC) system warning light 2-14 vention (I-BSI) ON indicator 2-18 Automatic Emergency (orange) light (green; if so equipped) Braking (AEB) system 2-11 Check suspension indicator Intelligent Key warning 2-14 2-18 warning light light light Automatic Transmission 2-11 Lane Departure Warning Exterior light indicator 2-18 (AT) check warning light (LDW) indicator light (or- 2-14 Front fog light indicator Automatic Transmission ange; if so equipped) 2-18 (AT) oil temperature warn- 2-11 light (if so equipped) Low tire pressure warning 2-15 ing light Front passenger air bag light 2-18 Automatic Transmission status light 2-12 Master warning light 2-16 (AT) park warning light High beam indicator light 2-18 Blind Spot Warning (BSW)/ Seat belt warning light 2-16 Intelligent Blind Spot Inter- Intelligent Lane Interven- 2-18 vention (I-BSI) system 2-12 Supplemental air bag 2-17 tion (I-LI) ON indicator light warning light (orange; if so warning light (green; if so equipped) equipped) Vehicle Dynamic Control 2-17 Malfunction Indicator Light 2-18 (VDC) warning light (MIL) Brake warning light 2-12 Security indicator light 2-19

SNOW mode indicator light 2-19 Charge warning light 2-13 2-19 Intelligent Distance Control TOW mode indicator light (I-DC) system warning light 2-13 Turn signal/hazard indica- 2-19 (orange; if so equipped) tor lights Engine oil pressure warning 2-13 Vehicle Dynamic Control 2-20 light (VDC) off indicator light

0-10 Illustrated table of contents 1 Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Seats ...... 1-3 Larger children ...... 1-31 Front seats ...... 1-4 Child restraints ...... 1-32 2nd row seats ...... 1-5 Precautions on child restraints ...... 1-33 3rd row seats ...... 1-7 Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren Armrest ...... 1-11 (LATCH) system ...... 1-35 Flexible seating ...... 1-12 Top tether strap child restraint ...... 1-37 Head restraints/headrests ...... 1-14 Rear-facing child restraint installation Adjustable head using LATCH ...... 1-38 restraint/headrest components ...... 1-16 Rear-facing child restraint installation Non-adjustable head restraint/headrest using the seat belts...... 1-40 components ...... 1-16 Forward-facing child restraint installation Remove ...... 1-16 using LATCH ...... 1-43 Install...... 1-17 Forward-facing child restraint installation using the seat belts...... 1-46 Adjust...... 1-17 Booster seats...... 1-51 Front-seat Active Head Restraint ...... 1-19 Supplemental restraint system ...... 1-54 Seat belts ...... 1-20 Precautions on supplemental Precautions on seat belt usage ...... 1-20 restraint system ...... 1-54 Pregnant women ...... 1-22 NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System Injured persons ...... 1-22 (front seats) ...... 1-60 Three-point type seat belt ...... 1-22 Front seat-mounted side-impact Seat belt extenders ...... 1-29 supplemental air bag and roof-mounted Seat belt maintenance ...... 1-29 curtain side-impact and rollover Child safety ...... 1-30 supplemental air bag systems ...... 1-68 Infants ...... 1-31 Seat belts with pretensioners Small children ...... 1-31 (front seats) ...... 1-69 Supplemental air bag warning labels ...... 1-70 Repair and replacement procedure ...... 1-72 Supplemental air bag warning light ...... 1-71 SEATS

. To help avoid risk of injury or death through unintended operation of the vehicle and/or its systems, do not leave children, people who require the assistance of others or pets unattended in your vehicle. Additionally, the temperature inside a closed vehicle on a warm day can quickly become high enough to cause a significant risk of injury or death to people and pets. . The seatback should not be re- SSS0133 clined any more than needed for comfort. Seat belts are most ef- well back and upright in the seat fective when the passenger sits WARNING with both feet on the floor and well back and straight up in the adjust the seat belt properly. See seat. If the seatback is reclined, . Do not ride in a moving vehicle “Precautions on seat belt usage” the risk of sliding under the lap when the seatback is reclined. (P.1-20). belt and being injured is increased. This can be dangerous. The . After adjustment, gently rock in shoulder belt will not be against the seat to make sure it is se- your body. In an accident, you curely locked. could be thrown into it and re- . ceive neck or other serious inju- Do not leave children unattended ries. You could also slide under inside the vehicle. They could the lap belt and receive serious unknowingly activate switches internal injuries. or controls. Unattended children could become involved in serious . For the most effective protection accidents. when the vehicle is in motion, the seat should be upright. Always sit Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-3 FRONT SEATS Front power seat adjustment Operating tips: . The power seat motor has an auto- reset overload protection circuit. If the motor stops during operation, wait 30 seconds, then reactivate the switch. . Do not operate the power seat switch for a long period of time when the engine is off. This will discharge the battery. See “Automatic drive positioner” (P.3-40) for the seat position memory function. SSS1051

CAUTION Forward and backward: occupants to rest when the vehicle is Moving the switch forward or back- stopped and the transmission is in the P ward will slide the seat forward or back- (Park) position. When adjusting the seat positions, ward to the desired position. be sure not to contact any moving parts to avoid possible injuries and/ Reclining: or damages. Move the recline switch backward until the desired angle is obtained. To bring the seatback forward again, move the switch forward. The reclining feature allows adjustment of the seatback for occupants of different sizes for added comfort and to help obtain proper seat belt fit. (See “Precau- tions on seat belt usage” (P.1-20).) Also, the seatback can be reclined to allow

1-4 Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 2ND ROW SEATS

WARNING

. Never allow anyone to ride in the cargo area or on the rear seat when it is in the fold-down position. Use of these areas by passengers without proper restraints could result in serious injury in an accident or sudden stop. . When returning the seatbacks to the upright position, be certain SSS1052 SSS1053 they are completely secured in the latched position. If they are Seat lifter: Lumbar support: not completely secured, passen- 1. Pull up or push down the adjusting The lumbar support feature provides low- gers may be injured in an acci- switch to adjust the seat height until er back support to the occupants. dent or sudden stop. the desired position is achieved. Push the front or back end of the switch . Properly secure all cargo to help 2. Tilt up or down the adjusting switch to to adjust the seatback lumbar area. prevent it from sliding or shifting. adjust the front angle of the seat until Do not place cargo higher than the desired position is achieved (for the seatbacks. In a sudden stop driver’s seat). or collision, unsecured cargo could cause personal injury.

Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-5 Reclining adjust the seat belt properly. See Pull the reclining lever and position the “Precautions on seat belt usage” seatback at the desired angle. Release the (P.1-20). reclining lever after positioning the seat . After adjustment, check to be at the desired angle. sure the seat is securely locked. To return the seatback, pull the lever. The reclining feature allows adjustment Entry to 3rd row seat of the seatback for occupants of different sizes to help obtain proper seat belt fit. (See “Precautions on seat belt usage” (P.1- CAUTION 20).) The seatback may also be reclined to allow occupants to rest when the vehicle . Do not drive with the 2nd row is parked. seat tipped up. SSS1081 . Be careful not to allow the 2nd Captain’s seat WARNING row seat to pinch, hit any part of your body or other people when operating the 2nd row seat. Make . Do not ride in a moving vehicle sure the seat path is clear of all when the seatback is reclined. objects before moving the seat. This can be dangerous. The shoulder belt will not be against your body. In an accident, you The 2nd row seat can be tipped forward could be thrown into it and re- for easy entry to or exit from the 3rd row ceive neck or other serious inju- seat. ries. You could also slide under the lap belt and receive serious internal injuries. . For the most effective protection when the vehicle is in motion, the seat should be upright. Always sit SSS1065 well back and upright in the seat Bench seat with both feet on the floor and 1-6 Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system and fold the seatback forward onto the seat base. Then lift up on the seat base and tip it forward.

SSS1068 3RD ROW SEATS Manual seat adjustment (if so equipped) Reclining: Pull the strap and position the seatback at the desired angle. Release the strap SSS1066 after positioning the seat at the desired To enter the 3rd row seat, pull the lever angle. or located on the 2nd row seat and fold The reclining feature allows adjustment the seatback forward at an angle over of the seatback for occupants of different the seat base. Then lift up the seat base sizes to help obtain proper seat belt fit. and tip the 2nd row seat forward . This (See “Precautions on child restraints” (P.1- will release the back of the seat so it may 33).) The seatback may also be reclined to be tipped forward. allow occupants to rest when the vehicle To exit the 3rd row seat, pull the lever or is parked. Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-7 . Properly secure all cargo with WARNING ropes or straps to help prevent it from sliding or shifting. Do not . Do not ride in a moving vehicle place cargo higher than the seat- when the seatback is reclined. backs. In a sudden stop or colli- This can be dangerous. The sion, unsecured cargo could shoulder belt will not be against cause personal injury. your body. In an accident, you . When returning the seatbacks to could be thrown into it and re- the upright position, be certain ceive neck or other serious inju- they are completely secured in ries. You could also slide under the latched position. If they are the lap belt and receive serious not completely secured, passen- internal injuries. gers may be injured in an acci- . For the most effective protection dent or sudden stop. when the vehicle is in motion, the SSS1069 seat should be upright. Always sit Folding: well back and upright in the seat with both feet on the floor and Pull the strap and fold the seatback. adjust the seat belt properly. See Return the seatback until it securely locks “Precautions on seat belt usage” in position. (P.1-20). . After adjustment, check to be WARNING sure the seat is securely locked. . Never allow anyone to ride in the cargo area or on the third row seat when it is in the folddown position. Use of these areas by passengers without proper restraints could result in serious injury in an accident or sudden stop.

1-8 Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system . Disconnect and secure the center seat belt and tongues into the retractor base. See “3rd row center seat belt” (P.1-26). — Always reconnect the center seat belt when the seat is returned to the upright position . Make sure that there are no objects on the seatback cushion.

SSS1116 SSS1095

Power seat adjustment (if so Reclining: equipped) Push and hold the rear side of the switch The 3rd row power folding seat controls beside the 3rd row cup holders until the are located behind the 2nd row seat (both desired seatback angle (up to 20 degrees) the driver’s and front passenger’s side) on is obtained. To move the seatback for- the 3rd row cup holder console . There ward again, push and hold the front side are also controls located on the rear of the switch until the desired angle is quarter trim panel behind the 3rd row obtained. seats (passenger’s side) . Before operating the 3rd row seats: WARNING . Make sure the 2nd row seatback is not reclined. . After adjustment, check to be . Lower the 3rd row head restraint to sure the seat is securely locked. the full down position. . Do not ride in a moving vehicle when the seatback is reclined.

Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-9 This can be dangerous. The . The seatback will be returned auto- shoulder belt will not be against matically. The seatback will rise up while your body. In an accident, you holding the switch. could be thrown into it and re- NOTE: ceive neck or other serious inju- Operating the power folding seats can ries. You could also slide under discharge the vehicle battery if the the lap belt and receive serious engine is not running. internal injuries. . For the most effective protection CAUTION when the vehicle is in motion, the seat should be upright. Always sit well back and upright in the seat When operating the rear power seat- with both feet on the floor and back return, make sure that the adjust the seat belt properly. See vehicle is stopped and the transmis- “Precautions on seat belt usage” sion is in the P (Park) position. (P.1-20). WARNING

. Never allow anyone to ride in the cargo area or on the rear seat when it is in the fold-down posi- SSS1118 tion. Use of these areas by passengers without proper restraints Folding: could result in serious injury in an Push and hold the front side of the switch accident or sudden stop. located on the passenger side of the . When returning the seatbacks to cargo room. The corresponding seatback the upright position, be certain (R: right side, L: left side) will be folded they are completely secured in down automatically. the latched position. If they are Push and hold the rear side of the switch not completely secured, passen-

1-10 Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system gers may be injured in an accident or sudden stop. . Properly secure all cargo to help prevent it from sliding or shifting. Do not place cargo higher than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause personal injury.

JVR0557X SSS1070

ARMREST 2nd row seat (if so equipped) Front seats Pull and draw the armrest forward until it The console box lid can be used as an is horizontal. armrest.

Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-11 FLEXIBLE SEATING vent them from causing injury to passengers or damage to the CAUTION WARNING vehicle in case of sudden braking or an accident. . When folding the 2nd row seat for . maximum cargo hauling, be sure . Never allow anyone to ride in the When returning the seatbacks to the upright position, be certain that cargo does not contact the cargo area or on the rear seats center console of the captain’s when they are in the fold-down they are completely secured in the latched position. If they are seat (if so equipped) to avoid position. In a collision, people possible damage to the console. riding in these areas without not completely secured, passen- . proper restraints are more likely gers may be injured in an acci- When folding or returning the to be seriously injured or killed. dent or sudden stop. seat(s) to the upright position, to avoid injury to yourself and . . Properly secure all cargo to help Do not allow people to ride in any others: area of your vehicle that is not prevent it from sliding or shifting. equipped with seats and seat Do not place cargo higher than — Make sure that the seat path belts. Be sure everyone in your the seatbacks. In a sudden stop is clear before moving the vehicle is in a seat and using a or collision, unsecured cargo seat. could cause personal injury. seat belt properly. — Be careful not to allow hands . . Do not fold down the rear seats When folding the bench seat or feet to get caught or when occupants are in the rear seatback down for maximum sto- pinched in the seat. seat area or any cargo is on the rage, make sure the seat base is rear seats. in the latched position by rocking the seat base. If the seat base is Stowing 2nd and 3rd row seats . Head restraints should be ad- not properly secured, cargo To stow 2nd and 3rd row seats for justed properly as they may pro- stored on top of a folded seat- maximum cargo capacity: vide significant protection back may become a projectile against injury in an accident. Al- causing personal injury or vehicle ways replace and adjust them damage. properly if they have been removed for any reason. . If the head restraints are removed for any reason, they should be securely stored to pre- 1-12 Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system SSS1119 SSS1120 SSS1121 1. Push and hold the corresponding 2. Push the folded seat down until it 3. Power operation (if so equipped): Fold switch located on the instrument locks in position. the 3rd row seat flat using the panel below the audio system. The switches located in the cargo area. seatback will fold down and tip for- See “Power seat adjustment” (P.1-9). ward. See “Entry to 3rd row seat” (P.1- Manual operation (if so equipped): 6). Fold the 3rd row seat flat using the strap located on the 3rd row seatbacks. See “Manual seat adjustment” (P.1-7). 4. Return 3rd row seats to seating positions by raising the 3rd row seatbacks to an upright position using the switches or straps. Make sure the seatback is locked in position. See “Power seat adjustment” (P.1-9) or “Manual seat adjustment” (P.1-7).

Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-13 HEAD RESTRAINTS/HEADRESTS

5. Return the 2nd row seat to a seating position by raising the 2nd row seat- WARNING backs to an upright position. Make sure the seatback is locked in position. Head restraint/headrest supplement the other vehicle safety systems. CAUTION They may provide additional protection against injury in certain rear end collisions. Adjustable head re- When folding the 2nd row seat for straints/headrests must be adjusted maximum cargo hauling, be sure properly, as specified in this section. that cargo does not contact the Check the adjustment after someone center console of the captain’s seat else uses the seat. Do not attach (if so equipped) to avoid possible anything to the head restraint/head- damage to the console. rest stalks or remove the head restraint/headrest. Do not use the seat if the head restraint/headrest has been removed. If the head restraint/ headrest was removed, reinstall and properly adjust the head restraint/ headrest before an occupant uses the seating position. Failure to follow these instructions can reduce the effectiveness of the head restraint/ headrest. This may increase the risk of serious injury or death in a collision.

1-14 Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system riding in that designated seating position.

JVR0403X

The illustration shows the seating posi- . The non-adjustable head restraints/ tions equipped with head restraint/head- headrests have a single locking notch rest. to secure them to the seat frame. Indicates the seating position is . Proper Adjustment: equipped with a head restraint. — For the adjustable type, align the Indicates the seating position is head restraint/headrest so the equipped with a headrest. center of your ear is approximately . level with the center of the head Your vehicle is equipped with a head restraint/headrest. restraint/headrest that may be inte- — If your ear position is still higher grated, adjustable or non-adjustable. . than the recommended alignment, Adjustable head restraints/headrests place the head restraint/headrest have multiple notches along the stalk at the highest position. to lock them in a desired adjustment . If the head restraint/headrest has position. been removed, ensure that it is re- installed and locked in place before

Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-15 SSS0992 JVR0203X SSS1037 ADJUSTABLE HEAD RESTRAINT/ NON-ADJUSTABLE HEAD RE- REMOVE HEADREST COMPONENTS STRAINT/HEADREST COMPONENTS 1. Removable head restraint/headrest 1. Removable head restraint/headrest CAUTION 2. Multiple notches 2. Single notch 3. Lock knob 3. Lock knob The front head restraints with a rear 4. Stalks 4. Stalks display are not designed to be pulled out. The rear display may be damaged if the head restraint is for- cibly pulled out.

Use the following procedure to remove the head restraint/headrest. 1. Pull the head restraint/headrest up to the highest position.

1-16 Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 2. Push and hold the lock knob. 3. Remove the head restraint/headrest from the seat. 4. Store the head restraint/headrest properly in a secure place so it is not loose in the vehicle. 5. Reinstall and properly adjust the head restraint/headrest before an occupant uses the seating position.

SSS0996 SSS0997 INSTALL ADJUST 1. Align the head restraint/headrest For adjustable head restraint/headrest stalks with the holes in the seat. Make Adjust the head restraint/headrest so the sure that the head restraint/headrest center is level with the center of your ears. is facing the correct direction. The If your ear position is still higher than the stalk with the adjustment notch recommended alignment, place the head must be installed in the hole with the restraint/headrest at the highest posi- lock knob . tion. 2. Push and hold the lock knob and push the head restraint/headrest down. 3. Properly adjust the head restraint/ headrest before an occupant uses the seating position.

Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-17 JVR0259X SSS1035 SSS1036

For non-adjustable head restraint/ Raise Lower headrest To raise the head restraint/headrest, pull To lower, push and hold the lock knob Make sure the head restraint/headrest is it up. and push the head restraint/headrest positioned so the lock knob is engaged in down. the notch before riding in that designated Make sure the head restraint/headrest is seating position. positioned so the lock knob is engaged in Make sure the head restraint/headrest is the notch before riding in that designated positioned so the lock knob is engaged in seating position. the notch before riding in that designated seating position.

1-18 Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system certain rear-end collisions. After the collision, the head restraints return to their original position. Adjust the Active Head Restraints properly as described earlier in this section.

SSS0508 FRONT-SEAT ACTIVE HEAD RE- STRAINT The Active Head Restraint moves forward utilizing the force that the seatback receives from the occupant in a rear-end collision. The movement of the head restraint helps support the occupant’s head by reducing its backward movement and helping absorb some of the forces that may lead to whiplash-type injuries. Active Head Restraints are effective for collisions at low to medium speeds in which it is said that whiplash injury occurs most. Active Head Restraints operate only in Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-19 SEAT BELTS

PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT USAGE If you are wearing your seat belt properly adjusted, and you are sitting upright and well back in your seat with both feet on the floor, your chances of being injured or killed in an accident and/or the severity of injury may be greatly reduced. NISSAN strongly encourages you and all of your passengers to buckle up every time you drive, even if your seating position includes a supplemental air bag. Most U.S. states and Canadian provinces or territories specify that seat SSS0136A belts be worn at all times when a vehicle is being driven.

SSS0134A

1-20 Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system . Be sure the seat belt tongue is . Once a seat belt pretensioner has WARNING securely fastened to the proper activated, it cannot be reused and buckle. must be replaced together with . Every person who drives or rides . Do not wear the seat belt inside the retractor. It is recommended in this vehicle should use a seat out or twisted. Doing so may you visit a NISSAN dealer for this belt at all times. Children should reduce its effectiveness. service. be properly restrained in the rear . . Do not allow more than one All seat belt assemblies, including seat and, if appropriate, in a child retractors and attaching hard- restraint. person to use the same seat belt. . ware, should be inspected after . The seat belt should be properly Never carry more people in the any collision. It is recommended adjusted to a snug fit. Failure to vehicle than there are seat belts. you visit a NISSAN dealer for this do so may reduce the effective- . If the seat belt warning light service. NISSAN recommends that ness of the entire restraint sys- glows continuously while the all seat belt assemblies in use tem and increase the chance or ignition is turned ON with all during a collision be replaced severity of injury in an accident. doors closed and all seat belts unless the collision was minor Serious injury or death can occur fastened, it may indicate a mal- and the belts show no damage if the seat belt is not worn prop- function in the system. Have the and continue to operate properly. erly. system checked. It is recom- Seat belt assemblies not in use . Always route the shoulder belt mended you visit a NISSAN dealer during a collision should also be over your shoulder and across for this service. inspected and replaced if either your chest. Never put the belt . No changes should be made to damage or improper operation is behind your back, under your the seat belt system. For exam- noted. arm or across your neck. The belt ple, do not modify the seat belt, . All child restraints and attaching should be away from your face add material or install devices hardware should be inspected and neck, but not falling off your that may change the seat belt after any collision. Always follow shoulder. routing or tension. Doing so may the restraint manufacturer’s in- . Position the lap belt as low and affect the operation of the seat spection instructions and repla- snug as possible AROUND THE belt system. Modifying or tam- cement recommendations. The HIPS, NOT THE WAIST. A lap belt pering with the seat belt system child restraints should be re- worn too high could increase the may result in serious personal placed if they are damaged. risk of internal injuries in an injury. accident. Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-21 PREGNANT WOMEN the lap belt and receive serious NISSAN recommends that pregnant wo- internal injuries. men use seat belts. The seat belt should . For the most effective protection be worn snug, and always position the lap when the vehicle is in motion, the belt as low as possible around the hips, seat should be upright. Always sit not the waist, and place the shoulder belt well back and upright in the seat over your shoulder and across your chest. with both feet on the floor and Never run the lap/shoulder belt over your adjust the seat belt properly. abdominal area. Contact your doctor for specific recommendations. INJURED PERSONS NISSAN recommends that injured persons use seat belts, depending on the injury. SSS0016 Check with your doctor for specific recommendations. THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT BELT

WARNING

. Every person who drives or rides in this vehicle should use a seat belt at all times. . Do not ride in a moving vehicle when the seatback is reclined. This can be dangerous. The shoulder belt will not be against your body. In an accident, you SSS0014 could be thrown into it and receive neck or other serious injuries. You could also slide under 1-22 Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system tor tongue may also be released. Release the connector tongue by inserting a suitable tool (such as a key) into the connector buckle .If the seat belt cannot be unbuckled or is already unbuckled, release the child by cutting the seat belt with a suitable tool (such as a knife or scissors) to release the seat belt.

JVR0183X SSS0292

Fastening the seat belts WARNING 1. Adjust the seat. (See “Seats” (P.1-3).) 2. Slowly pull the seat belt out of the Do not allow children to play with the retractor and insert the tongue into seat belts. Most seating positions are the buckle until you hear and feel the equipped with Automatic Locking latch engage. Retractor (ALR) mode seat belts. If . The retractor is designed to lock the seat belt becomes wrapped during a sudden stop or on im- around a child’s neck with the ALR pact. A slow pulling motion per- mode activated, the child can be mits the belt to move, and allows seriously injured or killed if the seat you some freedom of movement belt retracts and becomes tight. This in the seat. can occur even if the vehicle is . parked. Unbuckle the seat belt to If the seat belt cannot be pulled release the child. For the center of from its fully retracted position, the 3rd row bench seat, the connec- firmly pull the belt and release it. Then smoothly pull the belt out of Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-23 the retractor. impacts. The Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode (child restraint mode) locks the seat belt for child restraint installation. When the ALR mode is activated the seat belt cannot be extended again until the seat belt tongue is detached from the buckle and fully retracted. The seat belt returns to the ELR mode after the seat belt fully retracts. For additional information, see “Child restraints” (P.1-32). The ALR mode should be used only for child restraint installation. During nor- SSS0290 mal seat belt use by an occupant, the ALR mode should not be activated. If it 3. Position the lap belt portion low and is activated, it may cause uncomforta- snug on the hips as shown. ble seat belt tension. 4. Pull the shoulder belt portion toward the retractor to take up extra slack. Be WARNING sure the shoulder belt is routed over your shoulder and across your chest. When fastening the seat belts, be The three-point type seat belts have two certain that seatbacks are comple- modes of operation: tely secured in the latched position. . Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) If they are not completely secured, . Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) passengers may be injured in an The Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) accident or sudden stop. mode allows the seat belt to extend and retract to allow the driver and passengers some freedom of movement in the seat. The ELR locks the seat belt when the vehicle slows down rapidly or during 1-24 Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system . Grasp the shoulder belt and pull forward quickly. The retractor should lock and restrict further belt movement. If the retractor does not lock during this check, get the system checked. It is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service, or to learn more about seat belt operation.

SSS0326 SSS1109

Unfastening the seat belts Center of 2nd row seat (if so To unfasten the seat belt, push the equipped) button on the buckle. The seat belt Selecting correct set of seat belts: automatically retracts. The center seat belt buckle is identified by Checking seat belt operation the CENTER mark . The center seat belt Seat belt retractors are designed to lock tongue can be fastened only into the seat belt movement by two separate center seat belt buckle. methods: . When the belt is pulled quickly from the retractor. . When the vehicle slows down rapidly. To increase your confidence in the seat belts, check the operation as follows:

Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-25 SSS0391 SSS0241

3rd row center seat belt The 3rd row center seat belt has a WARNING connector tongue and a seat belt tongue . Both the connector tongue . Always fasten the connector ton- and the seat belt tongue must be se- gue and the seat belt in the order curely latched for proper seat belt opera- shown. tion. . Always make sure both the connector tongue and the seat belt tongue are secured when using the seat belt or installing a child restraint. Do not use the seat belt or child restraint with only the seat belt tongue attached. This could result in serious personal injury in case of an accident or a sudden stop. SSS1077 1-26 Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system Stowing 3rd row center seat belt: Attaching 3rd row center seat belt: When folding down the 3rd row seat, the Always be sure the 3rd center seat belt 3rd center seat belt can be retracted into connector tongue and connector buckle a stowed position. are attached. Disconnect only when fold- 1. Hold the connector tongue so that ing down the 3rd row seat. the seat belt does not retract sud- To connect the buckle: denly when the tongue is released 1. Pull out the connector tongue from from the connector buckle. Release the retractor base . the connector tongue by inserting a suitable tool such as key into the 2. Pull out the seat belt tongue from the connector buckle. tongue holder . 2. Store the seat belt tongue into the 3. Pull the seat belt and fasten the tongue holder first . connector buckle until it clicks . 3. Store the connector tongue into the The center seat belt connector tongue retractor base . and buckle are identified by the and mark. The center seat belt connector tongue WARNING can be attached only into the 3rd center seat belt connector buckle. Do not unfasten the 3rd center seat To fasten the seat belt, see “Fastening the belt connector except when folding seat belts” (P.1-23). down the 3rd seat. WARNING

. When attaching the 3rd center seat belt connector, be certain that the seatbacks are completely secured in the latched position and the 3rd center seat belt connector is completely secured. SSS1078 Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-27 . If the 3rd center seat belt connector and the seatbacks are not secured in the correct position, serious personal injury may result in an accident or sudden stop.

SSS1097 SSS0896

Storing 3rd row seat belt buckles Shoulder belt height adjustment Before folding down the seat, put the (for front seats and 2nd row seats) buckles in the storage of the seat cushion The shoulder belt anchor height should to avoid dropping it under the seat be adjusted to the position best for you. cushion. (See “Precautions on seat belt usage” (P.1- 20).) To adjust, push the button , and then move the shoulder belt anchor to the desired position, so that the belt passes over the center of the shoulder. The belt should be away from your face and neck, but not falling off of your shoulder. Release the adjustment button to lock the shoulder belt anchor into position.

1-28 Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system . If dirt builds up in the shoulder belt WARNING WARNING guide of the seat belt anchors, the seat belts may retract slowly. Wipe the . After adjustment, release the ad- . It is recommended that only shoulder belt guide with a clean, dry justment button and try to move NISSAN seat belt extenders, made cloth. the shoulder belt anchor up and by the same company which . Periodically check to see that the down to make sure it is securely made the original equipment seat seat belt and the metal components fixed in position. belts, be used with the NISSAN such as buckles, tongues, retractors, flexible wires and anchors work prop- . The shoulder belt anchor height seat belts. . erly. If loose parts, deterioration, cuts should be adjusted to the posi- Adults and children who can use or other damage on the webbing is tion best for you. Failure to do so the standard seat belt should not found, the entire seat belt assembly may reduce the effectiveness of use an extender. Such unneces- should be replaced. the entire restraint system and sary use could result in serious increase the chance or severity of personal injury in the event of an injury in an accident. accident. . Never use seat belt extenders to SEAT BELT EXTENDERS install child restraints. If the child If, because of body size or driving position, restraint is not secured properly, it is not possible to properly fit the lap- the child could be seriously in- shoulder belt and fasten it, an extender jured or killed in a collision or a that is compatible with the installed seat sudden stop. belts is available that can be purchased. The extender adds approximately 8 in SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE (200 mm) of length and may be used for . To clean the seat belt webbing, apply either the driver or front passenger seat- a mild soap solution or any solution ing position. It is recommended you visit a recommended for cleaning upholstery NISSAN dealer for assistance with pur- or carpets. Then, wipe with a cloth and chasing an extender if an extender is allow the seat belts to dry in the required. shade. Do not allow the seat belts to retract until they are completely dry.

Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-29 CHILD SAFETY

tor tongue may also be released. able for children who outgrow rear-facing Release the connector tongue by child restraints and are at least 1 year old. inserting a suitable tool (such as a Booster seats are used to help position a key) into the connector buckle .If vehicle lap/shoulder belt on a child who the seat belt cannot be unbuckled or can no longer use a forward-facing child is already unbuckled, release the restraint. child by cutting the seat belt with a suitable tool (such as a knife or WARNING scissors) to release the seat belt. Infants and children need special Children need adults to help protect protection. The vehicle’s seat belts them. may not fit them properly. The They need to be properly restrained. shoulder belt may come too close JVR0183X In addition to the general information in to the face or neck. The lap belt may this manual, child safety information is not fit over their small hip bones. In available from many other sources, in- an accident, an improperly fitting WARNING cluding doctors, teachers, government seat belt could cause serious or fatal traffic safety offices, and community or- injury. Always use appropriate child restraints. Do not allow children to play with the ganizations. Every child is different, so be seat belts. Most seating positions are sure to learn the best way to transport equipped with Automatic Locking your child. All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or Retractor (ALR) mode seat belts. If There are three basic types of child territories require the use of approved the seat belt becomes wrapped restraint systems: child restraints for infants and small children. See “Child restraints” (P.1-32). around a child’s neck with the ALR . Rear-facing child restraint mode activated, the child can be A child restraint may be secured in the . Forward-facing child restraint seriously injured or killed if the seat . vehicle by using either the LATCH (Lower belt retracts and becomes tight. This Booster seat Anchor and Tethers for CHildren) system can occur even if the vehicle is The proper restraint depends on the or with the vehicle seat belt. See “Child parked. Unbuckle the seat belt to child’s size. Generally, infants up to about restraints” (P.1-32) for more information. 1 year and less than 20 lbs (9 kg) should release the child. For the center of NISSAN recommends that all pre-teens be placed in rear-facing child restraints. the 3rd row bench seat, the connec- and children be restrained in the rear Forward-facing child restraints are avail- 1-30 Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system seat. Studies show that children are height recommendations. NISSAN recom- type seat belt. The booster seat should fit safer when properly restrained in the mends that small children be placed in the vehicle seat and have a label certify- rear seat than in the front seat. child restraints that comply with Federal ing that it complies with Federal Motor This is especially important because Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Cana- Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian your vehicle has a supplemental re- dian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. You Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. straint system (Air bag system) for the should choose a child restraint that fits A booster seat should be used until the front passenger. See “Supplemental re- your vehicle and always follow the man- child can pass the seat belt fit test below: straint system” (P.1-54). ufacturer’s instructions for installation . and use. Are the child’s back and hips against INFANTS the vehicle seatback? LARGER CHILDREN Infants up to at least 1 year old should be . Is the child able to sit without slouch- placed in a rear-facing child restraint. Children should remain in a forward- ing? NISSAN recommends that infants be facing child restraint with a harness until . Do the child’s knees bend easily over placed in child restraints that comply with they reach the maximum height or the front edge of the seat with feet flat Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards weight limit allowed by the child restraint on the floor? or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Stan- manufacturer. . Can the child safely wear the seat belt dards. You should choose a child restraint Once a child outgrows the height or (lap belt low and snug across the hips that fits your vehicle and always follow weight limit of the harness-equipped and shoulder belt across mid-chest the manufacturer’s instructions for instal- forward-facing child restraint, NISSAN and shoulder)? lation and use. recommends that the child be placed in . Is the child able to use the properly SMALL CHILDREN a commercially available booster seat to adjusted head restraint/headrest? obtain proper seat belt fit. For a seat belt . Children that are over 1 year old and Will the child be able to stay in position to fit properly, the booster seat should for the entire ride? weigh at least 20 lbs (9 kg) should remain raise the child so that the shoulder belt is in a rear-facing child restraint as long as properly positioned across the chest and possible up to the height or weight limit the top, middle portion of the shoulder. of the child restraint. Children who out- The shoulder belt should not cross the grow the height or weight limit of the neck or face and should not fall off the rear-facing child restraint and are at least shoulder. The lap belt should lie snugly 1 year old should be secured in a forward- across the lower hips or upper thighs, not facing child restraint with a harness. Refer the abdomen. to the manufacturer’s instructions for minimum and maximum weight and A booster seat can only be used in seating positions that have a three-point Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-31 CHILD RESTRAINTS

seriously injured or killed in a sudden stop or collision.

JVR0473X SSS0099 If you answered no to any of these questions, the child should remain in a booster seat using a three-point type seat belt. NOTE: Laws in some communities may follow different guidelines. Check local and state regulations to confirm your child is using the correct restraint system before traveling. WARNING

Never let a child stand or kneel on SSS0100 any seat and do not allow a child in the cargo area. The child could be 1-32 Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system PRECAUTIONS ON CHILD RE- seat than in the front seat. If seat. you must install a forward- STRAINTS — Keep seatbacks as upright as facing child restraint in the possible after fitting the child front seat, see “Forward-fa- restraint. WARNING cing child restraint installation using the seat belts” (P.1-46). — Infants and children should . Failure to follow the warnings always be placed in an appro- — Even with the NISSAN Ad- and instructions for proper use priate child restraint while in vanced Air Bag System, never and installation of child restraints the vehicle. could result in serious injury or install a rear-facing child re- . When the child restraint is not in death of a child or other passen- straint in the front seat. An use, keep it secured with the gers in a sudden stop or collision: inflating air bag could seriously injure or kill a child. A LATCH system or a seat belt. In a — The child restraint must be rear-facing child restraint sudden stop or collision, loose used and installed properly. must only be used in the rear objects can injure occupants or Always follow all of the child seat. damage the vehicle. restraint manufacturer’s instructions for installation and — Be sure to purchase a child use. restraint that will fit the child and vehicle. Some child re- CAUTION — Infants and children should straints may not fit properly never be held on anyone’s in your vehicle. lap. Even the strongest adult A child restraint in a closed vehicle cannot resist the forces of a — Child restraint anchor points can become very hot. Check the collision. are designed to withstand seating surface and buckles before loads from child restraints placing a child in the child restraint. — Do not put a seat belt around that are properly fitted. both a child and another pas- This vehicle is equipped with a universal senger. — Never use the anchor points for adult seat belts or har- child restraint anchor system, referred to — NISSAN recommends that all nesses. as the LATCH (Lower Anchors and child restraints be installed in Tethers for CHildren) system. Some child the rear seat. Studies show — A child restraint with a top restraints include rigid or webbing- that children are safer when tether strap should not be mounted attachments that can be con- properly restrained in the rear used in the front passenger nected to these anchors. Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-33 For details, see “Lower Anchors and LATCH lower anchors or the seat belt Tethers for CHildren (LATCH) system ” to install the child restraint (not both (P.1-35). at the same time). If you do not have a LATCH compatible . If the combined weight of the child child restraint, the vehicle seat belts can and child restraint is greater than 65 be used. lbs (29.5 kg), use the vehicle’s seat belt (not the lower anchors) to install the Several manufacturers offer child re- child restraint. straints for infants and small children of . various sizes. When selecting any child Be sure to follow the child restraint restraint, keep the following points in manufacturer’s instructions for instal- mind: lation. All U.S. states and Canadian provinces . Choose only a restraint with a label or territories require that infants and certifying that it complies with Federal small children be restrained in an ap- Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or proved child restraint at all times while SSS1113 Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Stan- the vehicle is being operated. Canadian LATCH system lower anchor locations - captain’s dard 213. seats . law requires the top tether strap on Check the child restraint in your forward-facing child restraints be se- vehicle to be sure it is compatible with cured to the designated anchor point the vehicle’s seat and seat belt sys- on the vehicle. tem. . If the child restraint is compatible with your vehicle, place your child in the child restraint and check the various adjustments to be sure the child restraint is compatible with your child. Choose a child restraint that is designed for your child’s height and weight. Always follow all recommended procedures. . If the combined weight of the child and child restraint is less than 65 lbs (29.5 kg), you may use either the 1-34 Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system to install the child restraint. Be sure to . Inspect the lower anchors by in- follow the child restraint manufacturer’s serting your fingers into the low- instructions for installation. er anchor area. Feel to make sure The LATCH lower anchor points are there are no obstructions over provided to install child restraints in the the anchors such as seat belt following positions only: webbing or seat cushion material. . 2nd row captain’s seats (if so The child restraint will not be equipped) secured properly if the lower . 2nd row bench seat outboard posi- anchors are obstructed. tions only (if so equipped) Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads LATCH lower anchor imposed by correctly fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be used to attach adult SSS1114 WARNING seat belts, or other items or equip- LATCH system lower anchor locations - bench seat ment to the vehicle. Doing so could Lower Anchors and Tethers for Failure to follow the warnings and damage the child restraint an- CHildren (LATCH) SYSTEM instructions for proper use and in- chorages. The child restraint will not stallation of child restraints could be properly installed using the da- Your vehicle is equipped with special result in serious injury or death of a maged anchorage, and a child could anchor points that are used with the child or other passengers in a sud- be seriously injured or killed in a LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for den stop or collision: collision. CHildren) system compatible child restraints. This system may also be referred . Attach LATCH system compatible to as the ISOFIX or ISOFIX compatible child restraints only at the loca- LATCH lower anchor location system. With this system, you do not have tions shown in the illustration. The LATCH lower anchor points are to use a vehicle seat belt to secure the . Do not secure a child restraint in provided to install child restraints in the child restraint unless the combined the center rear seating position rear outboard seating positions only. Do weight of the child and child restraint using the LATCH lower anchors. not attempt to install a child restraint in exceeds 65 lbs (29.5 kg). If the combined The child restraint will not be the center seating position using the weight of the child and child restraint is secured properly. LATCH lower anchors. greater than 65 lbs (29.5 kg), use the vehicle’s seat belt (not the lower anchors) Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-35 CAUTION

Store the loose LATCH covers (for example, in the console box) where they will not get damaged to avoid losing them. (See “Console box” (P.2- 56).)

SSS0643 LATCH webbing-mounted attachment Installing child restraint LATCH lower anchor attachments LATCH compatible child restraints include two rigid or webbing-mounted attachments that can be connected to two anchors located at certain seating posi- JVR0631X tions in your vehicle. With this system, you LATCH lower anchor cover removal do not have to use a vehicle seat belt to The LATCH lower anchor points are secure the child restraint. Check your located under the covers labelled ISOFIX child restraint for a label stating that it is at the bottom of the rear outboard seat compatible with LATCH. This information cushions. To access a LATCH lower an- may also be in the instructions provided chor point, insert your finger into the by the child restraint manufacturer. cover and pull the cover off.

1-36 Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system SSS0644 JVR0619X JVR0621X LATCH rigid-mounted attachment 2nd row captain’s seat 3rd row bench seat When installing a child restraint, carefully TOP TETHER STRAP CHILD RE- read and follow the instructions in this STRAINT manual and those supplied with the child restraint. If the manufacturer of your child restraint requires the use of a top tether strap, it must be secured to an anchor point.

WARNING

. In the 3rd row bench seat, a child restraint with a top tether strap can only be used in the outboard seating position (right side). Do not place it in the outboard seat- JVR0620X ing position (left side) and center 2nd row bench seat position and attempt to angle the Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-37 tether strap to the outboard seat- Top tether anchor point locations Follow these steps to install a rear-facing ing position (right side). Anchor points are located in the following child restraint in the 2nd row seats using the LATCH system: . Child restraint anchorages are locations: designed to withstand only those . 2nd row bench seat (if so equipped) 1. Position the child restraint on the seat. loads imposed by correctly fitted on the seatback of the outboard Always follow the child restraint man- child restraints. Under no circum- seating positions as shown. ufacturer’s instructions. stances are they to be used to . 2nd row captain’s seats (if so attach adult seat belts, or other equipped) on the seatback of the items or equipment to the vehi- outboard seating positions as shown. cle. Doing so could damage the . 3rd row bench seat on the seatback of child restraint anchorages. The the outboard seating position (right child restraint will not be properly side) as shown. installed using the damaged an- If you have any questions when instal- chorage, and a child could be ling a top tether strap child restraint on seriously injured or killed in a the rear seat, it is recommended you collision. visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. . Properly secure cargo and do not allow it to contact the top tether REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT strap when it is attached to the INSTALLATION USING LATCH top tether anchor. Cargo that is Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the not properly secured or cargo “Child safety” and “Child restraints” sec- that contacts the top tether strap tions before installing a child restraint. may damage the top tether strap Do not use the lower anchors if the during a collision. Your child combined weight of the child and the could be seriously injured or child restraint exceeds 65 lbs (29.5 kg). If killed in a collision if the child the combined weight of the child and the restraint top tether strap is da- child restraint is greater than 65 lbs (29.5 maged. kg), use the vehicle’s seat belt (not the lower anchors) to install the child restraint. Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions for installation. 1-38 Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system JVR0635X JVR0636X SSS0639 Rear-facing web-mounted — step 2 Rear-facing rigid-mounted — step 2 Rear-facing — step 3 2. Secure the child restraint anchor at- 3. For child restraints that are equipped tachments to the LATCH lower an- with webbing-mounted attachments, chors. Check to make sure the LATCH remove any additional slack from the attachment is properly attached to anchor attachments. Press downward the lower anchors. and rearward firmly in the center of the child restraint with your hand to compress the vehicle seat cushion and seatback while tightening the webbing of the anchor attachments.

Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-39 in all types of vehicles. REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT 5. Check to make sure the child restraint INSTALLATION USING THE SEAT is properly secured prior to each use. If BELTS the child restraint is loose, repeat steps 1 through 4. WARNING

. The three-point seat belt with Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) must be used when installing a child restraint. Failure to use the ALR mode will result in the child restraint not being properly secured. The restraint could SSS0650 tip over or be loose and cause Rear-facing — step 4 injury to a child in a sudden stop 4. After attaching the child restraint, test or collision. Also, it can change it before you place the child in it. Push the operation of the front pas- it from side to side while holding the senger air bag. See “Front pas- child restraint near the LATCH attach- senger air bag and status light” ment path. The child restraint should (P.1-62). not move more than 1 inch (25 mm), . When installing a child restraint from side to side. Try to tug it forward system in the 3rd center seat and check to see if the LATCH attach- position, both the center seat belt ment holds the restraint in place. If the connector tongue and buckle restraint is not secure, tighten the tongue must be secured. See LATCH attachment as necessary, or “3rd row center seat belt” (P.1-26). put the restraint in another seat and test it again. You may need to try a different child restraint or try installing by using the vehicle seat belt (if applicable). Not all child restraints fit

1-40 Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1. Child restraints for infants must be used in the rear-facing direction and therefore must not be used in the front seat. Position the child restraint on the seat. Always follow the restraint manufacturer’s instructions.

SSS0100 SSS0654 Rear-facing — step 1 Rear-facing — step 2 Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the 2. Route the seat belt tongue through “Child safety” (P.1-30) and “Child restraints” the child restraint and insert it into the (P.1-32) before installing a child restraint. buckle until you hear and feel the Do not use the lower anchors if the latch engage. Be sure to follow the combined weight of the child and the child restraint manufacturer’s instruc- child restraint exceeds 65 lbs (29.5 kg). If tions for belt routing. the combined weight of the child and the child restraint is greater than 65 lbs (29.5 kg), use the vehicle’s seat belt (not the lower anchors) to install the child restraint. Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions for installation. Follow these steps to install a rear-facing child restraint using the vehicle seat belts in the rear seats: Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-41 SSS0655 SSS0656 SSS0657 Rear-facing — step 3 Rear-facing — step 4 Rear-facing — step 5 3. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is 4. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up 5. Remove any additional slack from the fully extended. At this time, the seat on the shoulder belt to remove any seat belt; press downward and rear- belt retractor is in the Automatic slack in the belt. ward firmly in the center of the child Locking Retractor (ALR) mode (child restraint to compress the vehicle seat restraint mode). It reverts to the cushion and seatback while pulling up Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) on the seat belt. mode when the seat belt is fully retracted.

1-42 Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system each use. If the seat belt is not locked, repeat steps 1 through 6. After the child restraint is removed and the seat belt fully retracted, the ALR mode (child restraint mode) is canceled. FORWARD-FACING CHILD RE- STRAINT INSTALLATION USING LATCH Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child safety” and “Child restraints” sections before installing a child restraint. Do not use the lower anchors if the combined weight of the child and the SSS0658 child restraint exceeds 65 lbs (29.5 kg). If JVR0637X Rear-facing — step 6 the combined weight of the child and the Forward-facing web-mounted — step 2 6. After attaching the child restraint, test child restraint is greater than 65 lbs (29.5 2. Secure the child restraint anchor at- it before you place the child in it. Push kg), use the vehicle’s seat belt (not the tachments to the LATCH lower an- it from side to side while holding the lower anchors) to install the child re- chors. Check to make sure the LATCH child restraint near the seat belt path. straint. Be sure to follow the child re- attachment is properly attached to The child restraint should not move straint manufacturer’s instructions for the lower anchors. more than 1 inch (25 mm), from side to installation. If the child restraint is equipped with a side. Try to tug it forward and check to Follow these steps to install a forward- top tether strap, route the top tether see if the belt holds the restraint in facing child restraint using the LATCH strap and secure the tether strap to place. If the restraint is not secure, system: the tether anchor point. See “Installing tighten the seat belt as necessary, or 1. Position the child restraint on the seat. top tether strap” (P.1-46). Do not install put the restraint in another seat and child restraints that require the use of test it again. You may need to try a Always follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions. a top tether strap in seating positions different child restraint. Not all child that do not have a top tether anchor. restraints fit in all types of vehicles. 7. Check to make sure that the child restraint is properly secured prior to

Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-43 seating position or a different child restraint.

JVR0638X SSS0647 Forward-facing rigid-mounted — step 2 Forward-facing — step 4 3. The back of the child restraint should 4. For child restraints that are equipped be secured against the vehicle seat- with webbing-mounted attachments, back. remove any additional slack from the If necessary, adjust or remove the anchor attachments. Press downward head restraint to obtain the correct and rearward firmly in the center of child restraint fit. If the head restraint the child restraint with your knee to is removed, store it in a secure place. compress the vehicle seat cushion Be sure to reinstall the head re- and seatback while tightening the straint when the child restraint is webbing of the anchor attachments. removed. See “Head restraints/head- 5. Tighten the tether strap according to rests” (P.1-14) for head restraint adjust- the manufacturer’s instructions to ment information. remove any slack. If the seating position does not have an adjustable head restraint or a headrest and it is interfering with the proper child restraint fit, try another 1-44 Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 7. Check to make sure the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use. If the child restraint is loose, repeat steps 1 through 6.

SSS0638 JVR0619X Forward-facing — step 6 2nd row captain’s seat 6. After attaching the child restraint, test it before you place the child in it. Push it from side to side while holding the child restraint near the LATCH attachment path. The child restraint should not move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from side to side. Try to tug it forward and check to see if the LATCH attachment holds the restraint in place. If the restraint is not secure, tighten the LATCH attachment as necessary, or put the restraint in another seat and test it again. You may need to try a different child restraint. Not all child restraints fit in all types of vehicles. JVR0620X 2nd row bench seat Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-45 Installing top tether strap FORWARD-FACING CHILD RE- First, secure the child restraint with the STRAINT INSTALLATION USING THE LATCH lower anchors (2nd row captain’s SEAT BELTS or bench outboard seating positions only). 1. If necessary, raise or remove the head WARNING restraint or headrest to position the . top tether strap over the top of the The three-point seat belt with seatback. If the head restraint or Automatic Locking Retractor headrest is removed, store it in a (ALR) must be used when instal- secure place. Be sure to reinstall the ling a child restraint. Failure to head restraint or headrest when the use the ALR mode will result in child restraint is removed. See “Head the child restraint not being prop- restraints/headrests” (P.1-14) for head erly secured. The restraint could SSS0640 restraint or headrest adjustment, re- tip over or be loose and cause moval and installation information. injury to a child in a sudden stop Forward-facing (front passenger seat) — step 1 or collision. Also, it can change Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the 2. Secure the tether strap to the tether the operation of the front pas- “Child safety” and “Child restraints” sec- anchor point on the back of each senger air bag. See “Front pas- tions before installing a child restraint. seatback behind the child restraint. senger air bag and status light” Do not use the lower anchors if the 3. Tighten the tether strap according to (P.1-62) combined weight of the child and the the manufacturer’s instructions to . When installing a child restraint child restraint exceeds 65 lbs (29.5 kg). If remove any slack. Make sure the head system in the 3rd center position, the combined weight of the child and the restraint or headrest does not contact both the center seat belt connec- child restraint is greater than 65 lbs (29.5 the top tether strap. tor tongue and buckle tongue kg), use the vehicle’s seat belt (not the If you have any questions when instal- must be secured. See “3rd row lower anchors) to install the child re- ling a top tether strap on the rear seat, center seat belt” (P.1-26). straint. Be sure to follow the child re- it is recommended you visit a NISSAN straint manufacturer’s instructions for dealer for this service. installation. Follow these steps to install a forward- facing child restraint using the vehicle seat belt in the rear seats or in the front 1-46 Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system passenger seat: restraint. 1. If you must install a child restraint in the front seat, it should be placed in a forward-facing direction only. Move the seat to the rearmost position. Child restraints for infants must be used in the rear-facing direction and, therefore, must not be used in the front seat. 2. Position the child restraint on the seat. Always follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions. The back of the child restraint should be secured against the vehicle seat- SSS0360B back. Forward-facing — step 3 If necessary, adjust or remove the 3. Route the seat belt tongue through head restraint or headrest to obtain the child restraint and insert it into the the correct child restraint fit. If the buckle until you hear and feel the head restraint or headrest is removed, latch engage. Be sure to follow the store it in a secure place. Be sure to child restraint manufacturer’s instruc- reinstall the head restraint or head- tions for belt routing. rest when the child restraint is removed. See “Head restraints/ If the child restraint is equipped with a headrests” (P.1-14) for head restraint top tether strap, route the top tether or headrest adjustment, removal and strap and secure the tether strap to installation information. the tether anchor point (rear seat installation only). See “Installing top If the seating position does not have tether strap” (P.1-50). Do not install an adjustable head restraint or a child restraints that require the use of headrest and it is interfering with the a top tether strap in seating positions proper child restraint fit, try another that do not have a top tether anchor. seating position or a different child

Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-47 SSS0651 SSS0652 SSS0653 Forward-facing — step 4 Forward-facing — step 5 Forward-facing — step 6 4. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is 5. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up 6. Remove any additional slack from the fully extended. At this time, the seat on the shoulder belt to remove any seat belt; press downward and rear- belt retractor is in the Automatic slack in the belt. ward firmly in the center of the child Locking Retractor (ALR) mode (child restraint with your knee to compress restraint mode). It reverts to Emer- the vehicle seat cushion and seatback gency Locking Retractor (ELR) mode while pulling up on the seat belt. when the seat belt is fully retracted. 7. Tighten the tether strap according to the manufacturer’s instructions to remove any slack.

1-48 Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system the seat belt is not locked, repeat steps 2 through 8.

SSS0641 SSS1099 Forward-facing — step 8 Forward-facing — step 10 8. After attaching the child restraint, test 10. If the child restraint is installed in the it before you place the child in it. Push front passenger seat, place the igni- it from side to side while holding the tion switch in the ON position. The child restraint near the seat belt path. front passenger air bag status light The child restraint should not move should illuminate. If this light is not more than 1 inch (25 mm), from side to illuminated, see “Front passenger air side. Try to tug it forward and check to bag and status light” (P.1-62). Move see if the belt holds the restraint in the child restraint to another seating place. If the restraint is not secure, position. Have the system checked. It tighten the seat belt as necessary, or is recommended you visit a NISSAN put the restraint in another seat and dealer for this service. test it again. You may need to try a After the child restraint is removed and different child restraint. Not all child the seat belt is fully retracted, the ALR restraints fit in all types of vehicles. mode (child restraint mode) is canceled. 9. Check to make sure the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use. If

Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-49 seat belt. 1. If necessary, raise or remove the head restraint or headrest to position the top tether strap over the top of the seatback. If the head restraint or headrest is removed, store it in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall the head restraint or headrest when the child restraint is removed. See “Head restraints/headrests” (P.1-14) for head restraint or headrest adjustment, removal and installation information. 2. Secure the tether strap to the tether anchor point on the back of each JVR0619X JVR0621X seatback (2nd row seat) or right side 2nd row captain’s seat 3rd row bench seat seatback (3rd row seat) behind the Installing top tether strap child restraint. 3. Tighten the tether strap according to the manufacturer’s instructions to WARNING remove any slack. Make sure the head restraint or headrest does not contact In the 3rd row bench seat, a child the top tether strap. restraint with a top tether strap can If you have any questions when instal- only be used in the outboard seating ling a top tether strap on the rear seat, position (right side). Do not place it in it is recommended you visit a NISSAN the outboard seating position (left dealer for this service. side) and center position and attempt to angle the tether strap to the outboard seating position (right side). JVR0620X 2nd row bench seat First, secure the child restraint with the 1-50 Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system BOOSTER SEATS Precautions on booster seats

WARNING

If a booster seat and seat belt are not used properly, the risk of a child being injured in a sudden stop or collision greatly increases: . Make sure the shoulder portion of the belt is away from the child’s face and neck and the lap portion of the belt does not cross the LRS0455 LRS0453 stomach. Booster seats of various sizes are offered . . Make sure the child’s head will be Make sure the shoulder belt is not by several manufacturers. When selecting properly supported by the booster behind the child or under the any booster seat, keep the following seat or vehicle seat. The seatback child’s arm. points in mind: must be at or above the center of . A booster seat must only be . Choose only a booster seat with a the child’s ears. For example, if a low installed in a seating position that label certifying that it complies with back booster seat is chosen, the has a lap/shoulder belt. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard vehicle seatback must be at or above 213 or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety the center of the child’s ears. If the Standard 213. seatback is lower than the center of . Check the booster seat in your vehicle the child’s ears, a high back booster to be sure it is compatible with the seat should be used. . vehicle’s seat and seat belt system. If the booster seat is compatible with your vehicle, place your child in the booster seat and check the various adjustments to be sure the booster seat is compatible with your child. Always follow all recommended pro- Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-51 cedures. Booster seat installation

CAUTION

Do not use the lap/shoulder belt Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode when using a booster seat with the seat belts.

Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child safety”, “Child restraints” and “Boos- ter seats” sections earlier in this section before installing a child restraint. LRS0464 Follow these steps to install a booster All U.S. states and Canadian provinces seat in the rear seat or in the front or territories require that infants and passenger seat: small children be restrained in an approved child restraint at all times while the vehicle is being operated. The instructions in this section apply to booster seat installation in the rear seats or the front passenger seat.

1-52 Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system proper booster seat fit, try another seating position or a different booster seat. 4. Position the lap portion of the seat belt low and snug on the child’s hips. Be sure to follow the booster seat manufacturer’s instructions for adjusting the seat belt routing. 5. Pull the shoulder belt portion of the seat belt toward the retractor to take up extra slack. Be sure the shoulder belt is positioned across the top, middle portion of the child’s shoulder. Be sure to follow the booster seat SSS0640 LRS0454 manufacturer’s instructions for ad- Front passenger position 1. If you must install a booster seat in justing the seat belt routing. the front seat, move the seat to the 3. The booster seat should be positioned 6. Follow the warnings, cautions and rearmost position. on the vehicle seat so that it is stable. instructions for properly fastening a 2. Position the booster seat on the seat. If necessary, adjust or remove the seat belt shown in “Seat belts” (P.1-20). Only place it in a forward-facing head restraint or headrest to obtain direction. Always follow the booster the correct booster seat fit. If the head seat manufacturer’s instructions. restraint or headrest is removed, store it in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall the head restraint or headrest when the booster seat is removed. See “Head restraints/ headrests” (P.1-14) for head restraint or headrest adjustment, removal and installation information. If the seating position does not have an adjustable head restraint or a headrest and it is interfering with the Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-53 SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM

PRECAUTIONS ON SUPPLEMENTAL positions in certain side impact or rollover RESTRAINT SYSTEM collisions. In a side impact, the curtain air bags are designed to inflate on the side This Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) where the vehicle is impacted. In a roll- section contains important information over, the curtain air bags on both sides concerning the following systems. are designed to inflate. Under both side- . Driver and passenger supplemental impact and rollover situations, the curtain front-impact air bag (NISSAN Ad- air bags will remain inflated for a short vanced Air Bag System) period of time. . Front seat-mounted side-impact sup- These supplemental restraint systems are plemental air bag designed to supplement the crash pro- . Roof-mounted curtain side-impact tection provided by the driver and pas- and rollover supplemental air bag senger seat belts and are not a . Seat belt with pretensioner substitute for them. Seat belts should SSS1099 Supplemental front-impact air bag sys- always be correctly worn and the occupant seated a suitable distance away 7. If the booster seat is installed in the tem: The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag Sys- tem can help cushion the impact force to from the steering wheel, instrument pa- front passenger seat, place the igni- nel and door finishers. (See “Seat belts” tion switch in the ON position. The the head and chest of the driver and front passenger in certain frontal collisions. (P.1-20) for instructions and precautions front passenger air bag status light on seat belt usage.) may or may not illuminate de- Front seat-mounted side-impact sup- pending on the size of the child and plemental air bag system: This system The supplemental air bags operate only the type of booster seat used. See can help cushion the impact force to the when the ignition switch is in the ON “Front passenger air bag and status chest and pelvis area of the driver and position. light” (P.1-62). front passenger in certain side impact After placing the ignition switch in the collisions. The supplemental side air bag ON position, the supplemental air bag is designed to inflate on the side where warning light illuminates. The supple- the vehicle is impacted. mental air bag warning light will turn Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and off after about 7 seconds if the systems rollover supplemental air bag system: are operational. This system can help cushion the impact force to the head of occupants in front and rear (2nd and 3rd) outboard seating 1-54 Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system WARNING

. The front air bags ordinarily will not inflate in the event of a side impact, rear impact, rollover, or lower severity frontal collision. Always wear your seat belts to help reduce the risk or severity of injury in various kinds of accidents. . The front passenger air bag will not inflate if the front passenger air bag status light is lit or if the SSS0131 front passenger seat is unoccupied. See “Front passenger air bag and status light” (P.1-62). . The seat belts and the front air bags are most effective when you are sitting well back and upright in the seat. The front air bags inflate with great force. Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System, if you are unrestrained, leaning forward, sitting sideways or out of position in any way, you are at greater risk of injury or death in a crash. You may also receive serious or fatal injuries SSS0132 from the front air bag if you are up against it when it inflates. Always sit back against the seat- Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-55 back and as far-away as practical front air bag inflates. from the steering wheel or instrument panel. Always use the seat belts. . The driver and front passenger seat belt buckles are equipped with sensors that detect if the seat belts are fastened. The Ad- vanced Air Bag System monitors the severity of a collision and seat belt usage then inflates the air bags. Failure to properly wear seat belts can increase the risk or severity of injury in an accident. SSS0007 . The front passenger seat is equipped with occupant classification sensors (weight sensors) that turn the front passenger air bag OFF under some conditions. This sensor is only used in this seat. Failure to be properly seated and wearing the seat belt can increase the risk or severity of injury in an accident. See “Front passenger air bag and status light” (P.1-62). . Keep hands on the outside of the steering wheel. Placing them inside the steering wheel rim could SSS0006 increase the risk of injury if the

1-56 Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system WARNING

. Never let children ride unrestrained or extend their hands or face out of the window. Do not attempt to hold them in your lap or arms. Some examples of dangerous riding positions are shown in the illustrations. . Children may be severely injured or killed when the front air bags, side air bags or curtain air bags inflate if they are not properly SSS0008 SSS0099 restrained. Pre-teens and children should be properly restrained in the rear seat, if possible. . Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System, never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front seat. An inflating front air bag could seriously injure or kill your child. See “Child restraints” (P.1-32) for details.

SSS0009 SSS0100

Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-57 SSS0832 SSS0140 SSS0159

WARNING

Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bags and roof- mounted curtain side-impact and rollover supplemental air bags: . The side air bags ordinarily will not inflate in the event of a front impact, rear impact, rollover, or lower severity side collision. Al- ways wear your seat belts to help reduce the risk or severity of SSS0833 SSS0162 injury in various kinds of accidents.

1-58 Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system . The curtain air bags ordinarily will properly restrained. Some exam- not inflate in the event of a front ples of dangerous riding posi- impact, rear impact, or lower tions are shown in the severity side collision. Always illustrations. wear your seat belts to help . Do not use seat covers on the reduce the risk or severity of front seatbacks. They may inter- injury in various kinds of acci- fere with side air bags inflation. dents. . The seat belts, the side air bags and curtain air bags are most effective when you are sitting well back and upright in the seat. The side air bags and curtain air bags inflate with great force. Do not allow anyone to place their hand, leg or face near the side air bags on the side of the seatback of the front seat or near the side roof rails. Do not allow anyone sitting in the front seats or rear outboard seats to extend their hand out of the window or lean against the door. Some examples of dangerous riding positions are shown in the previous illustrations. . When sitting in the rear seat, do not hold onto the seatback of the front seat. If the side air bag inflates, you may be seriously injured. Be especially careful with children, who should always be Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-59 11. Occupant classification system control unit NISSAN ADVANCED AIR BAG SYS- TEM (front seats)

WARNING

To ensure proper operation of the passenger’s advanced air bag system, please observe the following items. . Do not allow a passenger in the rear seat to push or pull on the seatback pocket. . Do not place heavy loads heavier than 9.1 lbs (4 kg) on the seatback, head restraint or in the seatback pocket. . Do not store cargo behind the seat that can press into the seatback. JVR0399X . Do not position the front passenger seat so it contacts the rear 1. Crash zone sensor rollover supplemental air bags seat. If the front seat does con- 2. Supplemental front-impact air bag mod- 6. Door satellite sensors ules (NISSAN Advanced Air Bags) tact the rear seat, the air bag 7. Seat belt pretensioners system may determine a sensor 3. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and 8. Satellite sensors rollover supplemental air bag inflators malfunction has occurred and the 9. Air bag Control Unit (ACU) front passenger air bag status 4. Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bag modules 10. Occupant classification sensors (weight light may illuminate and the sup- sensors) plemental air bag warning light 5. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and 1-60 Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system This vehicle is equipped with the NISSAN may flash. depending on the crash severity and Advanced Air Bag System for the driver whether the front occupants are belted . If a forward facing child restraint and front passenger seats. This system is or unbelted. Additionally, the front pas- is installed in the front passenger designed to meet certification require- senger air bag may be automatically seat, do not position the front ments under U.S. regulations. It is also turned OFF under some conditions, de- passenger seat so the child re- permitted in Canada. All of the informa- pending on the information provided by straint contacts the instrument tion, cautions and warnings in this the occupant classification sensors. If the panel. If the child restraint does manual apply and must be followed. front passenger air bag is OFF, the front contact the instrument panel, the The driver supplemental front-impact air passenger air bag status light will be system may determine the seat is bag is located in the center of the illuminated (if the seat is unoccupied, the occupied and the passenger air steering wheel. The passenger supple- light will not be illuminated, but the air bag may deploy in a collision. mental front-impact air bag is mounted in bag will be off). (See “Front passenger air Also the front passenger air bag the instrument panel above the glove bag and status light” (P.1-62) for further status light may not illuminate. box. The front air bags are designed to details.) One front air bag inflating does See “Child restraints” (P.1-32) for inflate in higher severity frontal collisions, not indicate improper performance of the information about installing and although they may inflate if the forces in system. using child restraints. another type of collision are similar to If you have any questions about your air . Confirm the operating condition those of a higher severity frontal impact. bag system, it is recommended you visit a with the front passenger air bag They may not inflate in certain frontal NISSAN dealer to obtain information status light. collisions. Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is about the system. If you are considering . If you notice that the front pas- not always an indication of proper front modification of your vehicle due to a senger air bag status light is not air bag operation. disability, you may also contact NISSAN. operating as described in this The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System Contact information is contained in the section, it is recommended you monitors information from the Air bag front of this Owner’s Manual. visit a NISSAN dealer to check the Control Unit (ACU), seat belt buckle sen- When a front air bag inflates, a fairly loud passenger seat Advanced Air Bag sors and the occupant classification sen- noise may be heard, followed by release System. sors (weight sensors). Inflator operation is of smoke. This smoke is not harmful and . Until you have confirmed with based on the severity of a collision and does not indicate a fire. Care should be your dealer that your passenger seat belt usage for the driver. For the taken not to inhale it, as it may cause seat advanced air bag is working front passenger, the occupant classifica- irritation and choking. Those with a properly, position the occupants tion sensors are also monitored. Based on history of a breathing condition should in the rear seating positions. information from the sensors, only one get fresh air promptly. front air bag may inflate in a crash, Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-61 Front air bags, along with the use of seat child restraints can increase the risk belts, help to cushion the impact force on or severity of injury in an accident. the head and chest of the front occupants. They can help save lives and reduce serious injuries. However, an in- Status light: flating front air bag may cause facial The front passenger seat is equipped with abrasions or other injuries. Front air bags the occupant classification sensors do not provide restraint to the lower (weight sensors) that turn the front body. passenger air bag on or off depending Even with NISSAN advanced air bags, seat on the weight applied to the front pas- belts should be correctly worn and the senger seat. The status of the front driver and passenger seated upright as passenger air bag (ON or OFF) is indicated far as practical away from the steering by the front passenger air bag status light wheel or instrument panel. The front air which is located on the instrument bags inflate quickly in order to help SSS1099 panel. After the ignition switch is placed in protect the front occupants. Because of Front passenger air bag status light the ON position, the front passenger air bag status light on the instrument panel this, the force of the front air bag inflating Front passenger air bag and status can increase the risk of injury if the illuminates for about 7 seconds and then occupant is too close to, or is against, light turns off or illuminates depending on the the air bag module during inflation. front passenger seat occupied status. The front air bags deflate quickly after a WARNING The light operates as follows: collision. . Unoccupied passenger seat: The The front air bags operate only when The front passenger air bag is de- light is OFF and the front passenger the ignition switch is in the ON position. signed to automatically turn OFF air bag is OFF and will not inflate in a crash. After placing the ignition switch in the under some conditions. Read this . ON position, the supplemental air bag section carefully to learn how it Passenger seat occupied by a small warning light illuminates. The supple- operates. Proper use of the seat, adult, child or child restraint as out- mental air bag warning light will turn seat belt and child restraints is ne- lined in this section: The light off after about 7 seconds if the system cessary for most effective protec- illuminates to indicate that the front is operational. tion. Failure to follow all passenger air bag is OFF and will not instructions in this manual concern- inflate in a crash. ing the use of seats, seat belts and 1-62 Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system . Occupied passenger seat and the (weight sensors) are on the seat cushion If this is not possible, the occupant passenger meets the conditions out- frame under the front passenger seat and classification sensors are designed to lined in this section: The light is are designed to detect an occupant and operate as described above to turn the OFF to indicate that the front passen- objects on the seat. For example, if a child front passenger air bag OFF for specified ger air bag is operational. is in the front passenger seat, the Ad- child restraints. Failing to properly secure In addition to the above, certain objects vanced Air Bag System is designed to turn child restrains and to use the ALR mode placed on the front passenger seat may the passenger air bag OFF in accordance may allow the restraint to tip or move in also cause the light to operate as de- with the regulations. Also, if a child an accident or sudden stop. This can also scribed above depending on their weight. restraint of the type specified in the result in the passenger air bag inflating in For additional information related to the regulations is on the seat, the occupant a crash instead of being OFF. (See “Child normal operation and troubleshooting of classification sensors can detect it and restraints” (P.1-32) for proper use and this occupant classification sensor sys- cause the air bag to turn OFF. installation.) tem, please refer to “Normal operation” Front passenger seat adult occupants If the front passenger seat is not occu- (P.1-64) and “Troubleshooting” (P.1-65) in who are properly seated and using the pied, the passenger air bag is designed this section. seat belt as outlined in this manual not to inflate in a crash. However, heavy should not cause the passenger air bag objects placed on the seat could result in Front passenger air bag: to be automatically turned OFF. For small air bag inflation, because of the object The front passenger air bag is designed adults it may be turned OFF, however, if being detected by the occupant classifi- to automatically turn OFF when the the occupant does not sit in the seat cation sensors. Other conditions could vehicle is operated under some condi- properly (for example, by not sitting up- also result in air bag inflation, such as if a tions as described below as permitted by right, by sitting on an edge of the seat, or child is standing on the seat, or if two U.S. regulations. If the front passenger air by otherwise being out of position), this children are on the seat, contrary to the bag is OFF, it will not inflate in a crash. The could cause the sensor to turn the air bag instructions in this manual. Always be driver air bag and other air bags in your OFF. Always be sure to be seated and sure that you and all vehicle occupants vehicle are not part of this system. wearing the seat belt properly for the are seated and restrained properly. The purpose of the regulation is to help most effective protection by the seat belt Using the front passenger air bag status reduce the risk of injury or death from an and supplemental air bag. light, you can monitor when the front inflating air bag to certain front passen- NISSAN recommends that pre-teens and passenger air bag is automatically turned ger seat occupants, such as children, by children be properly restrained in a rear OFF with the seat occupied. The light will requiring the air bag to be automatically seat. NISSAN also recommends that ap- not illuminate when the front passenger turned OFF. propriate child restraints and booster seat is unoccupied. The occupant classification sensors seats be properly installed in a rear seat. If an adult occupant is in the seat but the Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-63 front passenger air bag status light is restraint in a rear seat. . Make sure that the front passenger illuminated (indicating that the air bag is The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System seat or seatback is not forced back OFF), it could be that the person is a small and front passenger air bag status light against an object on the seat or floor adult, or is not sitting on the seat will take a few seconds to register a behind it. properly. change in the front passenger seat sta- . Make sure that there is no object If a child restraint must be used in the tus. However, if the seat becomes unoc- placed under the front passenger front seat, the front passenger air bag cupied, the front passenger air bag status seat. status light may or may not be illumi- light will remain off. Steps: nated, depending on the size of the child If a malfunction occurs in the front 1. Adjust the seat as outlined. (See and the type of child restraint being used. passenger air bag system, the supple- If the front passenger air bag status light “Seats” (P.1-3).) Sit upright, leaning mental air bag warning light , located against the seatback, and centered is not illuminated (indicating that the air in the meter and gauges area will blink. bag might inflate in a crash), it could be on the seat cushion with your feet Have the system checked. It is recom- comfortably extended to the floor. that the child restraint or seat belt is not mended you visit a NISSAN dealer for this being used properly. Make sure that the service. 2. Make sure there are no objects on child restraint is installed properly, the your lap. seat belt is used properly and the occu- Normal operation: 3. Fasten the seat belt as outlined. (See pant is positioned properly. If the front In order for the occupant classification “Seat belts” (P.1-20).) passenger air bag status light is still not sensor system to classify the front pas- 4. Remain in this position for 30 seconds illuminated, reposition the occupant or senger based on weight, please follow the allowing the system to classify the child restraint in a rear seat. precautions and steps outlined below: front passenger before the vehicle is If the front passenger air bag status light Precautions: put into motion. will not illuminate even though you be- . 5. Ensure proper classification by check- lieve that the child restraint, the seat belts Make sure that there are no objects ing the front passenger air bag status and the occupant are properly positioned, weighing over 9.1 lbs (4 kg) hanging on light. the system may be sensing an unoccu- the seat or placed in the seatback pied seat (in which case the air bag is pocket. NOTE: . OFF). Your NISSAN dealer can check that Make sure that a child restraint or This vehicle’s occupant classification the system is OFF by using a special tool. other object is not pressing against sensor system locks the classification However, until you have confirmed with the rear of the seatback. during driving so it is important that . your dealer that your air bag is working Make sure that a rear passenger is not you confirm that the front passenger is properly, reposition the occupant or child pushing or pulling on the back of the properly classified prior to driving. Also, front passenger seat. 1-64 Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system the occupant classification sensor sys- tween the seat cushion and the door. . A child restraint or other object press- tem may recalculate the weight of the If the vehicle is moving, please come to a ing against the rear of the seatback. occupant when the vehicle comes to a stop when it is safe to do so. Check and . A rear passenger pushing or pulling stop (i.e. stop light, stop sign, etc.), so correct any of the above conditions. on the back of the front passenger the front passenger seat occupant Restart the vehicle and wait 1 minute. seat. should continue to remain seated as NOTE: . Forcing the front seat or seatback outlined above. A system check will be performed dur- against an object on the seat or floor Troubleshooting: ing which the front passenger air bag behind it. . If you think the front passenger air bag status light will remain lit for about 7 An object placed under the front status light is incorrect: seconds initially. passenger seat. . An object placed between the seat 1. If the light is ON with no front passenger If the light is still ON after this, it is and no objects on the front passenger cushion and center console or be- recommended that the vehicle be seat: tween the seat cushion and the door. checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as This may be due to the following condi- possible. If the vehicle is moving, please come to a tions that may be interfering with the stop when it is safe to do so. Check and weight sensors: 2. If the light is ON with an adult occupying the front passenger seat: correct any of the above conditions. . Restart the vehicle and wait 1 minute. An object weighing over 9.1 lbs (4 kg) . Occupant is a small adult — the front hanging on the seat or placed in the passenger air bag status light is func- NOTE: seatback pocket. tioning as intended. The front passen- A system check will be performed dur- . A child restraint or other object press- ger air bag is suppressed. ing which the front passenger air bag ing against the rear of the seatback. However, if the occupant is not a small status light will remain lit for about 7 . A rear passenger pushing or pulling adult, then this may be due to the seconds initially. on the back of the front passenger following conditions that may be interfer- If the light is still ON after this, the person seat. ing with the weight sensors: should be advised not to ride in the front . Forcing the front seat or seatback . Occupant is not sitting upright, lean- passenger seat and it is recommended against an object on the seat or floor ing against the seatback, and cen- that the vehicle be checked by a NISSAN behind it. tered on the seat cushion with his/her dealer as soon as possible. . An object placed under the front feet comfortably extended to the 3. If the light is OFF with a small adult, child passenger seat. floor. or child restraint occupying the front . An object placed between the seat passenger seat. cushion and center console or be- This may be due to the following condi-

Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-65 tions that may be interfering with the NOTE: weight sensors: classification sensors (weight A system check will be performed dur- sensors). This can affect the op- . Small adult or child is not sitting ing which the front passenger air bag eration of the air bag system and upright, leaning against the seatback, status light will remain lit for about 7 result in serious personal injury. and centered on the seat cushion with seconds initially. . Do not use water or acidic clea- his/her feet comfortably extended to If the light is still OFF after this, the small the floor. ners (hot steam cleaners) on the adult, child or child restraint should be seat. This can damage the seat or . The child restraint is not properly repositioned in the rear seat and it is occupant classification sensors. installed, as outlined. (See “Child re- recommended that the vehicle be This can also affect the operation straints” (P.1-32).) checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as of the air bag system and result in . An object weighing over 9.1 lbs (4 kg) possible. serious personal injury. hanging on the seat or placed in the . seatback pocket. Other supplemental front-impact Immediately after inflation, several front air bag system compo- . A child restraint or other object press- air bag precautions nents will be hot. Do not touch ing against the rear of the seatback. them; you may severely burn . A rear passenger pushing or pulling WARNING yourself. on the back of the front passenger . seat. No unauthorized changes should . Do not place any objects on the be made to any components or . Forcing the front seat or seatback steering wheel pad or on the wiring of the supplemental air against an object on the seat or floor instrument panel. Also, do not bag system. This is to prevent behind it. place any objects between any accidental inflation of the supple- . An object placed under the front occupant and the steering wheel mental air bag or damage to the passenger seat. or instrument panel. Such objects supplemental air bag system. . An object placed between the seat may become dangerous projec- . Do not make unauthorized cushion and center console. tiles and cause injury if the front changes to your vehicle’s electri- If the vehicle is moving, please come to a air bags inflate. cal system, suspension system or stop when it is safe to do so. Check and . Do not place objects with sharp front end structure. This could correct any of the above conditions. edges on the seat. Also, do not affect proper operation of the Restart the vehicle and wait 1 minute. place heavy objects on the seat front air bag system. that will leave permanent impres- . Tampering with the air bag sys- sions in the seat. Such objects tem may result in serious perso- can damage the seat or occupant 1-66 Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system nal injury. Tampering includes . No unauthorized changes should appropriate sections in this Owner’s Man- changes to the steering wheel be made to any components or ual. and the instrument panel assem- wiring of the seat belt system. bly by placing material over the This may affect the front air bag steering wheel pad and above the system. Tampering with the seat instrument panel or by installing belt system may result in serious additional trim material around personal injury. the air bag system. . It is recommended you visit a . Removing or modifying the front NISSAN dealer for work on and passenger seat may affect the around the front air bag. It is also function of the air bag system recommended you visit a NISSAN and result in serious personal dealer for installation of electrical injury. equipment. The Supplemental . Modifying or tampering with the Restraint System (SRS) wiring front passenger seat may result harnesses* should not be modi- in serious personal injury. For fied or disconnected. Unauthor- example, do not change the front ized electrical test equipment seats by placing material on the and probing devices should not seat cushion or by installing ad- be used on the air bag system. ditional trim material, such as . A cracked windshield should be seat covers, on the seat that is replaced immediately by a quali- not specifically designed to as- fied repair facility. A cracked sure proper air bag operation. windshield could affect the func- Additionally, do not stow any tion of the supplemental air bag objects under the front passen- system. ger seat or the seat cushion and seatback. Such objects may inter- * The SRS wiring harness connectors are fere with the proper operation of yellow and orange for easy identifica- the occupant classification sen- tion. sors. When selling your vehicle, we request that you inform the buyer about the front air bag system and guide the buyer to the Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-67 They are designed to inflate on the side bags do not provide restraint to the lower where the vehicle is impacted. They may body. not inflate in certain side collisions on the The seat belts should be correctly worn side where the vehicle is impacted. and the driver and passenger seated Curtain air bags are also designed to upright as far as practical away from the inflate in certain types of rollover colli- side air bag. Rear seat passengers should sions or near rollovers. As a result, certain be seated as far away as practical from vehicle movements (for example, during the door finishers and side roof rails. The severe off roading) may cause the curtain side air bags and curtain air bags inflate air bags to inflate. quickly in order to help protect the Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not occupants. Because of this, the force of always an indication of proper side air the side air bags and curtain air bags bag and curtain air bag operation. inflating can increase the risk of injury if the occupant is too close to, or is against, SSS1092 When side air bags and curtain air bags these air bag modules during inflation. In inflate, a fairly loud noise may be heard, a rollover, the curtain air bags on both FRONT SEAT-MOUNTED SIDE-IM- followed by release of smoke. This smoke sides are designed to inflate. Under both PACT SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG AND is not harmful and does not indicate a fire. side-impact situations, the curtain air ROOF-MOUNTED CURTAIN SIDE- Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it bags will remain inflated for a short may cause irritation and choking. Those period of time. IMPACT AND ROLLOVER SUPPLE- with a history of a breathing condition MENTAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS should get fresh air promptly. The side air bags and curtain air bags The side air bags are located in the operate only when the ignition switch is Side air bags, along with the use of seat in the ON position. outside of the seatback of the front seats. belts, help to cushion the impact force on The curtain air bags are located in the the chest and pelvis of the front occu- After placing the ignition switch in the side roof rails. All of the information, pants. Curtain air bags help to cushion ON position, the supplemental air bag cautions and warnings in this manual the impact force to the head of occu- warning light illuminates. The air bag apply and must be followed. The side air pants in the front and rear (2nd and 3rd) warning light will turn off after about 7 bags and curtain air bags are designed to outboard seating positions. They can help seconds if the systems are operational. inflate in higher severity side collisions, save lives and reduce serious injuries. although they may inflate if the forces in However, an inflating side air bags and another type of collision are similar to curtain air bags may cause abrasions or those of a higher severity side impact. other injuries. Side air bags and curtain air 1-68 Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system nal injury. For example, do not guide the buyer to the appropriate sec- WARNING change the front seats by placing tions in this Owner’s Manual. material near the seatback or by SEAT BELTS WITH PRETENSIONERS . Do not place any objects near the installing additional trim materi- (front seats) seatback of the front seats. Also, al, such as seat covers, around do not place any objects (an the side air bags. umbrella, bag, etc.) between the . Removing or modifying the front WARNING front door finisher and the front passenger seat may affect the seat. Such objects may become function of the air bag system . The pretensioners cannot be re- dangerous projectiles and cause and result in serious personal used after activation. They must injury if side air bag inflates. injury. be replaced together with the . Right after inflation, several side . It is recommended you visit a retractor and buckle as a unit. air bags and curtain air bag sys- NISSAN dealer for work on and . If the vehicle becomes involved in tem components will be hot. Do around the side air bag and a collision but a pretensioner is not touch them; you may severely curtain air bag. It is also recom- not activated, be sure to have the burn yourself. mended you visit a NISSAN dealer pretensioner system checked . No unauthorized changes should for installation of electrical equip- and, if necessary, replaced. It is be made to any components or ment. The Supplemental Re- recommended you visit a NISSAN wiring of side air bag and curtain straint System (SRS) wiring dealer for this service. air bags. This is to prevent da- harnesses* should not be modi- . No unauthorized changes should mage to or accidental inflation of fied or disconnected. Unauthor- be made to any components or the side air bag and curtain air ized electrical test equipment wiring of the pretensioner sys- bag systems. and probing devices should not tem. This is to prevent damage to . Do not make unauthorized be used on the side-impact air or accidental activation of the changes to your vehicle’s electri- bag system. pretensioners. Tampering with cal system, suspension system or the pretensioner system may re- side panel. This could affect prop- * The SRS wiring harness connectors are sult in serious personal injury. er operation of the side air bag yellow and orange for easy identifica- . tion. It is recommended you visit a and curtain air bag systems. NISSAN dealer for work on and . When selling your vehicle, we request that around the pretensioner system. Tampering with the air bag sys- you inform the buyer about the side air tem may result in serious perso- It is also recommended you visit a bag and curtain air bag systems and NISSAN dealer for installation of Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-69 electrical equipment. Unauthor- ing condition should get fresh air ized electrical test equipment promptly. and probing devices should not After pretensioner activation, load limiters be used on the pretensioner sys- allow the seat belt to release webbing (if tem. necessary) to reduce forces against the . If you need to dispose of a pre- chest. tensioner or scrap the vehicle, it is The supplemental air bag warning light recommended you visit a NISSAN is used to indicate malfunctions in dealer for this service. Correct the pretensioner system. (See “Supple- pretensioner disposal procedures mental air bag warning light” (P.1-71) for are set forth in the appropriate more details.) If the operation of the NISSAN Service Manual. Incorrect supplemental air bag warning light indi- disposal procedures could cause cates there is a malfunction, have the personal injury. system checked. It is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. SSS1016 The pretensioner system may activate When selling your vehicle, we request that SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING with the supplemental air bag system in you inform the buyer about the preten- LABELS certain types of collisions. Working with sioner system and guide the buyer to the the seat belt retractor, it helps tighten the appropriate sections in this Owner’s Man- Warning labels about the supplemental seat belt when the vehicle becomes ual. front-impact air bag system are placed in involved in certain types of collisions, the vehicle as shown in the illustration. helping to restrain front seat occupants. SRS air bag The pretensioner is encased with the seat The warning labels are located on the belt retractor and buckle anchor. These surface of the sun visors. seat belts are used the same way as conventional seat belts. When a pretensioner activates, smoke is WARNING released and a loud noise may be heard. The smoke is not harmful, and it does not Do not use a rear-facing child re- indicate a fire. Care should be taken not straint on a seat protected by an air to inhale it as it may cause irritation and bag in front of it. If the air bag choking. Those with a history of a breath- 1-70 Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system . deploys, it may cause serious injury The supplemental air bag warning or death. light remains on after approximately 7 seconds. . The supplemental air bag warning light flashes intermittently. . The supplemental air bag warning light does not come on at all. Under these conditions, the air bag and/ or pretensioner systems may not operate properly. They must be checked and repaired. It is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

SPA1097 WARNING

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING If the supplemental air bag warning LIGHT light is on, it could mean that the The supplemental air bag warning light, front air bag, side air bag, curtain air displaying in the instrument panel, bag and/or pretensioner systems monitors the circuits for the air bag will not operate in an accident. To systems, pretensioners and all related help avoid injury to yourself or wiring. others, have your vehicle checked When the ignition switch is in the ON as soon as possible. It is recom- position, the supplemental air bag warn- mended you visit a NISSAN dealer ing light illuminates for about 7 seconds for this service. and then turns off. This means the system is operational. If any of the following conditions occur, the air bag and/or pretensioner systems need servicing:

Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-71 REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT PRO- mended you visit a NISSAN dealer improper air bag deployment re- CEDURE for this service. However, the air sulting in injury or death. The front air bags, side air bags, curtain bag module and pretensioner air bags and pretensioners are designed system cannot be repaired. to activate on a one-time-only basis. As a . The front air bag, side air bag, reminder, unless it is damaged, the sup- curtain air bag and the preten- plemental air bag warning light will re- sioner should be inspected if main illuminated after inflation has there is any damage to the front occurred. These systems should be re- end or side portion of the vehicle. paired and/or replaced as soon as possi- It is recommended you visit a ble. It is recommended you visit a NISSAN NISSAN dealer for this service. dealer for this service. . If you need to dispose of a sup- When maintenance work is required on plemental air bag or pretensioner the vehicle, the front air bags, side air or scrap the vehicle, it is recom- bags, curtain air bags, pretensioners and mended you visit a NISSAN deal- related parts should be pointed out to the er. Correct supplemental air bag person conducting the maintenance. The and pretensioner system dispo- ignition switch should always be in the sal procedures are set forth in the LOCK position when working under the appropriate NISSAN Service Man- hood or inside the vehicle. ual. Incorrect disposal procedures could cause personal injury. WARNING . If there is an impact to your vehicle from any direction, your . Occupant Classification Sensor Once a front air bag, side air bag (OCS) should be checked to verify or curtain air bag has inflated, the it is still functioning correctly. It is air bag module will not function recommended that you visit a again and must be replaced. Ad- NISSAN dealer for this service. ditionally, the activated preten- The OCS should be checked even sioner must also be replaced. The if no air bags deploy as a result of air bag module and pretensioner the impact. Failure to verify prop- should be replaced. It is recom- er OCS function may result in an 1-72 Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 2 Instruments and controls

Cockpit ...... 2-3 Wiper and washer switch...... 2-33 Instrument panel ...... 2-4 Windshield wiper and washer operation ...... 2-34 Meters and gauges ...... 2-5 Rain-sensing auto wiper system Speedometer and odometer ...... 2-6 (if so equipped)...... 2-34 Tachometer ...... 2-7 Rear window wiper and Engine coolant temperature gauge ...... 2-7 washer operation ...... 2-36 Fuel gauge...... 2-8 Rear window and outside mirror defroster switch ...... 2-36 Engine oil pressure gauge ...... 2-8 Windshield deicer switch (if so equipped)...... 2-36 Voltmeter...... 2-9 Headlight and turn signal switch ...... 2-37 Meter/ring illumination and needle sweep...... 2-9 Headlight switch ...... 2-37 Warning lights, indicator lights and audible reminders ...... 2-10 Instrument brightness control ...... 2-40 Checking lights ...... 2-11 Turn signal switch ...... 2-41 Warning lights ...... 2-11 Fog light switch (if so equipped) ...... 2-41 Indicator lights ...... 2-17 Heated steering wheel (if so equipped)...... 2-42 Audible reminders ...... 2-20 Horn ...... 2-42 Vehicle information display ...... 2-20 Heated seats...... 2-43 Operational indicators ...... 2-23 Front (if so equipped)...... 2-43 Maintenance indicators ...... 2-26 Rear (if so equipped)...... 2-44 Trip computer...... 2-28 Climate controlled seats (if so equipped) ...... 2-45 Security systems ...... 2-30 Warning systems switch (if so equipped) ...... 2-46 Vehicle Security System ...... 2-30 SNOW mode switch ...... 2-46 NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System ...... 2-31 TOW mode switch ...... 2-47 Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF switch ...... 2-47 Rear door alert ...... 2-48 Map lights ...... 2-69 Turning the rear door alert system Rear personal lights ...... 2-69 ON/OFF ...... 2-48 Vanity mirror lights ...... 2-70 System operation ...... 2-49 Cargo light ...... 2-70 How to temporarily disable the rear door HomeLink® Universal Transceiver (Type A) (if alert system...... 2-49 so equipped) ...... 2-70 Power outlet ...... 2-50 Programming HomeLink® ...... 2-71 USB (Universal Serial Bus) charging Programming HomeLink® for Canadian connector ...... 2-52 customers and gate openers ...... 2-72 Storage ...... 2-53 Operating the HomeLink® Universal Cup holders ...... 2-53 Transceiver ...... 2-73 Sunglasses holder ...... 2-55 Programming troubleshooting ...... 2-73 Glove box ...... 2-56 Clearing the programmed information...... 2-73 Console box...... 2-56 Reprogramming a single HomeLink® Tray ...... 2-58 button ...... 2-73 Coat hooks...... 2-59 If your vehicle is stolen ...... 2-74 Luggage hooks ...... 2-59 HomeLink® Universal Transceiver (Type B) Cargo floor box ...... 2-60 (if so equipped) ...... 2-74 Roof rack ...... 2-60 Programming HomeLink® ...... 2-75 Rear bumper cover ...... 2-61 Using the garage door two-way communication...... 2-78 Windows...... 2-63 Programming HomeLink® for Canadian Power windows ...... 2-63 customers and gate openers ...... 2-78 Moonroof (if so equipped) ...... 2-65 Operating the HomeLink® Universal Power moonroof ...... 2-65 Transceiver ...... 2-79 Welcome light (if so equipped) ...... 2-67 Programming troubleshooting ...... 2-79 Battery saver system ...... 2-67 Clearing the programmed information...... 2-79 Interior lights ...... 2-68 Reprogramming a single Interior light switch ...... 2-68 HomeLink® button ...... 2-79 Console light ...... 2-69 If your vehicle is stolen ...... 2-80 COCKPIT

8. Wiper and washer switch 9. Steering-wheel-mounted controls (right side) — Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) system 10. Dynamic driver assistance switch (if so equipped) — Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI) system (if so equipped) — Intelligent Distance Control (I-DC) system (if so equipped) — Intelligent Blind Spot Intervention (I- BSI) system (if so equipped) 11. Shift lever 12. Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) shift switch (if so equipped)/SNOW mode switch/TOW MODE switch/Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF switch 13. Power liftgate main switch (if so equipped) 14. Warning systems switch (if so equipped) — Lane Departure Warning (LDW) (if so equipped) — Blind Spot Warning (BSW) (if so equipped) WAA0101X 15. Rear door alert switch 1. Power liftgate switch (if so equipped) — Turn signal 16. Electric tilting/telescopic steering wheel 2. Heated steering wheel switch (if so — Fog light (if so equipped) switch equipped) 6. Steering-wheel-mounted controls (left 3. Instrument brightness control switch side) 4. TRIP/RESET switch for twin trip odometer — Audio control steering switch 5. Headlight, fog light and turn signal switch — Hands-Free Phone System switch — Headlight 7. Trip computer switch

Instruments and controls 2-3 INSTRUMENT PANEL

10. Parking brake 11. Hood release handle 12. Steering wheel — Horn — Driver supplemental air bag — Power steering 13. Push-button ignition switch 14. Climate controlled seat switch (if so equipped)/Heated seat switch (if so equipped) 15. Front passenger air bag status light 16. Power outlet 17. USB connection port 18. Cup holder/Tray 19. Heater and air conditioner 20. Audio system 21. Glove box

JVC1093X

1. Side ventilator — RearView Monitor (if so equipped) 2. Meters and gauges — Navigation system (if so equipped) 3. Center ventilator 6. Hazard warning flasher switch 4. Center multi-function control panel 7. Defroster switch/Deicer switch (if so 5. Center display equipped) — Intelligent Around View Monitor (if so 8. Front passenger supplemental air bag equipped) 9. Fuse box

2-4 Instruments and controls METERS AND GAUGES

CAUTION

. For cleaning, use a soft cloth, dampened with water. Never use a rough cloth, alcohol, benzine, thinner or any kind of solvent or paper towel with a chemical cleaning agent. They will scratch or cause discoloration to the lens. . Do not spray any liquid such as water on the meter lens. Spraying liquid may cause the system to malfunction.

SIC4368

1. Tachometer* 7. Engine oil pressure gauge* 2. Warning and indicator lights 8. Fuel gauge* 3. Speedometer* *: The needle indicators may move 4. Engine coolant temperature gauge* slightly after the ignition switch is 5. Voltmeter* placed in the OFF position. This is not 6. Vehicle information display/Odometer/ a malfunction. twin trip odometer

Instruments and controls 2-5 Resetting the trip odometer: Pushing the TRIP RESET switch for more than 1 second resets the trip odometer to zero. Average fuel economy and distance to empty information is also available. (See “Vehicle information display” (P.2-20).)

SIC4369 JVI0543X Speedometer Odometer/twin trip odometer SPEEDOMETER AND ODOMETER Odometer/twin trip odometer Speedometer The odometer and twin trip odometer are displayed on the vehicle informa- The speedometer indicates vehicle speed tion display when the ignition switch is in in miles per hour (MPH) and kilometers the ON position. per hour (km/h). The odometer records the total distance the vehicle has been driven. The twin trip odometer records the distance of individual trips. Changing the display: Pushing the TRIP RESET switch at the bottom left of the combination meter panel changes the display as follows: TRIP A ? TRIP B ? TRIP A

2-6 Instruments and controls CAUTION

If the gauge indicates engine coolant temperature near the hot (H) end of the normal range, reduce vehicle speed to decrease temperature. If gauge is over the normal range, stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible. If the engine is overheated, continued operation of the vehicle may seriously damage the engine. See “If your vehicle overheats” (P.6- 14) for immediate action required. SIC4371 SIC4372 TACHOMETER ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE The tachometer indicates engine speed in GAUGE revolutions per minute (RPM). Do not rev The gauge indicates the engine coolant the engine into the red zone . temperature. The engine coolant temperature is within CAUTION the normal range when the gauge needle points within the zone shown in the illustration. When engine speed approaches the red zone, shift to a higher gear or The engine coolant temperature varies reduce engine speed. Operating the with the outside air temperature and engine in the red zone may cause driving conditions. serious engine damage.

Instruments and controls 2-7 reaches “0”. There will be a small reserve of fuel in the tank when the fuel gauge needle reaches “0”. The indicates that the fuel-filler door is located on the driver’s side of the vehicle.

CAUTION

. If the vehicle runs out of fuel, the malfunction indicator light (MIL) may come on. Refuel as soon as possible. After a few SIC4374 driving trips, the light should SIC4375 turn off. If the light remains on FUEL GAUGE after a few driving trips, have the ENGINE OIL PRESSURE GAUGE The gauge indicates the approximate vehicle inspected. It is recom- The gauge indicates the engine lubrica- fuel level in the tank. mended you visit a NISSAN dealer tion system oil pressure while the engine The gauge may move slightly during for this service. is running. When the engine speed is high, braking, turning, acceleration, or going . For additional information, see the engine oil pressure is also high. When up or down hills. “Malfunction Indicator Light it is low, the gauge indicates the low (L) oil pressure. The gauge needle returns to 0 (Empty) (MIL)” (P.2-18). after the ignition switch is placed in the The engine oil pressure is normal when OFF position. the gauge needle points within the zone shown in the illustration. Refill the fuel tank before the gauge registers “0” (Empty). The low fuel warning appears on the CAUTION vehicle information display when the fuel tank is getting low. Refuel as soon as it is . This gauge is not designed to convenient, preferably before the gauge indicate low engine oil level. Use

2-8 Instruments and controls the dipstick to check the oil level. METER/RING ILLUMINATION AND (See “Engine oil” (P.8-6).) NEEDLE SWEEP . If the gauge needle does not The ring illumination surrounding meters move with the proper amount of and gauges illuminates when the driver’s engine oil, have the vehicle door is closed after getting into the checked. It is recommended you vehicle with the Intelligent Key carried in. visit a NISSAN dealer for this When the engine is started, the indicator service. Continued vehicle opera- needles will sweep in the speedometer tion in such a condition could and tachometer and the ring illumination cause serious damage to the en- will be brightened gradually. This function gine. can be turned off. (See “Trip computer” (P.2-28).)

SIC4376 VOLTMETER When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, the volt meter indicates the battery voltage. When the engine is running, it indicates the generator voltage. While cranking the engine, the volt drop below the normal range. If the needle is not in the normal range (10.5 to 15.5 volt) while the engine is running, it may indicate that the charging system is not functioning properly. Have the system checked. It is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Instruments and controls 2-9 WARNING LIGHTS, INDICATOR LIGHTS AND AUDIBLE REMINDERS

Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) warning light Exterior light indicator Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warn- (4WD models) ing light Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) system Front fog light indicator light (if so warning light (orange) equipped) Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) Intelligent Key warning light Front passenger air bag status light system warning light Automatic transmission check warn- Lane Departure Warning (LDW) indica- High beam indicator light ing light tor light (orange; if so equipped) Automatic Transmission (AT) oil tem- Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI) ON Low tire pressure warning light perature warning light indicator light (green; if so equipped) Automatic Transmission (AT) park Master warning light Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) warning light Blind Spot Warning (BSW)/Intelligent Blind Spot Intervention (I-BSI) system Seat belt warning light Security indicator light warning light (orange; if so equipped) Supplemental air bag warning light SNOW mode indicator light Brake warning light Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) warn- TOW mode indicator light ing light Automatic transmission position indi- Charge warning light Turn signal/hazard indicator lights cator light Intelligent Distance Control (I-DC) Intelligent Blind Spot Intervention (I- Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off system warning light (orange; if so BSI) ON indicator light (green; if so indicator light equipped) equipped) Engine oil pressure warning light Check suspension indicator light

2-10 Instruments and controls CHECKING LIGHTS WARNING LIGHTS system is ON, it may indicate that the With all doors closed, apply the parking system is unavailable. See “Automatic brake, fasten the seat belts and place the or Anti-lock Braking Sys- Emergency Braking (AEB)” (P.5-98) for more details. ignition switch in the ON position without tem (ABS) warning light starting the engine. The following lights (if When the ignition switch is in the ON so equipped) will come on: Automatic Transmission (AT) position, the Anti-lock Braking System , or , , , , , (ABS) warning light illuminates and then check warning light The following lights (if so equipped) will turns off. This indicates the ABS is opera- When the ignition switch is placed in the come on briefly and then go off: tional. ON position, the light comes on for 2 seconds. If the light comes on at any , or , , , , , , If the ABS warning light illuminates while the engine is running, or while driving, it other time, it may indicate the transmis- , , sion is not functioning properly. It is If any light does not come on or operates may indicate the ABS is not functioning properly. Have the system checked. It is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer in a way other than described, it may to check and repair the transmission. indicate a burned-out bulb and/or a recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. system malfunction. It is recommended Automatic Transmission (AT) you have the system checked by a If an ABS malfunction occurs, the anti- NISSAN dealer. lock function is turned off. The brake oil temperature warning light Some indicators and warnings are also system then operates normally, but with- This light illuminates when the Automatic displayed on the vehicle information dis- out anti-lock assistance. (See “Brake sys- Transmission (AT) oil temperature is too play between the speedometer and tach- tem” (P.5-130).) high. If the light illuminates while driving, ometer. (See “Vehicle information display” reduce the vehicle speed as soon as (P.2-20).) Automatic Emergency Braking safely possible until the light turns off. (AEB) system warning light This light comes on when the ignition CAUTION switch is placed in the ON position. It turns off after the engine is started. Continued vehicle operation when This light illuminates when the Automatic the AT oil temperature warning light Emergency Braking (AEB) system is set to is on may damage the AT. OFF on the center display. If the light illuminates when the AEB Instruments and controls 2-11 and I-BSI systems are not functioning recommended you have this service Automatic Transmission (AT) properly. Although the vehicle is still performed by a NISSAN dealer. park warning light (4WD models) driveable, have the systems checked. It Low hydraulic pressure warning indica- is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer This light indicates that the Automatic tor: Transmission (AT) parking function is not for this service. See “Blind Spot Warning engaged. If the transfer control is not (BSW)” (P.5-32) and “Intelligent Blind Spot If the brake warning light illuminates secured in any driving position while the Intervention (I-BSI)” (P.5-40). when the engine is running, or while AT shift lever is in the “P” (Park) position, driving with the parking brake is released, the transmission will disengage and the or Brake warning light check the brake fluid level. If the brake wheels will not lock. fluid level is sufficient, it may indicate low This light functions for both the parking hydraulic pressure in the brake booster. It If the AT park warning light illuminates brake and the foot brake systems. is recommended that you have the brake with the shift lever in the P (Park) Parking brake indicator: system checked by a NISSAN dealer position, shift the Four-Wheel Drive promptly. (4WD) shift switch to the AUTO, 4H or When the ignition switch is in the ON 4L position again with the shift lever in position, the light comes on when the Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning the N (Neutral) position. (See “NISSAN all- parking brake is applied. indicator: mode 4WD®” (P.5-116).) Low brake fluid warning light: When the parking brake is released and When the ignition switch is in the ON the brake fluid level is sufficient, if both Blind Spot Warning (BSW)/ position, the light warns of a low brake the brake warning light and the Anti-lock Intelligent Blind Spot Intervention fluid level. If the light comes on while the Braking System (ABS) warning light illu- (I-BSI) system warning light (or- engine is running with the parking brake minate, it may indicate the ABS is not functioning properly. Have the brake ange; if so equipped) not applied, stop the vehicle and perform the following: system checked, and if necessary re- When the ignition switch is placed in the paired. It is recommended you visit a ON position, the indicator light will first 1. Check the brake fluid level. If brake NISSAN dealer for this service. (See “Anti- illuminate in orange and turn green fluid is low, add fluid and have the lock Braking System (ABS) warning light” before turning off. This indicates that system checked. It is recommended (P.2-11).) the Blind Spot Warning (BSW) and Intelli- you have this service performed by a gent Blind Spot Intervention (I-BSI) sys- NISSAN dealer. (See “Brake fluid” (P.8- tems are operational. 9).) If the light comes on in orange and 2. If the brake fluid level is correct, have remains on, it may indicate that the BSW the warning system checked. It is 2-12 Instruments and controls indicate that the system is malfunction- WARNING Charge warning light ing. Although the vehicle is still drive- If the light comes on while the engine is able under normal conditions, have the . Your brake system may not be running, it may indicate the charging vehicle checked. It is recommended you working properly if the warning system is not functioning properly. Turn visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. light is on. Driving could be dan- the engine off and check the alternator See “Intelligent Distance Control (I-DC)” gerous. If you judge it to be safe, belt. If the belt is loose, broken, missing or (P.5-85). drive carefully to the nearest if the light remains on, have your vehicle service station for repairs. Other- serviced immediately. It is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. Engine oil pressure warning wise, have your vehicle towed light because driving it could be dan- This light warns of low engine oil pres- gerous. CAUTION . sure. If the light flickers or comes on Pressing the brake pedal with the during normal driving, pull off the road in engine stopped and/or low brake Do not continue driving if the alter- a safe area, stop the engine immediately fluid level may increase your nator belt is loose, broken or miss- and call a NISSAN dealer or other author- stopping distance and braking ing. ized repair shop. will require greater pedal effort as well as pedal travel. The engine oil pressure warning light is . not designed to indicate a low oil level. If the brake fluid level is below the Intelligent Distance Control (I- Use the dipstick to check the oil level. minimum or MIN mark on the (See “Engine oil” (P.8-6).) brake fluid reservoir, do not drive DC) system warning light (orange; if until the brake system has been so equipped) checked. It is recommended you This light comes on if there is a malfunc- CAUTION visit a NISSAN dealer for this tion in the Intelligent Distance Control (I- service. DC) system. Running the engine with the engine If the warning light illuminates, park the oil pressure warning light on could vehicle in a safe place. Turn the engine off, cause serious damage to the engine restart the engine, resume driving and almost immediately. Such damage is turn on the I-DC system again. not covered by warranty. Turn off the If it is not possible to turn on the system engine as soon as it is safe to do so. or the warning light stays on, it may

Instruments and controls 2-13 Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) warn- sion shift lever to the N (Neu- Intelligent Key warning light tral) position and shift the ing light (4WD models) 4WD shift switch to AUTO After the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, this light comes on for about The warning light comes on when the . ignition switch is placed in the ON posi- If the warning light is still on after 2 seconds and then turns off. the above operations, have your tion. It turns off soon after the engine is This light warns of a malfunction with the started. vehicle checked as soon as possible. It is recommended you visit Intelligent Key system. If the 4WD system malfunctions, or the a NISSAN dealer for this service. If the light comes on while the engine is diameter of the front and the rear wheels stopped, it may be impossible to start the are different, the warning light will either engine. If the light comes on while the remain illuminated or blink. (See “NISSAN Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) engine is running, you can drive the all-mode 4WD®” (P.5-116).) vehicle. However in these cases, have system warning light (orange) the system checked as soon as possible. This light comes on if there is a malfunc- It is recommended you visit a NISSAN CAUTION tion in the Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) dealer for this service. system. . If the warning light comes on If the warning light comes on, park the Lane Departure Warning (LDW) while driving there may be a vehicle in a safe place. Turn the engine off, indicator light (orange; if so malfunction in the 4WD system. restart the engine, resume driving and set Reduce the vehicle speed and the ICC system again. equipped) have your vehicle checked as If it is not possible to set the system or When the ignition switch is placed in the soon as possible. It is recom- the indicator stays on, it may indicate ON position, the light will come on in mended you visit a NISSAN dealer that the system is malfunctioning. orange, turn green, and then turn off. This for this service. Although the vehicle is still driveable indicates that the Lane Departure Warn- . If the 4WD warning light turns on under normal conditions, have the ve- ing (LDW) and Intelligent Lane Interven- when driving on dry or hard hicle checked. It is recommended you tion (I-LI) systems are operational. surfaced roads: visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. While the LDW and/or I-LI system is on, — in the 4H(I) position, shift the the light will blink in orange and a 4WD shift switch to AUTO warning chime will sound if the vehicle is traveling close to either the left or the — in the 4L(O) position, stop the right of a traveling lane with detectable vehicle and shift the transmis- lane markers. 2-14 Instruments and controls If the light comes on in orange and The tire pressure for each tire will also tion. The light will remain on after 1 remains on, it may indicate that the LDW be displayed. minute. Have the system checked. It is and I-LI systems are not functioning When the low tire pressure warning light recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer properly. Although the vehicle is still illuminates, you should stop and adjust for this service. The CHECK TIRE PRES- driveable, have the systems checked. It the tire pressure to the recommended SURE warning does not appear if the low is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire and tire pressure warning light illuminates to for this service. Loading Information label. The low tire indicate a TPMS malfunction. See “Lane Departure Warning (LDW)/In- pressure warning light does not automa- For additional information, see “Tire Pres- telligent Lane Intervention (I-LI)” (P.5-23). tically turn off when the tire pressure is sure Monitoring System (TPMS)” (P.5-5). adjusted. After the tire is inflated to the Low tire pressure warning recommended pressure, the vehicle must be driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25 WARNING light km/h) to activate the TPMS and turn off Your vehicle is equipped with a Tire the low tire pressure warning light. Use a . If the light does not illuminate Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) that tire pressure gauge to check the tire with the ignition switch placed in monitors the tire pressure of all tires pressure. the ON position, have the vehicle except the spare. The CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning ap- checked as soon as possible. It is The low tire pressure warning light warns pears each time the ignition switch is recommended you visit a NISSAN of low tire pressure or indicates that the placed in the ON position as long as the dealer for this service. TPMS is not functioning properly. low tire pressure warning light remains . If the light illuminates or Low After the ignition switch is placed in the illuminated. Pressure information is displayed ON position, this light illuminates for For additional information, see “Vehicle on the monitor screen while driv- about 1 second and turns off. information display” (P.2-20), “Tire Pres- ing, avoid sudden steering maneuvers or abrupt braking, reduce Low tire pressure warning: sure Monitoring System (TPMS)” (P.5-5) and “Tire Pressure Monitoring System vehicle speed, pull off the road to If the vehicle is being driven with low tire (TPMS) ” (P.6-3). a safe location and stop the pressure, the warning light will illuminate. vehicle as soon as possible. Driv- A CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning also TPMS malfunction: ing with under-inflated tires may appears in the vehicle information dis- If the TPMS is not functioning properly, permanently damage the tires play. If you select the tire pressure in- the low tire pressure warning light will and increase the likelihood of tire formation in the center display, the Low flash for approximately 1 minute when the failure. Serious vehicle damage Pressure information will be displayed. ignition switch is placed in the ON posi- could occur and may lead to an

Instruments and controls 2-15 . accident and could result in ser- . Replacing tires with those not Parking brake release warning ious personal injury. Check the originally specified by NISSAN . Door/liftgate open warning tire pressure for all four tires. could affect the proper operation . Front radar obstruction warning Adjust the tire pressure to the of the TPMS. . Headlight warning recommended COLD tire pressure . Loose fuel cap warning shown on the Tire and Loading . Check tire pressure warning Information label to turn the low . tire pressure warning light OFF. If CAUTION Intelligent Back-up Intervention (I-BI) the light still illuminates while not available warning (if so equipped) . driving after adjusting the tire . The TPMS is not a substitute for Intelligent Back-up Intervention (I-BI) pressure, a tire may be flat or the regular tire pressure check. malfunction warning (if so equipped) the TPMS may be malfunctioning. Be sure to check the tire pressure . Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) If you have a flat tire, replace it regularly. system warning with a spare tire as soon as . If the vehicle is being driven at . Extended storage fuse warning (if so possible. If no tire is flat and all speeds of less than 16 MPH (25 equipped) tires are properly inflated, it is km/h), the TPMS may not operate See “Vehicle information display” (P.2-20). recommended you consult a correctly. NISSAN dealer. . Be sure to install the specified Seat belt warning light and . Since the spare tire is not size of tires to the four wheels chime equipped with the TPMS, when a correctly. spare tire is mounted or a wheel The light and chime remind you to fasten is replaced, the TPMS will not seat belts. The light illuminates whenever the ignition switch is placed in the ON function and the low tire pressure Master warning light warning light will flash for ap- position, and will remain illuminated until proximately 1 minute. The light When the ignition switch is in the ON the driver’s seat belt is fastened. At the will remain on after 1 minute. position, the master warning light illumi- same time, the chime will sound for about Have your tires replaced and/or nates if any of the following are displayed 6 seconds unless the driver’s seat belt is TPMS system reset as soon as on the vehicle information display: securely fastened. possible. It is recommended you . No key warning The seat belt warning light for the front visit a NISSAN dealer for these . Low fuel warning passenger will illuminate if the seat belt is services. . Low washer fluid warning not fastened when the front passenger’s seat is occupied. For approximately 5

2-16 Instruments and controls seconds after the ignition switch is placed tion properly. light alerts the driver to the fact that the in the ON position, the system does not For additional information, see “Supple- VDC system’s fail-safe mode is operating, activate the warning light for the front mental restraint system” (P.1-54). for example the VDC or hill start assist passenger. system may not be functioning properly. See “Seat belts” (P.1-20) for precautions on Have the system checked. It is recom- seat belt usage. WARNING mended you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. If a malfunction occurs in the system, the VDC system function will be Supplemental air bag warning If the supplemental air bag warning light is on, it could mean that the canceled but the vehicle is still driveable. light front air bag, side air bag, curtain air For additional information, see “Vehicle After placing the ignition switch in the ON bag systems and/or pretensioner Dynamic Control (VDC) system” (P.5-133). position, the supplemental air bag warn- systems will not operate in an acci- INDICATOR LIGHTS ing light will illuminate. The supplemental dent. To help avoid injury to yourself air bag warning light will turn off after or others, have your vehicle checked. Automatic Transmission (AT) about 7 seconds if the air bag and/or It is recommended you visit a NISSAN pretensioner systems are operational. dealer for this service. position indicator light If any of the following conditions occur, When the ignition switch is placed in the the air bag and/or pretensioner systems ON position, the indicator shows the shift needs servicing. Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) lever position. . The supplemental air bag warning warning light In the manual shift mode, when the transmission does not shift to the se- light remains on after approximately When the ignition switch is in the ON lected gear due to a transmission protec- 7 seconds. position, the Vehicle Dynamic Control tion mode, the AT position indicator light . The supplemental air bag warning (VDC) warning light illuminates and then will blink and a buzzer will sound. light flashes intermittently. turns off. . See “Automatic transmission” (P.5-18) for The supplemental air bag warning The light will blink when the VDC system further details. light does not come on at all. or the traction control system is operat- It is recommended you visit a NISSAN ing, thus alerting the driver that the dealer for these services. vehicle is nearing its traction limits. The Unless checked and repaired, the supple- road surface may be slippery. mental restraint system (air bag system) When the VDC warning light illuminates and/or the pretensioners may not func- when the VDC system is turned on, this

Instruments and controls 2-17 lights are turned off. Intelligent Blind Spot Inter- Intelligent Lane Intervention (I- vention (I-BSI) ON indicator light Front fog light indicator light LI) ON indicator light (green; if so (green; if so equipped) (if so equipped) equipped) The light comes on in green when the The front fog light indicator light illumi- The light comes on in green when the Intelligent Blind Spot Intervention (I-BSI) nates when the front fog lights are on. Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI) system system is turned on. The light turns off (See “Fog light switch” (P.2-41).) is turned on. The light turns off when the when the system is turned off. system is turned off. NOTE: Front passenger air bag sta- NOTE: This light is common with the BSW/I-BSI tus light This light is common with the Lane system warning light (orange). (See Departure Warning (LDW) indicator light “Blind Spot Warning (BSW)/Intelligent The front passenger air bag status light (orange). (See “Lane Departure Warning Blind Spot Intervention (I-BSI) system ( ) located on the instrument panel will (LDW) indicator light” (P.2-14).) warning light” (P.2-12).) be lit and the passenger front air bag will be OFF depending on how the front For more details, see “Lane Departure For more details, see “Intelligent Blind passenger seat is being used. Warning (LDW)/Intelligent Lane Interven- Spot Intervention (I-BSI)” (P.5-40). tion (I-LI)” (P.5-23). For front passenger air bag status light operation, see “NISSAN Advanced Air Bag Check suspension indicator System (front seats)” (P.1-60). Malfunction Indicator Light light (MIL) When the ignition switch is placed in the High beam indicator light If the malfunction indicator light comes ON position, the light comes on for 2 This light comes on when the headlight on steady or blinks while the engine is seconds. high beam is on and goes out when the running, it may indicate a potential emis- low beam is selected. sion control malfunction. Exterior light indicator The malfunction indicator light may also This indicator illuminates when the head- come on steady if the fuel-filler cap is light switch is turned to the AUTO, or loose or missing, or if the vehicle runs out position and the front parking lights, of fuel. Check to make sure the fuel-filler instrument panel lights, rear combination cap is installed and closed tightly, and lights, license plate lights or headlights that the vehicle has at least 3 US gallons are on. The indicator turns off when these (14 liters) of fuel in the fuel tank.

2-18 Instruments and controls After a few driving trips, the light . Malfunction indicator light blinking — should turn off if no other potential An engine misfire has been detected Security indicator light emission control system malfunction ex- which may damage the emission The light blinks when the ignition switch ists. control system. is in the ACC, OFF and LOCK position. This If this indicator light remains on for 20 To reduce or avoid emission control function indicates the security system seconds and then blinks for 10 seconds system damage: equipped on the vehicle is operational. when the engine is not running, it indi- 1) Do not drive at speeds above 45 If the security system is malfunctioning, cates that the vehicle is not ready for an MPH (72 km/h). this light will remain on while the ignition emission control system inspection/ 2) Avoid hard acceleration or decel- switch is in the ON position. For additional maintenance test. (See “Readiness for eration. information, see “Security systems” (P.2- Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test” (P.10- 3) Avoid steep uphill grades. 30). 32).) 4) If possible, reduce the amount of Operation: cargo being hauled or towed. SNOW mode indicator light The malfunction indicator light will come The malfunction indicator light may When selecting SNOW mode while the on in one of two ways: stop blinking and remain on. engine is running, this light will illuminate. . Malfunction indicator light on steady Have the vehicle inspected. It is re- (See “SNOW mode” (P.5-127).) — An emission control system mal- commended you visit a NISSAN dealer function has been detected. Check for this service. You do not need to TOW mode indicator light have your vehicle towed to the dealer. the fuel-filler cap if the LOOSE FUEL This light will illuminate when the TOW CAP warning appears in the vehicle MODE is selected while the engine is information display. If the fuel-filler running. (See “TOW mode” (P.5-126).) cap is loose or missing, tighten or CAUTION install the cap and continue to drive the vehicle. The light should turn Continued vehicle operation without Turn signal/hazard indicator off after a few driving trips. If the having the emission control system lights light does not turn off after a few checked and repaired as necessary The light flashes when the turn signal driving trips, have the vehicle in- could lead to poor driveability, re- switch lever or hazard switch is turned on. spected. It is recommended you visit duced fuel economy, and possible a NISSAN dealer for this service. You damage to the emission control sys- do not need to have your vehicle tem. towed to the dealer.

Instruments and controls 2-19 VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY

Light reminder chime Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) A chime will sound when the driver side off indicator light door is opened with the light switch in the When the ignition switch is in the ON or position and the ignition position, the Vehicle Dynamic Control switch in the ACC, OFF or LOCK position. (VDC) off indicator light illuminates and Turn the light switch off when you leave then turns off. the vehicle. The light comes on when the VDC off switch is pushed to OFF. This indicates Parking brake reminder chime that the VDC system is not operating. The chime will sound if the vehicle is When the 4L position is selected with the driven at more than 4 MPH (7 km/h) with Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) shift switch, the the parking brake applied. Stop the vehi- VDC system is disabled and the VDC off cle and release the parking brake. indicator light illuminates. (4WD models) Brake pad wear warning SIC4379 For additional information, see “Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system” (P.5-133). The disc brake pads have audible wear The vehicle information display located warnings. When a brake pad requires between the speedometer and odometer, AUDIBLE REMINDERS replacement, it will make a high pitched and shows the indicators for the driving Key reminder chime scraping sound when the vehicle is in systems, Intelligent Key operation and motion. This scraping sound will first various warnings and information. A chime will sound if the driver side door occur only when the brake pedal is is opened while the ignition switch is For detailed information about each sys- depressed. After more wear of the brake tem, see the following sections: placed in the ACC position. Make sure pad, the sound will always be heard even . the ignition switch is placed in the OFF if the brake pedal is not depressed. Have Automatic Transmission (AT) position, and take the Intelligent Key with the brakes checked as soon as possible if — “Warning lights, indicator lights and you when leaving the vehicle. the warning sound is heard. audible reminders” (P.2-10). — “Driving the vehicle” (P.5-17). . Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) — “NISSAN all-mode 4WD®” (P.5-116). . Intelligent Back-up Intervention (I-BI)

2-20 Instruments and controls — “Intelligent Back-up Intervention (I- BI)” (P.5-53). . Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) — “Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)” (P.5-63). . Intelligent Distance Control (I-DC) — “Intelligent Distance Control (I-DC)” (P.5-85). . Intelligent Key system — “Intelligent Key system” (P.3-7). — “Push-button ignition switch” (P.5- 13). . Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) — “Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB)” (P.5-98). . Intelligent Forward Collision Warning (I-FCW) — “Intelligent Forward Collision Warn- ing (I-FCW)” (P.5-106).

Instruments and controls 2-21 JVI1894X

2-22 Instruments and controls OPERATIONAL INDICATORS 3. SHIFT “P” warning 5. Intelligent Key battery discharge 1. Engine start operation indicator This warning appears when the ignition indicator switch is pushed to stop the engine with This indicator appears when the Intelli- This indicator appears when the shift the shift lever in any position except the P gent Key battery is running out of power. lever is in the P (Park) position. (Park) position. If this indicator appears, replace the This indicator means that the engine will If this warning appears, move the shift battery with a new one. (See “Intelligent start by pushing the ignition switch with lever to the P (Park) position or push the Key battery replacement” (P.8-21).) the brake pedal depressed. ignition switch to the ON position. 6. Engine start operation for Intelli- 2. NO KEY warning An inside warning chime will also sound. gent Key system indicator This warning appears in either of the (See “Intelligent Key system” (P.3-7).) following conditions. This indicator appears when the Intelli- 4. “PUSH” warning gent Key battery is running out of power No key inside the vehicle: This warning appears when the shift lever and when the Intelligent Key System and The warning appears when the door is is moved to the P (Park) position with the vehicle are not communicating normally. closed with the Intelligent Key left outside ignition switch in the ACC position after If this indicator appears, touch the igni- the vehicle and the ignition switch in the the SHIFT “P” warning appears. tion switch with the Intelligent Key while ACC or ON position. Make sure that the To push the ignition switch to the OFF depressing the brake pedal. (See “Intelli- Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle. position, perform the following proce- gent Key battery discharge” (P.5-15).) Unregistered Intelligent Key: dure: ? 7. Remote engine start indicator (if The warning appears when the ignition SHIFT “P” warning (Move the shift lever ? ? so equipped) switch is pushed from the LOCK position to “P”) PUSH warning (Push the ? and the Intelligent Key cannot be recog- ignition switch ignition switch position This indicator appears when the engine ? ? nized by the system. You cannot start the is turned to ON) PUSH warning has been started using the remote engine ? engine with an unregistered key. Use the (Push the ignition switch ignition start function. To start the vehicle, de- registered Intelligent Key. switch position is turned to OFF) press the brake pedal and place the ignition switch in the ON position. See “Intelligent Key system” (P.3-7) for more details. For more details, see “Remote engine start” (P.3-19).

Instruments and controls 2-23 8. Parking brake release warning 12. Loose fuel cap warning 15. Intelligent Back-up Intervention This warning appears when the vehicle This warning appears when the fuel-filler (I-BI) not available warning (if so speed is above 4 MPH (7 km/h) and the cap is not tightened correctly after the equipped) parking brake is applied. vehicle has been refueled. (See “Fuel-filler This warning appears when the Intelli- cap” (P.3-27).) 9. Low fuel warning gent Back-up Intervention (I-BI) system is temporarily not available. This warning appears when the fuel level 13. Check tire pressure warning in the tank is getting low. Refuel as soon This warning appears when the low tire For more details, see “Intelligent Back-up as it is convenient, preferably before the pressure warning light in the meter Intervention (I-BI)” (P.5-53). fuel gauge reaches the 0 (Empty) position. illuminates and low tire pressure is de- 16. Intelligent Back-up Intervention There is a small reserve of fuel remain- tected. The warning appears each time the ignition switch is placed in the ON (I-BI) malfunction warning (if so ing in the tank when the fuel gauge equipped) reaches the 0 (Empty) position. position as long as the low tire pressure warning light remains illuminated. If this This warning appears when the Intelli- 10. Low washer fluid warning warning appears, stop the vehicle and gent Back-up Intervention (I-BI) system is This warning appears when the washer adjust the tire pressure to the recom- not functioning properly. tank fluid is at a low level. Add washer mended COLD tire pressure shown on the For more details, see “Intelligent Back-up fluid as necessary. (See “Window washer Tire and Loading Information label. (See Intervention (I-BI)” (P.5-53). fluid” (P.8-10).) “Low tire pressure warning light” (P.2-15) and “Tire Pressure Monitoring System 17. Headlight warning 11. Door/liftgate open warning (TPMS)” (P.5-5).) This warning appears if the LED head- (ignition switch is in the ON posi- 14. Extended storage fuse warning lights are malfunctioning. It is recommended you have the system checked tion) (if so equipped) This warning appears if any of the doors by a NISSAN dealer. This warning may appear if the extended and/or the liftgate are open or not closed storage fuse switch is not pushed in 18. Front radar obstruction warning securely. The vehicle icon indicates which (switched on). When this warning ap- door or the liftgate is open on the display. This warning appears when the sensor pears, push in (switch on) the extended area of the front bumper is covered with storage fuse switch to turn off the warn- dirt or is obstructed, making it impossible ing. For more information, see “Extended to detect a vehicle ahead. storage fuse switch” (P.8-21). The following systems will be automatically canceled. 2-24 Instruments and controls . Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) system 21. Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) shift While the indicator is displayed, the I-DC . Intelligent Distance Control (I-DC) sys- indicator (4WD models) system is operational. (See “Intelligent tem (if so equipped) Distance Control (I-DC)” (P.5-85).) This indicator shows the Four-Wheel . Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) Drive (4WD) driving mode (AUTO, 4HI or 24. Intelligent Back-up Intervention system 4LO) that is selected by the 4WD shift (I-BI) system indicator (if so . Intelligent Forward Collision Warning switch. (See “NISSAN all-mode 4WD®” (P.5- equipped) (I-FCW) system 116).) For more details, see “Intelligent Cruise The I-BI ON indicator (SYSTEM ON) ap- Control (ICC)” (P.5-63), “Intelligent Distance 22. Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) pears when the shift lever is in the R Control (I-DC)” (P.5-85), “Automatic Emer- system MAIN switch indicator (Reverse) position with the Intelligent gency Braking (AEB)” (P.5-98) or “Intelli- The Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) sys- Back-up Intervention (I-BI) system turned gent Forward Collision Warning (I-FCW)” tem main switch indicator (CRUISE) is on. (P.5-106). displayed when the ICC main switch is If the I-BI system is turned off, the I-BI OFF indicator (SYSTEM OFF) appears. 19. “TIMER” indicator pushed. When the main switch is pushed again, the indicator disappears. While the For more details, see “Intelligent Back-up This indicator appears when the set CRUISE indicator is displayed, the ICC Intervention (I-BI)” (P.5-53). “TIMER” indicator activates. You can set system is operational. the time for up to 6 hours. (See “Trip The cruise control set indicator (SET) is 25. Rear door alert is activated computer” (P.2-28).) displayed while the vehicle is controlled When the rear door alert system is 20. Low outside temperature by the conventional (fixed speed) cruise enabled, this message appears when the control mode of the ICC system. rear door alert system is active and can warning remind the driver to check the rear seat. This warning appears if the outside tem- For more details, see “Intelligent Cruise NOTE: perature is below 37°F (3°C). The warning Control (ICC)” (P.5-63). can be set not to be displayed. (See “Trip 23. Intelligent Distance Control (I- This system is disabled until a driver computer” (P.2-28).) enables it using the rear door alert DC) system switch indicator (if so switch. equipped) For more details, see “Rear door alert” The indicator is displayed when the (P.2-48). Intelligent Distance Control (I-DC) system switch is pushed on. When the switch is pushed again, the indicator disappears.

Instruments and controls 2-25 26. Check back seat for all articles MAINTENANCE INDICATORS When the rear door alert system is 1. Engine oil replacement indicator enabled, this message appears when the vehicle comes to a complete stop, the This indicator appears when the custo- shift lever is moved from the D (Drive) or R mer set time comes for changing the (Reverse) position to P (Park) position, and engine oil. You can set or reset the the driver exits the vehicle. This message distance for changing the engine oil. alerts the driver, after a period of time, to (See “Trip computer” (P.2-28).) check for items in the rear seat after the 2. Oil filter replacement indicator audible alert has been provided. This indicator appears when the custo- NOTE: mer set time comes for replacing the oil This rear door alert system is disabled filter. You can set or reset the distance for until a driver enables it using the rear replacing the oil filter. (See “Trip compu- door alert switch. ter” (P.2-28).) For more details, see “Rear door alert” (P.2-48). 3. Tire replacement indicator This indicator appears when the customer set distance comes for replacing tires. You can set or reset the distance for replacing tires. (See “Trip computer” (P.2-28).)

WARNING

The tire replacement indicator is not a substitute for regular tire checks, including tire pressure checks. See SIC4325 “Changing wheels and tires” (P.8-37). Many factors including tire inflation, alignment, driving habits and road conditions affect tire wear and when 2-26 Instruments and controls tires should be replaced. Setting the tire replacement indicator for a certain driving distance does not mean your tires will last that long. Use the tire replacement indicator as a guide only and always perform regular tire checks. Failure to perform regular tire checks, including tire pressure checks could result in tire failure. Serious vehicle damage could occur and may lead to a collision, which could result in serious personal injury or death.

4. “OTHER” indicator This indicator appears when the customer set time comes for replacing items other than the engine oil, oil filter and tires. You can set or reset the distance for replacing the items. (See “Trip computer” (P.2-28).) More maintenance reminders are also available on the center display. (See NissanConnect® Owner’s Manual.)

SIC4494

Instruments and controls 2-27 consumption and speed ? Elapsed time The display is updated every 30 seconds. and trip odometer ? Distance to empty The first 30 seconds after a reset, the (dte) ? Outside air temperature (ICY) ? display shows “——”. Setting ? Warning check 3. Elapsed time and trip odometer 1. Current and average fuel con- (MILES or km) sumption Elapsed time: The current and average fuel consump- The elapsed time mode shows the time tion mode shows the current and aver- since the last reset. The displayed time age fuel consumption. can be reset by pushing the switch 2. Average fuel consumption (MPG for longer than 1 second. (The trip od- or l (liter)/100 km) and speed (MPH ometer is also reset at the same time.) or km/h) Trip odometer: SIC4420 Fuel consumption: The trip odometer mode shows the total distance the vehicle has been driven since TRIP COMPUTER The average fuel consumption mode the last reset. Resetting is done by push- Switches for the trip computer are lo- shows the average fuel consumption ing the switch for longer than 1 cated on the right side of the combina- since the last reset. Resetting is done by second. (The elapsed time is also reset at tion meter panel. To operate the trip pushing the switch for longer than the same time.) computer, push the switches as shown 1 second. (The average speed is also reset above. at the same time.) 4. Distance to empty (dte — MILES switch The display is updated every 30 seconds. or km) At about the first 1/3 mile (500 m) after a switch The distance to empty (dte) mode pro- reset, the display shows “——”. vides you with an estimation of the When the ignition switch is pushed to the Speed: distance that can be driven before refuel- ON position, modes of the trip computer ing. The dte is constantly being calcu- The average speed mode shows the can be selected by pushing the lated, based on the amount of fuel in the average vehicle speed since the last reset. switch . fuel tank and the actual fuel consump- Resetting is done by pushing the Each time the switch is pushed, the tion. display will change as follows: switch for longer than 1 second. (The average fuel consumption is also reset at The display is updated every 30 seconds. ? Current fuel consumption Average fuel the same time.) The dte mode includes a low range 2-28 Instruments and controls warning feature. If the fuel level is low, the 6. Setting MAINTENANCE: warning is displayed on the screen. Setting is available while the engine is There are 5 submenus under the main- When the fuel level drops even lower, the running. tenance menu. dte display will change to “——”. Setting cannot be made while driving. A . BACK . If the amount of fuel added is small, message “SETTING CAN ONLY BE OPER- Select this submenu to return to the the display just before the ignition ATED WHEN STOPPED” is also displayed top page of the setting mode. switch is pushed to the OFF position on the vehicle information display. . TIRE may continue to be displayed. The switch and switch are Select this submenu to set or reset the . When driving uphill or rounding used in the setting mode to select and distance for replacing tires. curves, the fuel in the tank shifts, decide a menu. . FILTER which may momentarily change the display. SKIP: Select this submenu to set or reset the Push the switch to move to the distance for replacing the oil filter. . 5. Outside air temperature (ICY — °F warning check mode. OIL or °C) Push the switch to select other Select this submenu to set or reset the The outside air temperature is displayed menus. distance for changing the engine oil. in °F or °C in the range of −22 to 131°F (−30 . OTHER to 55°C). ALERT: Select this submenu and set or reset The outside air temperature mode in- There are 3 submenus under the alert the distance for replacing items other cludes a low temperature warning fea- menu. than the engine oil, oil filter and tires. . ture. If the outside air temperature is BACK OPTIONS: below 37°F (3°C), the warning is displayed Select this submenu to return to the There are 4 submenus under the display on the screen. top page of the setting mode. menu. The outside temperature sensor is lo- . TIMER . BACK cated in front of the radiator. The sensor Select this submenu to specify when may be affected by road or engine heat, the “TIMER” indicator activates. Select this submenu to return to the top page of the setting mode. wind directions and other driving condi- . ICY . LANGUAGE tions. The display may differ from the Select this submenu to display the low actual outside temperature or the tem- outside temperature warning. Select this submenu to choose Eng- perature displayed on various signs or lish, French or Spanish for display. billboards.

Instruments and controls 2-29 SECURITY SYSTEMS

. UNIT cannot prevent it, nor can it prevent the Select this submenu to choose the theft of interior or exterior vehicle com- unit. ponents in all situations. Always secure . EFFECTS your vehicle even if parking for a brief Select this submenu to turn on and off period. Never leave your Intelligent Key(s) the needle sweep function when in the vehicle, and always lock it when starting the engine. unattended. Be aware of your surroundings, and park in secure, well-lit areas 7. Warning check whenever possible. SKIP: Many devices offering additional protection, such as component locks, identifica- Push the switch to move to the tion markers, and tracking systems, are warning check mode. available at auto supply stores and speci- Push the switch to select other alty shops. Your NISSAN dealer may also menus. SIC2133 offer such equipment. Check with your insurance company to see if you may be DETAIL: Your vehicle has two types of security eligible for discounts for various theft This item is available only when a warning systems, as follows: protection features. is displayed. . Vehicle security system Select this menu to see the details of . NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System warnings. The security condition will be shown by the security indicator light. VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM The vehicle security system provides visual and audio alarm signals if someone opens the doors, hood, or liftgate when the system is armed. It is not, however, a motion detection type system that activates when a vehicle is moved or when a vibration occurs. The system helps deter vehicle theft but

2-30 Instruments and controls 5. Confirm that the security indicator . Unlocking the door or opening the light comes on. The security indicator liftgate without using the button on light stays on for about 30 seconds. the Intelligent Key, the door handle The vehicle security system is now request switch or the mechanical key. pre-armed. After about 30 seconds (Even if the door is opened by releas- the vehicle security system automati- ing the door inside lock knob, the cally shifts into the armed phase. The alarm will activate.) security light begins to flash once . Opening the hood. every approximately 3 seconds. If, during this 30-second pre-arm time How to stop an activated alarm period, the door is unlocked, or the The alarm will stop when a door is ignition switch is pushed to ACC or unlocked by pushing the unlock button ON, the system will not arm. on the Intelligent Key, the door handle Even when the driver and/or passen- request switch or using the mechanical SIC2045 gers are in the vehicle, the system will key, or when the ignition switch is pushed activate with all doors, hood, and lift- to the ACC or ON position. How to arm the vehicle security gate locked with the ignition switch in If the system does not operate as system the LOCK position. When pushing the described above, it is recommended ignition switch to the ACC or ON posi- 1. Close all windows. you have it checked by a NISSAN dealer. tion, the system will be released. The system can be armed even if the NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYS- windows are open. Vehicle security system activation TEM 2. Push the ignition switch to the OFF The vehicle security system will give the The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System position. following alarm: will not allow the engine to start without 3. Remove the Intelligent Key from the . The headlights blink and the horn the use of the registered Intelligent Key. vehicle. sounds intermittently. Never leave these keys in the vehicle. 4. Close all doors, hood and liftgate. Lock . The alarm automatically turns off FCC Notice: all doors. The doors can be locked after approximately 50 seconds. How- For USA: ever, the alarm reactivates if the with the Intelligent Key, door handle This device complies with Part 15 of the vehicle is tampered with again. request switch, power door lock FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the switch or mechanical key. The alarm is activated by: following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, Instruments and controls 2-31 and (2) this device must accept any the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System interference received, including inter- as soon as possible. Please bring all ference that may cause undesired op- registered keys that you have. It is eration. recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer NOTE: for this service. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. For Canada: This device complies with Industry Ca- nada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not SIC2045 cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including Security indicator light interference that may cause undesired The security indicator light is located on operation of the device. the meter panel. It indicates the status of the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System. The light blinks after the ignition switch was in the ACC, OFF and LOCK position. This function indicates the security systems equipped on the vehicle are operational. If the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System is malfunctioning, this light will remain on while the ignition switch is in the ON position. If the light still remains on and/or the engine will not start, seek service for

2-32 Instruments and controls WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH

not use the window washer re- WARNING servoir tank to mix the washer fluid concentrate and water. In freezing temperatures the washer solution may freeze on the window If the wiper operation is interrupted by and obscure your vision which may snow or ice, the wiper may stop moving lead to an accident. Warm the win- to protect its motor. If this occurs, turn dow with the defroster before you the wiper switch to the OFF position wash the window. and remove the snow or ice that is on and around the wiper arms. In approximately 1 minute, turn the switch on again to operate the wiper. CAUTION

. Do not operate the washer con- JVI1010X tinuously for more than 30 sec- Type A (if so equipped) onds. . Do not operate the washer if the reservoir tank is empty. . Do not fill the window washer reservoir tank with washer fluid concentrates at full strength. Some methyl alcohol based washer fluid concentrates may permanently stain the grille if spilled while filling the window washer reservoir tank. . Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates with water to the manufacturer’s recommended levels JVI1011X before pouring the fluid into the Type B (if so equipped) window washer reservoir tank. Do Instruments and controls 2-33 WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHER automatically operate several times. OPERATION Wiper drip wipe system: The windshield wiper and washer oper- The wiper will also operate once about 3 ates when the ignition switch is in the ON seconds after the washer and wiper are position. operated. This operation is to wipe Push the lever down to operate the wiper washer fluid that has dripped on the at the following speed: windshield. INT (Type A) (if so equipped) — intermittent operation can be adjusted by turning the knob toward (Slower) or (Faster). When the speed sensing wiper interval function is turned on, the intermittent operation speed varies in accordance with the vehicle speed. (For example, when the vehicle speed is high, the JVI1013X intermittent operation speed will be faster.) To turn this function on and off, see RAIN-SENSING AUTO WIPER SYS- NissanConnect® Owner’s Manual. TEM (if so equipped) AUTO (Type B) (if so equipped) — For models with the rain-sensing auto wiper The rain-sensing auto wiper system can system, see “Rain-sensing auto wiper automatically turn on the wipers and system” (P.2-34). adjust the wiper speed depending on LO — continuous low speed operation the rainfall and the vehicle speed by using HI — continuous high speed operation the rain sensor located on the upper part of the windshield. MIST — one sweep operation of the wiper Pull the lever toward you to operate the To set the rain-sensing auto wiper sys- washer. Then the wiper will also operate tem, push the lever down to the AUTO several times. position . The wiper will sweep once while the ignition switch is in the ON To operate the washer, pull the lever position. toward the back of the vehicle until the desired amount of washer fluid is The rain sensor sensitivity level can be adjusted by turning the knob toward the spread on the windshield. The wiper will front (High) or toward the rear (Low). 2-34 Instruments and controls . High — High sensitive operation the rain-sensing auto wipers may be . Low — Low sensitive operation higher even though the amount of To turn the rain-sensing auto wiper the rainfall is small. system off, push up the lever to the OFF . Be sure to turn off the rain-sensing position, or pull down the lever to the LO auto wiper system when you use a or HI position. car wash. . Using genuine wiper blades is recommended for proper operation of CAUTION the rain-sensing auto wiper system. (See “Windshield wiper blades” (P.8- Do not touch the rain sensor and 16) for wiper blade replacement.) around it when the wiper switch is in the AUTO position and the ignition switch is in the ON position. The wipers may operate unexpectedly JVI1014X and cause to an injury or may da- Type A (if so equipped) mage a wiper.

. The rain-sensing auto wipers are intended for use during rain. If the switch is left in the AUTO position, the wipers may operate unexpectedly when dirt, fingerprints, oil film or insects are stuck on or around the sensor. The wipers may also operate when exhaust gas or moisture affect the rain sensor. . The rain-sensing auto wipers may not operate if rain does not hit the rain sensor even if it is raining. . When the windshield glass is coated JVI1015X with water repellent, the speed of Type B (if so equipped) Instruments and controls 2-35 REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDE WINDSHIELD DEICER SWITCH (if so MIRROR DEFROSTER SWITCH equipped)

REAR WINDOW WIPER AND WASHER OPERATION If the rear window wiper operation is interrupted by snow etc., the wiper may stop moving to protect its motor. If this occurs, turn the wiper switch to OFF and remove the snow etc. on and around the wiper arms. After about 1 minute, turn the switch ON again to operate the wiper. The rear window wiper and washer operate when the ignition switch is in the ON position. Turn the switch clockwise from the OFF SIC4385 SIC4385 position to operate the wiper. To defog/defrost the rear window glass The windshield deicer switch (defroster Intermittent (INT) — intermittent operation (not adjustable) and outside mirrors, start the engine and switch) operates when the ignition switch push the switch on. The indicator light is in the ON position. Low (ON) — continuous low speed operation will come on. Push the switch again to The deicer is used to remove ice from the turn the defroster off. Push the switch forward to operate the windshield when a wiper is frozen to the washer. Then the wiper will also operate It will automatically turn off in approxi- windshield. several times. mately 15 minutes. When the switch is pushed, the indicator light illuminates and the deicer operates for approximately 15 minutes. CAUTION The rear window defroster will activate at the same time. After the preset time has When cleaning the inner side of the passed, the deicer will turn off automati- rear window, be careful not to cally. To turn off the deicer manually, scratch or damage the rear window push the deicer switch again, and the defroster. indicator light turns off.

2-36 Instruments and controls HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNAL SWITCH

HEADLIGHT SWITCH CAUTION Lighting . When operating the deicer con- Turn the switch to the position: tinuously, be sure to start the The front parking, side marker, tail, license engine. Otherwise, it may cause plate and instrument lights will come on. the battery to discharge. Turn the switch to the position: . Headlights will come on and all the other When cleaning the inner side of lights remain on. the window, be careful not to scratch or damage the electrical conductors on the surface of the window.

SIC3668 Type A (if so equipped)

JVI1505X Type B (if so equipped)

Instruments and controls 2-37 the OFF, or position. The Intelligent Auto Headlight system can turn on the headlights automatically when it is dark and turn off the headlights when it is light. The headlights will also be turned on automatically at twilight or in rainy weather (when the windshield wiper is operated continuously). If the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position and one of the doors is opened and this condition is continued, the headlights remain on for 5 minutes. SIC3669 Automatic headlights off delay: SIC3784A You can keep the headlights on for up to Intelligent Auto Headlight system Be sure not to put anything on top of 180 seconds after you place the ignition the photo sensor located on the top The Intelligent Auto Headlight system switch in the OFF position and open any of the instrument panel. The photo allows the headlights to be set so they door then close all the doors. sensor controls the Intelligent Auto turn on and off automatically. You can adjust the period of the auto- Headlight system; if it is covered, the To set the Intelligent Auto Headlight matic headlights off delay from 0 seconds photo sensor reacts as if it is dark and system: (OFF) to 180 seconds. The factory default the headlights will illuminate. 1. Make sure the headlight switch is in setting is 45 seconds. the AUTO position . For automatic headlights off delay 2. Place the ignition switch in the ON setting, see NissanConnect® Owner’s position. Manual. 3. The Intelligent Auto Headlight system automatically turns the headlights on and off. To turn the Intelligent Auto Headlight system off, turn the headlight switch to 2-38 Instruments and controls Battery saver system if the headlights turn off auto- A chime will sound when the driver side matically. door is opened with the light switch in the or position and the ignition Daytime running light system switch in the OFF or LOCK position. The daytime running lights automatically When the headlight switch is in the or illuminate when the engine is started with position while the ignition switch is in the parking brake released. The daytime the ON position, the lights will automati- running lights operate with the headlight cally turn off after a period of time when switch in the OFF position or in the the ignition switch has been pushed to position. Turn the headlight switch to the the OFF position. position for full illumination when When the headlight switch remains in the driving at night. or position after the lights auto- If the parking brake is applied before the matically turn off, the lights will turn on SIC3670 engine is started, the daytime running when the ignition switch is pushed to the lights do not illuminate. The daytime ON position. Headlight beam select running lights illuminate once the parking To select the low beam, put the lever in brake is released. The daytime running the neutral position as shown. CAUTION lights will remain on until the ignition To select the high beam, push the lever switch is pushed to the OFF position. forward while the switch is in the position. Pull it back to select the low . When you turn on the headlight beam. switch again after the lights auto- WARNING Pulling the lever toward you will flash the matically turn off, the lights will headlight high beam even when the not turn off automatically. Be When the daytime running light sys- headlight switch is in the OFF position. sure to turn the light switch to tem is active, tail lights on your the OFF position when you leave vehicle are not on. It is necessary at the vehicle for extended periods dusk to turn on your headlights. of time, otherwise the battery will Failure to do so could cause an be discharged. accident injuring yourself and . Never leave the light switch on others. when the engine is not running for extended periods of time even Instruments and controls 2-39 brightness, “MIN” appears on the display . However, “MIN” does not appear during the nighttime. The vehicle information display returns to the normal display under the following conditions: . when the instrument brightness control switch is not operated for more than 5 seconds. . when the or switch on the right side of the combination meter panel is pushed.

SIC4378 INSTRUMENT BRIGHTNESS CON- TROL The instrument brightness control switch can be operated when the ignition switch is in the ON position. When the switch is operated, the vehicle information display switches to the brightness adjustment mode. Push the upper switch to brighten the instrument panel lights. The bar moves to the + side. When reaching the maximum brightness, “MAX” appears on the display . SIC3270 Push the lower switch to dim the instrument panel lights. The bar moves to the − side. When reaching the minimum 2-40 Instruments and controls lever. The turn signal will automatically flash three times. Choose the appropriate method to signal a lane change based on road and traffic conditions.

SIC3671 SIC3672 TURN SIGNAL SWITCH FOG LIGHT SWITCH (if so equipped) Turn signal To turn the fog lights on, turn the headlight switch to the position, then turn Move the lever up or down to signal the the switch to the position. To turn turning direction. When the turn is com- them off, turn the switch to the OFF pleted, the turn signals cancel automati- position. cally. The headlights must be on with the low Lane change signal beams selected for the fog lights to . Move the lever up or down until the operate. The fog lights automatically turn turn signal begins to flash, but the off when the high beam headlights are lever does not latch, to signal a lane selected. change. Hold the lever until the lane change is completed. . Move the lever up or down until the turn signal begins to flash, but the lever does not latch, and release the Instruments and controls 2-41 HEATED STEERING WHEEL (if so equipped) HORN

indicator light will turn off. NOTE: If the surface temperature of the steering wheel is above 68°F (20°C) when the switch is turned on, the system will not heat the steering wheel. This is not a malfunction.

SIC4401 SIC4444 The heated steering wheel system is To sound the horn, push the center pad designed to operate only when the sur- area of the steering wheel. face temperature of the steering wheel is below 68°F (20°C). WARNING Push the heated steering wheel switch to warm the steering wheel after the engine starts. The indicator light on the switch Do not disassemble the horn. Doing will illuminate. so could affect proper operation of the supplemental front air bag sys- If the surface temperature of the steering tem. Tampering with the supple- wheel is below 68°F (20°C), the system will mental front air bag system may heat the steering wheel and cycle off and result in serious personal injury. on to maintain a temperature above 68°F (20°C). The indicator light will remain on as long as the system is on. Push the switch again to turn the heated steering wheel system off manually. The 2-42 Instruments and controls HEATED SEATS

. Any liquid spilled on the heated WARNING seat should be removed immediately with a dry cloth. Do not use or allow occupants to use . When cleaning the seat, never use the seat heater if you or the occu- gasoline, thinner, or any similar pants cannot monitor elevated seat materials. temperatures or have an inability to . If any malfunctions are found or feel pain in body parts that contact the heated seat does not operate, the seat. Use of the seat heater by turn the switch off and have the such people could result in serious system checked. It is recom- injury. mended you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

CAUTION SIC2770

. The battery could run down if the FRONT (if so equipped) seat heater is operated while the The front seats can be warmed by built-in engine is not running. heaters. The switches located on the instrument panel can be operated inde- . Do not use the seat heater for pendently of each other. extended periods or when no one is using the seat. 1. Start the engine. . Do not put anything on the seat 2. Select heat range. which insulates heat, such as a . For high heat, push the HI (High) blanket, cushion, seat cover, etc. side of the switch . Otherwise, the seat may become . For low heat, push the LO (Low) side overheated. of the switch . . Do not place anything hard or . The indicator light will illuminate heavy on the seat or pierce it with when the heater is on. a pin or similar object. This may 3. To turn off the heater, return the result in damage to the heater. switch to the level position. Make sure

Instruments and controls 2-43 the indicator light turns off. 3. To turn off the heater, return the switch to the level position. Make sure the indicator light turns off. The heater is controlled by a thermo- stat, automatically turning the heater on and off. The indicator light will remain on as long as the switch is on. When the vehicle’s interior is warmed, or before you leave the vehicle, be sure to turn off the switch.

SIC2770 REAR (if so equipped) The 2nd row outboard seats are warmed by built-in heaters. The switches located on the back side of the center console can be operated independently of each other. 1. Start the engine. 2. Select heat range. For high heat, push the HI (High) side of the switch. For low heat, push the LO (Low) side of the switch. The indicator light in the switch will illuminate when the heater is on.

2-44 Instruments and controls CLIMATE CONTROLLED SEATS (if so equipped)

knob to the OFF position (center). The . Do not use the climate controlled indicator light on the control knob seat for extended periods or goes off at the OFF position. when no one is using the seat. The climate controlled seat has air . Do not put anything on the seat filters. If the climate controlled seat is which insulates heat, such as a not functioning properly, it may indi- blanket, cushion, seat cover, etc. cate the air filters may be clogged. To Otherwise, the seat may become check the air filters for the climate overheated. controlled seat, it is recommended . you visit a NISSAN dealer. Do not place anything hard or heavy on the seat or pierce it with a pin or similar object. This may WARNING result in damage to the climate controlled seat. SIC4334 Do not use or allow occupants to use . Any liquid spilled on the seat the climate controlled seats if you or should be removed immediately The climate controlled seat warms up or the occupants cannot monitor seat with a dry cloth. cools down the front seats by built-in temperatures or have an inability to . The climate controlled seat has heaters or blowing cool air from the feel pain in those body parts in surface of the seat. The switches located an air filter. Do not operate cli- contact with the seat. Use of the mate controlled seat without an on the instrument panel can be operated climate controlled seats by such independently of each other. air filter. This may result in da- people could result in serious injury. mage to the system. 1. Start the engine. . When cleaning the seat, never use 2. Turn the control knob to the heat gasoline, thinner, or any similar side or to the cool side . The materials. indicator light on the control knob CAUTION . will illuminate. If any malfunctions are found or . The battery could run down if the the climate controlled seat does 3. Adjust the temperature using the climate controlled seat is oper- not operate, turn the switch off control knob . ated while the engine is not run- and have the system checked. It 4. When the vehicle’s interior is warmed ning. is recommended you visit a or cooled, and/or before you leave the NISSAN dealer for this service. vehicle, be sure to turn the control Instruments and controls 2-45 WARNING SYSTEMS SWITCH (if so SNOW MODE SWITCH equipped)

traveling lane with detectable lane markers. (See “Lane Departure Warning (LDW)/Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI)” (P.5-23).) The BSW system will turn on the side indicator lights, located next to the outside mirrors, if the radar sensors detect a vehicle in the detection zone. If the turn signal is activated in the direction of the detected vehicle, a chime sounds twice and the side indicator light will flash. (See “Blind Spot Warning (BSW)” (P.5-32).)

SSD0956 SIC4454 The warning systems switch is used to For driving or starting the vehicle on turn on and off the warning systems snowy roads or slippery areas, push on (Lane Departure Warning (LDW) and Blind the SNOW mode switch. The SNOW mode Spot Warning (BSW) systems) that are indicator light will illuminate. When the activated using the settings menu on SNOW mode is activated, engine output is the center display. controlled to avoid wheel spin. When the warning systems switch is Push off the SNOW mode for normal turned off, the indicator on the switch driving. is off. The indicator will also be off if all of the warning systems are deactivated using the settings menu. The LDW system will sound a warning chime and blink the Lane Departure Warning (LDW) indicator light (orange) to alert the driver if the vehicle is traveling close to either the left or the right of a

2-46 Instruments and controls VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC) TOW MODE SWITCH OFF SWITCH

(P.5-133).)

SIC4474 SIC4455 TOW MODE should be used when pulling The vehicle should be driven with the a heavy trailer or hauling a heavy load. Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system on Driving the vehicle in TOW MODE with no for most driving conditions. trailer/load or light trailer/light load will If the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, the not cause any damage. However, fuel VDC system reduces the engine output to economy may be reduced, and the trans- reduce wheel spin. The engine speed will mission/engine driving characteristics be reduced even if the accelerator is may feel unusual. depressed to the floor. If maximum en- Push the TOW MODE switch to activate gine power is needed to free a stuck TOW MODE. The indicator light on the vehicle, turn the VDC system off. TOW MODE switch illuminates when TOW To turn off the VDC system, push the VDC MODE is selected. Push the TOW MODE OFF switch. The indicator will illumi- switch again to turn TOW MODE OFF. nate. TOW MODE is automatically canceled Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart when the ignition switch is placed in the the engine to turn on the system. (See OFF position. “Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system”

Instruments and controls 2-47 REAR DOOR ALERT

The rear door alert system functions under certain conditions to indicate there may be an object or passenger in the rear seat(s). Check the seat(s) before exiting the vehicle. The rear door alert system is initially disabled. The driver can enable the system using the rear door alert switch. (See “Turning the rear door alert system ON/OFF” (P.2-48).)

JVP0649X Rear door alert switch TURNING THE REAR DOOR ALERT Rear door alert switch indicator light SYSTEM ON/OFF switch To turn on the rear door alert system, switch push the rear door alert switch . The rear door alert switch indicator light will illuminate. To turn off the system, push the rear door 2-48 Instruments and controls alert switch again. The rear door alert SYSTEM OPERATION switch indicator light will go off. When the rear door alert system is When the system is turned ON: activated and the driver exits the vehicle . The system is activated when a rear after arriving at a destination: door is opened and closed within 10 . When the driver places the vehicle in minutes of the vehicle being driven. the P (Park) position, a message ap- For additional information, refer to pears in the vehicle information dis- “System operation” (P.2-49). play for a driver to select “DISMISS . If a rear door is opened and closed but MESSAGE” or “DISABLE ALERT” if de- the vehicle is not driven within ap- sired. proximately 10 minutes, the system . With the system enabled, when the will not be activated. A rear door must driver exits the vehicle, an audible alert be opened and closed and the vehicle (horn sound) will occur unless a rear driven within 10 minutes for the sys- door is opened and closed within a SIC4420 tem to be activated. short time to deactivate the alert. NOTE: . If the doors are locked before the alert HOW TO TEMPORARILY DISABLE . When turning on or off the system, is deactivated by opening a rear door, THE REAR DOOR ALERT SYSTEM the system will retain current set- the horn will sound. Perform the following steps to tempora- tings even if the engine is restarted. . If the system is activated but the rily disable the rear door alert system. . If the battery terminal is discon- liftgate is opened before opening a nected and connected after the sys- rear door, the audible horn alert will be 1. When the driver places the vehicle in tem is turned on, the system will be delayed until after the liftgate is the P (Park) position, a message ap- turned off and initialized. To use the closed. pears in the vehicle information display for a driver to select “DISMISS rear door alert system after the . If the audible horn alert occurs, a MESSAGE” or “DISABLE ALERT” if de- battery terminal is disconnected message will also appear in the vehi- sired. and connected for servicing by the cle information display that states, customer or a NISSAN dealer, push “CHECK BACK SEAT FOR All ARTICLES”. 2. Push the switch to toggle the rear door alert switch to turn on between “DISMISS MESSAGE” and “DIS- the system. ABLE ALERT”. 3. Push the switch to enter.

Instruments and controls 2-49 POWER OUTLET

. Using switch , a driver can NOTE: select “DISMISS MESSAGE” to clear There may be times when the horn CAUTION the display for a period of time. If no sounds but there are no objects or selection is made, this message passengers in the rear seat(s). automatically turns off after a per- . Use power outlet with the engine iod of time. running to avoid discharging the . Using switch , a driver can vehicle battery. select “DISABLE ALERT” to disable . Avoid using power outlet when the horn alert for the remainder of the air conditioner, headlights or the current trip. rear window defroster is on. . Before inserting or disconnecting WARNING a plug, be sure the electrical accessory being used is turned OFF. . There may be times when there is . an object or passenger in the rear When not in use, be sure to close seat(s) but the audible alert does the cap. Do not allow water or any not sound. For example, this may liquid to contact the outlet. occur if rear seat passengers enter or exit the vehicle during a trip. . The system does not directly detect objects or passengers in the rear seat(s). Instead, it can detect when a rear door is opened and closed, indicating that there may be something in the rear seat(s).

2-50 Instruments and controls . This power outlet is not designed for use with a cigarette lighter unit. . Push the plug in as far as it will go. If good contact is not made, the plug may overheat or the internal temperature fuse may blow.

SIC4389 SIC4391 Instrument panel Luggage room Type A (if so equipped) The power outlet is used for powering electrical accessories such as cellular telephones.

CAUTION

. The outlet and plug may be hot during or immediately after use. . Do not use with accessories that exceed a combined power draw of 12 volts, 120W (10A) for all the power outlets. Do not use double SIC4456 adapters or more than one elec- Back side of front console trical accessory. Instruments and controls 2-51 SIC2648 JVI1638X JVI1604X Main switch Power outlet Type B (if so equipped) Pull up the cover and plug in. USB (Universal Serial Bus) CHAR- GING CONNECTOR The power outlet (plug type) is located on After using the power outlet, be sure to the back side of the front console. It can turn off the main switch. The USB connector can be used only operate when the ignition switch in the for charging an external device. ON position and the main switch (located Open the cover to access the USB con- in the console box) is ON. CAUTION nector. The specification of this power outlet is Connect a USB device into the connector. for use of a 120 volt, 150W (1.25A) power . Do not use with accessories that Charging will start automatically (max- draw. exceed a 120 volt, 150W (1.25A) imum output up to 5 volt, 12W, 2.4A). power draw. To turn on or off the power supply to the The external device will be charged con- outlet, push the ON or OFF side of the . Use this power outlet with the tinuously while the ignition switch is in main switch. When the switch is turned to engine running. (If the engine is the ACC or ON position. the ON position, the indicator light will stopped, this could result in a discharged battery.) Some mobile devices cannot be charged illuminate. depending on their specifications.

2-52 Instruments and controls STORAGE

CUP HOLDERS CAUTION CAUTION . Do not force a USB device into the connector. Inserting the USB de- . Avoid abrupt starting and braking vice tilted or up-side-down into when the cup holder is being the connector may damage the used to prevent spilling the drink. connector. Make sure that the If the liquid is hot, it can scald you USB device is connected correctly or your passenger. into the connector. . Use only soft cups in the cup . Do not use a reversible USB cable. Using the reversible USB cable holder. Hard objects can injure you in an accident. may damage the connector. . Do not recline the rear seatback . Do not grab the USB connector when you use the cup holders on cover when pulling the USB de- the rear armrest. Doing so may vice out of the connector. This cause the beverages to spill over, could damage the connector and and if they are hot, they may the cover. scald the passengers.

JVI1688X

Front To open the cup holder, push the lid . To close, lower the cup holder lid and push it down lightly. The cup holder is not designed to store personal items.

Instruments and controls 2-53 SIC3118 SIC2915 SIC4419

2nd row seat Type B (if so equipped): 3rd row seat To open the cup holder, pull the lid. Type A (if so equipped): To open the cup holder, push the lid . The flap will be folded down when inserting a large container. To close, lower the cup holder lid and push it down lightly. To clean the front cup holder, pull up the inside tray and remove it. The cup holder is not designed to store personal items.

2-54 Instruments and controls CAUTION

. Do not use for anything other than glasses. . Do not leave glasses in the sunglasses holder while parking in direct sunlight. The heat may damage the glasses.

SIC4501 JVI0619X

Soft bottle holder SUNGLASSES HOLDER To open the sunglasses holder, push and release. Only store one pair of sunglasses CAUTION in the holder.

. Do not use bottle holder for any other objects that could be WARNING thrown about in the vehicle and possibly injure people during Keep the sunglasses holder closed sudden braking or an accident. while driving to avoid obstructing . Do not use bottle holder for open the driver’s view and to help prevent liquid containers. an accident.

Instruments and controls 2-55 SIC4393 JVI1711X GLOVE BOX CONSOLE BOX Front WARNING Type A (if so equipped): Keep glove box lid closed while driv- To open the console box lid, push up the ing to help prevent injury in an knob and pull up the lid. accident or a sudden stop. To close, push the lid down until the lock latches. To open the glove box, pull the handle . To close, push the lid in until the lock latches. To lock /unlock the glove box, use the mechanical key. For the mechanical key usage, see “Keys” (P.3-2).

2-56 Instruments and controls JVI1509X SIC4422

Type B (if so equipped): Rear (if so equipped) To open the console box lid from the To open the lid, push the knob up and front seat, push up the knob and pull pull up the lid. up the lid. To close, push the lid down until the lock To open the console box lid from the 2nd latches. row seat, push the knob . To close, push the lid down until the lock latches.

Instruments and controls 2-57 SIC4423 JVI1687X

Pocket: TRAY To open the pocket, pull the knob . To open the tray, push the lid . To close, To close, push the lid until the lock push the lid down. latches.

JVI1690X To open the tray, push the lid . To close, push the lid down.

2-58 Instruments and controls more likely to be seriously injured or killed. . Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. . The child restraint top tether strap may be damaged by contact with items in the cargo area. Secure any items in the cargo area. Your child could be seriously injured or killed in a collision if the top tether strap is damaged. SIC3505 SIC4446 . Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt COAT HOOKS LUGGAGE HOOKS properly. The coat hooks are equipped at the rear assist grips. WARNING CAUTION CAUTION . Always make sure that the cargo is properly secured. Use the sui- Do not apply a total load of more Do not place items which are more table ropes and hooks. than 22 lb (10 kg) or 7 lb (3 kg) to than 2 lb (1 kg) on the hook. . Unsecured cargo can become the hook. dangerous in an accident or sudden stop. . Never allow anyone to ride in the luggage area. It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are

Instruments and controls 2-59 (GAWR front and rear). The GVWR and GAWR are located on the F.M.V.S.S. or C.V. M.S.S. certification label (located on the driver’s door pillar). For additional information regarding GVWR and GAWR, refer to “Vehicle loading information” (P.10-13).

WARNING

. Always install the cross bars onto the roof side rails before loading cargo of any kind. Loading cargo directly onto the roof side rails or JVI1204X JVI1515X the vehicle’s roof may cause vehicle damage. CARGO FLOOR BOX ROOF RACK . Drive extra carefully when the Push the handle to open the cargo floor Do not apply any load directly to the roof vehicle is loaded at or near the board . side rails. Cross bars must be installed cargo carrying capacity, espe- before applying load/cargo/luggage to cially if the significant portion of the roof of the vehicle. Genuine NISSAN that load is carried on the roof accessory cross bars are available rack. through a NISSAN dealer. It is recom- . Heavy loading of the roof rack mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for has the potential to affect the additional information. vehicle stability and handling The service load capacity for the roof side during sudden or unusual hand- rails is 221 lb (100 kg), however do not ling maneuvers. exceed the accessory cross bars load . Roof rack load should be evenly capacity. distributed. Be careful that your vehicle does not . Do not exceed maximum roof exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating rack load weight capacity. (GVWR) or its Gross Axle Weight Rating 2-60 Instruments and controls . Properly secure all cargo with ropes or straps to help prevent it from sliding or shifting. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause personal injury.

JVE0219X JVI1516X REAR BUMPER COVER 2. Take the rear bumper cover from the The rear bumper cover helps prevent the bag stored in the cargo floor box. rear bumper from being scratched or damaged when loading or unloading a cargo. 1. Open the cargo floor board using the handle .

Instruments and controls 2-61 — To clean the rear bumper cov- WARNING er, use a soft cloth, dampened with a mild solution of neutral . Never install the rear bumper detergent. Never use benzine, cover while the engine is running. thinner or any similar chemi- The exhaust gas could heat the cal. rear bumper cover and this may — Remove any solvent such as cause a fire. oil or gasoline spilled on the . Never drive with the rear bumper surface of the rear bumper cover left in place. There is a risk cover as soon as possible. that the liftgate will not close correctly, and that carbon monoxide may enter the cabin causing serious injury or death. JVI1517X 3. Install the rear bumper cover. . Place the cover over the surface CAUTION with the tag facing down. . Attach the hooks to the luggage . Failure to follow the instructions hooks . below could result in damage to . Secure the strap to the liftgate the rear bumper cover. striker . — Do not close the liftgate with 4. Cover the upper part of the rear the rear bumper cover in- bumper as shown. stalled. After loading or unloading the cargo, be — Do not strike or apply exces- sure to remove the rear bumper cover sive force to the rear bumper and store it in the storage place. cover. — Keep the rear bumper cover away from heat or fire.

2-62 Instruments and controls WINDOWS

POWER WINDOWS seconds, power to the windows is canceled. WARNING

. Make sure that all passengers have their hands, etc. inside the vehicle while it is in motion and before closing the windows. Use the window lock switch to prevent unexpected use of the power windows. . To help avoid risk of injury or death through unintended operation of the vehicle and or its SIC4352 systems, including entrapment in windows or inadvertent door 1. Driver side window lock activation, do not leave chil- 2. Front passenger side window dren, people who require the 3. Rear left passenger side window assistance of others or pets un- 4. Rear right passenger side window attended in your vehicle. Addi- 5. Window lock button tionally, the temperature inside a closed vehicle on a warm day can Main power window switch (driver’s quickly become high enough to side) cause a significant risk of injury To open or close the window, push down or death to people and pets. or pull up the switch and hold it. The main switch (driver side switches) will The power windows operate when the open or close all the windows. ignition switch is in the ON position or for about 45 seconds after the ignition switch is pushed to the OFF position. If the driver’s or front passenger’s door is opened during this period of about 45 Instruments and controls 2-63 Locking passengers’ windows When the lock button is pushed in, only the driver side window can be opened or closed. Push it in again to cancel.

SIC4353 SIC4354

Passenger side power window Automatic operation switch To fully open or close the window, com- The passenger side switch will open or pletely push down or pull up the switch close only the corresponding window. To and release it; it need not be held. The open or close the window, push down or window will automatically open or close pull up the switch and hold it. all the way. To stop the window, just push or lift the switch in the opposite direction. A light push or pull on the switch will cause the window to open or close until the switch is released.

2-64 Instruments and controls MOONROOF (if so equipped)

Auto reverse function If the windows do not close automatically WARNING WARNING If the power window automatic function (closing only) does not operate properly, . In an accident you could be perform the following procedure to initi- thrown from the vehicle through There are some small distances im- alize the power window system. an open moonroof. Always use mediately before the closed position seat belts and child restraints. which cannot be detected. Make sure 1. Push the ignition switch to start the that all passengers have their hands, engine. . Do not allow anyone to stand up etc., inside the vehicle before closing 2. Close the door. or extend any portion of their the window. body out of the moonroof open- 3. After starting the engine, open the ing while the vehicle is in motion window completely by operating the or while the moonroof is closing. If the control unit detects something power window switch. caught in the window as it is closing, the 4. Pull the power window switch and window will be immediately lowered. hold it to close the window, and then The auto reverse function can be acti- hold the switch more than 3 seconds CAUTION vated when the window is closed by after the window is closed completely. . automatic operation when the ignition 5. Release the power window switch. Remove water drops, snow, ice or sand from the moonroof before switch is in the ON position or for 45 Operate the window by the automatic opening. seconds after the ignition switch is function to confirm the initialization is pushed to the OFF position. complete. . Do not place any heavy object on the moonroof or surrounding Depending on the environment or driv- 6. Perform steps 2 through 5 above for area. ing conditions, the auto reverse func- other windows. tion may be activated if an impact or load similar to something being caught If the power window automatic function POWER MOONROOF in the window occurs. does not operate properly after performing the procedure above, have your The moonroof only operates when the vehicle checked. It is recommended you ignition switch is in the ON position. visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. The moonroof is operational for about 45 seconds, even if the ignition switch is pushed to the OFF position. If the driver’s door or the passenger’s door is opened

Instruments and controls 2-65 during this period of about 45 seconds, Sliding the moonroof power to the moonroof is canceled. To fully open or close the moonroof, push the switch to the OPEN or CLOSE position and release it; it need not be held. The roof will automatically open or close all the way. To stop the roof, push the switch once more while it is opening or closing. Auto reverse function

WARNING

JVI0614X There are some small distances immediately before the closed position Sunshade which cannot be detected. Make sure that all passengers have their hands, The sunshade will open automatically etc., inside the vehicle before closing when the moonroof is opened. However, the moonroof. it must be closed manually. Tilting the moonroof If the control unit detects something To tilt up, first close the moonroof, then caught in the moonroof when it is closing, push the switch to the TILT UP position the moonroof will be immediately and release it; it need not be held. To tilt opened. down the moonroof, push the switch to The auto reverse function can be acti- the TILT DOWN position. vated when the moonroof is closed by automatic operation when the ignition switch is in the ON position or for about 45 seconds after the ignition switch is pushed to the OFF position. If the moonroof cannot be closed auto- 2-66 Instruments and controls WELCOME LIGHT (if so equipped) matically when the auto reverse function cabin illumination will illuminate when activates due to a malfunction, push and you approach the vehicle with the Intel- hold the switch to the CLOSE position. ligent Key (within approximately 3.3 ft (1 Depending on the environment or driv- m) of the antenna built inside the door ing conditions, the auto reverse func- handles) and the following conditions are tion may be activated if an impact or met. load similar to something being caught . All doors are closed and locked. in the moonroof occurs. . The ignition switch is in the LOCK or OFF position. If the moonroof does not operate . The Intelligent Key is outside the If the moonroof does not operate prop- vehicle. erly, perform the following procedure to . The puddle light operates within a set initialize the moonroof operation system. duration. 1. If the moonroof is open, close it fully BATTERY SAVER SYSTEM by repeatedly pushing the moonroof SIC3642 switch to the CLOSE position. The welcome light function will be deac- To activate or deactivate the welcome tivated automatically to prevent battery 2. Push and hold the switch to the light function, perform the following pro- discharge under the following conditions. CLOSE position. cedure. To activate the welcome light function 3. Release the moonroof switch after the 1. Place the ignition switch in the ON again, unlock any door. moonroof moves slightly up and position. . If the welcome light function does not down. 2. Open the driver’s side door. operate within a set duration. Note 4. Push and hold the switch to the OPEN 3. Within 20 seconds after the ignition that the duration is set to 9 days as position to fully tilt the moonroof switch is placed in the ON position, the factory default setting. down. push the door open request switch on . If the welcome light function is acti- 5. Check if the moonroof switch oper- the driver’s side door handle for more vated 15 consecutive times when you ates normally. than 5 seconds with the driver’s door approach and leave the vehicle with If the moonroof does not operate prop- open. the Intelligent Key without the doors erly after performing the procedure 4. A chime sounds when the setting is being unlocked. above, have your moonroof checked and completed. repaired. It is recommended you visit a Once the welcome light function is active, NISSAN dealer for this service. the puddle light and the passenger Instruments and controls 2-67 INTERIOR LIGHTS

telligent Key or door handle request CAUTION switch with the ignition switch in the OFF position. . . Turn off the lights when you leave when any door is opened and then the vehicle. closed with the ignition switch in the OFF position. . Do not use the lights for extended . when any door is opened with the periods of time with the engine ignition switch in the ACC or ON stopped. This could result in a position. discharged battery. — The lights will remain on while the door is opened. When the door is closed, the lights will turn off. When the “Lamp ON When Door Unlocks” key is set to the OFF position (see JVI0760X NissanConnect® Owner’s Manual), the INTERIOR LIGHT SWITCH lights will illuminate under the following condition: ON switch . any door is opened with the ignition When the ON switch is pushed in, the switch in any position map lights and rear personal lights will — remain on while the door is opened. illuminate. When the door is closed, the lights go off. DOOR OFF switch When the switch is pushed in, the map When the switch is not pushed in, the lights and rear personal lights will not map lights and rear personal lights will illuminate under the above condition. illuminate for a period of time under the following conditions: . when the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position. . when doors are unlocked by pushing the UNLOCK button on the In-

2-68 Instruments and controls JVI0759X JVI0758X SIC3250 CONSOLE LIGHT MAP LIGHTS REAR PERSONAL LIGHTS The console light will turn on whenever Push the button as illustrated to turn the Push the button as illustrated to turn the the clearance lights or headlights are light on or off. light on or off. illuminated.

Instruments and controls 2-69 HomeLink® UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER VANITY MIRROR LIGHTS CARGO LIGHT (Type A) (if so equipped)

The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver provides a convenient way to consolidate the functions of up to three individual hand-held transmitters into one built-in device. HomeLink® Universal Transceiver: . Will operate most Radio Frequency (RF) devices such as garage doors, gates, home and office lighting, entry door locks and security systems. . Is powered by your vehicle’s battery. No separate batteries are required. If the vehicle’s battery is discharged or is disconnected, HomeLink® will retain SIC4448 SIC4418 all programming. The light on the vanity mirror will turn on The cargo light switch has three posi- When the HomeLink® Universal Trans- when the cover on the vanity mirror is tions: ON , center and OFF . ceiver is programmed, retain the origi- opened. ON position nal transmitter for future programming procedures (Example: new vehicle pur- When the cover is closed, the light will When the switch is in the ON position , turn off. chases). Upon sale of the vehicle, the the cargo light will illuminate. programmed HomeLink® Universal The lights will also turn off after a Center position Transceiver buttons should be erased period of time when the lights remain When the switch is in the center position for security purposes. For additional illuminated to prevent the battery from information, refer to “Programming becoming discharged. , the cargo light will illuminate when the liftgate is opened. HomeLink®” (P.2-71). OFF position When the switch is in the OFF position , WARNING the cargo light will not illuminate. . Do not use the HomeLink® Uni- versal Transceiver with any garage door opener that lacks safety

2-70 Instruments and controls stop and reverse features as re- PROGRAMMING HomeLink® quired by federal safety stan- The following steps show generic instruc- dards. (These standards became tions how to program a HomeLink® effective for opener models man- button. If you have any questions or are ufactured after April 1, 1982). A having difficulty programming your garage door opener which cannot HomeLink® buttons, refer to the detect an object in the path of a HomeLink® web site at: www.homelink. closing garage door and then com/nissan or call 1-800-355-3515. automatically stop and reverse, NOTE: does not meet current federal safety standards. Using a garage It is also recommended that a new door opener without these fea- battery be placed in the hand-held tures increases the risk of serious transmitter of the device being pro- injury or death. grammed to HomeLink® for quicker . programming and accurate transmis- JVI0428X During the programming proce- sion of the radio-frequency. dure your garage door or security 1. Position the end of your hand-held 2. Using both hands, simultaneously gate will open and close (if the press and hold the desired HomeLink® transmitter is within range). Make transmitter 1-3 in (26-76 mm) away from the HomeLink® surface, keeping button and handheld transmitter but- sure that people or objects are ton. DO NOT release until the clear of the garage door, gate, the HomeLink® indicator light in view. HomeLink® indicator light flashes etc. that you are programming. slowly and then rapidly. When the . Your vehicle’s engine should be indicator light flashes rapidly, both turned off while programming buttons may be released. (The rapid the HomeLink® Universal Trans- flashing indicates successful pro- ceiver. Do not breathe exhaust gramming.) gases; they contain colorless NOTE: and odorless carbon monoxide. Some devices to be programmed Carbon monoxide is dangerous. It may require you to replace Step 2 can cause unconsciousness or with the cycling procedure noted in death. the “Programming HomeLink® for Canadian customers and gate openers” (P.2-72). Instruments and controls 2-71 located near where the hanging an- PROGRAMMING HomeLink® FOR tenna wire is attached to the unit). If CANADIAN CUSTOMERS AND GATE there is difficulty locating the button, reference the garage door opener’s OPENERS manual. Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit) 5. Press and release the “Learn” or “Set” after several seconds of transmission – button. which may not be long enough for NOTE: HomeLink® to pick up the signal during Once the button is pressed, you have programming. Similar to this Canadian approximately 30 seconds to initiate law, some U.S. gate operators are de- the next step. signed to “time-out” in the same manner. 6. Return to the vehicle and firmly press If you live in Canada or you are having and hold the programmed HomeLink® difficulties programming a gate operator JVI0429X button for two seconds and release. or garage door opener by using the Repeat the “press/hold/release” se- “Programming HomeLink®” procedures, 3. Press the button for 2 seconds up to 3 quence up to 3 times to complete replace “Programming HomeLink®” Step times. the programming process. HomeLink® 2 with the following: . should now activate your rolling code If the garage door responds, pro- NOTE: graming is completed. equipped device. When programming a garage door . If the garage door does not re- 7. If you have any questions or are opener, etc., unplug the device during spond, continue with Steps 4-6 for having difficulty programming your the “cycling” process to prevent possi- a rolling code device. A second HomeLink® buttons, refer to the ble damage to the garage door opener person may make the following HomeLink® web site at: www. components. steps easier. Use a ladder or other homelink.com/nissan or call 1-800- device. Do not stand on your vehi- 355-3515. Step 2: Using both hands, simultaneously cle to perform the next steps. press and hold the desired HomeLink® button and the hand-held transmitter 4. At the receiver located on the garage button. During programming, your hand- door opener motor in the garage, held transmitter may automatically stop locate the “Learn” or “Set” button (the transmitting. Continue to press and hold name and color of the button may the desired HomeLink® button while you vary by manufacturer but it is usually press and re-press (“cycle”) your hand- 2-72 Instruments and controls held transmitter every two seconds until PROGRAMMING TROUBLESHOOT- CLEARING THE PROGRAMMED IN- the frequency signal has been learned. ING FORMATION The HomeLink® indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly after several If the HomeLink® does not quickly learn The following procedure clears the pro- seconds upon successful programming. the hand-held transmitter information: grammed information from both buttons. DO NOT release until the HomeLink® . replace the hand-held transmitter Individual buttons cannot be cleared. indicator light flashes slowly and then batteries with new batteries. However, individual buttons can be reprogrammed, see “Reprogramming a sin- rapidly. When the indicator light flashes . position the hand-held transmitter gle HomeLink® button” (P.2-73). rapidly, both buttons may be released. with its battery area facing away from The rapid flashing indicates successful the HomeLink® surface. To clear all programming programming. . press and hold both the HomeLink® 1. Press and hold the two outer Proceed with “Programming HomeLink®” and hand-held transmitter buttons HomeLink® buttons until the indicator step 3 to complete. without interruption. light begins to flash in approximately Remember to plug the device back in . position the hand-held transmitter 1-3 10 seconds. Do not hold for longer when programming is completed. in (26-76 mm) away from the than 20 seconds. HomeLink® surface. Hold the transmit- OPERATING THE HomeLink® UNI- ter in that position for up to 15 2. Release both buttons. VERSAL TRANSCEIVER seconds. If HomeLink® is not pro- HomeLink® is now in the programming The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver, grammed within that time, try holding mode and can be programmed at any after it is programmed, can be used to the transmitter in another position - time beginning with “Programming activate the programmed device. To op- keeping the indicator light in view at HomeLink®” - Step 1. erate, simply press and release the appro- all times. REPROGRAMMING A SINGLE priate programmed HomeLink® Universal If you have any questions or are having HomeLink® BUTTON Transceiver button. The amber indicator difficulty programming your HomeLink® light will illuminate while the signal is buttons, refer to the HomeLink® web site To reprogram a HomeLink® Universal being transmitted. at: www.homelink.com/nissan or 1-800- Transceiver button, complete the following. For convenience, the hand-held transmit- 355-3515. ter of the device may also be used at any 1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® time. button. Do not release the button. 2. The indicator light will begin to flash after 20 seconds. Without releasing the HomeLink® button, proceed with

Instruments and controls 2-73 HomeLink® UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER (Type B) (if so equipped)

“Programming HomeLink®” - Step 1. interference received, including inter- The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver For questions or comments, contact ference that may cause undesired op- provides a convenient way to consolidate HomeLink® at: www.homelink.com/ eration. the functions of up to three individual nissan or 1-800-355-3515. NOTE: hand-held transmitters into one built-in device. The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver Changes or modifications not expressly button has now been reprogrammed. approved by the party responsible for HomeLink® Universal Transceiver: The new device can be activated by compliance could void the user’s . Will operate most Radio Frequency pushing the HomeLink® button that was authority to operate the equipment. (RF) devices such as garage doors, just programmed. This procedure will not For Canada: gates, home and office lighting, entry affect any other programmed HomeLink® door locks and security systems. buttons. This device complies with Industry Ca- . Is powered by your vehicle’s battery. nada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). IF YOUR VEHICLE IS STOLEN No separate batteries are required. If Operation is subject to the following the vehicle’s battery is discharged or is If your vehicle is stolen, you should two conditions: (1) this device may not disconnected, HomeLink® will retain change the codes of any non-rolling code cause interference, and (2) this device all programming. device that has been programmed into must accept any interference, including When the HomeLink® Universal Trans- HomeLink®. Consult the Owner’s Manual interference that may cause undesired ceiver is programmed, retain the origi- of each device or call the manufacturer or operation of the device. nal transmitter for future programming dealer of those devices for additional procedures (Example: new vehicle pur- information. chases). Upon sale of the vehicle, the When your vehicle is recovered, you will programmed HomeLink® Universal need to reprogram the HomeLink® Uni- Transceiver buttons should be erased versal Transceiver with your new trans- for security purposes. For additional mitter information. information, refer to “Programming FCC Notice: HomeLink®” (P.2-75). For USA: This device complies with Part 15 of the WARNING FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device . Do not use the HomeLink® Uni- may not cause harmful interference, versal Transceiver with any gar- and (2) this device must accept any age door opener that lacks safety

2-74 Instruments and controls NOTE: stop and reverse features as required by federal safety stan- If your vehicle is equipped with Smart dards. (These standards became Rearview Mirror, you may have to com- effective for opener models man- plete additional programming to enable ufactured after April 1, 1982). A Two-Way Communication. The mirror garage door opener which cannot can provide the status of your garage detect an object in the path of a door (open/close). closing garage door and then PROGRAMMING HomeLink® automatically stop and reverse, The following steps show generic instruc- does not meet current federal tions how to program a HomeLink® safety standards. Using a garage button. If you have any questions or are door opener without these fea- having difficulty programming your tures increases the risk of serious HomeLink® buttons, refer to the injury or death. HomeLink® web site at: www.homelink. . During the programming proce- com/nissan or call 1-800-355-3515. JVI1689X dure your garage door or security NOTE: HomeLink® buttons (1-3) gate will open and close (if the It is also recommended that a new Indicator light (appears above each transmitter is within range). Make HomeLink® button) sure that people or objects are battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of the device being pro- Status display (where the current condi- clear of the garage door, gate, tion of the HomeLink® is displayed) etc. that you are programming. grammed to HomeLink® for quicker programming and accurate transmis- . Your vehicle’s engine should be sion of the radio-frequency. turned off while programming the HomeLink® Universal Trans- ceiver. Do not breathe exhaust gases; they contain colorless and odorless carbon monoxide. Carbon monoxide is dangerous. It can cause unconsciousness or death.

Instruments and controls 2-75 . 12 inches (15-20 cm). Keep this in If the indicator light rapidly flashes mind if you have difficulty with the in green, firmly press, hold for two programming process. seconds and release the HomeLink® button up to three 3. While the HomeLink® indicator light is times to complete the program- flashing in orange, press and hold the ming process. Do not press the hand-held transmitter button. Con- HomeLink® button rapidly. At this tinue pressing the hand-held trans- point if your device operates, pro- mitter button until the HomeLink® gramming is complete. If the device indicator light changes from orange does not operate or operates but to green and “TRAINED” is displayed on no door status indicator with Two- the lower right of the mirror. You may *1 Way Communication , continue now release the hand-held transmit- with the next step of the program- ter button. ming instructions. NOTE: 6. At the garage door opener motor JVI1639X Some devices to be programmed (security gate motor, etc.), locate the may require you to replace the Step 1. Press and release the HomeLink® “Learn” or “Set” button. This can usual- 3 with the cycling procedure noted button that you would like to pro- ly be found where the hanging anten- in “Programming HomeLink® for Ca- gram. The HomeLink® indicator light na wire is attached to the motor-head nadian customers and gate open- will flash in orange slowly and “TRAIN- unit (see the device’s manual to iden- ers” (P.2-78). ING” is displayed on the lower right of tify this button.). The name and color the mirror (if not, refer to “Clearing the 4. Wait until your garage door has of the button may vary by manufac- programmed information” (P.2-79).). stopped moving before completing turer. 2. Position the hand-held transmitter the next steps. NOTE: (garage door opener remote) 1-3 5. Press the HomeLink® button and ob- A ladder and/or second person may inches (2-8 cm) away from the serve the indicator light. simplify the following steps. Do not HomeLink® button that you would . If the indicator light remains con- stand on your vehicle to perform the light to program. stant green, your device should next steps. NOTE: operate when the HomeLink® but- Some hand-held transmitter (gar- ton is pressed. At this point, if your age door opener remotes) may ac- device operates, programming is tually train better at a distance of 6- complete.

2-76 Instruments and controls HomeLink® web site at: www. NOTE: homelink.com/nissan or call 1-800- A ladder and/or second person may 355-3515. simplify the following steps. Do not stand on your vehicle to perform the *1: Programming Two-Way Communica- next steps. tion 2. On your garage door opener in your To check if your garage door opener is garage, locate the “Learn” or “Set” compatible with this feature, refer to the button (usually near where the hang- homelink.com/compatible/two-way- ing antenna wire is attached to the communication website. If your garage garage door opener). If there is diffi- door opener has this functionality, culty locating this button, refer to the HomeLink® mirror garage door status device’s owner’s manual. indicators may appear after completion of programming. 3. Press and release the “Learn” or “Set” button. NOTE: WAC0258X 4. A light on your garage door opener Example It is possible for the HomeLink® to stop may flash, and your two-way 7. Firmly press and release the “Learn” or working with the garage door system HomeLink® indicators in your vehicle “Set” button until the indicator illumi- shortly after initial programming if the may flash, confirming completion of nates. Once the button is pressed, you Two-Way Communication program- the process. ming is not completed. If this is the have approximately 30 seconds to 5. Pressing the trained HomeLink® but- initiate the next step. case, following the steps below will restore door operation. ton will now activate your garage 8. Return to the vehicle and firmly press, door. The status indicators will show hold for two seconds and release the 1. In your vehicle, press and hold the when the door is moving. HomeLink® button up to three times. trained HomeLink® button for 2 seconds, then release. Confirm that the 6. Your two-way enrollment is now com- Do not press the HomeLink® button plete. rapidly. At this point programming is garage door is moving. When the complete and your device should garage door stops, you will have one operate when the HomeLink® button minute to complete the following is pressed and released. steps: 9. If you have any questions or are having difficulty programming your HomeLink® buttons, refer to the Instruments and controls 2-77 USING THE GARAGE DOOR TWO- Flashing in orange – Opening WAY COMMUNICATION Illuminating in green – Closed HomeLink® has the function of commu- Illuminating in green – Opened nicating with garage door opener sys- The status indicator stops to flash after tems. If your garage door openers are an open/close signal is received or no compatible with HomeLink®, the signal is received within 30 seconds from HomeLink® can: the garage door opener. . receive and display “closing” or “open- PROGRAMMING HomeLink® FOR ing” status from your garage door opener. CANADIAN CUSTOMERS AND GATE . recall and display the garage door OPENERS being “closed” or “opened”. Canadian radio-frequency laws require HomeLink® can receive the status from a transmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit) garage door opener at a range up to 820 JVI1640X after several seconds of transmission – ft (250 m), but it varies depending on the which may not be long enough for environment. You may need to reduce Using two-way communication HomeLink® to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this Canadian vehicle speed to successfully receive the Press and hold the HomeLink® buttons (1 garage door opener communication. law, some U.S. gate operators are de- and 2) simultaneously for 2 seconds to signed to “time-out” in the same manner. recall and display the last recorded garage door status communicated to If you live in Canada or you are having HomeLink®. HomeLink® will display the difficulties programming a gate operator last recorded status for 3 seconds. or garage door opener by using the “Programming HomeLink®” procedures, If two-way communication programming replace “Programming HomeLink®” Step is successful, HomeLink® will display the 3 with the following: status of your garage door opener with the status indicator , which changes NOTE: depending on the status. The garage When programming a garage door door opener status indicator shows the opener, etc., unplug the device during garage door opener status as follows: the “cycling” process to prevent possi- Flashing in orange – Closing ble damage to the device components. Step 3: While the HomeLink® indicator 2-78 Instruments and controls light is flashing in orange, press and . position the hand-held transmitter To clear all programming release (“cycling”) the hand-held transmit- with its battery area facing away from 1. Press and hold the two outer ter button every 2 seconds. Continue to the HomeLink® button. HomeLink® buttons until the indicator . press and release the hand-held trans- press and hold the HomeLink® button light begins to flash in green and mitter button until the HomeLink® indi- and hand-held transmitter button in “CLEARED” is displayed on the mirror, cator light changes from orange to green. each step without interruption. in approximately 10 seconds. Do not When the indicator light illuminates in . position the hand-held transmitter 1 hold for longer than 20 seconds. green, hand-held transmitter button may to 3 in (2 to 8 cm) away from the 2. Release both buttons. be released. HomeLink® button. Hold the transmit- Proceed with “Programming HomeLink®” ter in that position for up to 15 HomeLink® is now in the programming step 4 to complete. seconds. If HomeLink® is not pro- mode and can be programmed at any grammed within that time, try holding time beginning with “Programming Remember to plug the device back in HomeLink®” - Step 1. when programming is completed. the transmitter in another position - for example, 6 to 12 in (15 to 30 cm) REPROGRAMMING A SINGLE OPERATING THE HomeLink® UNI- away, keeping the HomeLink® button HomeLink® BUTTON VERSAL TRANSCEIVER in view at all times. To reprogram a HomeLink® button, com- If you have any questions or are having The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver, plete the following. after it is programmed, can be used to difficulty programming your HomeLink® activate the programmed device. To op- buttons, refer to the HomeLink® web site 1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® erate, firmly press the appropriate pro- at: www.homelink.com/nissan or 1-800- button. DO NOT release the button. grammed HomeLink® button. The 355-3515. 2. The indicator light will illuminate in indicator light will illuminate in green with CLEARING THE PROGRAMMED IN- green, and after 20 seconds it will three parenthesis on the mirror begin to flash in orange and “TRAIN- while the signal is being transmitted. FORMATION ING” is displayed on the mirror. The following procedure clears the pro- 3. Release the HomeLink® button and PROGRAMMING TROUBLESHOOT- grammed information from three but- proceed with “Programming ING tons. Individual buttons cannot be HomeLink®” — Step 3. If the HomeLink® does not quickly learn cleared. However, individual buttons can the hand-held transmitter information: be reprogrammed, see “Reprogramming For questions or comments, contact HomeLink® at: www.homelink.com/ . replace the hand-held transmitter a single HomeLink® button” (P.2-79). nissan or 1-800-355-3515. batteries with new batteries. The HomeLink® button has now been reprogrammed. The new device can be Instruments and controls 2-79 activated by pressing the HomeLink® NOTE: button that was just programmed. This Changes or modifications not expressly procedure will not affect any other pro- approved by the party responsible for grammed HomeLink® buttons. compliance could void the user’s If a new device is not programmed to the authority to operate the equipment. HomeLink® button, it will revert to the For Canada: previously stored programming. This device complies with Industry Ca- IF YOUR VEHICLE IS STOLEN nada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). If your vehicle is stolen, you should Operation is subject to the following change the codes of any non-rolling code two conditions: (1) this device may not device that has been programmed into cause interference, and (2) this device HomeLink®. Consult the Owner’s Manual must accept any interference, including of each device or call the manufacturer or interference that may cause undesired dealer of those devices for additional operation of the device. information. When your vehicle is recovered, you will need to reprogram the HomeLink® Uni- versal Transceiver with your new transmitter information. FCC Notice: For USA: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

2-80 Instruments and controls 3 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Keys ...... 3-2 Canceling a remote engine start ...... 3-20 Intelligent Key ...... 3-2 Conditions the remote engine start will Valet hand-off...... 3-4 not work ...... 3-20 Doors ...... 3-4 Hood ...... 3-21 Locking with mechanical key ...... 3-4 Liftgate ...... 3-22 Opening and closing windows with the Operating manual liftgate...... 3-22 mechanical key ...... 3-5 Operating power liftgate (if so equipped) ...... 3-22 Locking with inside lock knob ...... 3-5 Auto closure ...... 3-25 Locking with power door lock switch...... 3-5 Liftgate release lever ...... 3-26 Automatic door locks ...... 3-6 Fuel-filler door ...... 3-26 Child safety rear door lock ...... 3-6 Opening the fuel-filler door...... 3-26 Intelligent Key system ...... 3-7 Fuel-filler cap ...... 3-27 Intelligent Key operating range ...... 3-9 Tilt/telescopic steering ...... 3-29 Door locks/unlocks precaution ...... 3-9 Electric operation ...... 3-30 Intelligent Key operation ...... 3-10 Sun visors...... 3-30 Battery saver system ...... 3-12 Mirrors...... 3-31 Warning signals ...... 3-12 Inside mirror ...... 3-31 Troubleshooting guide ...... 3-13 Outside mirrors ...... 3-38 Remote keyless entry system ...... 3-15 Vanity mirror ...... 3-40 How to use remote keyless entry system ...... 3-16 Automatic drive positioner (if so equipped)...... 3-40 Remote engine start (if so equipped) ...... 3-19 Entry/exit function ...... 3-40 Remote engine start operating range...... 3-19 Memory storage ...... 3-41 Remote starting the engine ...... 3-19 Setting memory function...... 3-42 Extending engine run time ...... 3-20 System operation ...... 3-42 KEYS

A key number plate is supplied with your keys. Record the key number and keep it in a safe place (such as your wallet), not in the vehicle. If you lose your keys, it is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer for duplicates by using the key number. NISSAN does not record any key numbers so it is very important to keep track of your key number plate. A key number is only necessary when you have lost all keys and do not have one to duplicate from. If you still have a key, it can be duplicated without knowing the key number. JVP0155X SPA2406 Type A (if so equipped) Type C (if so equipped) 1. Intelligent Key (2) 2. Mechanical key (inside Intelligent Key) (2) 3. Key number plate (1) INTELLIGENT KEY Your vehicle can only be driven with the Intelligent Keys which are registered to your vehicle’s Intelligent Key system components and NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System components. As many as 4 In- telligent Keys can be registered and used with one vehicle. The new keys must be registered by a NISSAN dealer prior to use with the Intelligent Key system and NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System of SPA2717 your vehicle. Since the registration pro- Type B (if so equipped) cess requires erasing all memory in the 3-2 Pre-driving checks and adjustments Intelligent Key components when regis- — Do not change or modify the tering new keys, be sure to take all Intelligent Key. Intelligent Keys that you have to the NISSAN dealer. — Do not use a magnet key holder. — Do not place the Intelligent CAUTION Key near an electric appliance such as a television set or . Be sure to carry the Intelligent personal computer. Key with you when driving. The Intelligent Key is a precision de- — Do not allow the Intelligent vice with a built-in transmitter. To Key to come into contact with avoid damaging it, please note water or salt water, and do the following. not wash it in a washing machine. This could affect SPA2033 — The Intelligent Key is water the system function. resistant; however, wetting may damage the Intelligent . If an Intelligent Key is lost or Mechanical key Key. If the Intelligent Key gets stolen, NISSAN recommends To remove the mechanical key, release wet, immediately wipe until it erasing the ID code of that Intel- the lock knob at the back of the Intelli- is completely dry. ligent Key. This will prevent the gent Key. Intelligent Key from unauthorized — Do not bend, drop or strike it use to unlock the vehicle. For To install the mechanical key, firmly insert against another object. information regarding the eras- it into the Intelligent Key until the lock — If the outside temperature is ing procedure, it is recommended knob returns to the lock position. below 14°F (−10°C), the battery you visit a NISSAN dealer. Use the mechanical key to lock or unlock of the Intelligent Key may not the doors and the glove box. function properly. See “Doors” (P.3-4) and “Storage” (P.2-53). — Do not place the Intelligent Key for an extended period in a place where temperatures exceed 140°F (60°C).

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-3 DOORS

CAUTION WARNING

Always carry the mechanical key . Always have the doors locked installed in the Intelligent Key. while driving. Along with the use of seat belts, this provides great- VALET HAND-OFF er safety in the event of an accident by helping to prevent When you have to leave a key with a valet, persons from being thrown from give them the Intelligent Key itself and the vehicle. This also helps keep keep the mechanical key with you to children and others from unin- protect your belongings. tentionally opening the doors, To prevent the glove box from being and will help keep out intruders. opened during valet hand-off, follow the . Before opening any door, always SPA2457B procedures below. look for and avoid oncoming 1. Remove the mechanical key from the traffic. LOCKING WITH MECHANICAL KEY Intelligent Key. . To help avoid risk of injury or The power door lock system allows you to 2. Lock the glove box with the mechan- death through unintended opera- lock or unlock all doors simultaneously ical key. tion of the vehicle and or its using the mechanical key. systems, including entrapment 3. Hand the Intelligent Key to the valet, . Turning the driver’s door key cylinder in windows or inadvertent door keeping the mechanical key in your to the front of the vehicle will lock all lock activation, do not leave chil- pocket or bag for insertion into the doors. dren, people who require the Intelligent Key when you retrieve your . Turning the driver’s door key cylinder vehicle. assistance of others or pets unattended in your vehicle. Addi- once to the rear of the vehicle will See “Storage” (P.2-53). tionally, the temperature inside a unlock the driver’s door. After return- closed vehicle on a warm day can ing the key to the neutral position , quickly become high enough to turning it to the rear again within 5 cause a significant risk of injury seconds will unlock all doors. or death to people and pets. . You can switch the lock system to the mode that allows you to open all the doors when the key is turned once. 3-4 Pre-driving checks and adjustments (See NissanConnect® Owner’s Man- ual.) OPENING AND CLOSING WINDOWS WITH THE MECHANICAL KEY The driver’s door key operation also allows you to open and close all door windows. To open the windows, turn the driver’s door key cylinder to the rear of the vehicle for longer than 1 second. The door is unlocked and the window keeps opening while turning the key. This function can also be performed by pushing and holding the door UNLOCK SPA2744 JVP0319X button of the Intelligent Key. (See “Re- mote keyless entry system” (P.3-15).) LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCK KNOB LOCKING WITH POWER DOOR LOCK To close the windows, turn the driver’s To lock the door individually, move the SWITCH door key cylinder to the front of the inside lock knob to the lock position . Operating the power door lock switch will vehicle for longer than 1 second. The To unlock, move the inside lock knob to lock or unlock all the doors. The switches door is locked and the window keeps the unlock position . are located on the driver’s and front closing while turning the key. Be sure not to leave the Intelligent Key passenger’s door armrests. inside the vehicle. To lock the doors, push the power door lock switch to the lock position . Be sure not to leave the Intelligent Key inside the vehicle. To unlock the doors including the fuel- filler door, push the power door lock switch to the unlock position .

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-5 Lockout protection 4. When activated, the hazard indicator When the power door lock switch (driver will flash twice. When deactivated, the or front passenger) is moved to the lock hazard indicator will flash once. position with any door open, all doors will 5. The ignition switch must be placed in lock and unlock automatically. With the the OFF and ON position again be- Intelligent Key left in the vehicle and any tween each setting change. door open, all doors will unlock automa- When the automatic door unlock system tically and a chime will sound after the is deactivated, the doors do not unlock door is closed. when the ignition switch is placed in the These functions help to prevent the OFF position. To unlock the door manu- Intelligent Key from being accidentally ally, use the inside lock knob or the power locked inside the vehicle. door lock switch (driver’s or front passenger’s side). AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS . All doors lock automatically when the SPA2745 vehicle speed reaches 15 MPH (24 km/h). CHILD SAFETY REAR DOOR LOCK . All doors unlock automatically when Child safety rear door locks help prevent the ignition switch is placed in the OFF doors from being opened accidentally, position. especially when small children are in the The automatic unlock function can be vehicle. deactivated or activated. To deactivate When the levers are in the lock position or activate the automatic door unlock , the rear doors can be opened only system, perform the following procedure: from the outside. 1. Close all doors. To disengage, move the levers to the 2. Place the ignition switch in the ON unlock position . position. 3. Within 20 seconds of performing Step 2, push and hold the power door lock switch to the position (UNLOCK) for more than 5 seconds.

3-6 Pre-driving checks and adjustments INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM

. When the vehicle is parked near a CAUTION parking meter. WARNING In such cases, correct the operating conditions before using the Intelligent . . Be sure to carry the Intelligent Radio waves could adversely af- Key function or use the mechanical key. fect electric medical equipment. Key with you when operating the Those who use a pacemaker vehicle. Although the life of the battery varies should contact the electric med- . Never leave the Intelligent Key in depending on the operating conditions, ical equipment manufacturer for the vehicle when you leave the the battery’s life is approximately 2 years. the possible influences before vehicle. If the battery is discharged, replace it with use. a new one. . The Intelligent Key transmits The Intelligent Key is always communi- Since the Intelligent Key is continuously radio waves when the buttons cating with the vehicle as it receives radio receiving radio waves, if the key is left are pushed. The FAA advises that waves. The Intelligent Key system trans- near equipment which transmits strong the radio waves may affect air- mits weak radio waves. Environmental radio waves, such as signals from a TV craft navigation and communica- conditions may interfere with the opera- and personal computer, the battery life tion systems. Do not operate the tion of the Intelligent Key system under may become shorter. Intelligent Key while on an air- the following operating conditions. For information regarding replacement of plane. Make sure the buttons are . When operating near a location where a battery, see “Intelligent Key battery not operated unintentionally strong radio waves are transmitted, replacement” (P.8-21). when the unit is stored during a such as a TV tower, power station and As many as 4 Intelligent Keys can be flight. broadcasting station. registered and used with one vehicle. For . When in possession of wireless equip- information about the purchase and use The Intelligent Key system can operate all ment, such as a cellular telephone, of additional Intelligent Keys, contact a the door locks using the remote control- transceiver, and CB radio. NISSAN dealer. ler function or pushing the request switch . When the Intelligent Key is in contact on the vehicle without taking the key out with or covered by metallic materials. from a pocket or purse. The operating . When any type of radio wave remote CAUTION environment and/or conditions may af- control is used nearby. fect the Intelligent Key system operation. . . When the Intelligent Key is placed near Do not allow the Intelligent Key, Be sure to read the following before using an electric appliance such as a perso- which contains electrical compo- the Intelligent Key system. nal computer. nents, to come into contact with water or salt water. This could Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-7 affect the system function. This may prevent the unauthorized use of the Intelligent Key to operate the vehicle. . Do not drop the Intelligent Key. For information regarding the erasing . Do not strike the Intelligent Key procedure, it is recommended that you sharply against another object. contact a NISSAN dealer. . Do not change or modify the Intelligent Key. . Wetting may damage the Intelli- gent Key. If the Intelligent Key gets wet, immediately wipe until it is completely dry. . If the outside temperature is below 14°F (−10°C), the battery of the Intelligent Key may not function properly. . Do not place the Intelligent Key for an extended period in an area where temperatures exceed 140°F (60°C). . Do not attach the Intelligent Key with a key holder that contains a magnet. . Do not place the Intelligent Key near equipment that produces a magnetic field, such as a TV, audio equipment and personal computers.

If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen, NISSAN recommends erasing the ID code of that Intelligent Key from the vehicle. 3-8 Pre-driving checks and adjustments SPA2074 SPA2326 INTELLIGENT KEY OPERATING door glass, handle or rear bumper the DOOR LOCKS/UNLOCKS PRECAU- RANGE request switches may not function. TION The Intelligent Key functions can only be When the Intelligent Key is within the . Do not push the door handle request used when the Intelligent Key is within operating range, it is possible for anyone switch with the Intelligent Key held in the specified operating range from the who does not carry the Intelligent Key to your hand as illustrated. The close request switch . push the request switch to lock/unlock distance to the door handle will cause the doors. the Intelligent Key system to have When the Intelligent Key battery is dis- difficulty recognizing that the Intelli- charged or strong radio waves are pre- gent Key is outside the vehicle. sent near the operating location, the . Intelligent Key system’s operating range After locking with the door handle becomes narrower, and the Intelligent request switch, verify the doors are Key may not function properly. securely locked by testing them. . To prevent the Intelligent Key from The operating range is within 31.50 in (80 being left inside the vehicle, make sure cm) from each request switch . you carry the key with you and then If the Intelligent Key is too close to the lock the doors.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-9 . Do not pull the door handle before pushing the door handle request switch. The door will be unlocked but will not open. Release the door handle once and pull it again to open the door. . The Intelligent Key system (opening/ closing doors with the door handle request switch) can be set to remain inactive. (See NissanConnect® Owner’s Manual.) . While the liftgate is in motion by using the power liftgate button on the Intelligent Key, the request switches on the door handles may be disabled. SPA2408 JVP0196X To unlock or lock the doors, use the UNLOCK or LOCK button on the In- INTELLIGENT KEY OPERATION telligent Key. See “How to use remote You can lock or unlock the doors without keyless entry system” (P.3-16). taking the key out from your pocket or bag.

JVP0197X

3-10 Pre-driving checks and adjustments When you carry the Intelligent Key with 3. Push the door handle request switch possession before operating the you, you can lock or unlock all doors by (driver’s or front passenger’s) or the request switch to prevent the pushing the door handle request switch liftgate request switch while carry- Intelligent Key from being left in (driver’s or front passenger’s) or the ing the Intelligent Key with you.*3 the vehicle. liftgate request switch within the range 4. All the doors and fuel-filler door will . of operation. The request switch is operational lock. only when the Intelligent Key has When you lock or unlock the doors or the 5. The hazard indicator flashes twice been detected by the Intelligent liftgate, the hazard indicator will flash and and the outside chime sounds twice. Key system. the horn (or the outside chime) will sound as a confirmation. For details, see “Setting *1: Doors will lock with the Intelligent Key hazard indicator and horn mode” (P.3-17). while the ignition switch is in the ACC or Lockout protection: ON position. To prevent the Intelligent Key from being Welcome light and farewell light *2: Doors will not lock with the Intelligent accidentally locked in the vehicle, lockout function Key while any door is open. protection is equipped with the Intelligent When you lock or unlock the doors *3: Doors will not lock by pushing the door Key system. including the liftgate, the parking lights, handle request switch with the Intelligent When the driver’s side door is open, the tail lights, side marker light and the Key inside the vehicle. doors are locked, and then the Intelligent license plate light will illuminate for a However, when an Intelligent Key is inside Key is put inside the vehicle and all the period of time. The welcome light and the vehicle, doors can be locked with doors are closed; the lock will automati- farewell light function can be disabled. another registered Intelligent Key. cally unlock and the door buzzer sounds. For information about disabling the wel- NOTE: come light and farewell light function, it is recommended you see a NISSAN dealer. CAUTION The doors may not lock when the Intelligent Key is in the same hand that Locking doors and fuel-filler door is operating the request switch to lock . After locking the doors using the 1. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) the door. Put the Intelligent Key in a request switch, make sure that purse, pocket or your other hand. position, push the ignition switch to the doors have been securely the OFF position and make sure you locked by operating the door carry the Intelligent Key with you.*1 handles. 2. Close all the doors.*2 . When locking the doors using the request switch, make sure to have the Intelligent Key in your Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-11 The fuel-filler door will also unlock BATTERY SAVER SYSTEM CAUTION when the driver’s door handle request When all the following conditions are met switch is pushed. for a period of time, the battery saver The lockout protection may not 3. Push the door handle request switch system will cut off the power supply to function under the following condi- again within 60 seconds. prevent battery discharge. tions: 4. The hazard indicator flashes once and . The ignition switch is in the ACC . When the Intelligent Key is placed outside chime sounds once again. All position, and on top of the instrument panel. the doors will unlock. . All doors are closed, and . When the Intelligent Key is placed The liftgate can be unlocked and opened . The shift lever is in the P (Park) inside the glove box or a storage by pushing the liftgate opener switch. See position. bin. “Liftgate” (P.3-22). WARNING SIGNALS . When the Intelligent Key is placed All doors will be locked automatically To help prevent the vehicle from moving inside the door pockets. unless one of the following operations is unexpectedly by erroneous operation of . performed within 1 minute after pushing the Intelligent Key listed on the following When the Intelligent Key is placed the request switch while the doors are inside or near metallic materials. chart or to help prevent the vehicle from locked. If during this 1-minute time period, being stolen, chime or beep sounds inside the request switch is pushed, all doors will and outside the vehicle and a warning Unlocking doors and fuel-filler door be locked automatically after another 1 displays in the vehicle information display. minute. 1. Push the door handle request switch . When a chime or beep sounds or the (driver’s or front passenger’s) or the Opening any door warning displays, be sure to check the liftgate request switch once while . Pushing the ignition switch vehicle and Intelligent Key. carrying the Intelligent Key with you. Power liftgate open (if so equipped) See “Troubleshooting guide” (P.3-13) and When you approach the vehicle with “Vehicle information display” (P.2-20). the Intelligent Key, the puddle light 1. Carry the Intelligent Key. and the passenger cabin illumination 2. Push the power liftgate opener switch will illuminate and stay on for a short . period of time (if so equipped). (See 3. The liftgate will unlock and automati- “Welcome light” (P.2-67).) cally open. 2. The hazard indicator flashes once and 4. The hazard indicator flashes 4 times outside chime sounds once. The cor- and the outside chime sounds. responding door will unlock. 3-12 Pre-driving checks and adjustments TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE Symptom Possible cause Action to take The SHIFT P warning appears on the When pushing the ignition display and the inside warning chime The shift lever is not in the P (Park) Shift the shift lever to the P (Park) switch to stop the engine sounds continuously or for a few sec- position. position. onds. When shifting the shift lever The inside warning chime sounds con- The ignition switch is in the ACC or Push the ignition switch to the OFF to the P (Park) position. tinuously. ON position. position. When opening the driver’s The inside warning chime sounds con- The ignition switch is in the ACC Push the ignition switch to the OFF door to get out of the vehicle tinuously. position. position. The NO KEY warning appears on the display, the outside chime sounds 3 The ignition switch is in the ACC or Push the ignition switch to the OFF times and the inside warning chime ON position. position. sounds for a few seconds. The “REAR DOOR ALERT IS ACTIVATED” When closing the door after message appears on the display, the Open a rear door and check the rear getting out of the vehicle horn sounds three times twice and The rear door alert is activated. seat for all articles to clear the warn- “CHECK BACK SEAT FOR ALL ARTICLES” ing message. warning appears on the display. The SHIFT P warning appears on the The ignition switch is in the ACC or Move the shift lever to the P (Park) display and the outside chime sounds OFF position and the shift lever is position and push the ignition switch continuously. not in the P (Park) position. to the OFF position. When closing the door with The outside chime sounds for a few The Intelligent Key is inside the the inside lock knob turned Carry the Intelligent Key with you. seconds and all the doors unlock. vehicle or cargo area. to LOCK When pushing the request The Intelligent Key is inside the Carry the Intelligent Key with you. switch or the LOCK but- The outside chime sounds for a few vehicle. ton on the Intelligent Key to seconds. lock the door A door is not closed securely. Close the door securely.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-13 Symptom Possible cause Action to take The Intelligent Key is inside the Carry the Intelligent Key with you. When pushing the door han- vehicle or cargo area. The outside chime sounds for a few dle request switch to lock the A door is not closed securely. Close the door securely. seconds. door The door handle request switch is Push the door handle request switch pushed before the door is closed. after the door is closed. The Intelligent Key battery indicator Replace the battery with a new one. The battery charge is low. appears on the display. (See “Battery” (P.8-11).) When pushing the ignition The NO KEY warning appears on the switch to start the engine The Intelligent Key is not in the display and the inside warning chime Carry the Intelligent Key with you. vehicle. sounds for a few seconds. When pushing the ignition The Intelligent Key system warning light It warns of a malfunction with the It is recommended that you contact a switch in the meter illuminates in yellow. Intelligent Key system. NISSAN dealer.

3-14 Pre-driving checks and adjustments REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM

Intelligent Key will not operate when: WARNING . the distance between the Intelligent Key and the vehicle is over 33 ft (10 m). . The Intelligent Key transmits radio the Intelligent Key battery runs down. waves when the buttons are pushed. After locking with the remote keyless The FAA advises that radio waves entry function, pull the door handle to may affect aircraft navigation and make sure the doors are securely locked. communication systems. Do not op- The LOCK/UNLOCK operating range var- erate the Intelligent Key while on an ies depending on the environment. To airplane. Make sure the buttons are securely operate the lock and unlock not operated unintentionally when buttons, approach the vehicle to about 3 the unit is stored for a flight. ft (1 m) from the door.

It is possible to lock/unlock all doors, fuel- JVP0156X filler door, activate the panic alarm and Type A (if so equipped) open the windows by pushing the buttons on the Intelligent Key from outside the vehicle. Before locking the doors, make sure the Intelligent Key is not left in the vehicle. The LOCK/UNLOCK button on the Intelli- gent Key can operate at a distance of approximately 33 ft (10 m) from the vehicle. (The effective distance depends upon the conditions around the vehicle.) As many as 4 Intelligent Keys can be used with one vehicle. For information concerning the purchase and use of additional Intelligent Keys, contact a NISSAN dealer. SPA2718 The lock and unlock buttons on the Type B (if so equipped) Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-15 Locking doors and fuel-filler door 4. The hazard indicator flashes once 1. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) again. All the doors will unlock. position, push the ignition switch to All doors will be locked automatically the OFF position and make sure you unless one of the following operations is carry the Intelligent Key with you.* performed within 1 minute after pushing 2. Close all the doors and the liftgate. the UNLOCK button on the Intelligent Key while the doors are locked. If during this 1- 3. Push the LOCK button on the minute time period, the UNLOCK button Intelligent Key. on the Intelligent Key is pushed, all doors 4. All the doors, the liftgate and fuel-filler will be locked automatically after another door will lock. 1 minute. 5. The hazard indicator flashes twice . Opening any door and the horn chirps once. . Pushing the ignition switch SPA1926B *: Doors will lock with the Intelligent Key Opening windows Type C (if so equipped) while the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position. To open the windows, push the door LOCK button UNLOCK button on the Intelligent UNLOCK button Unlocking doors and fuel-filler door Key for about 3 seconds after the door is Power liftgate button 1. Push the UNLOCK button on unlocked. PANIC button the Intelligent Key once. To stop opening, release the UNLOCK Remote engine start button 2. The hazard indicator flashes once. The button. HOW TO USE REMOTE KEYLESS driver’s door and fuel-filler door will Window cannot be closed using the ENTRY SYSTEM unlock. Intelligent Key. When you lock or unlock the doors or the The puddle light and the passenger The door windows can be opened or liftgate, the hazard indicator will flash and cabin illumination will illuminate and closed by turning the mechanical key in the horn (or the outside chime) will sound stay on for a short period of time (if so a door lock. (See “Doors” (P.3-4).) as a confirmation. For details, see “Setting equipped). (See “Welcome light” (P.2- hazard indicator and horn mode” (P.3-17). 67).) 3. Push the UNLOCK button on the Intelligent Key again within 60 seconds. 3-16 Pre-driving checks and adjustments Opening/closing liftgate (if so pushed for more than 1 second.) equipped) Remote engine start (if so 1. Push the power liftgate button equipped) for more than 1 second. The remote engine start button is 2. The liftgate will automatically open. on the Intelligent Key if the vehicle has The hazard indicator flashes 4 times and remote engine start function. This func- the outside chime sounds for approxi- tion allows the engine to start from mately 3 seconds. outside the vehicle. See “Remote engine To close the liftgate, push the power start” (P.3-19) for more details. liftgate button for more than 1 Setting hazard indicator and horn second. mode The liftgate will automatically close. This vehicle is set in hazard indicator and If the button is pushed while the horn mode when you first receive the liftgate is being opened or closed, the vehicle. liftgate will reverse. In hazard indicator and horn mode, when Using panic alarm the LOCK button is pushed, the hazard indicator flashes twice and the If you are near your vehicle and feel horn chirps once. When the UNLOCK threatened, you may activate the alarm button is pushed, the hazard indicator to call attention as follows: flashes once. 1. Push the PANIC button on the If horns are not necessary, the system Intelligent Key for more than 1 sec- can be switched to the hazard indicator ond. mode. 2. The theft warning alarm and head- In hazard indicator mode, when the LOCK lights will stay on for 25 seconds. button is pushed, the hazard indica- 3. The panic alarm stops when: tor flashes twice. When the UNLOCK . It has run for 25 seconds, or button is pushed, neither the hazard . Any of the buttons on the Intelligent indicator nor the horn operates. Key are pushed. (Note: Panic button or power liftgate button should be Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-17 Hazard indicator and horn mode: Switching procedure: Push the LOCK and UNLOCK DOOR UNLOCK DOOR LOCK buttons on the Intelligent Key simulta- Intelligent Key system HAZARD - twice HAZARD - once neously for more than 2 seconds to (Using door handle request switch) OUTSIDE CHIME - twice OUTSIDE CHIME - once switch the mode from one to the other. Remote keyless entry system HAZARD - twice HAZARD - once When pushing the buttons to set the (Using or button) HORN - once HORN - none hazard indicator mode, the hazard indicator flashes 3 times. Hazard indicator mode: When pushing the buttons to set the hazard indicator and horn mode, the DOOR LOCK DOOR UNLOCK hazard indicator flashes once and the horn chirps once. Intelligent Key system HAZARD - twice HAZARD - none (Using door handle request switch) Remote keyless entry system (Using or button) HAZARD - twice HAZARD - none

3-18 Pre-driving checks and adjustments REMOTE ENGINE START (if so equipped)

Other conditions may affect the remote WARNING engine start function. See “Conditions the remote engine start will not work” (P.3- 20). To avoid risk of injury or death, do not use the remote engine start Other conditions can affect the perfor- function when the vehicle is in an mance of the Intelligent Key transmitter. enclosed area such as a garage. See “Intelligent Key system” (P.3-7) for additional information. REMOTE ENGINE START OPERATING RANGE The remote engine start function can only be used when the Intelligent Key is within the specified operating range from JVP0445X the vehicle. The remote engine start button is on When the Intelligent Key battery is dis- the Intelligent Key if the vehicle has charged or other strong radio wave remote engine start function. This func- sources are present near the operating tion allows the engine to start from location, the Intelligent Key operating outside the vehicle. range becomes narrower, and the Intelli- gent Key may not function properly. Some systems, such as the air conditioner system, will turn on during a remote The remote engine start operating range engine start, if the system was on the is approximately 197 ft (60 m) from the last time the ignition switch was turned vehicle. off. REMOTE STARTING THE ENGINE Laws in some local communities may To use the remote start function to start restrict the use of remote engine starters. the engine, perform the following: For example, some laws require a person 1. Aim the Intelligent Key at the vehicle. using remote engine start to have the vehicle in view. Check local regulations for 2. Push the “LOCK” button to lock all any requirements. doors.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-19 3. Within 5 seconds push and hold the tion is performed. . The extended engine run time has remote engine start button until . The second 10 minutes will start im- expired. the turn signal lights flash and the tail mediately when the remote engine . The first 10 minute timer has expired. lights illuminate. If the vehicle is not start function is performed. For exam- . The engine hood has been opened. within view, push and hold the remote ple, if the engine has been running for . The shift lever is moved out of the P engine start button for at least 2 5 minutes, and 10 minutes are added, (Park) position. seconds. the engine will run for a total of 15 . The theft alarm sounds due to illegal minutes. The following events will occur when the entry into the vehicle. engine starts: . Extending engine run time will count . The ignition switch is pushed without towards the two remote engine start . The front parking lights will turn on an Intelligent Key in the vehicle. limit. and remain on as long as the engine is . The ignition switch is pushed with an A maximum of two remote engine starts, running. Intelligent Key in the vehicle but the or a single start with an extension, are . The doors will be locked and the air brake pedal is not depressed. allowed between ignition cycles. conditioner system may turn on. CONDITIONS THE REMOTE ENGINE . The ignition switch must be cycled to the The engine will continue to run for START WILL NOT WORK about 10 minutes. Repeat the steps to ON position and then back to the OFF extend the time for an additional 10 position before the remote engine start The remote engine start will not operate minutes. See “Extending engine run procedure can be used again. if any of the following conditions are time” (P.3-20). CANCELING A REMOTE ENGINE present: . Depress and hold the brake pedal, then START The ignition switch is placed in the ON place the ignition switch in the ON posi- position. To cancel a remote engine start, perform tion before driving. For further instruc- . The hood is not securely closed. one of the following: tions, see “Driving the vehicle” (P.5-17). . The hazard indicator flashers are on. . Aim the Intelligent Key at the vehicle . The engine is still running. The engine EXTENDING ENGINE RUN TIME and push and hold the remote engine must be completely stopped. Wait at The remote engine start function can be start button until the front park- least 6 seconds if the engine goes extended one time by performing the ing lights turn off. from running to off. This is not applic- steps listed in “Remote starting the en- . Turn on the hazard indicator flashers. gine” (P.3-19). Run time will be calculated able when extending engine run time. . Cycle the ignition switch ON and then as follows: . The remote engine start button is OFF. not pushed and held for at least 2 . The first 10 minute run time will start seconds. when the remote engine start func- 3-20 Pre-driving checks and adjustments HOOD

. The remote engine start button is not pushed and held within 5 seconds of pushing the “LOCK” button. . The brake pedal is depressed. . The doors are not closed and locked. . The liftgate is open. . The Intelligent Key system warning light remains on in the vehicle information display. . An Intelligent Key is left inside the vehicle. . The theft alarm sounds due to illegal entry into the vehicle. . Two remote engine starts, or a single JVP0463X remote engine start with an extension, have already been used. 1. Pull the hood lock release handle . The shift lever is not in the P (Park) located below the instrument panel; hood to fly open and result in an position. the hood will then spring up slightly. accident. . The remote engine start may display a 2. Pull the lever up at the front of the If you see steam or smoke com- warning or indicator in the vehicle infor- hood with your fingertips and raise ing from the engine compart- mation display. For an explanation of the the hood. ment, to avoid injury do not warning or indicator, see “Operational open the hood. indicators” (P.2-23). 3. When closing the hood, slowly close the hood down and make sure it locks into place.

WARNING

. Make sure the hood is completely closed and latched before driving. Failure to do so could cause the

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-21 LIFTGATE

. inserting the mechanical key into the WARNING driver’s door key cylinder and turning it to the rear of the vehicle twice. . Always be sure the liftgate has To close the liftgate, pull down until it been closed securely to prevent it securely locks. from opening while driving. OPERATING POWER LIFTGATE (if so . Do not drive with the liftgate equipped) open. This could allow dangerous To operate the power liftgate, the shift exhaust gases to be drawn into lever must be in the P (Park) position. the vehicle. See “Exhaust gas The power liftgate will not operate if the (carbon monoxide)” (P.5-4). battery voltage is low. . Do not leave children unattended inside the vehicle. They could unknowingly activate switches JVP0464X or controls. Unattended children could become involved in serious OPERATING MANUAL LIFTGATE accidents. To open the liftgate, unlock it and push . Always be sure that hands and the liftgate opener switch . Pull up the feet are clear of the door frame to liftgate to open. avoid injury while closing the The liftgate can be unlocked by: liftgate. . pushing the unlock button on the Intelligent Key twice. . pushing the liftgate request switch with the Intelligent Key carried on you. . pushing the door handle request switch twice with the Intelligent Key carried on you. . pushing the power door lock switch to the unlock position.

3-22 Pre-driving checks and adjustments SPA2547 SPA2548 JVP0214X Power liftgate switch — Instrument panel Intelligent Key Power liftgate main switch The power liftgate operation can be turned on or off by the power liftgate main switch on the instrument panel. When the power liftgate main switch is pushed to the “OFF” position, the power operation is not available by the power liftgate switch on the liftgate and liftgate opener switch. The liftgate can still be operated by the power liftgate switch on the instrument panel and the power liftgate button on the Intelligent Key.

JVP0465X SPA2796 Liftgate opener switch Power liftgate switch — Liftgate Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-23 Power open side chime sounds when the liftgate A pinch sensor is mounted on each side When the liftgate is fully closed, the starts closing. of the liftgate. If an obstacle is detected liftgate will fully open automatically by: NOTE: by the pinch sensor during power close, the liftgate will reverse and return to the . pushing the power liftgate switch When the liftgate is closed, it remains full open position immediately. on the instrument panel unlocked. Manually lock the liftgate. NOTE: . pushing the liftgate opener switch Reverse function . pushing the power liftgate button If the pinch sensor is damaged or The power liftgate will reverse immedi- removed, the power close function will on the Intelligent Key for more than 1 ately if one of the following actions is not operate. second performed during power open or power The hazard flashes 4 times and the out- close. WARNING side chime sounds when the liftgate . pushing the power liftgate switch starts opening. on the instrument panel There is a small distance immedi- NOTE: . pushing the power liftgate button ately before the closed position that on the Intelligent Key. The liftgate can be opened by the cannot be detected. Make sure that . power liftgate switch , the liftgate pushing the liftgate switch on the all passengers keep their hands, etc., opener switch or the power liftgate lower part of the liftgate clear from the liftgate opening be- button even if the liftgate is The outside chime sounds when the fore closing the liftgate. locked. The liftgate will individually un- liftgate starts to reverse. lock and open. Power close Auto reverse function Manual mode When the liftgate is fully opened, the The auto-reverse function enables the If power operation is not available, the liftgate will fully close automatically by: liftgate to automatically reverse when liftgate can be operated manually. Power something is caught in the liftgate as it . operation may not be available if multiple pushing the power liftgate switch is opening or closing. When the control obstacles have been detected in a single on the instrument panel unit detects an obstacle, the liftgate will power cycle or if the battery voltage is . pushing the power liftgate button reverse and return to the full open or full low. When the power liftgate main switch on the Intelligent Key for more than 1 close position. is in the OFF position, the liftgate can be second If a second obstacle is detected, the opened manually by pushing the liftgate . pushing the power liftgate switch liftgate motion will stop and the drive opener switch. If the power liftgate open- on the lower part of the liftgate motor will disengage. The liftgate will er switch is pushed during power open or The hazard flashes 4 times and the out- enter the manual mode. close, the power operation will be can- 3-24 Pre-driving checks and adjustments celed and the liftgate can be operated manually. CAUTION

. If the power liftgate does not stay open or if the liftgate unexpectedly closes at any time, do not operate the liftgate. There may be a pressure loss in one or both of the liftgate gas stays. Have the liftgate inspected. It is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. . Do not activate the power liftgate if one or both of the liftgate gas JVP0466X stays are removed. Damage to the liftgate or power liftgate me- Safe Mode chanisms may occur. If the gas stays of the liftgate lose pressure, the power liftgate safe mode is AUTO CLOSURE activated. When the safe mode is activated, the liftgate intermittently closes. If the liftgate is pulled down to a partly Then the liftgate will be pulled to the open position, the liftgate will pull itself to closed and latched position by a motor. the closed position. The power liftgate cannot be opened Do not apply excessive force when the using the switches at any time in the safe auto closure is operating. Excessive mode. force applied may cause the mechanism to malfunction. Do not operate the liftgate again until it is checked. It is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-25 FUEL-FILLER DOOR

OPENING THE FUEL-FILLER DOOR CAUTION

. The liftgate will automatically CAUTION close from a partly open position. To avoid pinching, keep hands Lock all doors before going through and fingers away from liftgate automatic car wash. Locking doors opening. helps prevent fuel-filler door from opening and becoming damaged. . Do not let children operate the liftgate.

SPA2751 LIFTGATE RELEASE LEVER If the liftgate cannot be opened with the door lock switch due to a discharged battery, follow these steps. 1. Remove the cover inside of the liftgate using a suitable tool. 2. Move the lever as illustrated to open the liftgate. It is recommended you contact a NISSAN dealer as soon as possible for repair.

3-26 Pre-driving checks and adjustments . Push the power door lock switch to can result in a serious malfunc- the UNLOCK position. tion and possible injury. It could To lock, close the fuel-filler door securely also cause the malfunction indi- and lock all doors by operating the door cator light to come on. handle request switch, the LOCK button . Never pour fuel into the throttle on the Intelligent Key, the mechanical key body to attempt to start your or the power door lock switch. vehicle. FUEL-FILLER CAP . Do not fill a portable fuel container in the vehicle or trailer. Static WARNING electricity can cause an explosion of flammable liquid, vapor or gas in any vehicle or trailer. To reduce . Gasoline is extremely flammable the risk of serious injury or death and highly explosive under cer- when filling portable fuel contain- SPA2752 tain conditions. You could be ers: To open the fuel-filler door, unlock the burned or seriously injured if it is misused or mishandled. Always — Always place the container on fuel-filler door by using one of the follow- the ground when filling. ing operations, then push the right side of stop engine and do not smoke or the door. allow open flames or sparks near — Do not use electronic devices the vehicle when refueling. . when filling. Push the driver’s door handle request . switch with the Intelligent Key carried Do not attempt to top off the fuel — Keep the pump nozzle in con- with you. tank after the fuel pump nozzle tact with the container while . shuts off automatically. Contin- you are filling it. Push the passenger’s door handle ued refueling may cause fuel request switch or liftgate request overflow, resulting in fuel spray — Use only approved portable switch twice with the Intelligent Key and possibly a fire. fuel containers for flammable carried with you. . liquid. . Push the UNLOCK button on the Use only an original equipment Intelligent Key. type fuel-filler cap as a replace- . ment. It has a built-in safety valve Insert the mechanical key into the needed for proper operation of door lock cylinder and rotate it to- the fuel system and emission wards the rear of the vehicle. control system. An incorrect cap Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-27 illuminate. CAUTION Turn the cap counterclockwise to re- . If fuel is spilled on the vehicle move. To tighten, turn the cap clockwise body, flush it away with water to until a single click is heard. avoid paint damage. . Insert the cap straight into the fuel-filler tube, then tighten until the fuel-filler cap clicks. Failure to tighten the fuel-filler cap properly may cause the malfunction indicator light (MIL) to illuminate. If the light illuminates because the fuel-filler cap is loose SPA2753 or missing, tighten or install the cap and continue to drive the To remove the fuel-filler cap: vehicle. The light should turn 1. Turn the fuel-filler cap counterclock- off after a few driving trips. If the wise to remove. light does not turn off after a few driving trips, have the vehicle 2. Put the fuel-filler cap on the cap inspected. It is recommended you holder while refueling. visit a NISSAN dealer for this To install the fuel-filler cap: service. 1. Insert the fuel-filler cap straight into . The LOOSE FUEL CAP warning will the fuel-filler tube. appear if the fuel-filler cap is not 2. Turn the fuel-filler cap clockwise until properly tightened. It may take a a single click is heard. few driving trips for the message to be displayed. Failure to tighten the fuel-filler cap properly after the LOOSE FUEL CAP warning appears may cause the Mal- function Indicator Light (MIL) to 3-28 Pre-driving checks and adjustments TILT/TELESCOPIC STEERING

for longer than 1 second to turn off the LOOSE FUEL CAP warning after tigh- WARNING tening the fuel cap. . Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving. You could lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident. . Do not adjust the steering wheel any closer to you than is necessary for proper steering operation and comfort. The driver’s air bag inflates with great force. If you are unrestrained, leaning for- SPA2815 ward, sitting sideways or out of position in any way, you are at greater risk of injury or death in a LOOSE FUEL CAP warning crash. You may also receive ser- The LOOSE FUEL CAP warning appears on ious or fatal injuries from the air the vehicle information display when the bag if you are up against it when fuel-filler cap is not tightened correctly it inflates. Always sit back against after the vehicle has been refueled. It may the seatback and as far away as take a few driving trips for the warning to practical from the steering wheel. be displayed. Always use the seat belts. To turn off the warning, perform the following: 1. Remove and install the fuel-filler cap as soon as possible. (See “Fuel-filler cap” (P.3-27).) 2. Tighten the fuel-filler cap until it clicks. 3. Push the switch on the right side of the combination meter panel

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-29 SUN VISORS

CAUTION

. Do not store the main sun visor before storing the extension sun visor. . Do not pull the extension sun visor forcedly downward.

1. To block out glare from the front, swing down the main sun visor . 2. To block glare from the side, remove the main sun visor from the center SPA2754 mount and swing it to the side . 3. Draw out the extension sun visor ELECTRIC OPERATION from the main sun visor to block from Tilt or telescopic operation further glare. Move the lever to adjust the steering wheel up or down, forward or rearward to the desired position. Entry/Exit function operation (if so equipped): The automatic drive positioner system will make the steering wheel move up automatically when the driver’s door is opened with the ignition switch in the LOCK position. This lets the driver get into and out of the seat more easily. For more information, see “Automatic drive positioner” (P.3-40). SIC3451 3-30 Pre-driving checks and adjustments MIRRORS

SPA2447 SPA2143 SPA2450-A INSIDE MIRROR Manual anti-glare type (if so Automatic anti-glare type (if so Adjust the height and the angle of the equipped) equipped) inside mirror to the desired position. The night position will reduce glare The inside mirror is designed so that it from the headlights of vehicles behind automatically changes reflection accord- you at night. ing to the intensity of the headlights of Use the day position when driving in the following vehicle. daylight hours. The anti-glare system will be automatically turned on when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position. WARNING When the anti-glare system is turned on, the indicator light will illuminate and Use the night position only when excessive glare from the headlights of the necessary, because it reduces rear vehicle behind you will be reduced. view clarity. Push the “*” switch to make the inside rearview mirror operate normally. The

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-31 indicator light will turn off. Push the “I” . Do not disassemble or modify the seat. Then adjust the mirror so as switch to turn the system on. Intelligent Rear View Mirror, the to see the rear window properly. Do not allow any object to cover the camera unit or wirings. If you do, Driving without adjusting the mir- sensors or apply glass cleaner on it may result in accidents or fire. ror may cause difficulty in watch- them. Doing so will reduce the sensitiv- In case you notice smoke or smell ing the display at Intelligent Rear ity of the sensor, resulting in improper coming from the Intelligent Rear View Mirror mode (camera view operation. View Mirror, stop using the sys- mode) due to the reflection from For the HomeLink® Universal Transceiver tem immediately. It is recom- the surface of the mirror. operation, see “HomeLink® Universal mended that you see a NISSAN . If the Intelligent Rear View Mirror Transceiver (Type A)” (P.2-70). dealer for servicing. malfunctions, immediately switch . Do not operate the Intelligent the system to the conventional Intelligent Rear View Mirror (if so Rear View Mirror while driving. rearview mirror mode. equipped) Doing so can be a distraction . When strong light (for example, and it could lose control of your sunlight or high beams from fol- WARNING vehicle and cause an accident or lowing vehicles) enters the cam- serious injury. era, a light beam or a glaring light . Do not gaze into the Intelligent may appear on the monitor Failure to follow the warnings and Rear View Mirror display during screen of the Intelligent Rear instructions for proper use of the driving. It may cause a distraction View Mirror. In that case, switch Intelligent Rear View Mirror could and it could lose control of your the system to the conventional result in serious injury or death. vehicle and cause an accident or rearview mirror mode appropri- . The Intelligent Rear View Mirror is serious injury. ately. a convenience feature but it is not . Do not put a cigarette or flames . If dirt, rain or snow accumulates a substitute for proper vehicle to the Intelligent Rear View Mir- on the exterior glass surface cov- operation. The system has areas ror, the camera unit or wirings. It ering the camera, the Intelligent where objects cannot be viewed. may cause a fire. Rear View Mirror may not display Check the blind spot of the In- . Be sure to adjust the Intelligent objects clearly. Use of the rear telligent Rear View Mirror before window wiper/washer may im- vehicle operation. The driver is Rear View Mirror before driving. Switch the system to the conven- prove visibility, but if not, switch always responsible for safe driv- the Intelligent Rear View Mirror to ing. tional rearview mirror mode and be properly seated on the driver’s the conventional rearview mirror mode until a time the glass cov- 3-32 Pre-driving checks and adjustments ering the camera can be cleaned. Transceiver (Type B)” (P.2-74).

JVP0515X

MENU button Left button Right button Mode select lever HomeLink® buttons (1-3) Components: Intelligent Rear View Mirror provides a clear rearview from a camera located on the rear of the vehicle. Intelligent Rear View Mirror has two modes: conventional rearview mirror mode and Intelligent Rear View Mirror mode (camera view mode). You can switch these two modes by the mode select lever . For the operation of the HomeLink® buttons , see “HomeLink® Universal Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-33 NOTE: . To switch the image quality adjustment items with the MENU button , push the button within 5 seconds after completing the adjustment of the previous item. If 5 seconds or more pass, the monitor will return to MENU (initial screen). . When one of the HomeLink® buttons is pushed, the monitor will display the HomeLink® screen.

JVP0489X JVP0506X

How to change the mode: How to make settings of Intelligent Rear The mode can be switched when the View Mirror: ignition switch is in the ON position. You can choose display settings of the . Pull the mode select lever to switch Intelligent Rear View Mirror such as to the Intelligent Rear View Mirror brightness, camera angle, textual indica- mode (camera view mode). tion ON or OFF and language. . Push the mode select lever to When the Intelligent Rear View Mirror switch to the conventional rearview mode is on, setting menu can be selected mirror mode. by pushing the MENU button . Each time the MENU button is pushed, the setting menu will change as follows: MENU (initial screen) ?BRIGHTNESS ? DOWN/UP ? ROTATION ? INDICATION ? DIMMING MIRROR ? LANGUAGE ? MENU (initial screen)

3-34 Pre-driving checks and adjustments JVP0507X JVP0508X JVP0510X BRIGHTNESS DOWN/UP ROTATION The brightness of the display screen can The vertical camera angle of the display The camera angle of the display screen be adjusted. screen can be adjusted. can be rotated. . Push the left button to dim the . Push the left button to down the . Push the left button to rotate the screen. camera angle. camera angle to the left. . Push the right button to brighten . Push the right button to up the . Push the right button to rotate the the screen. camera angle. camera angle to the right.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-35 JVP0511X JVP0514X JVP0512X INDICATION DIMMING MIRROR LANGUAGE The textual indication can be turned on or The mirror is designed so that it auto- The language of the textual indication off on the Intelligent Rear View Mirror matically changes reflection according to can be selected on the Intelligent Rear display screen. the intensity of the headlights of the View Mirror display screen. . Push the right button to disable the following vehicle. You can enable or Select the language by using the or textual indication on the display disable the automatic anti-glare mode. button. You can select either English or screen. . Push the left button to enable the French. The language setting will be . Push the left button to enable the automatic anti-glare mode. retained even if the engine is restarted. . textual indication on the display Push the right button to disable the Intelligent Rear View Mirror system screen. automatic anti-glare mode. precautions: NOTE: . Long-term use of this system in stopping engine may cause battery to be discharged.

3-36 Pre-driving checks and adjustments . Do not attach an antenna of wireless . The Intelligent Rear View Mirror device near the Intelligent Rear View mode (camera view mode) display Mirror. Electric wave from wireless is different from the conventional device may cause disturbed image rearview mirror. Objects in the disin Intelligent Rear View Mirror. play may differ from actual distance. . Do not push buttons excessively or Do not solely rely on the Intelligent operating the lever roughly may Rear View Mirror. Always rely on cause a system failure or the Intelli- your own operation to avoid acci- gent Rear View Mirror itself to drop. dents. . Never turn the body of Intelligent . If the brightness of the camera view Rear View Mirror by 90° or more. It display is adjusted to excessive may damage the Intelligent Rear bright level, it may cause an eye- View Mirror. strain in the driving. Adjust the . Do not apply strong shocks to the brightness properly. body of Intelligent Rear View Mirror. JVP0559X . Use the rear window wiper when it It may cause a system failure. Flicker image (example) rains. If the camera view image is . Do not apply heavy load to the . When LED headlights are viewed on still unclear when the rear window camera and camera-cover on the the Intelligent Rear View Mirror dis- wiper is in operation, check the rear of the vehicle. It may cause the play, the images may flicker. This is deterioration of the rear window camera to be removed or may cause normal. wiper blade. a system failure. . Due to diffused reflection from ex- . When using the rear window wiper, . If it is difficult to see the Intelligent ternal environment, images on the images on the screen may flicker. Rear View Mirror display screen be- screen may flicker. This is not a This is not a malfunction. cause of a strong external light, malfunction. . Defog the rear window with defros- switch the mode to the conventional . A quick movement of a thing may ter when rear window is fogged. Use rearview mirror mode for better use. not be able to display on the camera the conventional rearview mirror . Close the sunshade (if so equipped) view screen. This is not a malfunc- mode until the rear window is fully when the Intelligent Rear View Mir- tion. defogged. ror display screen is unclear due to . Turn on the headlights at twilight or . The display of the Intelligent Rear strong external light. in a tunnel, etc. View Mirror may become hot. This is not a malfunction.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-37 . The color of an object in the distance OUTSIDE MIRRORS or in the dark may be difficult to be recognized. This is not a malfunction. WARNING System maintenance (Intelligent Rear . Objects viewed in the outside View Mirror): mirror on the passenger side are . Always keep the mirror and camera closer than they appear. Be care- area of the rear window clean. ful when moving to the right. . Clean the mirror and the camera lens Using only this mirror could cause with a dry soft cloth. an accident. Use the inside mirror . When clean the camera area of the or glance over your shoulder to rear window, using a soft cloth dam- properly judge distances to other pend with water and a few neutral objects. detergent. And after, the dry it up with . Do not adjust the mirrors while SPA2739 dry soft cloth. driving. You could lose control of . If the image on the Intelligent Rear your vehicle and cause an acci- Adjusting outside mirrors View Mirror display screen is still un- dent. The outside mirror control switch is clear even after cleaning the camera located on the driver’s door armrest. area of the rear window, an oil film may be adhering to the rear window The outside mirror will operate only when glass. Clean the rear window glass the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON with an oil film remover. position. . Never use alcohol, benzine, thinner, or Move the switch right or left to select the any similar material to clean the right or left side mirror , then adjust mirror or camera lens. It will cause a using the control switch . discoloration, deterioration or a system malfunction. . Do not attach a sticker (including transparent material) on the camera area of the rear window.

3-38 Pre-driving checks and adjustments Defrosting outside mirrors ing. If the mirrors were folded or The outside mirrors will be heated when unfolded by hand, be sure to the rear window defroster switch is adjust them again electrically be- operated. (See “Rear window and outside fore driving. mirror defroster switch” (P.2-36).) The outside mirror remote control operates when the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position. To fold the outside mirrors, push the outside mirror folding switch to the “CLOSE” position . To unfold, push to the “OPEN” position . If mirrors are manually operated or SPA2738 bumped, the mirror body can become loose at the pivot point. To correct Power foldable outside mirrors electronic mirror operation, cycle the mirrors by pushing “CLOSE” until completely closed, then push “OPEN” until the CAUTION mirrors are in the open position. Reverse tilt-down feature (if so . Do not touch the mirrors while they are moving. Your hand may equipped) be pinched, and the mirror may When backing up the vehicle, the right malfunction. and left outside mirrors will turn down- . Do not drive with the mirrors ward automatically to provide better rear stored. You will be unable to see visibility. behind the vehicle. 1. Place the ignition switch in the ON . If the mirrors were folded or position. unfolded by hand, there is a 2. Move the shift lever to the R (Reverse) chance that the mirror will move position. forward or backward during driv- Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-39 AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER (if so equipped)

3. Choose the right or left outside mirror by operating the outside mirror control switch. 4. The outside mirror surfaces move downward. When one of the following conditions has occurred, the outside mirror surfaces will return to their original positions. . The shift lever is moved to any position other than R (Reverse). . The outside mirror control switch is set to the center position. . The ignition switch is placed in the OFF position. SIC4448 JVP0247X SET/memory switches Automatic anti-glare (if so VANITY MIRROR The automatic drive positioner system equipped) To use the front vanity mirror, pull down has three features: the sun visor and pull up the cover. The outside rearview mirrors are de- . Entry/exit function signed so that its automatically change . reflection according to the intensity of Memory storage . the headlights of the vehicle following Setting memory function you. ENTRY/EXIT FUNCTION The anti-glare system will be automati- This system is designed so that the cally turned on when the ignition switch is driver’s seat and steering column will placed in the ON position. automatically move when the automatic transmission shift lever is in the P (Park) position. This allows the driver to get into and out of the driver’s seat more easily. The driver’s seat will slide backward and the steering wheel will move up when the driver’s door is opened with the ignition 3-40 Pre-driving checks and adjustments switch in the LOCK position. Initialize entry/exit function proximately 5 seconds after pushing The driver’s seat and steering wheel will If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the switch. return to the previous positions when the the fuse opens, the entry/exit function When the memory is stored in the ignition switch is pushed to the ACC will not work though this function was set memory switch (1 or 2), a buzzer will position. on before. In such a case, after connect- sound. The driver’s seat will not return to the ing the battery or replacing with a new If memory is stored in the same previous positions if the seat or steering fuse, open and close the driver’s door memory switch, the previous memory adjusting switch is operated when the more than two times after the ignition will be deleted. seat is at the exit position. switch is turned from the ON position to the LOCK position. The entry/exit func- Linking Intelligent Key to a stored Cancel or activate entry/exit function will be activated. memory position tion MEMORY STORAGE The Intelligent Key can be linked to a The shift lever must be in the P (Park) Two positions for the driver’s seat, steer- stored memory position with the follow- position with the ignition switch in the ing column and outside mirrors can be ing procedure. OFF position. stored in the automatic drive positioner 1. Follow the steps for storing a memory The entry/exit function can be activated memory. Follow these procedures to use position. or canceled by pressing and holding the the memory system. 2. While the indicator light for the mem- SET switch for more than 10 seconds. 1. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) ory switch being set is illuminated for The entry/exit function can also be acti- position. 5 seconds, push the button on the vated or canceled if the “Lift Steering 2. Adjust the driver’s seat, steering col- Intelligent Key. If the indicator light Wheel on Exit” key or “Slide Driver Seat umn and outside mirrors to the de- blinks, the Intelligent Key is linked to Back on Exit” key is turned to ON or OFF in sired positions by manually operating that memory setting. the Vehicle settings on the center display. each adjusting switch. For additional Push the ignition switch to the OFF (See NissanConnect® Owner’s Manual.) information, see “Seats” (P.1-3) and position, and then push the button “Tilt/telescopic steering” (P.3-29) and on the Intelligent Key. The driver’s seat, “Outside mirrors” (P.3-38). steering wheel and outside mirrors will 3. Push the SET switch and, within 5 move to the memorized position. seconds, push the memory switch (1 or 2) fully for at least 1 second. The indicator light for the pushed memory switch will stay on for ap- Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-41 Confirming memory storage The driver’s seat, steering column and SYSTEM OPERATION . Push the ignition switch to the ON outside mirrors will move to the The automatic drive positioner system position and push the SET switch. If memorized position or to the exit will not work or will stop operating under the main memory has not been position when the entry/exit function the following conditions: is set to active with the indicator light stored, the indicator light will come . When the vehicle speed is above 0 on for approximately 0.5 second. flashing, and then the light will stay on for approximately 5 seconds. MPH (0 km/h) or 4 MPH (7 km/h) for When the memory has stored in posi- some limited functions such linking an tion, the indicator light will stay on for SETTING MEMORY FUNCTION Intelligent Key to the vehicle when the approximately 5 seconds. The status of the following settings can power source is turned on from off or . If the battery cable is disconnected, or be linked to the Intelligent Key and the during the Exit function. if the fuse opens, the memory will be memorized settings can be available for . When any of the memory switches are canceled. In this case, reset the de- each Intelligent Key. pushed while the automatic drive sired position using the previous pro- . Air conditioner system positioner is operating. cedure. . . When the adjusting switch for the . Navigation system (if so equipped) If optional Intelligent Keys are added . driver’s seat and steering column is to your vehicle, the memory storage Audio system To use the memory function, lock the turned on while the automatic drive procedure to switch 1 or 2 and linking positioner is operating. Intelligent Key procedure to a stored doors with the Intelligent Key that is . When the seat has already been memory position should be per- linked to the settings. moved to the memorized position. formed again for each Intelligent Key. To enable the memorized settings: . When no seat position is stored in the For additional Intelligent Key informa- 1. Carry the Intelligent Key that is linked tion, see “Keys” (P.3-2). memory switch. to the settings, and unlock the doors . When the shift lever is moved from the Selecting the memorized position by pushing the driver’s door handle P (Park) position to any other position. request switch or “UNLOCK” but- 1. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) ton on the Intelligent Key. position. 2. Place the ignition switch in the ON 2. Use one of the following methods to position. “Connection with the key has move the driver’s seat, the outside been done” will be displayed on the mirrors and the steering wheel. screen and the memorized settings . Push the memory switch (1 or 2) are available (only when a new Intel- fully for at least 1 second. ligent Key is used).

3-42 Pre-driving checks and adjustments 4 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

NissanConnect® Owner’s Manual ...... 4-2 Turning on and off the sonar function ...... 4-26 Safety note ...... 4-2 Sonar system limitations ...... 4-27 RearView Monitor (if so equipped) ...... 4-3 System temporarily unavailable ...... 4-28 RearView Monitor system operation ...... 4-4 System maintenance ...... 4-28 How to read the displayed lines ...... 4-4 Moving Object Detection (MOD) ...... 4-29 Difference between predictive and actual MOD system operation ...... 4-30 distances...... 4-5 Turning on and off the MOD system ...... 4-31 How to park with predictive course lines ...... 4-6 MOD system limitations ...... 4-32 Sonar indicator ...... 4-7 System maintenance ...... 4-33 Adjusting the screen ...... 4-8 Ventilators ...... 4-34 Predictive course line settings ...... 4-8 Center ventilators ...... 4-34 RearView Monitor system limitations...... 4-8 Side ventilators ...... 4-34 System maintenance ...... 4-9 Rear ventilators...... 4-34 Intelligent Around View Monitor Heater and air conditioner...... 4-35 (if so equipped) ...... 4-10 Automatic air conditioner ...... 4-36 Intelligent Around View Monitor system Rear automatic air conditioning system...... 4-39 operation ...... 4-12 Operating tips ...... 4-43 How to adjust the screen view...... 4-19 Linking Intelligent Key (if so equipped)...... 4-43 Intelligent Around View Monitor settings ...... 4-20 In-cabin microfilter ...... 4-43 Intelligent Around View Monitor Servicing air conditioner...... 4-43 system limitations ...... 4-22 Antenna ...... 4-43 System maintenance ...... 4-24 Window antenna ...... 4-43 Camera aiding sonar function (models with Intelligent Around View Monitor) ...... 4-25 Satellite antenna ...... 4-44 Sonar system operation...... 4-25 Car phone or CB radio ...... 4-44 NISSANCONNECT® OWNER’S MANUAL SAFETY NOTE

For models with NissanConnect® with Navigation (if so equipped) and Services WARNING CAUTION (if so equipped), refer to the NissanCon- nect® Owner’s Manual regarding the fol- . Do not disassemble or modify Do not use the system when the lowing information. this system. If you do, it may engine is not running for extended . Audio system result in accidents, fire, or electric periods of time to prevent battery . Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone shock. discharge. . NissanConnect® Services . Do not use this system if you . SiriusXM TrafficTM notice any abnormality, such as Do not attempt to operate the system in . SiriusXM® Travel Link a frozen screen or lack of sound. extreme temperature conditions [below −4°F (−20°C) and above 158°F (70°C)]. . SiriusXM® Radio Continued use of the system may Operating this system under these con- . result in accident, fire or electric Navigation system shock. ditions may result in system malfunc- . Voice Recognition System . tions. . In case you notice any foreign Information and settings viewable on object in the system hardware, NissanConnect® spill liquid on it, or notice smoke or smell coming from it, stop using the system immediately. It is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer for servicing. Ignoring such conditions may lead to accidents, fire, or electric shock. . Park the vehicle in a safe location and apply the parking brake to view the images on the front center display screen.

4-2 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems REARVIEW MONITOR (if so equipped)

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the RearView Monitor system could result in serious injury or death. . The RearView Monitor is a convenience but it is not a substitute for proper backing. Always turn and look out the windows, and check mirrors to be sure that it is safe to move before operating the vehicle. Always back up slowly. . The system is designed as an aid to the driver in showing large stationary objects directly behind the vehicle, to help avoid damaging the vehicle. . The distance guide line and the vehicle width line should be used JVH1688X as a reference only when the vehicle is on a level paved sur- 1. SETTING button face. The distance viewed on the monitor is for reference only and may be different than the actual distance between the vehicle and displayed objects.

Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-3 CAUTION

Do not scratch the camera lens when cleaning dirt or snow from the front of camera.

The RearView Monitor system automatically shows a rear view of the vehicle when the shift lever is placed in the R (Reverse) position. The radio can still be heard while the RearView Monitor is active. JVH1395X SAA1896 To display the rear view, the RearView HOW TO READ THE DISPLAYED Monitor system uses a camera located LINES just above the vehicle’s license plate. Guiding lines which indicate the vehicle REARVIEW MONITOR SYSTEM OP- width and distances to objects with ERATION reference to the bumper line are With the ignition switch in the ON posi- displayed on the monitor. tion, move the shift lever to the R Distance guide lines: (Reverse) position to operate the Rear- Indicate distances from the bumper. View Monitor. . Red line : approx. 1.5 ft (0.5 m) . Yellow line : approx. 3 ft (1 m) . Green line : approx. 7 ft (2 m) . Green line (if so equipped): approx. 10 ft (3 m) Vehicle width guide lines : Indicate the approximate vehicle width 4-4 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems when backing up. Predictive course lines : Indicate the predictive course when backing up. The predictive course lines will be displayed on the monitor when the shift lever is in the R (Reverse) position and the steering wheel is turned. The predictive course lines will move depending on how much the steering wheel is turned and will not be displayed while the steering wheel is in the neutral position. The vehicle width guide lines and the width of the predictive course lines are wider than the actual width and course. DIFFERENCE BETWEEN PREDICTIVE AND ACTUAL DISTANCES The displayed guidelines and their locations on the ground are for approximate reference only. Objects on uphill or downhill surfaces or projecting objects will be actually located at distances different from those displayed in the monitor JVH1214X JVH1215X relative to the guidelines (refer to illustrations). When in doubt, turn around and view the objects as you are backing up, or Backing up on a steep uphill Backing up on a steep downhill park and exit the vehicle to view the When backing up the vehicle up a hill, the When backing up the vehicle down a hill, positioning of objects behind the vehicle. distance guide lines and the vehicle width the distance guide lines and the vehicle guide lines are shown closer than the width guide lines are shown farther than actual distance. Note that any object on the actual distance. Note that any object the hill is farther than it appears on the on the hill is closer than it appears on the monitor. monitor.

Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-5 position if the object projects over the actual backing up course. HOW TO PARK WITH PREDICTIVE COURSE LINES

WARNING

. If the tires are replaced with different sized tires, the predictive course line may not be displayed correctly. . On a snow-covered or slippery road, there may be a difference between the predictive course line and the actual course line. . The displayed lines will appear slightly off to the right because the rearview camera is not installed in the rear center of the vehicle.

SAA1923 JVH1216X

Backing up near a projecting object Backing up behind a projecting The predictive course lines do not object touch the object in the display. However, The position is shown farther than the the vehicle may hit the object if it projects position in the display. However, the over the actual backing up course. position is actually at the same distance as the position . The vehicle may hit the object when backing up to the 4-6 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 5. When the vehicle is parked in the space completely, move the shift lever to the P (Park) position and apply the parking brake. SONAR INDICATOR When the sonar system is ON, the sonar indicator will appear in the display. (See “Sonar system” (P.5-127).)

SAA1897 SAA1898 1. Visually check that the parking space 3. Slowly back up the vehicle adjusting is safe before parking your vehicle. the steering wheel so that the pre- 2. The rearview of the vehicle is dis- dictive course lines enter the park- played on the screen when the shift ing space . lever is moved to the R (Reverse) 4. Maneuver the steering wheel to make position. the vehicle width guide lines parallel to the parking space while referring to the predictive course lines. Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-7 screen is not displayed. Push the SETTING REARVIEW MONITOR SYSTEM LIM- button and select “Camera/Sonar” key, ITATIONS and then select “Display” key. NOTE: WARNING Do not adjust any of the display settings of the RearView Monitor while the vehicle is moving. Make sure the park- Listed below are the system limita- ing brake is firmly applied. tions for RearView Monitor. Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance PREDICTIVE COURSE LINE SET- with these system limitations could TINGS result in serious injury or death. To toggle on and off the predictive course . The system cannot completely lines: eliminate blind spots and may not show every object. JVH1690X 1. Push the SETTING button while the RearView Monitor screen is not dis- . Underneath the bumper and the ADJUSTING THE SCREEN played. corner areas of the bumper can- The display settings such as Brightness, 2. Select “Camera/Sonar” key. not be viewed on the RearView Contrast, Black Level, Tint and Color of 3. Select “Camera” key. Monitor because of its monitoring the RearView Monitor can be adjusted. range limitation. The system will 4. Select “Predictive Course Lines” key to not show small objects below the 1. Push the SETTING button while the turn the feature on or off. When this bumper, and may not show ob- RearView Monitor screen is displayed. item is turned on, the predictive jects close to the bumper or on 2. The Display settings menu is dis- course lines will be displayed on the the ground. monitor. played. Select an item you wish to . Objects viewed in the RearView adjust. Monitor differ from actual dis- 3. Adjust the selected item by touching tance because a wide-angle lens the “+” or “-” key. is used. Select “Reset Settings” key to return all . Objects in the RearView Monitor settings to default. will appear visually opposite Display settings menu can also be ac- compared to when viewed in the cessed while the RearView Monitor rearview and outside mirrors. 4-8 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems . . Use the displayed lines as a re- When strong light is directly coming ference. The lines are highly af- on the camera, objects may not be fected by the number of displayed clearly. occupants, fuel level, vehicle po- . Vertical lines may be seen in objects sition, road conditions and road on the screen. This is due to strong grade. reflected light from the bumper. . . Make sure that the liftgate is The screen may flicker under fluores- securely closed when backing up. cent light. . The colors of objects on the RearView . Do not put anything on the rear- Monitor may differ somewhat from view camera. The rearview cam- the actual color of objects. era is installed above the license . plate. Objects on the monitor may not be clear in a dark environment. . When washing the vehicle with . There may be a delay when switching high-pressure water, be sure not JVH1395X to the RearView Monitor. to spray it around the camera. . Otherwise, water may enter the When activating the RearView Moni- SYSTEM MAINTENANCE camera unit causing water con- tor, the guide lines, the icons and the densation on the lens, a malfunc- messages may not be displayed for a tion, fire or an electric shock. while. CAUTION . If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on . Do not strike the camera. It is a the camera, the RearView Monitor . Do not use alcohol, benzine or precision instrument. Otherwise, may not display object clearly. Clean thinner to clean the camera. This it may malfunction or cause da- the camera. will cause discoloration. To clean mage resulting in a fire or an . the camera, wipe with a cloth electric shock. Do not use wax on the camera window. Wipe off any wax with a clean dampened with diluted mild cloth dampened with mild detergent cleaning agent and then wipe The following are operating limitations diluted with water. with a dry cloth. and do not represent a system malfunc- . tion: Do not damage the camera as the monitor screen may be adversely . When the temperature is extremely affected. high or low, the screen may not clearly display objects. Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-9 INTELLIGENT AROUND VIEW MONITOR (if so equipped)

If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on the camera , RearView Monitor may not display objects clearly. Clean the camera by wiping it with a cloth dampened with a diluted mild cleaning agent and then wiping it with a dry cloth.

JVH1689X

1. CAMERA button 2. SETTING button

4-10 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems the front of the vehicle. WARNING CAUTION . Rear-wide view An approximately 180-degree view of Failure to follow the warnings and Do not scratch the lens when clean- the rear of the vehicle. instructions for the proper use of the ing dirt or snow from the front of the Intelligent Around View Monitor sys- camera. tem could result in serious injury or death. The Intelligent Around View Monitor sys- . The Intelligent Around View Moni- tem is designed as an aid to the driver in tor is a convenience feature and situations such as slot parking or parallel is not a substitute for proper parking. vehicle operation because it has The monitor displays various views of the areas where objects cannot be position of the vehicle in a split screen viewed. The four corners of the format. All views are not available at all vehicle in particular, are areas times. where objects do not always ap- Available views: pear in the bird’s-eye, front, or rear views. Always check your . Front view surroundings to be sure that it is An approximately 150-degree view of safe to move before operating the front of the vehicle. the vehicle. Always operate the . Rear view vehicle slowly. An approximately 150-degree view of . The driver is always responsible the rear of the vehicle. for safety during parking and . Bird’s-eye view other maneuvers. The surrounding view of the vehicle from above. . Front-side view The view around and ahead of the front passenger’s side wheel. . Front-wide view An approximately 180-degree view of Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-11 Available views . Objects in the monitor will appear visually opposite compared to when viewed in the rearview and WARNING outside mirrors. . . The distance guide lines and the Use the mirrors or actually look to vehicle width lines should be properly judge distances to other used as a reference only when objects. the vehicle is on a paved, level . The distance between objects surface. The apparent distance viewed in the rear view differs viewed on the monitor may be from actual distance because a different than the actual distance wide-angle lens is used. between the vehicle and dis- . On a snow-covered or slippery played objects. road, there may be a difference JVH1397X . Use the displayed lines and the between the predictive course bird’s-eye view as a reference. line and the actual course line. To display the multiple views, the Intelli- The lines and the bird’s-eye view . gent Around View Monitor system uses The vehicle width and predictive are greatly affected by the num- cameras located in the front grill, on the course lines are wider than the ber of occupants, fuel level, vehi- vehicle’s outside mirrors and one just actual width and course. cle position, road condition and above the vehicle’s license plate. . The displayed lines on the rear road grade. INTELLIGENT AROUND VIEW MONI- view will appear slightly off to the . If the tires are replaced with right because the rearview cam- TOR SYSTEM OPERATION different sized tires, the predic- era is not installed in the rear With the ignition switch in the ON positive course lines and the bird’s- center of the vehicle. tion, move the shift lever to the R eye view may be displayed incor- (Reverse) position or press the CAMERA rectly. button to operate the Intelligent Around . When driving the vehicle up a hill, View Monitor. objects viewed in the monitor are further than they appear. When driving the vehicle down a hill, objects viewed in the monitor are closer than they appear. 4-12 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems Front and rear view: NOTE: Guiding lines that indicate the approx- When the monitor displays the front imate vehicle width and distances to view and the steering wheel turns objects with reference to the vehicle body about 90 degrees or less from the line are displayed on the monitor. straight ahead position, both the right and left predictive course lines are Distance guide lines displayed. When the steering wheel Indicate distances from the vehicle body. turns about 90 degrees or more, a line . Red line : approx. 1.5 ft (0.5 m) is displayed only on the opposite side of . Yellow line : approx. 3 ft (1 m) the turn. . Green line : approx. 7 ft (2 m) . Green line (if so equipped): approx. 10 ft (3 m) SAA1840 Vehicle width guide lines Front view Indicate the approximate vehicle width. Predictive course lines Indicate the predictive course when operating the vehicle. The predictive course lines will be displayed on the monitor when the steering wheel is turned. The predictive course lines will move depending on how much the steering wheel is turned and will not be displayed while the steering wheel is in the straight-ahead position. The front view will not be displayed when the vehicle speed is above 6 MPH (10 km/h).

SAA1896 Rear view

Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-13 placed in the ON position. . Tall objects, such as a curb or Predictive course lines ( and ) indicate vehicle, may be misaligned or not the predictive course when operating the displayed at the seam of the vehicle. The predictive course lines will be views. displayed on the monitor when the steer- . Objects that are above the cam- ing wheel is turned. The predictive course era cannot be displayed. lines will move depending on how much . the steering wheel is turned and will not The view for the bird’s-eye view be displayed while the steering wheel is in may be misaligned when the the straight-ahead position. camera position alters. . When the monitor displays the front view A line on the ground may be and the steering wheel turns about 90 misaligned and is not seen as degrees or less from the straight-ahead being straight at the seam of the position, the two green predictive course views. The misalignment will in- WAE0224X lines are shown in front of the vehicle. crease as the line proceeds away from the vehicle. Bird’s-eye view: When the steering wheel turns about 90 degrees or more, one green predictive The bird’s-eye view shows the overhead course line is shown in front of the view of the vehicle, which helps confirm vehicle and the other green predictive the vehicle position and the predictive course line is shown at side of the course to a parking space. vehicle. The vehicle icon shows the position of When the monitor displays the rear view, the vehicle. Note that the size of the the predictive course lines are shown at vehicle icon on the bird’s-eye view may back of the vehicle. differ somewhat from the actual distance to the vehicle. The areas that the cameras cannot cover WARNING are indicated in black. The non-viewable area is highlighted in . Objects in the bird’s-eye view will yellow for several seconds after the bird’s- appear further than the actual eye view is displayed. It will be shown only distance. the first time after the ignition switch is 4-14 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems CAUTION

The turn signal light may look like the side-of-vehicle line. This is not a malfunction.

JVH1141X JVH1142X Front-wide view Front-side view: Guiding lines: Guiding lines that indicate the width and the front end of the vehicle are displayed on the monitor. The front-of-vehicle line shows the front part of the vehicle. The side-of-vehicle line shows the vehicle width including the outside mirrors. The extensions of both the front and side lines are shown with a green dotted line. JVH1143X Rear-wide view Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-15 Front-wide/rear-wide view: Difference between predicted and The front-wide/rear-wide view shows a actual distances wider area on the entire screen and The displayed guidelines and their loca- allows the checking of the blind corners tions on the ground are for approximate on the right and left sides. The front- reference only. Objects on uphill or down- wide/rear-wide view displays an approxi- hill surfaces or projecting objects will be mately 180-degree area while the front actually located at distances different view and the rear view display an ap- from those displayed in the monitor proximately 150-degree area. The predic- relative to the guidelines (refer to illustra- tive course lines are not displayed when tions). When in doubt, turn around and using the front-wide/rear-wide view. view the objects as you are backing up, or Distance guide lines park and exit the vehicle to view the Indicates distances from the vehicle body. positioning of objects behind the vehicle. . Red line : approx. 1.5 ft (0.5 m) . Yellow line : approx. 3 ft (1 m) . Green line : approx. 7 ft (2 m) . Green line (if so equipped): approx. 10 ft (3 m) Vehicle width guide lines Indicates the approximate vehicle width.

JVH1214X

Backing up on a steep uphill: When backing up the vehicle up a hill, the distance guide lines and the vehicle width guide lines are shown closer than the actual distance. Note that any object on the hill is further than it appears on the monitor.

4-16 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems JVH1215X SAA1923 JVH1216X

Backing up on a steep downhill: Backing up near a projecting object: Backing up behind a projecting object: When backing up the vehicle down a hill, The predictive course lines do not The position is shown further than the the distance guide lines and the vehicle touch the object in the display. However, position in the display. However, the width guide lines are shown further than the vehicle may hit the object if it projects position is actually at the same dis- the actual distance. Note that any object over the actual backing up course. tance as the position . The vehicle may on the hill is closer than it appears on the hit the object when backing up to the monitor. position if the object projects over the actual backing up course. Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-17 How to park with predictive course lines

WARNING

. If the tires are replaced with different sized tires, the predictive course lines may be displayed incorrectly. . On a snow-covered or slippery road, there may be a difference between the predictive course line and the actual course line. . If the battery is disconnected or becomes discharged, the predictive course lines may be displayed incorrectly. If this occurs, drive the vehicle on a straight road for more than 5 minutes.

WAE0225X JVH1690X

How to switch the display HOW TO ADJUST THE SCREEN VIEW The Intelligent Around View Monitor can The display settings such as Brightness, display two split views as well as a single Contrast, Black Level, Tint and Color of view of the front-wide view or rear-wide the Intelligent Around View Monitor can view. Push the CAMERA button, change be adjusted. the shift lever position, or select the 1. Push the SETTING button with the “Change View” key to switch between Intelligent Around View Monitor the available views. turned on. For models with the Intelligent Back-up 2. The Display settings menu is dis- Intervention (I-BI) system, “ ” key may played. Select an item you wish to be displayed on the Intelligent Around adjust. View Monitor screen when the shift lever 3. Adjust the selected item by touching is in the R (Reverse) position. For details of the “+” or “-” key. the I-BI system, see “Intelligent Back-up Intervention (I-BI)” (P.5-53). Select “Reset Settings” key to return all settings to default.

Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-19 NOTE: Do not adjust any of the display settings of the Intelligent Around View Monitor while the vehicle is moving. Make sure the parking brake is firmly applied. Display settings menu can also be ac- cessed while the Intelligent Around View Monitor screen is not displayed. See “Intelligent Around View Monitor settings” (P.4-20). INTELLIGENT AROUND VIEW MONI- TOR SETTINGS To set up the Intelligent Around View Monitor to your preferred settings, push the SETTING button while the Intelligent Around View Monitor screen is not displayed, select the “Camera/Sonar” key. Items displayed on the screen may vary depending on the specification and model.

4-20 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems Available setting items: Setting item Action Camera Back-up Collision Intervention Intelligent Back-up Intervention (I-BI) system on/off. See “Intelligent Back-up Intervention (I-BI)” (P.5-53). Moving Object Detection Turn the MOD system on/off. See “Moving Object Detection (MOD)” (P.4-29). Non-viewable Area Reminder When this item is turned on, the non-viewable area is highlighted in yellow for several seconds after the bird’s-eye view is displayed. It will be shown only the first time after the ignition switch is placed in the ON position. Predictive Course Lines When this item is turned on, the predictive course lines are displayed in the front and the rear view and bird’s-eye view. Automatic Display with Sonar The automatic sonar display can be turned on/off.

Sonar For the information about the sonar, see “Camera aiding sonar function (models with Intelligent Around View Monitor)” (P.4-25). Display Brightness Adjust display settings by touching the “+”/“-” key. Contrast Black Level Tint Color Reset Settings Return all the settings to default.

Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-21 . INTELLIGENT AROUND VIEW MONI- Otherwise, water may enter the The colors of objects on the Intelligent TOR SYSTEM LIMITATIONS camera unit causing water con- Around View Monitor may differ densation on the lens, a malfunc- somewhat from the actual color of tion, fire or an electric shock. objects. WARNING . Objects on the monitor may not be . Do not strike the cameras. They clear and the color of the object may are precision instruments. Doing Listed below are the system limita- differ in a dark environment. so could cause a malfunction or . tions for Intelligent Around View cause damage resulting in a fire There may be differences in sharpness Monitor. Failure to operate the vehi- or an electric shock. between each camera view of the cle in accordance with these system bird’s-eye view. limitations could result in serious . When activating the Intelligent Around injury or death. The following are operating limitations and do not represent a system malfunc- View Monitor, the icons and the mes- . Do not use the Intelligent Around tion: sages may not be displayed for a while. View Monitor with the outside . The screen displayed on the Intelligent . If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on mirrors in the stored position, Around View Monitor will automati- the camera, the Intelligent Around and make sure that the liftgate cally return to the previous screen 3 View Monitor may not display objects is securely closed when operating minutes after the CAMERA button has the vehicle using the Intelligent clearly. Clean the camera. been pushed while the shift lever is in . Around View Monitor. a position other than the R (Reverse) Do not use wax on the camera lens. . The apparent distance between position. Wipe off any wax with a clean cloth that has been dampened with a objects viewed on the Intelligent . There may be a delay when switching diluted mild cleaning agent, then wipe Around View Monitor differs from between views. with a dry cloth. the actual distance. . When the temperature is extremely . The cameras are installed on the high or low, the screen may not front grille, the outside mirrors display objects clearly. and above the rear license plate. . When strong light directly shines on Do not put anything on the vehi- the camera, objects may not be dis- cle that covers the cameras. played clearly. . When washing the vehicle with . The screen may flicker under fluores- high pressure water, be sure not cent light. to spray it around the cameras.

4-22 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems not appear in the monitor .

JVH1633X

System temporarily unavailable When the “ ” icon is displayed on the screen, there will be abnormal conditions in the Intelligent Around View Monitor. This will not hinder normal driving operation but the system should be inspected. It is recommended you visit a NISSAN JVH1399X dealer for inspecting. There are some areas where the system will not show objects and the system does not warn of moving objects. When in the front or the rear view display, an object below the bumper or on the ground may not be viewed . When in the bird’s-eye view, a tall object near the seam of the camera viewing areas will Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-23 If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on any of the cameras , the Intelligent Around View Monitor may not display objects clearly. Clean the camera by wiping with a cloth dampened with a diluted mild cleaning agent and then wiping with a dry cloth.

JVH1634X JVH1397X When the “ ” icon is displayed on the SYSTEM MAINTENANCE screen, the camera image may be receiving temporary electronic disturbances from surrounding devices. This will not CAUTION hinder normal driving operation. How- ever, if it occurs frequently, the system . Do not use alcohol, benzine or should be inspected. It is recommended thinner to clean the camera. This you visit a NISSAN dealer. will cause discoloration. To clean the camera, wipe with a cloth dampened with diluted mild cleaning agent and then wipe with a dry cloth. . Do not damage the camera as the monitor screen may be adversely affected.

4-24 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems CAMERA AIDING SONAR FUNCTION (models with Intelligent Around View Monitor)

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the sonar function as outlined in this section could result in serious injury or death. . The sonar is a convenience feature. It is not a substitute for proper parking. . This function is designed as an aid to the driver in detecting large stationary objects to help avoid damaging the vehicle. . The driver is always responsible for safety during parking and other maneuvers. . Always look around and check that it is safe to move before parking. . Read and understand the limita- WAE0226X tions of the sonar as contained in this section. 1. Center display SONAR SYSTEM OPERATION 2. Sonar indicator The system gives the tone for front The sonar function helps to inform the 3. CAMERA button objects when the shift lever is in the D (Drive) position and both front and rear driver of large stationary objects around 4. SETTING button the vehicle when parking by issuing an objects when the shift lever is in the R audible and visual alert. (Reverse) position. When the camera image is shown on the

Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-25 center display, the system shows the . When the CAMERA button is pushed sonar indicator regardless of the shift and a screen other than the camera lever position. view is shown on the display. The system is deactivated at speeds . When vehicle speed decreases below above 6 MPH (10 km/h). It is reactivated approximately 6 MPH (10 km/h). at lower speeds. . When the ignition switch is placed in The colors of the sonar indicators and the the OFF position and turned back to distance guide lines in the front, front- the ON position again. wide, rear and rear-wide views indicate To deactivate the sonar system comple- different distances to the object. tely, use the “Sonar” settings. See “Sonar function settings” (P.4-27). When the objects are detected, the indicator (green) appears and blinks and the tone sounds intermittently. When the vehicle moves closer to the object, the WAE0227X color of the indicator turns yellow and the rate of the blinking and the rate of the TURNING ON AND OFF THE SONAR tone increase. When the vehicle is very FUNCTION close to the object, the indicator stops blinking and turns red, and the tone When the Sonar/MOD key is selected, sounds continuously. the indicator will turn off and the sonar will be turned off temporarily. The Moving The intermittent tone will stop after 3 Object Detection (MOD) system will also seconds when an object is detected by be turned off at the same time. (See only the sonar and the distance does not “Moving Object Detection (MOD)” (P.4- change. 29).) When the Sonar/MOD key is The tone will stop when the object is no selected again, the indicator will turn longer near the vehicle. on and the sonar will turn back on. In the below cases, the sonar will be turned back on automatically: . When the shift lever is in the R (Reverse) position.

4-26 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems the vehicle icon and the sonar icon will . Inclement weather or ultrasonic disappear from the Sonar/MOD key. The sources such as an automatic car next time the ignition switch is placed in wash, a truck’s compressed-air the ON position, “Sonar is OFF” is dis- brakes or a pneumatic drill may played briefly. affect the function of the system, FR Sensor Only: including reduced performance When this item is turned on, only the front or a false activation. sonar is activated. The amber markers are . This function is designed as an displayed at the rear corners of the aid to the driver in detecting large vehicle icon. stationary objects to help avoid Interrupt Display: damaging the vehicle. When this item is turned on, the Intelligent . The system is not designed to Around View Monitor will interrupt the prevent contact with small or JVH1695X current view in the display to see the moving objects. surrounding area of the vehicle. . The system will not detect small Sonar function settings Sonar Sensitivity: objects below the bumper, and may not detect objects close to To set up the sonar function to your Adjust the sensitivity level of the sonar. preferred settings, push the SETTING the bumper or on the ground. Sonar Volume: button, select the “Camera/Sonar” key . The system may not detect the and then select the “Sonar” key on the Adjust the tone volume of the sonar. following objects: center display. SONAR SYSTEM LIMITATIONS — Fluffy objects such as snow, Designs and items displayed on the cloth, cotton, grass or wool. screen may vary depending on the mod- WARNING — Thin objects such as rope, wire els. or chain. Sonar: Listed below are the system limita- — Wedge-shaped objects. When this item is turned on, the front and tions for the sonar function. Failure . If your vehicle sustains damage rear sonar is activated. When this item is to operate the vehicle in accordance to the bumper fascia, leaving it turned off (indicator turns off), the front with these system limitations could misaligned or bent, the sensing and rear sonar is deactivated. The amber result in serious injury or death. markers are displayed at the corners of zone may be altered causing in- accurate measurement of objects Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-27 or false alarms. sonar function will be diminished.

CAUTION

Excessive noise (such as audio system volume or an open vehicle window) will interfere with the tone and it may not be heard.

SYSTEM TEMPORARILY UNAVAIL- ABLE When the amber markers are displayed at the corners of the vehicle icon and the function cannot be activated from the “Sonar” settings (the setting items are grayed out), the sonar system may be malfunctioning. SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

CAUTION

Keep the surface of the sonar sensors (located on the front and rear bumper fascia) free from accumulations of snow, ice and dirt. Do not scratch the surface of the sonar sensors when cleaning. If the sensors are covered, the accuracy of the

4-28 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems MOVING OBJECT DETECTION (MOD)

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the Moving Object Detection system could result in serious injury or death. . The MOD system is not a substitute for proper vehicle operation and is not designed to prevent contact with the objects surrounding the vehicle. When maneuvering, always use the outside mirror and rearview mirror and turn and check the surrounding to ensure it is safe to maneuver. . The system is deactivated at speeds above 6 MPH (10 km/h). It is reactivated at lower speeds. . The MOD system is not designed to detect the surrounding sta- JVH1689X tionary objects.

1. CAMERA button The Moving Object Detection (MOD) sys- 2. SETTING button tem can inform the driver of the moving objects surrounding the vehicle when driving out of garages, maneuvering into parking lots and in other such instances. The MOD system detects moving objects by using image processing technology on Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-29 the image shown on the display. MOD SYSTEM OPERATION The MOD system will turn on automatically under the following conditions: . When the shift lever is in the R (Reverse) position. . When vehicle speed decreases below approximately 5 MPH (8 km/h).

WAE0228X JVH1698X Bird’s-eye view Rear and front-side views

WAE0229X JVH1699X Front view / rear view Front-wide view / rear-wide view 4-30 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems When the MOD system detects moving . When the shift lever is in the D (Drive) objects near the vehicle, the yellow frame position and the vehicle speed is will be displayed on the view where the below approximately 5 MPH (8 km/h), objects are detected and a chime will the MOD system detects moving ob- sound once. While the MOD system con- jects in the front view or front-wide tinues to detect moving objects, the view. yellow frame continues to be displayed. . When the shift lever is in the R In the bird’s-eye view, the yellow frame (Reverse) position and the vehicle is displayed on each camera image (front, speed is below approximately 5 MPH rear, right, left) depending on where (8 km/h), the MOD system detects moving objects are detected. moving objects in the rear view or rear-wide view. The MOD system will The yellow frame is displayed on each not operate if the liftgate is open. view in the front view, front-wide view, rear view and rear-wide view modes. The MOD system does not detect moving objects in the front-side view. The MOD JVH1712X While the sonar is beeping, the MOD icon is not displayed on the screen when system does not chime. in front-side view. TURNING ON AND OFF THE MOD A green MOD icon is displayed in the SYSTEM view where the MOD system is operative. When the MOD is active and the Sonar/ A gray MOD icon is displayed in the view MOD key is selected, the MOD system where the MOD system is not operative. will turn off temporarily and the indicator If the MOD system is turned off, the MOD will turn off. (A camera-aiding sonar will icon is not displayed. turn off at the same time.) When the The MOD system operates in the follow- Sonar/MOD key is selected again, the ing conditions when the camera view is indicator will turn on and the MOD system displayed: will turn back on. . When the shift lever is in the P (Park) or To enable or disable the MOD, use the N (Neutral) position and the vehicle is “Camera” menu. See “MOD function stopped, the MOD system detects the setting” (P.4-32). moving objects in the bird’s-eye view.

Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-31 MOD function setting MOD SYSTEM LIMITATIONS To set up the MOD function to your preferred settings, push the SETTING WARNING button, select “Camera/Sonar” key, and then select the “Camera” key on the center display. Listed below are the system limitations for MOD. Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with these system limitations could result in serious injury or death. . Do not use the MOD system when towing a trailer. The system may not function properly. . JVH1713X Excessive noise (for example, audio system volume or open Moving Object Detection: vehicle window) will interfere When this item is turned on, the MOD is with the chime sound, and it activated. When this item is turned off may not be heard. (indicator turns off), the MOD system is . The MOD system performance deactivated. When the MOD system is will be limited according to en- deactivated, “MOD” will disappear on vironmental conditions and sur- the Sonar/MOD key and the MOD icon rounding objects such as: will disappear as well. — When there is low contrast When the sonar is turned off on the between background and the setting menu as well, the Sonar/MOD moving objects. key will disappear. — When there is blinking source of light. — When strong light such as another vehicle’s headlight or sunlight is present.

4-32 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems — When camera orientation is If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on any of not in its usual position, such the cameras , the MOD system may not as when mirror is folded. operate properly. Clean the camera by wiping with a cloth dampened with a — When there is dirt, water drops diluted mild cleaning agent and then or snow on the camera lens. wiping with a dry cloth. — When the position of the moving objects in the display is not changed. . The MOD system might detect flowing water droplets on the camera lens, white smoke from the muffler, moving shadows, etc. . The MOD system may not func- JVH1397X tion properly depending on the speed, direction, distance or SYSTEM MAINTENANCE shape of the moving objects. . If your vehicle sustains damage to the parts where the camera is CAUTION installed, leaving it misaligned or . bent, the sensing zone may be Do not use alcohol, benzine or altered and the MOD system may thinner to clean the camera. This not detect objects properly. will cause discoloration. To clean . the camera, wipe with a cloth When the temperature is extre- dampened with diluted mild mely high or low, the screen may cleaning agent and then wipe not display objects clearly. This is with a dry cloth. not a malfunction. . Do not damage the camera as the monitor screen may be adversely affected.

Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-33 VENTILATORS

SAA3348 SAA3054 JVH1313X CENTER VENTILATORS SIDE VENTILATORS REAR VENTILATORS Open/close the ventilators by moving the Open/close the ventilators by moving the Open/close the ventilators by moving the control to either direction. control to either direction. control to either direction. : This symbol indicates that the venti- : This symbol indicates that the venti- : This symbol indicates that the ventilators are closed. Moving the side lators are closed. Moving the side lators are closed. Moving the side control to this direction will close the control to this direction will close the control to this direction will close the ventilators. ventilators. ventilators. : This symbol indicates that the venti- : This symbol indicates that the venti- : This symbol indicates that the ventilators are open. Moving the side lators are open. Moving the side lators are open. Moving the side control to this direction will open the control to this direction will open the control to this direction will open the ventilators. ventilators. ventilators. Adjust the air flow direction of the venti- Adjust the air flow direction of the ventilators by moving the center knob (up/ lators by moving the center knob (up/ down, left/right) until the desired position down, left/right) until the desired position is achieved. is achieved.

4-34 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER

vents. WARNING . When parking, set the heater and air conditioner controls to turn off air . The air conditioner cooling func- recirculation to allow fresh air into tion operates only when the en- the passenger compartment. This gine is running. should help reduce odors inside the vehicle. . Do not leave children or adults who would normally require the support of others alone in your vehicle. Pets should not be left alone either. On hot, sunny days, temperatures in a closed vehicle could quickly become high en- SAA3055 ough to cause severe or possibly fatal injuries to people or animals. Adjust the air flow direction of the venti- . Do not use the recirculation mode lators by moving the center knob (up/ for long periods as it may cause down, left/right) until the desired position the interior air to become stale is achieved. and the windows to fog up. . Do not adjust the heating and air conditioning controls while driving so that full attention may be given to vehicle operation.

Start the engine and operate the heater and air conditioner system. NOTE: . Odors from inside and outside the vehicle can build up in the air conditioner unit. Odor can enter the passenger compartment through the Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-35 AUTOMATIC AIR CONDITIONER Automatic operation Cooling and/or dehumidified heating (AUTO): This mode may be used all year round. The system works automatically to control the inside temperature, air flow distribution and fan speed after the preferred temperature is set manually. 1. Push the “AUTO” button on. (The indicator on the button will illuminate and AUTO will be displayed.) SAA3059 2. Turn the temperature control dial (driver’s side) to set the desired tem- 1. “AUTO” button/Temperature control dial 12. “A/C” air conditioner ON/OFF button perature. (driver’s side) 13. “ ” upper vent button 2. “ ” front defroster button The temperature of the passenger compartment will be maintained 3. “ ” rear window defroster button (See “Rear window and outside mirror defros- automatically. Air flow distribution ter switch” (P.2-36).) and fan speed will also be controlled 4. “ ” fan speed decrease button automatically. 5. “OFF” button 3. You can individually set driver and 6. “ ” fan speed increase button front passenger’s side temperature 7. “ ” outside air circulation button using each temperature control button. When the “DUAL” button is pushed 8. “ ” air recirculation button or the passenger’s side temperature 9. “DUAL” zone control ON/OFF button/ control button is turned, the DUAL Temperature control dial (passenger’s side) indicator will come on. To turn off the passenger’s side temperature control, 10. “MODE” manual air flow control button push the “DUAL” button. 11. “REAR” control button

4-36 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4. To turn off the heater and air condi- Manual operation . Push the “ ” outside air circulation tioner system, push the “OFF” button. button to draw outside air into the Fan speed control: A visible mist may be seen coming from passenger compartment. The “ ” the ventilators in hot, humid conditions as Push the fan speed increase “ ”or indicator light on the button will come the air is cooled rapidly. This does not decrease “ ” buttons to manually con- on. indicate a malfunction. trol the fan speed. . To control the air intake automatically, Push the “AUTO” button to return to push and hold either the “ ” air Dehumidified defrosting or defogging: automatic control of the fan speed. recirculation button or the “ ” out- 1. Push the “ ” front defroster button. side air circulation button (whichever (The indicator light on the button will Temperature control: indicator light is illuminated). The illuminate.) Turn the temperature control dial to set indicator lights (both air recirculation 2. Turn the temperature control dial to the desired temperature. and outside air circulation buttons) set the desired temperature. Air flow control: will flash twice, and then the air intake will switch to automatic control. . To quickly remove ice from the out- Pushing the “MODE” manual air flow side of the windows, push the fan control button selects the air outlet to: Turning the system off speed increase button “ ” and set it : Air flows from center and side ventila- Push the OFF button. to the maximum position. tors. . As soon as possible after the wind- : Air flows from center and side ventila- Upper vent system shield is clean, push the “AUTO” button tors and foot outlets. When the upper vent “ ” button is to return to the auto mode. : Air flows mainly from foot outlets. pushed, the air flow against the driver’s . When the “ ” front defroster button : Air flows from defroster and foot outlets. or passenger’s upper body becomes gen- is pushed, the air conditioner will tle. The indicator light on the button will automatically be turned on at outside Air intake control: illuminate. temperatures above 23°F (−5°C) to . Push the “ ” air recirculation button In this mode, air from the upper ventilator defog the windshield, and the air to recirculate interior air inside the flows in order to control the cabin tem- recirculate mode will automatically vehicle. The “ ” indicator light on the perature without blowing air directly on be turned off. button will come on. The air recircula- the occupants. Outside air is drawn into the passen- tion mode cannot be activated when Push the upper vent “ ” button when ger compartment to improve the the air conditioner is in the front defogging performance. you want the air conditioner to work defrosting mode “ ”. quickly. To turn the system off, push the upper Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-37 vent “ ” button to turn the indicator light off.

JVH1630X JVH1720X

Operations on touch panel screen The following operations are available with the touch panel screen. Heater and air conditioner can be operated on the touch panel screen. Push the Availability of the item depends on the “CLIMATE” button on the center multi- model and specifications. function control panel and turn the dis- Available items: play to the Climate screen. . For details of the touch panel screen Touch to change the air flow mode. operation, see the separate NissanCon- . - / + nect® Owner’s Manual. Touch to change the fan speed of the air from the ventilators. . Rear Climate Touch to display the Rear Climate screen. (See “Rear automatic air conditioning system” (P.4-39).)

4-38 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems . A/C Climate screen is displayed. Touch to turn the air conditioner on/ Push the “CLIMATE” button one more off. time, the display will return to the Climate . DUAL screen. Touch to turn the DUAL mode (pas- The rear automatic air conditioning sys- senger’s side temperature control) tem can also be adjusted by using the on/off. rear air conditioner control panel located . Upper Vent on the rear of the center console. (See Touch to turn the upper vent system “Rear air conditioner control panel opera- on/off. (See “Upper vent system” (P.4- tion” (P.4-42).) 37).) This table shows the relation between the front air conditioner control panel and the rear air conditioner control panel. JVH1621X Display status REAR AUTOMATIC AIR CONDITION- Rear Climate Rear Climate screen is not ING SYSTEM screen is dis- displayed (Cli- played Push the “REAR” button on the front air mate screen) conditioner control panel to turn on the Front air Only the rear rear automatic air conditioning system. condition- automatic air Only the front (The REAR indicator light will illuminate.) er control conditioning air conditioner panel system can be can be operated To control the rear automatic air con- operated ditioning system with the front air condi- Rear air Only the rear tioner control panel, push the “CLIMATE” condition- automatic air button on the center multi-function con- er control Cannot be op- conditioning trol panel and touch “Rear Climate” key. panel erated system can be The display will switch to the Rear Climate operated screen. The rear automatic air conditioning system can be adjusted with the front air conditioner control panel when the Rear Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-39 Front air conditioner control panel Climate screen. If the A/C indicator : The air outlet is fixed at foot level. operation light does not illuminate, push the : The air outlet is fixed at both the head “A/C” button. (The A/C indicator light and foot levels. Automatic operation: will turn on.) : The air outlet is fixed at the head level. 1. Push the “REAR” button to turn on rear NOTE: automatic air conditioning system. Touch panel operation When the front air conditioner is off, the Push the “CLIMATE” button on the The rear automatic air conditioning sys- rear automatic air conditioning system center multi-function control panel tem can also be controlled on the Rear only operates the fan. When you would and select the “Rear Climate” key to Climate screen. like to use the air conditioner, be sure to display the Rear Climate screen. push the “A/C” button on the front air Touch the “Rear Climate” key on the 2. Push the “AUTO” button. (The AUTO conditioner control panel to turn on the Climate screen to display the Rear Cli- indicator light will illuminate and A/C indicator light. mate screen. “AUTO” will appear on the display.) Manual operation: 3. Turn the temperature control dial . Temperature control (driver’s side) to set the desired tem- Turn the temperature control dial perature. (driver’s side) to set the desired tem- Cooling and dehumidified heating: perature. 1. Push the “REAR” button to turn on the . Fan speed control rear automatic air conditioning sys- Push the fan speed control “ ” tem. Push the “CLIMATE” button on button or “ ” button to manually the center multi-function control pa- control the fan speed. nel and touch “Rear Climate” key to . Air flow control display the Rear Climate screen. Push the “MODE” button to change the 2. Turn the temperature control dial air flow mode. (driver’s side) to set the desired temperature. 3. Switch the air flow mode to by pushing the “MODE” button. 4. Push the “CLIMATE” button on the center multi-function control panel one more time to return to the 4-40 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems . Fan Up The fan speed of the air from the ventilators can be increased. . Auto Touch to turn the auto mode on/off. . Mode Touch to select different air flow mode.

JVH1719X Rear Climate screen Available items: . Temp Down Touch to decrease the temperature setting. . Temp Up Touch to increase the temperature setting. SAA3327 . ON/OFF 1. “OFF” button Touch to turn the rear automatic air 2. Fan speed control button conditioning system on/off. 3. “AUTO” button . Fan Down 4. Display The fan speed of the air from the 5. “MODE” button ventilators can be decreased. 6. “TEMP” button

Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-41 Rear air conditioner control panel Turning the system off operation Use the following methods to turn the Rear control buttons: rear automatic air conditioning system off. The rear seat passengers can adjust the . rear automatic air conditioning system Operating the front air conditioner using the control switches on the rear of control panel: the center console. Push the “OFF” button on the front air conditioner control panel when the The rear control buttons do not function Rear Climate screen is displayed. when the Rear Climate screen is shown . on the front display. To activate the rear Operating the Rear Climate screen: control buttons, push the “CLIMATE” but- Touch the “ON/OFF” key on the Rear ton on the center multi-function control Climate screen when the rear auto- panel and switch the screen to the matic air conditioning system is on. Climate screen. . Operating the rear air conditioner SAA3088 . “OFF” button: control panel: Rear automatic air conditioning sys- Push the “OFF” button on the rear air tem off. conditioner control panel when the Rear Climate screen is not displayed. . “ ” button: Rear fan speed control up/down . “AUTO” button: Rear automatic air conditioning system on, AUTO mode on . “MODE” button: Rear air flow control change . “TEMP” button: Rear temperature control up/down

SAA3058

4-42 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems ANTENNA

OPERATING TIPS flow decreases significantly or if win- WINDOW ANTENNA When the engine coolant temperature dows fog up easily when operating the The antenna pattern is printed inside the and outside air temperature are low, the heater or air conditioner. rear side glass. air flow from the foot outlets may not SERVICING AIR CONDITIONER operate. However, this is not a malfunc- The air conditioner system in your NISSAN CAUTION tion. After the coolant temperature is charged with a refrigerant designed warms up, the air flow from the foot with the environment in mind. This re- . outlets will operate normally. frigerant will not harm the earth’s Do not place metalized film near The sensors and located on the ozone layer. However, special charging the 3rd row seat window or at- instrument panel help maintain a con- equipment and lubricant are required tach any metal parts to it. This stant temperature. Do not put anything when servicing your NISSAN air condi- may cause poor reception or on or around the sensors. tioner. Using improper refrigerants or noise. . When cleaning the inside of the LINKING INTELLIGENT KEY (if so lubricants will cause severe damage to your air conditioner system. (See “Capa- rear side window, be careful not equipped) cities and recommended fluids/lubri- to scratch or damage the rear The air conditioner system settings can cants” (P.10-2) for air conditioner system side window antenna. Lightly be memorized for each Intelligent Key. refrigerant and lubricant recommenda- wipe along the antenna with a For more details, see “Setting memory tions.) dampened soft cloth. function” (P.3-42). Your NISSAN dealer will be able to service IN-CABIN MICROFILTER your environmentally friendly air condi- The air conditioner system is equipped tioner system. with an in-cabin microfilter which collects dirt, pollen, dust, etc. WARNING To make sure the air conditioner heats, defogs, and ventilates efficiently, replace The system contains refrigerant un- the filter in accordance with the specified der high pressure. To avoid personal maintenance intervals listed in the “9. injury, any air conditioner service Maintenance and schedules” section. It is should be done only by an experi- recommended to see a NISSAN dealer to enced technician with the proper replace the filter. equipment. The filter should be replaced if the air Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-43 CAR PHONE OR CB RADIO

When installing a car phone or a CB radio in your vehicle, be sure to observe the CAUTION following cautions, otherwise the new equipment may adversely affect the elec- . tronic control modules and electronic Keep the antenna as far away as control system harness. possible from the electronic control modules. . Keep the antenna wire more than WARNING 8 in (20 cm) away from the electronic control system har- . A cellular phone should not be ness. Do not route the antenna used for any purpose while driv- wire next to any harness. ing so full attention may be given . Adjust the antenna standing- to vehicle operation. Some juris- wave ratio as recommended by SAA3602 dictions prohibit the use of cellu- the manufacturer. lar phones while driving. . Connect the ground wire from the SATELLITE ANTENNA . If you must make a call while your CB radio chassis to the body. vehicle is in motion, the hands- There is a satellite antenna on the rear . For details, it is recommended free cellular phone operational part of the vehicle roof. you visit a NISSAN dealer. mode (if so equipped) is highly recommended. Exercise extreme caution at all times so full attention may be given to vehicle operation. . If a conversation in a moving vehicle requires you to take notes, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle before doing so.

4-44 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 5 Starting and driving

Precautions when starting and driving ...... 5-4 Parking brake...... 5-22 Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) ...... 5-4 Lane Departure Warning (LDW)/Intelligent Three-way catalyst ...... 5-4 Lane Intervention (I-LI) (if so equipped) ...... 5-23 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) ...... 5-5 LDW system operation ...... 5-24 Avoiding collision and rollover ...... 5-8 Turning the LDW system ON/OFF ...... 5-25 On-pavement and off-road driving How to enable/disable the LDW system ...... 5-26 precautions ...... 5-9 I-LI system operation ...... 5-26 Off-road recovery ...... 5-9 Turning the I-LI system ON/OFF...... 5-27 Rapid air pressure loss ...... 5-9 How to enable/disable the I-LI system ...... 5-28 Drinking alcohol/drugs and driving ...... 5-10 LDW/I-LI system limitations ...... 5-28 Driving safety precautions ...... 5-10 System temporarily unavailable ...... 5-30 Push-button ignition switch ...... 5-13 System malfunction ...... 5-31 Operating range for engine start function ...... 5-13 System maintenance ...... 5-31 Push-button ignition switch positions ...... 5-14 Blind Spot Warning (BSW) (if so equipped)...... 5-32 Emergency engine shut off ...... 5-15 BSW system operation ...... 5-33 Intelligent Key battery discharge ...... 5-15 Turning the BSW system ON/OFF ...... 5-34 Before starting the engine...... 5-16 How to enable/disable the BSW system ...... 5-34 Starting the engine ...... 5-16 BSW system limitations ...... 5-35 Remote engine start (if so equipped)...... 5-17 BSW driving situations...... 5-36 Driving the vehicle ...... 5-17 System temporarily unavailable ...... 5-39 Engine protection mode ...... 5-17 System malfunction ...... 5-39 Automatic transmission ...... 5-18 System maintenance ...... 5-40 Intelligent Blind Spot Intervention (I-BSI) (if I-DC system limitations ...... 5-92 so equipped) ...... 5-40 System temporarily unavailable ...... 5-95 I-BSI system operation ...... 5-42 System malfunction ...... 5-97 Turning the I-BSI system ON/OFF...... 5-43 System maintenance ...... 5-97 How to enable/disable the I-BSI system ...... 5-44 Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) ...... 5-98 I-BSI system limitations ...... 5-44 AEB system operation ...... 5-99 I-BSI driving situations ...... 5-46 Turning the AEB system ON/OFF ...... 5-101 System temporarily unavailable ...... 5-51 AEB system limitations ...... 5-101 System malfunction...... 5-52 System temporarily unavailable ...... 5-103 System maintenance ...... 5-52 System malfunction ...... 5-104 Intelligent Back-up Intervention (I-BI) (if System maintenance ...... 5-105 so equipped) ...... 5-53 Intelligent Forward Collision Warning I-BI system operation ...... 5-55 (I-FCW) ...... 5-106 How to enable/disable the I-BI system ...... 5-59 I-FCW system operation ...... 5-108 I-BI system precautions ...... 5-60 Turning the I-FCW system ON/OFF ...... 5-109 System temporarily unavailable ...... 5-61 I-FCW system limitations ...... 5-111 System malfunction...... 5-62 System temporarily unavailable ...... 5-113 System maintenance ...... 5-62 System malfunction ...... 5-113 Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) ...... 5-63 System maintenance ...... 5-114 How to select the cruise control mode ...... 5-65 Break-in schedule...... 5-115 Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode ...... 5-65 Fuel efficient driving tips ...... 5-115 Conventional (fixed speed) cruise Increasing fuel economy ...... 5-116 control mode...... 5-81 NISSAN all-mode 4WD® (if so equipped) ...... 5-116 Intelligent Distance Control (I-DC) (if NISSAN all-mode 4WD® system ...... 5-117 so equipped) ...... 5-85 4WD shift switch ...... 5-121 I-DC system operation ...... 5-87 4WD shift indicator ...... 5-122 Turning the I-DC system ON/OFF ...... 5-90 4WD warning light ...... 5-122 How to enable/disable the I-DC system ...... 5-91 Hill Start Assist system ...... 5-124 I-DC system display and indicators ...... 5-91 Parking/parking on hills ...... 5-125 TOW mode ...... 5-126 Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system ...... 5-133 SNOW mode ...... 5-127 Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) Sonar system (if so equipped) ...... 5-127 OFF switch ...... 5-134 Sonar settings ...... 5-128 Cold weather driving ...... 5-135 Sonar indicator ...... 5-129 Freeing a frozen door lock ...... 5-135 Power steering ...... 5-130 Antifreeze...... 5-135 Brake system ...... 5-130 Battery...... 5-135 Braking precautions ...... 5-130 Draining of coolant water ...... 5-135 Parking brake break-in...... 5-131 Tire equipment ...... 5-135 Brake assist ...... 5-131 Special winter equipment ...... 5-136 Brake assist ...... 5-131 Driving on snow or ice ...... 5-136 Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)...... 5-131 Engine block heater (if so equipped) ...... 5-136 PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTING AND DRIVING

cause unconsciousness or death. fied mechanic whenever: WARNING . If you suspect that exhaust fumes — The vehicle is raised for ser- are entering the vehicle, drive vice. . with all windows fully open, and Do not leave children or adults — You suspect that exhaust have the vehicle inspected imme- who would normally require the fumes are entering into the diately. support of others alone in your passenger compartment. vehicle. Pets should not be left . Do not run the engine in closed alone either. They could acciden- spaces such as a garage. — You notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system. tally injure themselves or others . Do not park the vehicle with the through inadvertent operation of engine running for any extended — You have had an accident the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny length of time. involving damage to the ex- days, temperatures in a closed haust system, underbody, or . Keep the liftgate closed while vehicle could quickly become rear of the vehicle. high enough to cause severe or driving, otherwise exhaust gases possibly fatal injuries to people or could be drawn into the passen- animals. ger compartment. If you must THREE-WAY CATALYST . drive with the liftgate open, fol- The three-way catalyst is an emission Properly secure all cargo to help low these precautions: prevent it from sliding or shifting. control device installed in the exhaust Do not place cargo higher than 1) Open all the windows. system. Exhaust gases in the three-way the seatbacks. In a sudden stop 2) Set the air recirculation to catalyst are burned at high temperatures or collision, unsecured cargo off and the fan control to high to help reduce pollutants. could cause personal injury. to circulate the air. . If electrical wiring or other cable WARNING EXHAUST GAS (carbon monoxide) connections must pass to a trailer through the seal on the liftgate or . The exhaust gas and the exhaust WARNING the body, follow the manufac- system are very hot. Keep people, turer’s recommendation to pre- animals or flammable materials vent carbon monoxide entry into away from the exhaust system . Do not breathe exhaust gases; the vehicle. components. they contain colorless and odor- . The exhaust system and body . Do not stop or park the vehicle less carbon monoxide. Carbon should be inspected by a quali- monoxide is dangerous. It can over flammable materials such as 5-4 Starting and driving dry grass, waste paper or rags. . Do not push or tow your vehicle Please note that the TPMS is not a They may ignite and cause a fire. to start the engine. substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYS- under-inflation has not reached the level CAUTION TEM (TPMS) to trigger illumination of the TPMS low Each tire, including the spare (if provided), tire pressure telltale. . Do not use leaded gasoline. De- should be checked monthly when cold Your vehicle has also been equipped with posits from leaded gasoline ser- and inflated to the inflation pressure a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate iously reduce the three-way recommended by the vehicle manufac- when the system is not operating prop- catalyst’s ability to help reduce turer on the vehicle placard or tire infla- erly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is exhaust pollutants. tion pressure label. (If your vehicle has combined with the low tire pressure tell- . Keep your engine tuned up. Mal- tires of a different size than the size tale. When the system detects a malfunc- functions in the ignition, fuel in- indicated on the vehicle placard or tire tion, the telltale will flash for jection, or electrical systems can inflation pressure label, you should deter- approximately one minute and then re- cause overrich fuel flow into the mine the proper tire inflation pressure for main continuously illuminated. This se- three-way catalyst, causing it to those tires.) quence will continue upon subsequent overheat. Do not keep driving if As an added safety feature, your vehicle vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunc- the engine misfires, or if notice- has been equipped with a Tire Pressure tion exists. When the malfunction indica- able loss of performance or other Monitoring System (TPMS) that illumi- tor is illuminated, the system may not be unusual operating conditions are nates a low tire pressure telltale when able to detect or signal low tire pressure detected. Have the vehicle in- one or more of your tires is significantly as intended. TPMS malfunctions may spected. It is recommended you under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low occur for a variety of reasons, including visit a NISSAN dealer for this tire pressure telltale illuminates, you the installation of replacement or alter- service. should stop and check your tires as soon nate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning prop- . Avoid driving with an extremely as possible, and inflate them to the erly. Always check the TPMS malfunction low fuel level. Running out of fuel proper pressure. Driving on a significantly telltale after replacing one or more tires could cause the engine to misfire, under-inflated tire causes the tire to or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that damaging the three-way catalyst. overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel effi- the replacement or alternate tires and . Do not race the engine while ciency and tire tread life, and may affect wheels allow the TPMS to continue to warming it up. the vehicle’s handling and stopping abil- function properly. ity. Starting and driving 5-5 Additional information the low tire pressure warning light . Since the spare tire is not equipped remains illuminated. WARNING with the TPMS, the TPMS does not The CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning monitor the tire pressure of the spare does not appear if the low tire pres- . If the low tire pressure warning tire. sure warning light illuminates to in- light illuminates or Low Pressure . The TPMS will activate only when the dicate a TPMS malfunction. information is displayed on the . vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 Tire pressure rises and falls depending monitor screen while driving, MPH (25 km/h). Also, this system may on the heat caused by the vehicle’s avoid sudden steering maneu- not detect a sudden drop in tire operation and the outside tempera- vers or abrupt braking, reduce pressure (for example, a flat tire while ture. Do not reduce the tire pressure vehicle speed, pull off the road driving). after driving because the tire pressure to a safe location and stop the . The low tire pressure warning light rises after driving. Low outside tem- vehicle as soon as possible. Driv- does not automatically turn off when perature can lower the temperature ing with under-inflated tires may the tire pressure is adjusted. After the of the air inside the tire which can permanently damage the tires tire is inflated to the recommended cause a lower tire inflation pressure. and increase the likelihood of tire pressure, the vehicle must be driven at This may cause the low tire pressure failure. Serious vehicle damage speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h) to warning light to illuminate. If the could occur and may lead to an activate the TPMS and turn off the low warning light illuminates in low ambi- accident and could result in ser- tire pressure warning light. Use a tire ent temperature, check the tire pres- ious personal injury. Check the pressure gauge to check the tire sure for all four tires. tire pressure for all four tires. . pressure. You can also check the pressure of all Adjust the tire pressure to the recommended COLD tire pressure . The CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning tires (except the spare tire) on the shown on the Tire and Loading appears in the vehicle information center display. (See NissanConnect® Information label to turn the low display when the low tire pressure Owner’s Manual.) The order of the tire tire pressure warning light OFF. If warning light is illuminated and low pressure figures displayed on the the light still illuminates while tire pressure is detected. The CHECK screen may not correspond with the driving after adjusting the tire TIRE PRESSURE warning turns off actual order of the tire position. pressure, a tire may be flat or when the low tire pressure warning For additional information, see “Low tire the TPMS may be malfunctioning. light turns off. pressure warning light” (P.2-15) and “Tire If you have a flat tire, replace it The CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) ” (P.6- 3). with a spare tire as soon as appears each time the ignition switch possible. If no tire is flat and all is placed in the ON position as long as tires are properly inflated, it is 5-6 Starting and driving recommended you consult a . Do not place metalized film or FCC Notice: NISSAN dealer. any metal parts (antenna, etc.) on For USA: . Since the spare tire is not the windows. This may cause This device complies with Part 15 of the equipped with the TPMS, when a poor reception of the signals FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the spare tire is mounted or a wheel from the tire pressure sensors, following two conditions: (1) This device is replaced, the TPMS will not and the TPMS will not function may not cause harmful interference, function and the low tire pressure properly. and (2) this device must accept any warning light will flash for ap- interference received, including inter- proximately 1 minute. The light Some devices and transmitters may tem- ference that may cause undesired op- will remain on after 1 minute. porarily interfere with the operation of eration. Have your tires replaced and/or the TPMS and cause the low tire pressure Note: Changes or modifications not TPMS system reset as soon as warning light to illuminate. Some exam- expressly approved by the party re- possible. It is recommended you ples are: sponsible for compliance could void visit a NISSAN dealer for these . Facilities or electric devices using the user’s authority to operate the services. similar radio frequencies are near the equipment. . Replacing tires with those not vehicle. For Canada: originally specified by NISSAN . If a transmitter set to similar frequen- could affect the proper operation cies is being used in or near the This device complies with Industry Ca- nada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). of the TPMS. vehicle. . Operation is subject to the following . Do not inject any tire liquid or If a computer (or similar equipment) or two conditions: (1) this device may not aerosol tire sealant into the tires, a DC/AC converter is being used in or cause interference, and (2) this device as this may cause a malfunction near the vehicle. must accept any interference, including of the tire pressure sensors. Low tire pressure warning light may interference that may cause undesired illuminate in the following cases. operation of the device. . If the vehicle is equipped with a wheel CAUTION and tire without TPMS. . If the TPMS has been replaced and the . The TPMS may not function prop- ID has not been registered. erly when the wheels are . If the wheel is not originally specified equipped with tire chains or the by NISSAN. wheels are buried in snow. Starting and driving 5-7 TPMS with Easy Fill Tire Alert . If the hazard indicator does not flash AVOIDING COLLISION AND ROLL- When adding air to an under-inflated tire, within approximately 15 seconds after OVER the TPMS with Easy Fill Tire Alert provides starting to inflate the tire, it indicates visual and audible signals outside the that the TPMS with Easy Fill Tire Alert vehicle to help you inflate the tires to is not operating. WARNING . the recommended COLD tire pressure. The TPMS will not activate the Easy Fill Tire Alert under the following condi- Failure to operate this vehicle in a Vehicle set-up: tions: safe and prudent manner may result 1. Park the vehicle in a safe and level — If there is interference from an in loss of control or an accident. place. external device or transmitter 2. Apply the parking brake and place the — The air pressure from the inflation Be alert and drive defensively at all times. shift lever in the P (Park) position. device such as those using a power Obey all traffic regulations. Avoid exces- 3. Place the ignition switch in the ON socket is not sufficient to inflate the sive speed, high speed cornering, or position. Do not start the engine. tire sudden steering maneuvers, because — If an electrical equipment is being these driving practices could cause you Operation: used in or near the vehicle to lose control of your vehicle. As with 1. Add air to the tire. — There is a malfunction in the TPMS any vehicle, a loss of control could 2. After a few seconds, the hazard in- system result in a collision with other vehicles dicators will start flashing. — There is a malfunction in the horn or objects, or cause the vehicle to roll- or hazard indicators over, particularly if the loss of control 3. When the designated pressure is causes the vehicle to slide sideways. Be . If the TPMS with Easy Fill Tire Alert reached, the horn beeps once and attentive at all times, and avoid driving does not operate due to TPMS inter- the hazard indicators stop flashing. when tired. Never drive when under the ference, move the vehicle about 3 ft 4. Perform the above steps for each tire. influence of alcohol or drugs (including (1m) backward or forward and try prescription or over-the-counter drugs . If the tire is over-inflated more than again. approximately 4 psi (30 kPa), the horn which may cause drowsiness). Always If the TPMS with Easy Fill Tire Alert is not wear your seat belt as outlined in the beeps and the hazard indicators flash working, use a tire pressure gauge. 3 times. To correct the pressure, push “Seat belts” (P.1-20), and also instruct your the core of the valve stem on the tire passengers to do so. briefly to release pressure. When the Seat belts help reduce the risk of injury in pressure reaches the designated collisions and rollovers. In a rollover pressure, the horn beeps once. crash, an unbelted or improperly belted 5-8 Starting and driving person is significantly more likely to be Be sure to read “Driving safety precau- vehicle to stay in the appropriate injured or killed than a person properly tions” (P.5-10). driving lane. wearing a seat belt. OFF-ROAD RECOVERY . If you decide that it is not safe to return the vehicle to the road sur- ON-PAVEMENT AND OFF-ROAD While driving, the right side or left side DRIVING PRECAUTIONS face based on vehicle, road or wheels may unintentionally leave the traffic conditions, gradually slow Utility vehicles have a significantly high- road surface. If this occurs, maintain the vehicle to a stop in a safe place er rollover rate than other types of control of the vehicle by following the off the road. vehicles. procedure below. Please note that this procedure is only a general guide. The RAPID AIR PRESSURE LOSS They have higher ground clearance than vehicle must be driven as appropriate passenger cars to make them capable of Rapid air pressure loss or a “blow-out” can based on the conditions of the vehicle, performing in a variety of on-pavement occur if the tire is punctured or is road and traffic. and off-road applications. This gives them damaged due to hitting a curb or pothole. a higher center of gravity than ordinary 1. Remain calm and do not overreact. Rapid air pressure loss can also be caused by driving on under-inflated tires. cars. An advantage of higher ground 2. Do not apply the brakes. Rapid air pressure loss can affect the clearance is a better view of the road, 3. Maintain a firm grip on the steering handling and stability of the vehicle, allowing you to anticipate problems. wheel with both hands and try to hold especially at highway speeds. However, they are not designed for cor- a straight course. nering at the same speeds as conven- Help prevent rapid air pressure loss by 4. When appropriate, slowly release the tional passenger cars any more than low- maintaining the correct air pressure and accelerator pedal to gradually slow slung sports cars are designed to perform visually inspect the tires for wear and the vehicle. satisfactorily under off-road conditions. If damage. See “Wheels and tires” (P.8-30). at all possible, avoid sharp turns or abrupt 5. If there is nothing in the way, steer the If a tire rapidly loses air pressure or maneuvers, particularly at high speeds. As vehicle to follow the road while the “blows-out” while driving maintain control with other vehicles of this type, failure to vehicle speed is reduced. Do not of the vehicle by following the procedure operate this vehicle correctly may result attempt to drive the vehicle back onto below. Please note that this procedure is in loss of control or vehicle rollover. Seat the road surface until vehicle speed is only a general guide. The vehicle must be belts help reduce the risk of injury in reduced. collisions and rollovers. In a rollover crash, driven as appropriate based on the con- 6. When it is safe to do so, gradually turn ditions of the vehicle, road and traffic. an unbelted or improperly belted person the steering wheel until both tires is significantly more likely to be injured or return to the road surface. When all killed than a person properly wearing a tires are on the road surface, steer the seat belt. Starting and driving 5-9 5. Lightly apply the brake pedal to gra- most people underestimate the effects of WARNING dually stop the vehicle. alcohol. 6. Turn on the hazard warning flashers Remember, drinking and driving don’t The following actions can increase and either contact a roadside emer- mix! And that is true for drugs, too (over- the chance of losing control of the gency service to change the tire or see the-counter, prescription, and illegal vehicle if there is a sudden loss of tire “Changing a flat tire” (P.6-4). drugs). Don’t drive if your ability to oper- air pressure. Losing control of the DRINKING ALCOHOL/DRUGS AND ate your vehicle is impaired by alcohol, drugs, or some other physical condition. vehicle may cause a collision and DRIVING result in personal injury. DRIVING SAFETY PRECAUTIONS . The vehicle generally moves or Your NISSAN is designed for both normal pulls in the direction of the flat WARNING and off-road use. However, avoid driving tire. in deep water or mud as your NISSAN is . Do not rapidly apply the brakes. Never drive under the influence of mainly designed for leisure use, unlike a . alcohol or drugs. Alcohol in the conventional off-road vehicle. Do not rapidly release the accel- bloodstream reduces coordination, Remember that Two-Wheel Drive (2WD) erator pedal. delays reaction time and impairs models are less capable than Four-Wheel . Do not rapidly turn the steering judgement. Driving after drinking Drive (4WD) models for rough road driving wheel. alcohol increases the likelihood of and extrication when stuck in deep snow, being involved in an accident injuring mud, or the like. 1. Remain calm and do not overreact. yourself and others. Additionally, if Please observe the following precautions: 2. Maintain a firm grip on the steering you are injured in an accident, alco- wheel with both hands and try to hold hol can increase the severity of the a straight course. injury. WARNING 3. When appropriate, slowly release the accelerator pedal to gradually slow NISSAN is committed to safe driving. . Drive carefully when off the road the vehicle. However, you must choose not to drive and avoid dangerous areas. Every under the influence of alcohol. Every year 4. Gradually steer the vehicle to a safe person who drives or rides in this thousands of people are injured or killed vehicle should be seated with location off the road and away from in alcohol-related accidents. Although the traffic if possible. their seat belt fastened. This will local laws vary on what is considered to keep you and your passengers in be legally intoxicated, the fact is that position when driving over rough alcohol affects all people differently and 5-10 Starting and driving terrain. . Heavy braking going down a hill . Before operating the vehicle, en- . Do not drive across steep slopes. could cause your brakes to over- sure that the driver and all pas- Instead drive either straight up or heat and fade, resulting in loss of sengers have their seat belts straight down the slopes. Off- control and an accident. Apply fastened. road vehicles can tip over side- brakes lightly and use a low . Always drive with the floor mats ways much more easily than they range to control your speed. in place as the floor may became can forward or backward. . Unsecured cargo can be thrown hot. . Many hills are too steep for any around when driving over rough . Lower your speed when encoun- vehicle. If you drive up them, you terrain. Properly secure all cargo tering strong crosswinds. With a may stall. If you drive down them, so it will not be thrown forward higher center of gravity, your you may not be able to control and cause injury to you or your NISSAN is more affected by your speed. If you drive across passengers. strong side winds. Slower speeds them, you may roll over. . To avoid raising the center of ensure better vehicle control. . Do not shift ranges while driving gravity excessively, do not exceed . Do not drive beyond the perfor- on downhill grades as this could the rated capacity of the roof rack mance capability of the tires, cause loss of control of the vehi- (if so equipped) and evenly dis- even with 4WD engaged. tribute the load. Secure heavy cle. . For 4WD equipped vehicles, do . loads in the cargo area as far Stay alert when driving to the top forward and as low as possible. not attempt to raise two wheels of a hill. At the top there could be Do not equip the vehicle with tires off the ground and shift the a drop-off or other hazard that larger than specified in this man- transmission to any drive or re- could cause an accident. ual. This could cause your vehicle verse position with the engine . If your engine stalls or you cannot to roll over. running. Doing so may result in drivetrain damage or unexpected make it to the top of a steep hill, . Do not grip the inside or spokes never attempt to turn around. vehicle movement which could of the steering wheel when driv- result in serious vehicle damage Your vehicle could tip or roll over. ing off-road. The steering wheel Always back straight down in R or personal injury. could move suddenly and injure . (Reverse) range. Never back down your hands. Instead drive with Do not attempt to test a 4WD in N (Neutral), using only the your fingers and thumbs on the equipped vehicle on a 2-wheel brake, as this could cause loss of outside of the rim. dynamometer (such as the dy- control. namometers used by some states for emissions testing), or Starting and driving 5-11 similar equipment even if the . Always use tires of the same type, els). other two wheels are raised off size, brand, construction (bias, the ground. Make sure you inform bias-belted or radial), and tread test facility personnel that your pattern on all four wheels. Install vehicle is equipped with 4WD tire chains on the rear wheels before it is placed on a dynam- when driving on slippery roads ometer. Using the wrong test and drive carefully. equipment may result in drive- . Be sure to check the brakes im- train damage or unexpected ve- mediately after driving in mud or hicle movement which could water. See “Brake system” (P.5- result in serious vehicle damage 130) for wet brakes. or personal injury (4WD models). . Avoid parking your vehicle on . When a wheel is off the ground steep hills. If you get out of the due to an unlevel surface, do not vehicle and it rolls forward, back- spin the wheel excessively. ward or sideways, you could be . Accelerating quickly, sharp steer- injured. ing maneuvers or sudden braking . Whenever you drive off-road may cause loss of control. through sand, mud or water as . If at all possible, avoid sharp deep as the wheel hub, more turning maneuvers, particularly frequent maintenance may be at high speeds. Your vehicle has required. See the maintenance a higher center of gravity than a schedule shown in the "9. Main- conventional passenger car. The tenance and schedules" section. vehicle is not designed for cor- . Spinning the rear wheels on slip- nering at the same speeds as pery surfaces may cause the 4WD conventional passenger cars. warning light to flash. The 4WD Failure to operate this vehicle system may also automatically correctly could result in loss of switch from the 4WD mode to control and/or a rollover acci- the 2WD mode. This could reduce dent. traction. Be especially careful when towing a trailer (4WD mod-

5-12 Starting and driving PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH

WARNING

Do not operate the push-button ignition switch while driving the vehicle except in an emergency. (The engine will stop when the ignition switch is pushed 3 consecutive times or the ignition switch is pushed and held for more than 2 seconds.) If the engine stops while the vehicle is being driven, this could lead to a crash and serious injury.

SSD0436 SSD1021 Before operating the push-button ignition switch, be sure to move the shift OPERATING RANGE FOR ENGINE When the ignition switch is pushed with- lever to the P (Park) position. START FUNCTION out depressing the brake pedal, the ignition switch position will change as The operating range for starting the follows: engine inside the vehicle is shown in . the illustration. Push center once to change to ACC. . . If the Intelligent Key is on the instru- Push center two times to change to ment panel, cargo area, inside the ON. . glove box or door pocket, or the Push center three times to change to corner of interior compartment, it OFF. (No position illuminates.) may not be possible to start the . Push center four times to return to engine. ACC. . If the Intelligent Key is near the door or . Open or close any door to return to door glass outside the vehicle, it may LOCK during the OFF position. be possible to start the engine. The ignition lock is designed so that the ignition switch position cannot be switched to LOCK until the shift lever is Starting and driving 5-13 moved to the P (Park) position. PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH ON (Normal operating position) When the ignition switch cannot be POSITIONS This position turns on the ignition system pushed toward the LOCK position, pro- and electrical accessories. LOCK (Normal parking position) ceed as follows: ON has a battery saver feature that will 1. Move the shift lever into the P (Park) The ignition switch can only be locked in turn the ignition switch to the OFF posi- position. this position. tion, if the vehicle is not running, after 2. Push the ignition switch to the OFF The ignition switch will be unlocked when some time under the following condi- position. The ignition switch position it is pushed to the ACC position while tions: indicator will not illuminate. carrying the Intelligent Key. . all doors are closed. 3. Open the door. The ignition switch will ACC (Accessories) . shift lever is in P (Park). . change to the LOCK position. This position activates electrical acces- turn signal/hazard indicator lights are The shift lever can be moved from the P sories such as the radio, when the engine not flashing. (Park) position if the ignition switch is in is not running. The battery saver feature will be can- the ON position and the brake pedal is ACC has a battery saver feature that will celled if any of the following occur: depressed. turn the ignition switch to the OFF posi- . any door is opened. If the battery of the vehicle is dis- tion after a period of time under the . shift lever is moved out of P (Park). charged, the push-button ignition following conditions: . ignition switch changes position. switch cannot be turned from the LOCK . all doors are closed. position. OFF . shift lever is in P (Park). Some indicators and warnings for opera- . turn signal/hazard indicator lights are The engine can be turned off in the tion are displayed on the vehicle informa- not flashing. position. tion display between the speedometer The battery saver feature will be can- The ignition lock is designed so that the and tachometer. (See “Vehicle informa- ignition switch cannot be switched to the tion display” (P.2-20).) celled if any of the following occur: . LOCK position until the shift lever is any door is opened. moved to the P (Park) position. . shift lever is moved out of P (Park). . ignition switch changes position.

5-14 Starting and driving onds after the chime sounds. The CAUTION engine will start. After step 3 is performed, when the Do not leave the vehicle with the ignition switch is pushed without depres- push-button ignition switch in ACC or sing the brake pedal, the ignition switch ON positions when the engine is not position will change to ACC. running for an extended period. This NOTE: can discharge the battery. . When the ignition switch is pushed to the ACC or ON position or the EMERGENCY ENGINE SHUT OFF engine is started by the above procedures, the Intelligent Key battery To shut off the engine in an emergency discharge indicator appears on the situation while driving, perform the fol- vehicle information display even if lowing procedure: the Intelligent Key is inside the . Rapidly push the push-button ignition JVS0404X vehicle. This is not a malfunction. switch 3 consecutive times in less INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY DIS- To turn off the Intelligent Key bat- than 1.5 seconds, or tery discharge indicator, touch the . Push and hold the push-button igni- CHARGE ignition switch with the Intelligent tion switch for more than 2 seconds. If the battery of the Intelligent Key is Key again. discharged, or environmental conditions . If the Intelligent Key battery dis- interfere with the Intelligent Key opera- charge indicator appears, replace tion, start the engine according to the the battery as soon as possible. following procedure: (See “Battery” (P.8-11).) 1. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) position. 2. Firmly apply the foot brake. 3. Touch the ignition switch with the Intelligent Key as illustrated. (A chime will sound.) 4. Push the ignition switch while depressing the brake pedal within 10 sec-

Starting and driving 5-15 BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE STARTING THE ENGINE

. Make sure the area around the vehicle 1. Apply the parking brake. pedal by depressing the brake is clear. 2. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) or N pedal and pushing the push-button . Check fluid levels such as engine oil, (Neutral) position. (P is recommended.) ignition switch to start the engine. coolant, brake fluid and window If the engine starts, but fails to run, The starter is designed not to operate washer fluid as frequently as possible, repeat the above procedure. unless the shift lever is in either of the or at least whenever you refuel. above positions. . Check that all windows and lights are clean. 3. Push the ignition switch to the ON CAUTION position. Firmly depress the brake . Visually inspect tires for their appear- pedal and push the ignition switch to ance and condition. Also check tires Do not operate the starter for more start the engine. for proper inflation. than 15 seconds at a time. If the engine does not start, push the . Lock all doors. To start the engine immediately, push and release the ignition switch while ignition switch to OFF and wait 10 . Position seat and adjust head re- depressing the brake pedal with the seconds before cranking again, straints/headrests. ignition switch in any position. otherwise the starter could be da- . Adjust inside and outside mirrors. . If the engine is very hard to start in maged. . Fasten seat belts and ask all passen- extremely cold weather or when gers to do likewise. restarting, depress the accelerator 4. Warm-up . Check the operation of warning lights pedal a little (approximately 1/3 to Allow the engine to idle for at least 30 when the ignition switch is pushed to the floor) and while holding, crank seconds after starting. Do not race the the ON position. (See “Warning lights, the engine. Release the accelerator engine while warming it up. Drive at indicator lights and audible remin- pedal when the engine starts. moderate speed for a short distance ders” (P.2-10).) . If the engine is very hard to start first, especially in cold weather. In cold because it is flooded, depress the weather, keep the engine running for accelerator pedal all the way to the a minimum of 2 - 3 minutes before floor and hold it. Push the ignition shutting it off. Starting and stopping switch to the ON position to start the engine over a short period of time cranking the engine. After 5 or 6 may make the vehicle more difficult to seconds, stop cranking by pushing start. the ignition switch to OFF. After cranking the engine, release the When racing the engine up to 4,000 accelerator pedal. Crank the engine rpm or more under the no load with your foot off the accelerator condition, the engine will enter the 5-16 Starting and driving DRIVING THE VEHICLE

fuel cut mode. the ON position, perform the following ENGINE PROTECTION MODE 5. To stop the engine, shift the shift lever steps: The engine has an engine protection to the P (Park) position and push the 1. Make sure that the Intelligent Key is mode to reduce the chance of damage ignition switch to the OFF position. on you. if the coolant temperature becomes too In preparation for the next engine start, 2. Firmly depress the brake pedal. high (for example, when climbing steep the engine may have a slightly delayed grades in high temperature with heavy 3. Push the ignition switch once to the loads, such as when towing a trailer). shutoff after placing the ignition switch in ON position. the OFF position, depending on the driv- When the engine temperature reaches a ing conditions. For additional information about the certain level: remote engine start function, see “Re- . NOTE: mote engine start” (P.3-19). The engine coolant temperature Care should be taken to avoid situations gauge will move toward the H posi- that can lead to potential battery dis- tion. charge and potential no-start condi- . Engine power may be reduced. tions such as: . The air conditioning cooling function 1. Installation or extended use of elec- may be automatically turned OFF for a tronic accessories that consume short time (the blower will continue to battery power when the engine is operate). not running (Phone chargers, GPS, Engine power and, under some condi- DVD players, etc.) tions, vehicle speed will decrease. Vehicle 2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/ speed can be controlled with the accel- or only driven short distances. erator pedal, but the vehicle may not accelerate at the desired speed. The In these cases, the battery may need to transmission will downshift or upshift as be charged to maintain battery health. it reaches prescribed shift points. You can REMOTE ENGINE START (if so also shift manually. equipped) As driving conditions change and engine Vehicles started with the remote engine coolant temperature is reduced, vehicle start function require the ignition switch speed can be increased using the accel- to be placed in the ON position before the erator pedal, and air conditioning cooling shift lever can be moved from the P (Park) function will automatically be turned position. To place the ignition switch in back ON. Starting and driving 5-17 If: AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION 1. The engine coolant temperature is not WARNING reduced. 7 speed automatic transmission 2. The air conditioning cooling function Overheating can result in reduced The automatic transmission in your vehi- does not turn back ON. engine power and vehicle speed. cle is electronically controlled by a trans- The reduced speed may be lower mission control module to produce 3. The engine oil pressure warning light than other traffic, which could in- maximum efficiency and smooth opera- illuminates or engine coolant crease the chance of a collision. Be tion. temperature gauge does not return especially careful when driving. If the to the normal range from the H Shown on the following pages are the vehicle cannot maintain a safe driv- position, this may indicate a malfunc- recommended operating procedures for ing speed, pull to the side of the road tion. Move the vehicle off the road to a this transmission. Follow these proce- in a safe area. Allow the engine to safe area and allow the engine to cool. dures for maximum vehicle performance cool and return to normal operation. If after checking the oil and coolant, and driving enjoyment. See “If your vehicle overheats” (P.6- the remains on or engine coolant 14). Starting the vehicle temperature does not return to the normal range, do not continue to After starting the engine, fully depress the drive. It is recommended you contact foot brake pedal and push the shift lever a NISSAN dealer. button before shifting the shift lever to CAUTION the R (Reverse), N (Neutral), D (Drive) or The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) Manual shift mode position. Be sure the may also come ON. You do not need to Running the engine with the engine vehicle is fully stopped before attempting have your vehicle towed, unless it re- oil pressure warning light on could to shift the shift lever. mains on, but have it inspected soon. It is cause serious damage to the engine This automatic transmission model is recommended you contact a NISSAN almost immediately. Such damage is dealer for this service. See “Warning lights, designed so that the foot brake pedal not covered by warranty. Turn off the must be depressed before shifting from indicator lights and audible reminders” engine as soon as it is safe to do so. (P.2-10). P (Park) to any drive position while the ignition switch position is ON. The shift lever cannot be moved out of the P (Park) position and into any of the other gear positions if the ignition switch is pushed to the LOCK, OFF or ACC position. 5-18 Starting and driving 1. Keep the foot brake pedal depressed . Do not downshift abruptly on and push the shift lever button to shift slippery roads. This may cause a into a driving gear. loss of control. 2. Release the parking brake and foot brake, then gradually start the vehicle in motion. CAUTION

WARNING . Except in an emergency, do not shift to the N (Neutral) position . Do not depress the accelerator while driving. Coasting with the pedal while shifting from P (Park) transmission in the N (Neutral) or N (Neutral) to R (Reverse), D position may cause serious da- (Drive) or manual shift mode. Al- mage to the transmission. ways depress the brake pedal . To avoid possible damage to your SSD0945 until shifting is completed. Failure vehicle; when stopping the vehi- Shift lever to do so could cause you to lose cle on an uphill grade, do not hold To move the shift lever, control and have an accident. the vehicle by depressing the . : Push the button while depressing the Cold engine idle speed is high, so accelerator pedal. The foot brake brake pedal, should be used for this purpose. use caution when shifting into a : Push the button, forward or reverse gear before the engine has warmed up. : Just move the shift lever. . Never shift to either the P (Park) Shifting or R (Reverse) position while the The shift lever position indicator light vehicle is moving forward and P (next to the shift lever) will be illuminated (Park), D (Drive) position or man- for approximately 30 minutes after the ual shift mode while the vehicle is ignition switch is turned off. The indicator moving rearward. This could light may also illuminate when the vehicle cause an accident or damage receives radio waves. This is not a mal- the transmission. function. After starting the engine, fully depress the

Starting and driving 5-19 brake pedal and shift the shift lever from the shift lever from the N (Neutral) D (Drive): P (Park) to R (Reverse), N (Neutral), D position or any drive position to the P Use this position for all normal forward (Drive) or Manual shift mode position. (Park) position. Apply the parking brake. driving. Push the button to shift into P (Park) or R When parking on a hill, apply the parking (Reverse). All other positions can be brake first, then move the shift lever to Manual shift mode selected without pushing the button. the P (Park) position. When the shift lever is in the manual shift gate, the transmission is ready for the CAUTION manual shift mode. Shift ranges can be WARNING selected manually by moving the shift lever up or down. Apply the parking brake if the shift Use this position only when the vehicle is completely stopped. When shifting up, move the shift lever to lever is in any position while the the + (up) side. The transmission shifts to engine is not running. Failure to do the higher range. so could cause the vehicle to move R (Reverse): unexpectedly or roll away and result When shifting down, move the shift lever Use this position to back up. Always be in serious personal injury or property to the − (down) side. The transmission sure the vehicle is completely stopped damage. shifts to the lower range. before selecting the R (Reverse) position. When canceling the manual shift mode, The brake pedal must be depressed and return the shift lever to the D (Drive) the shift lever button pushed in to move position. The transmission returns to the the shift lever from the P (Park) posi- CAUTION normal driving mode. tion, the N (Neutral) position or any drive position to the R (Reverse) posi- In the manual shift mode, the shift range Make sure the vehicle is completely tion. is displayed on the position indicator in stopped and the transmission is in the meter. the P (Park) position. N (Neutral): Neither forward nor reverse gear is en- P (Park) position: gaged. The engine can be started in this position. You may shift to the N (Neutral) Use this position when the vehicle is position and restart a stalled engine while parked or when starting the engine. Make the vehicle is moving. sure the vehicle is completely stopped. The brake pedal must be depressed and the shift lever button pushed in to move 5-20 Starting and driving Shift ranges up or down one by one as shift to the other gear. This helps spinning and subsequent hard braking, follows: maintain driving performance and the fail-safe system may be activated. reduces the chance of vehicle da- This will occur even if all electrical M ? M ? M ? M ? M ? M ? M 1 / 2 / 3 / 4 / 5 / 6 / 7 mage or loss of control. circuits are functioning properly. In this . When the transmission does not case, push the switch to the OFF posi- M 7 (7th): shift to the selected gear, the Auto- tion and wait for 3 seconds. Then push Use this position for all normal forward matic Transmission (AT) position in- the ignition switch back to the ON driving at highway speeds. dicator light (in the vehicle position. The vehicle should return to its normal operating condition. If it does M M information display) will blink and 6 (6th) and 5 (5th): the buzzer will sound. not return to its normal operating con- Use these positions when driving up long . In the manual shift mode, the trans- dition, have the transmission checked slopes, or for engine braking when driving mission automatically shifts down and repaired, if necessary. It is recom- down long slopes. to 1st gear before the vehicle comes mended you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. M4 (4th), M3 (3rd) and M2 (2nd): to a stop. When accelerating again, it is necessary to shift up to the Use these positions for hill climbing or desired range. engine braking on downhill grades. M1 (1st): Accelerator downshift — In D (Drive) Use this position when climbing steep position — hills slowly or driving slowly through deep For passing or hill climbing, fully depress snow, or for maximum engine braking on the accelerator pedal to the floor. This steep downhill grades. shifts the transmission down into the . Remember not to drive at high speeds lower gear, depending on the vehicle for extended periods of time in lower speed. than 7th gear. This reduces fuel econ- Fail-safe omy. When the fail-safe operation occurs, note . Moving the shift lever rapidly to the that the transmission will be locked in any same side twice will shift the ranges in of the forward gears according to the succession. condition. . In the manual shift mode, the transmission may not shift to the se- If the vehicle is driven under extreme lected gear or may automatically conditions, such as excessive wheel Starting and driving 5-21 PARKING BRAKE

4. Push down the shift lock as illustrated. WARNING 5. Push the shift lever button and move the shift lever to N (Neutral) . Be sure the parking brake is fully position while holding down the released before driving. Failure to shift lock. do so can cause brake failure and The vehicle may be moved to the desired lead to an accident. location. . Do not release the parking brake If the lever cannot be moved out of P from outside the vehicle. (Park), have the automatic transmission . Do not use the gear shift in place system checked as soon as possible. It is of the parking brake. When park- recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer ing, be sure the parking brake is for this service. fully engaged. SSD0946 . To help avoid risk of injury or death through unintended opera- Shift lock release tion of the vehicle and/or its If the battery charge is low or discharged, systems, do not leave children, the shift lever may not be moved from the people who require the assis- P (Park) position even with the brake tance of others or pets unat- pedal depressed and the shift lever but- tended in your vehicle. ton pushed. Additionally, the temperature inside a closed vehicle on a warm To move the shift lever, perform the day can quickly become high following procedure: enough to cause a significant risk 1. Place the ignition switch in the OFF or of injury or death to people and LOCK position. pets. 2. Apply the parking brake. 3. Remove the shift lock cover using a suitable tool.

5-22 Starting and driving LANE DEPARTURE WARNING (LDW)/ INTELLIGENT LANE INTERVENTION (I-LI) (if so equipped) . Lane Departure Warning (LDW) system WARNING — warns the driver with a warning light and chime that the vehicle is Failure to follow the warnings and beginning to leave the driving lane. instructions for proper use of the . Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI) sys- LDW and I-LI systems could result in tem serious personal injury or death. — warns the driver with a warning light and chime, and helps assist . The LDW and I-LI systems will not the driver to return the vehicle to prevent loss of control. It is the the center of the traveling lane by driver’s responsibility to stay applying the brakes to the left or alert, drive safely, keep the vehi- right wheels individually (for a short cle in the traveling lane, and be in period of time). control of the vehicle at all times. SPA2331 . The I-LI system may activate if you change lanes without first To apply: Fully depress the parking brake activating your turn signal or, for pedal . example, if a construction zone To release: directs traffic to cross an existing 1. Firmly apply the foot brake . lane marker. If this occurs, you may need to apply corrective 2. Depress the parking brake pedal steering to complete your lane and the parking brake will be released. change. 3. Before driving, be sure the brake . Because the I-LI system may not warning light goes out. activate under the road, weather, and lane marker conditions described in this section, it may not activate every time your vehicle begins to leave its lane and you will need to apply corrective steering.

Starting and driving 5-23 JVS0907X The LDW and I-LI systems use a camera installed behind the windshield to monitor the lane markers of your traveling lane.

JVS1094X I-LI ON indicator light/LDW indicator light LDW SYSTEM OPERATION (on the instrument panel) The LDW system operates above approxi- Warning systems switch mately 45 MPH (70 km/h) and when the Dynamic driver assistance switch lane markings are clear. Center multi-function control panel If the vehicle approaches either the left or right side of the traveling lane, the LDW indicator light (orange) on the instrument 5-24 Starting and driving panel will flash and a warning chime will sound. NOTE: The LDW system is not designed to warn when you operate the lane change signal and change traveling lanes in the direction of the signal. (The LDW system will become operable again approximately 2 seconds after the lane change signal is turned off.)

JVS1130X Warning systems switch TURNING THE LDW SYSTEM ON/OFF Warning systems ON indicator light The warning systems switch is used to Center multi-function control panel turn on and off the LDW system when it is activated on the center display using the center multi-function control panel . See “How to enable/disable the LDW system” (P.5-26). When the warning systems

Starting and driving 5-25 switch is turned off, the warning I-LI SYSTEM OPERATION systems ON indicator light on the The I-LI system operates above approxi- switch is off. mately 45 MPH (70 km/h) and when the The warning systems switch will turn lane markings are clear. on and off the LDW and BSW (if so If the vehicle approaches either the left or equipped) systems at the same time. right side of the traveling lane, the LDW indicator light (orange) on the instrument panel will flash and a warning chime will sound. Then, the I-LI system will automatically apply the brakes for a short period of time to help assist the driver to return the vehicle to the center of the traveling lane. JVS1043X NOTE: . The I-LI system is not designed to HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE LDW work when you operate the lane SYSTEM change signal and change traveling lanes in the direction of the signal. Perform the following steps to enable or (The I-LI system will become oper- disable the LDW system. able again approximately 2 seconds 1. Push the SETTING button . after the lane change signal is 2. Touch [Driver Assistance]. turned off.) 3. Touch [Lane Assist]. . The I-LI braking assist will not operate or will stop operating and only a 4. Touch [Lane Departure Warning] to warning chime will sound under the turn the system ON/OFF. following conditions. — When the brake pedal is depressed. — When the steering wheel is turned as far as necessary for the vehicle to change lanes.

5-26 Starting and driving — When the accelerator pedal is depressed while brake control assist is provided. — When the ICC, I-DC, I-BSI, BSW, I- FCW or AEB warnings sound. — When the hazard warning flashers are operated. — When driving on a curve at a high speed. . While the I-LI system is operating, you may hear a sound of brake operation. This is normal and indicates that the I-LI system is operating properly.

JVS1095X I-LI ON indicator light (green) (on the TURNING THE I-LI SYSTEM ON/OFF instrument panel) To turn on the I-LI system, push the Dynamic driver assistance switch dynamic driver assistance switch on Center multi-function control panel the steering wheel after starting the engine. The I-LI ON indicator light (green) on the instrument panel will illuminate. Push the dynamic driver assistance

Starting and driving 5-27 switch again to turn off the I-LI system. LDW/I-LI SYSTEM LIMITATIONS The I-LI ON indicator light (green) will turn off. The dynamic driver assistance switch is WARNING used for the I-LI, I-BSI (if so equipped) and I-DC systems. Listed below are the system limitations for the LDW and I-LI systems. When the dynamic driver assistance Failure to operate the vehicle in switch is pushed, the I-BSI and I-DC accordance with these system lim- systems will also turn on or off simulta- itations could result in serious injury neously. The I-LI system can be individu- or death. ally set to on or off on the center display using the center multi-function control . The system will not operate at panel . speeds below 45 MPH (70 km/h) or if it cannot detect lane mar- If the system is set to off, the system will JVS1043X not turn on even if the dynamic driver kers. assistance switch is pushed to on. To HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE I-LI . The I-LI system is primarily in- set the system to on or off on the center SYSTEM tended for use on well-developed display, see “How to enable/disable the I- freeways or highways. It may not LI system” (P.5-28). Perform the following steps to enable the detect the lane markers in certain I-LI system. roads, weather or driving condi- 1. Push the SETTING button . tions. 2. Touch [Driver Assistance]. . Do not use the I-LI system under 3. Touch [Lane Assist]. the following conditions as it may not function properly: 4. Touch [Lane Departure Prevention] to turn the system ON/OFF. — During bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.). — When driving on slippery roads, such as on ice or snow, etc.

5-28 Starting and driving — When driving on winding or water, dirt, snow, etc. properly. uneven roads. — On roads where the discontin- — When strong light enters the — When there is a lane closure ued lane markers are still lane camera unit. (For exam- due to road repairs. detectable. ple, the light directly shines on — When driving in a makeshift or — On roads where there are the front of the vehicle at temporary lane. sharp curves. sunrise or sunset.) — When driving on roads where — On roads where there are — When a sudden change in the lane width is too narrow. sharply contrasting objects, brightness occurs. (For exam- such as shadows, snow, ple, when the vehicle enters or — When driving without normal exits a tunnel or under a tire conditions (for example, water, wheel ruts, seams or lines remaining after road re- bridge.) tire wear, low tire pressure, . installation of spare tire, tire pairs. (The LDW and I-LI sys- Excessive noise will interfere with chains, non-standard wheels). tems could detect these items the warning chime sound, and as lane markers.) the chime may not be heard. — When the vehicle is equipped with non-original brake parts — On roads where the traveling or suspension parts. lane merges or separates. — When towing a trailer or other — When the vehicle’s traveling vehicle. direction does not align with the lane marker. . The camera may not detect lane markers in the following situa- — When traveling close to the tions and the LDW and I-LI sys- vehicle in front of you, which tems may not operate properly. obstructs the lane camera unit detection range. — On roads where there are multiple parallel lane markers, — When rain, snow or dirt ad- lane markers that are faded or heres to the windshield in not painted clearly, yellow front of the lane camera unit. painted lane markers, non- — When the headlights are not standard lane markers, or bright due to dirt on the lens lane markers covered with or if the aiming is not adjusted Starting and driving 5-29 LI system cannot be activated: . When the VDC system (except TCS function) or ABS operates. . When the VDC system is turned off. . When the SNOW mode switch is turned on. . When the 4WD shift switch is in the 4H or 4L position (for 4WD models). Action to take: When the above conditions no longer exist, turn off the I-LI system. Push the dynamic driver assistance switch again to turn the I-LI system back on. Condition B: LDW system: If the vehicle is parked in direct sunlight under high temperature conditions (over approximately 104°F (40°C)) and then the LDW system is turned on, the LDW system may be deactivated automatically, and the warning systems ON indicator light on the switch will blink. JVS0882X I-LI system: If the vehicle is parked in I-LI ON indicator light (green) (on the SYSTEM TEMPORARILY UNAVAIL- direct sunlight under high temperature instrument panel) ABLE conditions (over approximately 104°F Warning systems ON indicator light (40°C)) and then the I-LI system is turned Condition A: Dynamic driver assistance switch on, the I-LI system will be turned off Under the following conditions, a beep automatically, a beep will sound and the will sound and the I-LI system will be I-LI ON indicator light (green) will blink. canceled automatically. The I-LI ON in- The LDW and I-LI systems are not avail- dicator light (green) will blink, and the I- able until the conditions no longer exist. 5-30 Starting and driving Action to take: the lane markers. When the above conditions no longer . Do not strike or damage the areas exist, the LDW system will resume auto- around the camera unit. Do not touch matically. the camera lens or remove the screw located on the camera unit. It is For the I-LI system, push the dynamic recommended you contact a NISSAN driver assistance switch again to turn dealer if the camera unit is damaged the I-LI system back on. due to an accident. SYSTEM MALFUNCTION LDW system: When the LDW system malfunctions, it will cancel automatically, and the LDW indicator light (orange) will illuminate. I-LI system: When the I-LI system malfunctions, it will be turned off automati- SSD0453 cally, a beep will sound, and the LDW SYSTEM MAINTENANCE indicator light (orange) will illuminate. The lane camera unit for the LDW/I-LI Action to take: systems is located above the inside Stop the vehicle in a safe location, place mirror. the vehicle in the P (Park) position, turn To keep the proper operation of the LDW/ the engine off and restart the engine. If I-LI systems and prevent a system mal- the LDW indicator light (orange) con- function, be sure to observe the following: tinues to illuminate, have the system . checked. It is recommended you visit a Always keep the windshield clean. NISSAN dealer for this service. . Do not attach a sticker (including transparent material) or install an accessory near the camera unit. . Do not place reflective materials, such as white paper or a mirror, on the instrument panel. The reflection of sunlight may adversely affect the camera unit’s capability of detecting Starting and driving 5-31 BLIND SPOT WARNING (BSW) (if so equipped)

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the BSW system could result in serious injury or death. . The BSW system is not a replacement for proper driving procedure and is not designed to prevent contact with vehicles or objects. When changing lanes, always use the side and rear mirrors and turn and look in the JVS0908X SSD1030 direction your vehicle will move Detection zone to ensure it is safe to change The BSW system uses radar sensors lanes. Never rely solely on the installed near the rear bumper to detect The radar sensors can detect vehicles on BSW system. other vehicles in an adjacent lane. either side of your vehicle within the detection zone shown as illustrated. This . There is a limitation to the detec- detection zone starts from the outside tion capability of the radar. Not mirror of your vehicle and extends ap- every moving object or vehicle proximately 10 ft (3.0 m) behind the rear will be detected. Using the BSW bumper, and approximately 10 ft (3.0 m) system under some road, ground, sideways. lane marker, traffic or weather conditions could lead to improper system operation. Always rely on your own operation to avoid accidents.

The BSW system helps alert the driver of other vehicles in adjacent lanes when changing lanes. 5-32 Starting and driving system chimes (twice) and the side indicator light flashes. The side indicator light continues to flash until the detected vehicle leaves the detection zone. NOTE: . The side indicator light illuminates for a few seconds when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position. . The brightness of the side indicator light is adjusted automatically depending on the brightness of the ambient light. . If a vehicle comes into the detection zone after the driver activates the turn signal, then only the side indicator light flashes and no chime sounds. For additional information, refer to “BSW driving situations” (P.5-36).

JVS1096X Side indicator light BSW SYSTEM OPERATION BSW system warning light The BSW system operates above approxi- Warning systems switch mately 20 MPH (32 km/h). Center multi-function control panel If the radar sensors detect a vehicle in the detection zone, the side indicator light illuminates. If the turn signal is then activated, the Starting and driving 5-33 switch is turned off, the warning systems ON indicator light on the switch is off. The warning systems switch will turn on and off the LDW and BSW systems at the same time. HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE BSW SYSTEM The BSW system can be turned off permanently using the center display.

JVS1130X Warning systems switch TURNING THE BSW SYSTEM ON/OFF Warning systems ON indicator light The warning systems switch is used to Center multi-function control panel turn on and off the BSW system when it is activated on the center display using the center multi-function control panel . See “How to enable/disable the BSW system” (P.5-34). When the warning systems

5-34 Starting and driving with these system limitations could lane width. When driving in a result in serious injury or death. wider lane, the radar sensors . The BSW system cannot detect all may not detect vehicles in an vehicles under all conditions. adjacent lane. When driving in a narrow lane, the radar sensors . The radar sensors may not be may detect vehicles driving two able to detect and activate BSW lanes away. when certain objects are present . such as: The radar sensors are designed to ignore most stationary objects, — Pedestrians, bicycles, animals. however objects such as guard- — Vehicles such as motorcycles, rails, walls, foliage and parked low height vehicles, or high vehicles may occasionally be de- ground clearance vehicles. tected. This is a normal operation condition. JVS1043X — Oncoming vehicles. . The following conditions may re- Perform the following steps to enable or — Vehicles remaining in the de- duce the ability of the radar to disable the BSW system. tection zone when you accel- detect other vehicles: erate from a stop. 1. Push the SETTING button . — Severe weather — A vehicle merging into an 2. Touch [Driver Assistance]. — Road spray adjacent lane at a speed ap- 3. Touch [Blind Spot Assist]. proximately the same as your — Ice/frost/snow build-up on 4. Touch [Blind Spot Warning] to turn the vehicle. the vehicle system ON/OFF. — A vehicle approaching rapidly — Dirt build-up on the vehicle BSW SYSTEM LIMITATIONS from behind. . Do not attach stickers (including — A vehicle which your vehicle transparent material), install ac- WARNING overtakes rapidly. cessories or apply additional paint near the radar sensors. — A vehicle that passes through These conditions may reduce the Listed below are the system limita- the detection zone quickly. ability of the radar to detect other tions for the BSW system. Failure to . operate the vehicle in accordance The radar sensor’s detection zone vehicles. is designed based on a standard Starting and driving 5-35 . Excessive noise (for example, audio system volume, open vehicle window) will interfere with the chime sound, and it may not be heard.

BSW DRIVING SITUATIONS

Indicator on

Indicator off

Indicator flashing JVS0737X JVS0738X Illustration 1 – Approaching from behind Illustration 2 – Approaching from behind Another vehicle approaching from Illustration 2: If the driver activates the behind turn signal, then the system chimes (twice) and the side indicator light flashes. Illustration 1: The side indicator light NOTE: illuminates if a vehicle enters the detec- . tion zone from behind in an adjacent lane. The radar sensors may not detect vehicles which are approaching rapidly from behind. . If the driver activates the turn signal before a vehicle enters the detection zone, the side indicator light will flash but no chime will sound when the other vehicle is detected.

5-36 Starting and driving the other vehicle is detected.

JVS0739X JVS0740X Illustration 3 – Overtaking another vehicle Illustration 4 – Overtaking another vehicle Overtaking another vehicle Illustration 4: If the driver activates the turn signal while another vehicle is in the Illustration 3: The side indicator light detection zone, then the system chimes illuminates if you overtake a vehicle and (twice) and the side indicator light flashes. that vehicle stays in the detection zone for approximately 3 seconds. NOTE: . When overtaking several vehicles in The radar sensors may not detect slower a row, the vehicles after the first moving vehicles if they are passed vehicle may not be detected if they quickly. are traveling close together. . The radar sensors may not detect slower moving vehicles if they are passed quickly. . If the driver activates the turn signal before a vehicle enters the detection zone, the side indicator light will flash but no chime will sound when Starting and driving 5-37 JVS0741X JVS0742X Illustration 5 – Entering from the side Illustration 6 – Entering from the side Entering from the side Illustration 6: If the driver activates the turn signal, then the system chimes Illustration 5: The side indicator light (twice) and the side indicator light flashes. illuminates if a vehicle enters the detection zone from either side. NOTE: . The radar sensors may not detect a vehicle which is traveling at about the same speed as your vehicle when it enters the detection zone. . If the driver activates the turn signal before a vehicle enters the detection zone, the side indicator light will flash but no chime will sound when the other vehicle is detected.

5-38 Starting and driving tions no longer exist. The radar sensors may be blocked by temporary ambient conditions such as splashing water, mist or fog. The blocked condition may also be caused by objects such as ice, frost or dirt obstructing the radar sensors. Action to take: When the above conditions no longer exist, the system will resume automatically. If the BSW system warning light (orange) continues to blink, have the system checked. It is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. SYSTEM MALFUNCTION When the system malfunctions, it will be turned off automatically, a beep will sound and the BSW system warning light (orange) will illuminate. Action to take: JVS0687X Stop the vehicle in a safe location, place BSW system warning light (orange) the vehicle in the P (Park) position, turn SYSTEM TEMPORARILY UNAVAIL- the engine off and restart the engine. ABLE If the BSW system warning light continues When radar blockage is detected, the to illuminate, have the system checked. It system will be turned off automatically, is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer a beep will sound and the BSW system for this service. warning light (orange) will blink. The system is not available until the condi-

Starting and driving 5-39 INTELLIGENT BLIND SPOT INTERVENTION (I-BSI) (if so equipped)

apply additional paint near the radar sensors. WARNING Do not strike or damage the area around the radar sensors. Failure to follow the warnings and It is recommended you visit a NISSAN instructions for proper use of the I- dealer if the area around the radar BSI system could result in serious sensors is damaged due to a collision. injury or death. Radio frequency statement . The I-BSI system is not a replacement for proper driving proce- This device complies with part 15 of the dures and is not designed to FCC Rules and RSS-310 of Industry Cana- prevent contact with vehicles or da. objects. When changing lanes, al- Operation is subject to the following two ways use the side and rear mir- JVS0908X conditions: rors and turn and look in the 1. This device may not cause harmful direction your vehicle will move SYSTEM MAINTENANCE interference. to ensure it is safe to change The two radar sensors for the BSW lanes. Never rely solely on the I- 2. This device must accept any interfer- BSI system. system are located near the rear bumper. ence received, including interference Always keep the area near the radar that may cause undesired operation. . There is a limitation to the detec- sensors clean. tion capability of the radar. Not Frequency of operation: 24.05GHz — every moving object or vehicle The radar sensors may be blocked by 24.25GHz temporary ambient conditions such as will be detected. Using the I-BSI Field Strength: Not greater than 2.5V/m splashing water, mist or fog. system under some road, ground, peak (0.25V/m average) at a distance of 3 lane marker, traffic or weather The blocked condition may also be m conditions could lead to improper caused by objects such as ice, frost or The manufacturer is not responsible for system operation. Always rely on dirt obstructing the radar sensors. any radio or TV interference caused by your own operation to avoid ac- Check for and remove objects obstruct- unauthorized modifications to this equip- cidents. ing the area around the radar sensors. ment. Such modifications could void the Do not attach stickers (including trans- user’s authority to operate the equip- The I-BSI system helps alert the driver of parent material), install accessories or ment. other vehicles in adjacent lanes when changing lanes and helps assist the driver 5-40 Starting and driving to return the vehicle to the center of the traveling lane.

JVS0910X SSD1030 Detection zone The I-BSI system uses radar sensors installed near the rear bumper to detect The radar sensors can detect vehicles on other vehicles in an adjacent lane. In either side of your vehicle within the addition to the radar sensors, the I-BSI detection zone shown as illustrated. system uses a camera installed behind This detection zone starts from the out- the windshield to monitor the lane mar- side mirror of your vehicle and extends kers of your traveling lane. approximately 10 ft (3.0 m) behind the rear bumper, and approximately 10 ft (3.0 m) sideways.

Starting and driving 5-41 system chimes (twice) and the side indicator light flashes. The side indicator light continues to flash until the detected vehicle leaves the detection zone. If the I-BSI system is ON and your vehicle approaches a lane marker while another vehicle is in the detection zone, the system chimes (three times) and the side indicator light flashes. Then the I-BSI system slightly applies the brakes to help return the vehicle back to the center of the driving lane. The I-BSI system operates regardless of turn signal usage. NOTE: . I-BSI warning and system application of the brakes will only be activated if the side indicator light is already illuminated when your vehicle approaches a lane marker. If another vehicle comes into the detection zone after your vehicle has crossed a lane marker, no I-BSI warning or system application of the JVS1097X brakes will be activated. (See “I-BSI driving situations” (P.5-46).) Side indicator light I-BSI SYSTEM OPERATION . The I-BSI system is typically acti- I-BSI ON indicator light (green)/I-BSI sys- The I-BSI system operates above approxi- tem warning light (orange) vated earlier than the Intelligent mately 37 MPH (60 km/h). Dynamic driver assistance switch Lane Intervention (I-LI) system when Center multi-function control panel If the radar sensors detect a vehicle in the your vehicle is approaching a lane detection zone, the side indicator light marker. illuminates. If the turn signal is then activated, the 5-42 Starting and driving illuminate. Push the dynamic driver assistance switch again to turn off the I-BSI system. The I-BSI ON indicator light (green) will turn off. The dynamic driver assistance switch is used for the I-BSI, I-LI and I-DC systems. When the dynamic driver assistance switch is pushed, the I-LI and I-DC systems will also turn on or off simultaneously. The I-BSI system can be individually set to on or off on the center display using the center multi-function control panel . If the system is set to off, the system will not turn on even if the dynamic driver assistance switch is pushed to on. To set the system to on or off on the center display, see “How to enable/disable the I- BSI system” (P.5-44).

JVS1098X I-BSI ON indicator light (green) TURNING THE I-BSI SYSTEM ON/ Dynamic driver assistance switch OFF Center multi-function control panel To turn on the I-BSI system, push the dynamic driver assistance switch on the steering wheel after starting the engine. The I-BSI ON indicator light (green) on the instrumental panel will

Starting and driving 5-43 I-BSI SYSTEM LIMITATIONS — A vehicle approaching rapidly from behind. WARNING — A vehicle which your vehicle overtakes rapidly. Listed below are the system limita- — A vehicle that passes through tions for the I-BSI system. Failure to the detection zone quickly. operate the vehicle in accordance . with these system limitations could The radar sensor’s detection zone result in serious injury or death. is designed based on a standard lane width. When driving in a . The I-BSI system cannot detect all wider lane, the radar sensors vehicles under all conditions. may not detect vehicles in an . The radar sensors may not be adjacent lane. When driving in a narrow lane, the radar sensors JVS1043X able to detect and activate I-BSI when certain objects are present may detect vehicles driving two HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE I-BSI such as: lanes away. SYSTEM — Pedestrians, bicycles, animals. . The radar sensors are designed to ignore most stationary objects, Perform the following steps to enable or — Vehicles such as motorcycles, however objects such as guard- disable the I-BSI system. low height vehicles, or high rails, walls, foliage and parked 1. Push the SETTING button . ground clearance vehicles. vehicles may occasionally be de- 2. Touch [Driver Assistance]. — Vehicles remaining in the detected. This is a normal operation 3. Touch [Blind Spot Assist]. tection zone when you accel- condition. erate from a stop. . 4. Touch [Blind Spot Intervention] to turn The camera may not detect lane the system ON/OFF. — Oncoming vehicles. markers in the following situations and the I-BSI system may — A vehicle merging into an not operate properly. adjacent lane at a speed approximately the same as your — On roads where there are vehicle. multiple parallel lane markers; lane markers that are faded or not painted clearly; yellow

5-44 Starting and driving painted lane markers; non- or if aiming is not adjusted — When driving on roads where standard lane markers; lane properly. the lane width is too narrow. markers covered with water, — When strong light enters a — When driving with a tire that is dirt, snow, etc. lane camera unit. (For exam- not within normal tire condi- — On roads where discontinued ple: light directly shines on the tions (for example, tire wear, lane markers are still detect- front of the vehicle at sunrise low tire pressure, installation able. or sunset.) of spare tire, tire chains, non- — On roads where there are — When a sudden change in standard wheels). sharp curves. brightness occurs. (For exam- — When the vehicle is equipped — On roads where there are ple: when the vehicle enters or with non-original brake parts sharply contrasting objects, exits a tunnel or under a or suspension parts. bridge.) such as shadows, snow, — When towing a trailer or other water, wheel ruts, seams or . Do not use the I-BSI system under vehicle. lines remaining after road re- the following conditions because . Excessive noise (for example, pairs. the system may not function audio system volume, open vehi- properly. — On roads where the traveling cle window) will interfere with the lane merges or separates. — During bad weather. (For ex- chime sound, and it may not be ample: rain, fog, snow, etc.) — When the vehicle’s traveling heard. direction does not align with — When driving on slippery the lane markers. roads, such as on ice or snow, etc. — When traveling close to the vehicle in front of you, which — When driving on winding or obstructs the lane camera uneven roads. unit detection range. — When there is a lane closure — When rain, snow or dirt ad- due to road repairs. heres to the windshield in — When driving in a makeshift or front of a lane camera unit. temporary lane. — When the headlights are not bright due to dirt on the lens Starting and driving 5-45 I-BSI DRIVING SITUATIONS

Indicator on

Indicator off

Indicator flashing

JVS0737X JVS0738X Illustration 1 - Approaching from behind Illustration 2 - Approaching from behind Another vehicle approaching from Illustration 2: If the driver activates the behind turn signal then the system chimes (twice) and the side indicator light flashes. Illustration 1: The side indicator light illuminates if a vehicle enters the detection zone from behind in an adjacent lane.

5-46 Starting and driving the other vehicle is detected.

JVS0760X JVS0739X Illustration 3 - Approaching from behind Illustration 4 - Overtaking another vehicle Illustration 3: If the I-BSI system is on and Overtaking another vehicle your vehicle approaches a lane marker while another vehicle is in the detection Illustration 4: The side indicator light zone, the system chimes (three times) illuminates if you overtake a vehicle and and the side indicator light flashes. Then that vehicle stays in the detection zone the I-BSI system slightly applies the for approximately 3 seconds. brakes to help return the vehicle back to the center of the driving lane. NOTE: . The radar sensors may not detect vehicles which are approaching rapidly from behind. . If the driver activates the turn signal before a vehicle enters the detection zone, the side indicator light will flash but no chime will sound when Starting and driving 5-47 . The radar sensors may not detect slower moving vehicles if they are passed quickly. . If the driver activates the turn signal before a vehicle enters the detection zone, the side indicator light will flash but no chime will sound when the other vehicle is detected.

JVS0740X JVS0761X Illustration 5 - Overtaking another vehicle Illustration 6 - Overtaking another vehicle Illustration 5: If the driver activates the Illustration 6: If the I-BSI system is on and turn signal while another vehicle is in the your vehicle approaches a lane marker detection zone, then the system chimes while another vehicle is in the detection (twice) and the side indicator light flashes. zone, the system chimes (three times) and the side indicator light flashes. Then, the I-BSI system slightly applies the brakes on the appropriate side to help return the vehicle back to the center of the driving lane. NOTE: . When overtaking several vehicles in a row, the vehicles after the first vehicle may not be detected if they are traveling close together.

5-48 Starting and driving JVS0741X JVS0742X JVS0761X Illustration 7 - Entering from the side Illustration 8 - Entering from the side Illustration 9 - Entering from the side Entering from the side Illustration 8: If the driver activates the Illustration 9: If the I-BSI system is on and turn signal while another vehicle is in the your vehicle approaches the lane marker Illustration 7: The side indicator light detection zone, then the side indicator while another vehicle is in the detection illuminates if a vehicle enters the detec- light flashes and a chime will sound twice. zone, the system chimes (three times) tion zone from either side. NOTE: and the side indicator light flashes. The I- NOTE: BSI system slightly applies the brakes on If the driver activates the turn signal the appropriate side to help return the The radar sensors may not detect a before a vehicle enters the detection vehicle which is traveling at about the vehicle back to the center of the driving zone, the side indicator light will flash lane. same speed as your vehicle when it but no chime will sound when another enters the detection zone. vehicle is detected.

Starting and driving 5-49 . I-BSI braking will not operate or will stop operating and only a warning chime will sound under the following conditions. — When the brake pedal is depressed. — When the vehicle is accelerated during I-BSI system operation. — When steering quickly — When the ICC, I-DC, I-FCW or AEB warnings sound. — When the hazard warning flashers are operated. JVS0742X — When driving on a curve at a high speed. Illustration 10 - Entering from the side Illustration 10: The I-BSI system will not operate if your vehicle is on a lane marker when another vehicle enters the detection zone. In this case only the BSW system operates. NOTE: . The radar sensors may not detect a vehicle which is traveling at about the same speed as your vehicle when it enters the detection zone. . If the driver activates the turn signal before a vehicle enters the detection zone, the side indicator light will flash but no chime will sound when the other vehicle is detected.

5-50 Starting and driving available until the conditions no longer exist. — When the VDC system (except TCS function) or ABS operates. — When the VDC system is turned off. Action to take: Turn off the I-BSI system and turn it on again when the above conditions no longer exist. . Under the following conditions, the I- BSI system will be turned off automatically, a chime will sound and the I- BSI system warning light (orange) will blink. The I-BSI system is not available until the conditions no longer exist. — When the camera detects that the interior temperature is high (over approximately 104°F (40°C)). — When radar blockage is detected. The radar sensors may be blocked by temporary ambient conditions such as JVS0687X splashing water, mist or fog. The blocked condition may also be caused by objects I-BSI ON indicator light (green)/I-BSI sys- SYSTEM TEMPORARILY UNAVAIL- tem warning light (orange) such as ice, frost or dirt obstructing the ABLE radar sensors. . Under the following conditions, a Action to take: chime will sound, the I-BSI ON indica- When the above conditions no longer tor light (green) will blink and the I- exist, turn the I-BSI system off and turn BSI system will be turned off auto- it on again. If the I-BSI system warning matically. The I-BSI system will not be light (orange) continues to blink even Starting and driving 5-51 after the I-BSI system is turned on again, apply additional paint near the radar stop the vehicle in a safe location, place sensors. the shift lever in the P (Park) position and Do not strike or damage the area around turn the engine off. Check for and remove the radar sensors. objects obscuring the radar sensors on the rear bumper, and restart the engine. It is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer if the area around the radar If the I-BSI system warning light (orange) sensors is damaged due to a collision. continues to blink, have the I-BSI system checked. It is recommended you The lane camera unit for I-BSI system is visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. located above the inside mirror. To keep the proper operation of I-BSI and prevent SYSTEM MALFUNCTION a system malfunction, be sure to observe When the I-BSI system malfunctions, it will the following: be turned off automatically, a chime will . Always keep the windshield clean. sound and the I-BSI system warning light JVS0910X . Do not attach a sticker (including (orange) will illuminate. transparent material) or install an Action to take: SYSTEM MAINTENANCE accessory near the camera unit. Stop the vehicle in a safe location, place The two radar sensors for the I-BSI . Do not place reflective materials, such the shift lever in the P (Park) position, turn system are located near the rear bumper. as white paper or a mirror, on the the engine off and restart the engine. Always keep the area near the radar instrument panel. The reflection of sensors clean. If the warning light (orange) continues to sunlight may adversely affect the illuminate, have the I-BSI system checked. The radar sensors may be blocked by camera unit’s capability of detecting It is recommended you visit a NISSAN temporary ambient conditions such as the lane markers. dealer for this service. splashing water, mist or fog. . Do not strike or damage the areas The blocked condition may also be around the camera unit. Do not touch caused by objects such as ice, frost or the camera lens or remove the screw dirt obstructing the radar sensors. located on the camera unit. It is recommended you contact a NISSAN Check for and remove objects obstruct- dealer if the camera unit is damaged ing the area around the radar sensors. due to an accident. Do not attach stickers (including transparent material), install accessories or

5-52 Starting and driving INTELLIGENT BACK-UP INTERVENTION (I-BI) (if so equipped)

Radio frequency statement This device complies with part 15 of the WARNING FCC Rules and RSS-310 of Industry Cana- da. Failure to follow the warnings and Operation is subject to the following two instructions for proper use of the I-BI conditions: system could result in serious injury or death. 1. This device may not cause harmful interference. . The I-BI system is not a replace- 2. This device must accept any interfer- ment for proper driving proce- ence received, including interference dure, is not designed to prevent that may cause undesired operation. contact with vehicles or objects and does not provide full brake Frequency of operation: 24.05GHz — power. When backing out of park- 24.25GHz ing spaces, always use the inside JVS0912X Field Strength: Not greater than 2.5V/m and rear mirrors and turn and peak (0.25V/m average) at a distance of 3 look in the direction you will The I-BI system uses radar sensors m move. Never rely solely on the I- installed on both sides near the rear The manufacturer is not responsible for BI system. bumper to detect an approaching vehicle any radio or TV interference caused by . There is a limitation to the detec- and sonar sensors to detect objects in unauthorized modifications to this equip- tion capability of the radar or the the rear. ment. Such modifications could void the sonar. Using the I-BI system un- user’s authority to operate the equip- der some road, ground, traffic or ment. weather conditions could lead to improper system operation. Al- ways rely on your own operation to avoid accidents.

The I-BI system can help alert the driver of an approaching vehicle or objects behind the vehicle when the driver is backing out of a parking space.

Starting and driving 5-53 ing vehicle from up to approximately 49 ft (15 m) away. The sonar sensors detect stationary objects behind the vehicle up to approximately 4.9 ft (1.5 m). Refer to the illustration for approximate zone coverage areas .

JVS0173X

JVS0698X The radar sensors detect an approach- 5-54 Starting and driving JVS0173X I-BI SYSTEM OPERATION When the shift lever is in the R (Reverse) position and the vehicle speed is less than approximately 5 MPH (8 km/h), the I-BI system operates. If the radar detects a vehicle approaching from the side or the sonar detects close JVS1099X stationary objects behind the vehicle, the Side indicator light system gives visual and audible warnings. I-BI system indicator If the driver does not apply the brakes, the system automatically applies the brake I-BI system key (on the center display) for a moment when the vehicle is moving Center multi-function control panel backwards. After the automatic brake application, the driver must depress the brake pedal to maintain brake pressure. If the driver’s foot is on the accelerator

Starting and driving 5-55 pedal, the system pushes the accelerator When the shift lever is placed in the R upward before applying the brake. If you (Reverse) position, the indicator on the I- continue to accelerate, the system will BI system key illuminates on the center not engage the brake. display and I-BI ON indicator appears on the vehicle information display.

JVS0304X Center display

JVS0197X I-BI ON indicator 5-56 Starting and driving If the radar detects an approaching vehicle from the side, the system chimes (once), the side indicator light on the side the vehicle is approaching from flashes and a yellow rectangular frame appears on the center display.

SSD1086 JVS0172X Side indicator light Illustration 1

JVS0307X JVS0173X Illustration 2 Starting and driving 5-57 . In the case of several vehicles ap- The I-BI system does not operate if the proaching in a row (Illustration 1) or in object is very close to the bumper. the opposite direction (Illustration 2), a chime may not be issued to the I-BI system after the first vehicle passes the sensors. . The sonar system chime indicating there is an object behind the vehicle has a higher priority than the I-BI chime (single beep) indicating an approaching vehicle. If the sonar system detects an object behind the vehicle and the I-BI system detects an approaching vehicle at the same time, the following indications are provided: JVS0307X — The sonar system chime sounds If an approaching vehicle or close object — The side indicator light on the side behind the vehicle is detected when your of the approaching vehicle flashes, vehicle is backing up, a red frame will and appear in the center display and the — A yellow rectangular frame appears system will chime three times. Then, the in the center display. brakes will be applied momentarily. After the automatic brake application, the driver must depress the brake pedal to maintain brake pressure. If the driver’s foot is on the accelerator pedal, the system moves the accelerator pedal upward before the braking is applied. However, if you continue to accelerate, the system will not engage the brakes.

5-58 Starting and driving The I-BI system can be turned off temporarily by touching the I-BI system key on the center display. The indicator on the I-BI system key turns off and the I-BI OFF indicator appears on the vehicle information display. When the shift lever is placed in the R (Reverse) position again, the I-BI system is turned on. HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE I-BI SYSTEM The I-BI system can be turned off permanently using the center display. JVS0304X JVS1043X Perform the following steps to enable or disable the I-BI system. 1. Push the SETTING button . 2. Touch [Camera/Sonar]. 3. Touch [Camera]. 4. Touch [Back-up Collision Intervention] to turn the system ON/OFF.

JVS0182X I-BI OFF indicator

Starting and driving 5-59 . The radar sensors detect approaching (moving) vehicles. The radar sensors cannot detect every object such as: — Pedestrians, bicycles, animals or child operated toy vehicles — A vehicle that passing at speeds greater than approximately 15 MPH (24 km/h) . The radar sensors may not detect approaching vehicles in certain situations: — Illustration a. When a vehicle parked next to you obstructs the beam of the radar sensor. — Illustration b. When the vehicle is parked in an angled parking space. — Illustration c. When the vehicle is parked on inclined ground. JVS0479X — Illustration d. When an approaching vehicle turns into I-BI SYSTEM PRECAUTIONS with these system limitations could your vehicle’s parking lot aisle. result in serious injury or death. — Illustration e. When the angle WARNING . Always check your surroundings formed by your vehicle and and turn to check what is behind approaching vehicle is small. Listed below are the system limita- you before backing up. . The following conditions may re- tions for the I-BI system. Failure to duce the ability of the radar operate the vehicle in accordance sensors to detect other vehicles: 5-60 Starting and driving — Severe weather properly. — Road spray — When driving with a tire that is not within normal tire condi- — Ice/frost/dirt build up on the tions (for example, tire wear, vehicle low tire pressure, installation . Do not attach stickers (including of spare tire, tire chains, non- transparent material), install ac- standard wheels). cessories or apply additional — When the vehicle is equipped paint near the radar sensors. with non-original brake parts These conditions may reduce the or suspension parts. ability of the radar sensors to detect other vehicles. — When towing a trailer or other vehicle. . The sonar sensors detect stationary objects behind the vehicle. . Excessive noise (for example, JVS0689X The sonar sensor may not detect: audio system volume, open vehi- Vehicle information display — Small or moving objects cle window) will interfere with the chime sound, and it may not be SYSTEM TEMPORARILY UNAVAIL- — Wedge-shaped objects heard. ABLE — Object close to the bumper Under the following conditions, a chime (less than approximately 1 ft will sound and “BCI NOT AVAILABLE” (30 cm)) warning message will appear in the — Thin objects such as rope, wire vehicle information display , and the I- and chain, etc. BI system will be turned off automatically. . The brake engagement by the I- . If the vehicle is parked in direct sun- BI system is not as effective on a light under high temperature condi- slope as it is on flat ground. When tions (over approximately 104°F on a steep slope the system may (40°C)). not function properly. . When side radar blockage is detected. . Do not use the I-BI system under Turn off the I-BI system and turn it on the following conditions because again when the above conditions no the system may not function longer exist. Starting and driving 5-61 SYSTEM MALFUNCTION apply additional paint near the radar If the I-BI system malfunctions, it will turn sensors. off automatically, a chime will sound and Do not strike or damage the area around “BCI MALFUNCTION” warning message will the radar sensors. appear in the vehicle information display It is recommended you visit a NISSAN . dealer if the area around the radar Action to take sensors is damaged due to a collision. Stop the vehicle in a safe location and Radio frequency statement place the shift lever in the P (Park) position. Turn the engine off and restart This device complies with part 15 of the the engine. If the warning message con- FCC Rules and RSS-310 of Industry Cana- tinues to appear, have the system da. checked. It is recommended you visit a Operation is subject to the following two NISSAN dealer for this service. JVS0908X conditions: 1. This device may not cause harmful SYSTEM MAINTENANCE interference. The two radar sensors for the I-BI 2. This device must accept any interfer- system are located near the rear bumper. ence received, including interference Always keep the area near the radar that may cause undesired operation. sensors clean. Frequency of operation: 24.05GHz — The radar sensors may be blocked by 24.25GHz temporary ambient conditions such as Field Strength: Not greater than 2.5V/m splashing water, mist or fog. peak (0.25V/m average) at a distance of 3 The blocked condition may also be m caused by objects such as ice, frost or The manufacturer is not responsible for dirt obstructing the radar sensors. any radio or TV interference caused by Check for and remove objects obstruct- unauthorized modifications to this equip- ing the area around the radar sensors. ment. Such modifications could void the Do not attach stickers (including trans- user’s authority to operate the equip- parent material), install accessories or ment.

5-62 Starting and driving INTELLIGENT CRUISE CONTROL (ICC)

if you are too close to the vehicle WARNING ahead. Pay special attention to the distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you Failure to follow the warnings and or a collision could occur. instructions for proper use of the ICC system could result in serious injury or death. The ICC system maintains a selected distance from the vehicle in front of you . ICC is not a collision avoidance or within the speed range of 0 to 90 MPH (0 warning device. For highway use to 144 km/h) up to the set speed. The set only and it is not intended for speed can be selected by the driver congested areas or city driving. between 20 to 90 MPH (32 to 144 km/h). Failure to apply the brakes could The vehicle travels at a set speed when result in an accident. the road ahead is clear. . Always observe posted speed The ICC system can be set to one of two limits and do not set the speed cruise control modes. over them. . Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control . Always drive carefully and atten- mode: tively when using either cruise control mode. Read and under- For maintaining a selected distance stand the Owner’s Manual thor- between your vehicle and the vehicle oughly before using the cruise in front of you up to the preset speed. control. To avoid serious injury . Conventional (fixed speed) cruise con- or death, do not rely on the trol mode: system to prevent accidents or For cruising at a preset speed. to control the vehicle’s speed in emergency situations. Do not use cruise control except in appropriate road and traffic conditions. . In the conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode, a warning chime will not sound to warn you Starting and driving 5-63 system display. For the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode, see “Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode” (P.5-65). For the conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode, see “Conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode” (P.5-81).

JVS0888X

Displays and indicators Once a control mode is activated, it ICC switches cannot be changed to the other cruise MAIN (ON·OFF) switch control mode. To change the mode, push Push the MAIN switch to choose the the MAIN switch once to turn the cruise control mode between the vehicle- system off. Then push the MAIN switch to-vehicle distance control mode and the again to turn the system back on and conventional (fixed speed) cruise control select the desired cruise control mode. mode. Always confirm the setting in the ICC 5-64 Starting and driving SSD1051 JVS0913X HOW TO SELECT THE CRUISE CON- VEHICLE-TO-VEHICLE DISTANCE The system is intended to enhance the TROL MODE CONTROL MODE operation of the vehicle when following a vehicle traveling in the same lane and Selecting vehicle-to-vehicle dis- In the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control direction. mode, the ICC system automatically tance control mode maintains a selected distance from the If the radar sensor detects a slower To choose the vehicle-to-vehicle distance vehicle traveling in front of you according moving vehicle ahead, the system will control mode , quickly push and release to that vehicle’s speed (up to the set reduce the vehicle speed so that your the MAIN switch . speed), or at the set speed when the road vehicle follows the vehicle in front at the ahead is clear. selected distance. Selecting the conventional (fixed The system automatically controls the speed) cruise control mode throttle and applies the brakes (up to To choose the conventional (fixed speed) approximately 40% of vehicle braking cruise control mode , push and hold the power) if necessary. MAIN switch for longer than approxi- The detection range of the sensor is mately 1.5 seconds. See “Conventional approximately 650 ft (200 m) ahead. (fixed speed) cruise control mode” (P.5-81).

Starting and driving 5-65 Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control The following items are controlled in the mode operation vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode: . The vehicle-to-vehicle distance control When there are no vehicles traveling mode is designed to maintain a selected ahead, the vehicle-to-vehicle distance distance and reduce the speed to match control mode maintains the speed set the slower vehicle ahead; the system will by the driver. The set speed range is decelerate the vehicle as necessary and if between approximately 20 and 90 the vehicle ahead comes to a stop, the MPH (32 and 144 km/h). vehicle decelerates to a standstill. How- . When there is a vehicle traveling ever, the ICC system can only apply up to ahead, the vehicle-to-vehicle distance approximately 40% of the vehicle’s total control mode adjusts the speed to braking power. This system should only maintain the distance, selected by be used when traffic conditions allow driver, from the vehicle ahead. The vehicle speeds to remain fairly constant adjusting speed range is up to the set or when vehicle speeds change gradually. speed. If the vehicle ahead comes to a SSD0254 stop, the vehicle decelerates to a If a vehicle moves into the traveling lane When driving on the freeway at a set standstill within the limitations of the ahead or if a vehicle traveling ahead speed and approaching a slower traveling system. The system will cancel once it rapidly decelerates, the distance between vehicle ahead, the ICC system will adjust judges a standstill with a warning vehicles may become closer because the the speed to maintain the distance, chime. ICC system cannot decelerate the vehicle selected by the driver, from the vehicle . quickly enough. If this occurs, the ICC When the vehicle traveling ahead has ahead. If the vehicle ahead changes lanes system will sound a warning chime and moved out from its lane of travel, the or exits the freeway, the ICC system will blink the system display to notify the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control accelerate and maintain the speed up to driver to take necessary action. mode accelerates and maintains ve- the set speed. Pay attention to the driving The system will cancel and a warning hicle speed up to the set speed. operation to maintain control of the chime will sound if the speed is below The ICC system does not control vehicle vehicle as it accelerates to the set speed. speed or warn you when you approach approximately 15 MPH (24 km/h) and a The vehicle may not maintain the set stationary and slow moving vehicles. You vehicle is not detected ahead. The system speed on winding or hilly roads. If this must pay attention to vehicle operation will also disengage when the vehicle goes occurs, you will have to manually control to maintain proper distance from vehicles above the maximum set speed. the vehicle speed. ahead when approaching toll gates or See “Approach warning” (P.5-73). traffic congestion. Normally when controlling the distance to

5-66 Starting and driving a vehicle ahead, this system automati- 4. DISTANCE switch: cally accelerates or decelerates your ve- Changes the vehicle’s following dis- hicle according to the speed of the tance: vehicle ahead. Depress the accelerator . Long to properly accelerate your vehicle when . Middle acceleration is required for a lane change. . Depress the brake pedal when decelera- Short tion is required to maintain a safe dis- 5. MAIN switch: tance to the vehicle ahead due to its Master switch to activate the system sudden braking or if a vehicle cuts in. Always stay alert when using the ICC system.

SSD0964

Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode switches The system is operated by a MAIN switch and four control switches, all mounted on the steering wheel. 1. ACCELERATE/RESUME switch: Resumes set speed or increases speed incrementally. 2. COAST/SET switch: Sets desired cruise speed, reduces speed incrementally. 3. CANCEL switch: Deactivates the system without erasing the set speed.

Starting and driving 5-67 4. Indicates your vehicle 5. Set vehicle speed indicator: Indicates the set vehicle speed. For Canadian models, the speed is displayed in km/h. 6. ICC system warning light (orange): The light comes on if there is a malfunction in the ICC system.

SSD1104 SSD0979

Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control When the ignition switch is pushed to the ON position, the indicators come on as mode display and indicators illustrated to check for a burned-out bulb, The display is located between the speed- and it turns off when the engine is ometer and tachometer. started. 1. MAIN switch indicator: Indicates that the MAIN switch is ON. 2. Vehicle ahead detection indicator: Indicates whether it detects a vehicle in front of you. 3. Set distance indicator: Displays the selected distance between vehicles set with the DISTANCE switch.

5-68 Starting and driving SSD1052 SSD1053 SSD1105

Operating vehicle-to-vehicle dis- To set cruising speed, accelerate your When the COAST/SET switch is pushed vehicle to the desired speed, push the under the following conditions, the sys- tance control mode COAST/SET switch and release it. (Vehicle tem cannot be set and the ICC indicators To turn on the cruise control, quickly ahead detection indicator, set distance will blink for approximately 2 seconds: push and release the MAIN switch on. indicator and set vehicle speed indicator . When traveling below 20 MPH (32 The MAIN switch indicator, set distance come on.) Take your foot off the accel- km/h) and the vehicle ahead is not indicator and set vehicle speed indicator erator pedal. Your vehicle will maintain detected come on and in a standby state for the set speed. . setting. When the shift lever is not in the D (Drive) or manual shift mode . When the parking brake is applied . When the brakes are operated by the driver

Starting and driving 5-69 position, push the MAIN switch to turn off the ICC system and reset the ICC switch by pushing the MAIN switch again (for 4WD models). For details about the 4WD shift switch, see “NISSAN all-mode 4WD®” (P.5-116). . When the VDC system is off (To use the ICC system, turn on the VDC system. Push the MAIN switch to turn off the ICC system and reset the ICC switch by pushing the MAIN switch again.) For details about the VDC system, see “Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) sys- SSD1106 tem” (P.5-133). . When the COAST/SET switch is pushed When ABS or VDC (including the trac- under the following conditions, the sys- tion control system) is operating tem cannot be set. . When a wheel is slipping (To use the ICC system, make sure the wheels are A warning chime will sound and the ICC no longer slipping. Push the MAIN indicators will blink. switch to turn off the ICC, and reset . When the SNOW mode is pushed the ICC system by pushing the MAIN (SNOW mode switch) (To use the ICC switch again.) system, turn off the SNOW mode switch, push the MAIN switch to turn off the ICC and reset the ICC switch by pushing the MAIN switch again.) For details about the SNOW mode switch, see “SNOW mode” (P.5-127). . When the 4WD shift switch is in the 4H or 4L position. (To use the ICC system, place the 4WD shift switch in the AUTO 5-70 Starting and driving ahead, the ICC system gradually accelerates your vehicle to resume the previously set vehicle speed. The ICC system then maintains the set speed. When a vehicle is no longer detected the vehicle ahead detection indicator turns off. If a vehicle ahead appears during acceleration to the set vehicle speed or any time the ICC system is in operation, the system controls the distance to that vehicle. When a vehicle is no longer detected SSD1107 under approximately 15 MPH (24 km/h), the system will be canceled. System set display with vehicle ahead the speed of the vehicle ahead to main- System set display without vehicle ahead tain the driver selected distance. The driver sets the desired vehicle speed NOTE: based on the road conditions. The ICC . The stoplights of the vehicle come system maintains the set vehicle speed, on when braking is performed by similar to standard cruise control, as long the ICC system. as no vehicle is detected in the lane . When the brake operates, a noise ahead. may be heard and/or vibration may The ICC system displays the set speed. be felt. This is not a malfunction. Vehicle detected ahead: When a vehicle ahead is detected, the When a vehicle is detected in the lane vehicle ahead detection indicator comes ahead, the ICC system decelerates the on. The ICC system will also display the vehicle by controlling the throttle and set speed and selected distance. applying the brakes to match the speed Vehicle ahead not detected: of a slower vehicle ahead. The system When a vehicle is no longer detected then controls the vehicle speed based on Starting and driving 5-71 How to change set vehicle speed . Push and hold the COAST/SET switch. To cancel the preset speed, use any of The set vehicle speed will decrease by these methods: approximately 5 MPH (5 km/h for Canada). . Push the CANCEL switch. The set . Push, then quickly release the COAST/ vehicle speed indicator will go out. SET switch. Each time you do this, the . Tap the brake pedal. The set vehicle set speed will decrease by approxi- speed indicator will go out. mately 1 MPH (1 km/h for Canada). . Turn the MAIN switch off. Both the To resume the preset speed, push and MAIN switch indicator and set vehicle release the ACCELERATE/RESUME switch. speed indicator will go out. The vehicle will resume the last set To reset at a faster cruising speed, use cruising speed when the vehicle speed is one of the following methods: over 20 MPH (32 km/h). . Depress the accelerator pedal. When SSD1108 the vehicle attains the desired speed, When passing another vehicle, the set push and release the COAST/SET speed indicator will flash when the vehicle switch. . speed exceeds the set speed. The vehicle Push and hold the ACCELERATE/RE- detect indicator will turn off when the SUME switch. The set vehicle speed area ahead of the vehicle is open. When will increase by approximately 5 MPH the pedal is released, the vehicle will (5 km/h for Canada). return to the previously set speed. . Push, then quickly release the ACCEL- Even though your vehicle speed is set in ERATE/RESUME switch. Each time you the ICC system, you can depress the do this, the set speed will increase by accelerator pedal when it is necessary to approximately 1 MPH (1 km/h for accelerate your vehicle rapidly. Canada). To reset at a slower cruising speed, use one of the following methods: . Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the vehicle attains the desired speed, push the COAST/SET switch and release it. 5-72 Starting and driving SSD0967

How to change set distance to vehicle ahead The distance to the vehicle ahead can be selected at any time depending on the traffic conditions. Each time the DISTANCE switch is pushed, the set distance will change to JVS0732X long, middle, short and back to long again in that sequence. . The distance to the vehicle ahead will Approach warning change according to the vehicle If your vehicle comes closer to the vehicle speed. The higher the vehicle speed, ahead due to rapid deceleration of that the longer the distance. vehicle or if another vehicle cuts in, the . If the engine is stopped, the set system warns the driver with the chime distance becomes “long”. (Each time and ICC system display. Decelerate by the engine is started, the initial setting depressing the brake pedal to maintain a becomes “long”.) Starting and driving 5-73 safe vehicle distance if: hilly roads or when entering or exiting a . When distance measurement be- . The chime sounds. curve. In these cases you will have to comes impaired due to adhesion of manually control the proper distance dirt or obstruction to the sensor . The vehicle ahead detection and set ahead of your vehicle. . distance indicator blink. When a wheel slips . The warning chime may not sound in Also, the sensor sensitivity can be af- When the radar signal is temporarily some cases when there is a short dis- fected by vehicle operation (steering interrupted maneuver or driving position in the lane) tance between vehicles. Some examples Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control are: or traffic or vehicle condition (for example, mode limitations . if a vehicle is being driven with some When the vehicles are traveling at the damage). same speed and the distance between vehicles is not changing Automatic cancellation WARNING . When the vehicle ahead is traveling A chime sounds under the following faster and the distance between ve- conditions and the control is automati- Listed below are the system limita- hicles is increasing cally canceled. tions for the ICC system. Failure to . operate the vehicle in accordance When a vehicle cuts in near your . When the vehicle ahead is not de- with these system limitations could vehicle tected and your vehicle is traveling result in serious injury or death. The warning chime will not sound when: below the speed of 15 MPH (24 km/h) . Your vehicle approaches other vehi- . When the system judges the vehicle is . The system is primarily intended cles that are parked or moving slowly. at standstill for use on straight, dry, open . The accelerator pedal is depressed, . When the shift lever is not in the D roads with light traffic. It is not overriding the system. (Drive) or manual shift mode advisable to use the system in city traffic or congested areas. NOTE: . When the parking brake is applied . This system will not adapt auto- The approach warning chime may . When the SNOW mode switch is matically to road conditions. This sound and the system display may pushed on. system should be used in evenly blink when the radar sensor detects . When the 4WD shift switch is in the 4H flowing traffic. Do not use the objects on the side of the vehicle or on or 4L position (for 4WD models) system on roads with sharp the side of the road. This may cause the . When the VDC system is turned off curves, or on icy roads, in heavy ICC system to decelerate or accelerate . When ABS or VDC (including the trac- rain or in fog. the vehicle. The radar sensor may de- tion control system) operates tect these objects when the vehicle is driven on winding roads, narrow roads, 5-74 Starting and driving . As there is a performance limit to (following distance) or selected tion or deceleration the distance control function, vehicle speed under some cir- . Do not use the ICC system if you never rely solely on the ICC sys- cumstances. are towing a trailer. The system tem. This system does not correct . The system may not detect the may not detect a vehicle ahead. careless, inattentive or absent- vehicle in front of you in certain . In some road or traffic conditions, minded driving, or overcome road or weather conditions. To a vehicle or object can unexpect- poor visibility in rain, fog, or other avoid accidents, never use the ICC edly come into the sensor detec- bad weather. Decelerate the ve- system under the following con- tion zone and cause automatic hicle speed by depressing the ditions: brake pedal, depending on the braking. You may need to control distance to the vehicle ahead — On roads where the traffic is the distance from other vehicles and the surrounding circum- heavy or there are sharp using the accelerator pedal. Al- stances in order to maintain a curves ways stay alert and avoid using safe distance between vehicles. — On slippery road surfaces the ICC system when it is not recommended in this section. . If the vehicle ahead comes to a such as on ice or snow, etc. stop, the vehicle decelerates to a — During bad weather (rain, fog, The radar sensor will not detect the standstill within the limitations of snow, etc.) the system. The system will can- following objects: cel once it judges that the vehicle — When rain, snow or dirt adhere . Stationary and slow moving vehicles has come to a standstill and to the system sensor . Pedestrians or objects in the roadway sound a warning chime. To pre- — On steep downhill roads (the . Oncoming vehicles in the same lane vent the vehicle from moving, the vehicle may go beyond the set . Motorcycles traveling offset in the driver must depress the brake vehicle speed and frequent travel lane pedal. braking may result in over- The sensor generally detects the signals . Always pay attention to the op- heating the brakes) returned from the vehicle ahead. There- eration of the vehicle and be — On repeated uphill and down- fore, if the sensor cannot detect the ready to manually control the hill roads reflection from the vehicle ahead, the proper following distance. The ICC system may not maintain the se- — When traffic conditions make vehicle-to-vehicle distance con- lected distance. trol mode of the ICC system may it difficult to keep a proper The following are some conditions in not be able to maintain the se- distance between vehicles be- which the sensor cannot detect the lected distance between vehicles cause of frequent accelera- Starting and driving 5-75 signals: . When the snow or road spray from traveling vehicles reduces the sensor’s visibility . When excessively heavy baggage is loaded in the rear seat or the luggage area of your vehicle . When your vehicle is towing a trailer, etc. The ICC system is designed to automatically check the sensor’s operation within the limitation of the system. When the sensor is covered with dirt or is obstructed, the system will automatically be canceled. If the sensor is covered with SSD0252 ice, a transparent or translucent vinyl bag, The detection zone of the ICC sensor is proper distance away from vehicle tra- etc., the ICC system may not detect them. limited. A vehicle ahead must be in the veling ahead. In these instances, the vehicle-to-vehicle detection zone for the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode may not cancel distance detection mode to maintain the and may not be able to maintain the selected distance from the vehicle ahead. selected following distance from the vehicle ahead. Be sure to check and clean A vehicle ahead may move outside of the the sensor regularly. detection zone due to its position within the same lane of travel. Motorcycles may not be detected in the same lane ahead if they are traveling offset from the center- line of the lane. A vehicle that is entering the lane ahead may not be detected until the vehicle has completely moved into the lane. If this occurs, the ICC system may warn you by blinking the system indicator and sounding the chime. The driver may have to manually control the 5-76 Starting and driving SSD0253

When driving on some roads, such as ing ahead. winding, hilly, curved, narrow roads, or roads which are under construction, the ICC sensor may detect vehicles in a different lane, or may temporarily not detect a vehicle traveling ahead. This may cause the ICC system to decelerate or accelerate the vehicle. The detection of vehicles may also be affected by vehicle operation (steering maneuver or traveling position in the lane, etc.) or vehicle condition. If this occurs, the ICC system may warn you by blinking the system indicator and sounding the chime unexpectedly. You will have to manually control the proper distance away from the vehicle travel- Starting and driving 5-77 SSD1110

System temporarily unavailable Condition A: Under the following conditions, the ICC system is automatically canceled. The chime will sound and the system will not be able to be set. JVS0889X . When the VDC is turned off . Warning light and display (example) When the ABS or VDC operates . MAIN (ON·OFF) switch When a tire slips . When the SNOW mode switch is pushed on . When the 4WD shift switch is in the 4H or 4L position (for 4WD models)

5-78 Starting and driving . When the radar signal is temporarily hicle in a safe place, place the shift lever in interrupted the P (Park) position and turn the engine off. When the radar signal is temporarily Action to take: interrupted, clean the sensor area of the When the conditions listed above are no front bumper and restart the engine. If longer present, turn the system off using the warning light (orange) stays on or the MAIN switch . Turn the ICC system warning message continues to be dis- back on to use the system. played, have the ICC system checked. It is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. . When driving on roads with limited road structures or buildings (for example, long bridges, deserts, snow fields, driving next to long walls) JVS0481X Action to take: Condition B: When the above conditions no longer Under the following conditions, making it exist, the ICC system will resume auto- impossible to detect a vehicle ahead, the matically. ICC system is automatically canceled. The chime will sound, the ICC system warning light (orange) will come on and the “FRONT RADAR OBSTRUCTION” warning message will appear in the vehicle information display. . When the radar sensor area of the front bumper is covered with dirt or is obstructed Action to take: If the warning light (orange) comes on or warning message appears, stop the ve-

Starting and driving 5-79 hicle checked. It is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

SSD0979 JVS0913X

Condition C: System maintenance When the ICC system is not operating The sensor for the ICC system is properly, the chime sounds and the ICC located below the front bumper. system warning light (orange) will come To keep the ICC system operating prop- on. erly, be sure to observe the following: Action to take: . Always keep the sensor area of the If the warning light comes on, park the front bumper clean. vehicle in a safe place. Turn the engine off, . Do not strike or damage the areas restart the engine, resume driving and set around the sensor. the ICC system again. . Do not cover or attach stickers or If it is not possible to set the system or similar objects on the front bumper the indicator stays on, it may indicate near the sensor area. This could cause that the ICC system is malfunctioning. failure or malfunction. Although the vehicle is still driveable . Do not attach metallic objects near under normal conditions, have the ve- the sensor area (brush guard, etc.).

5-80 Starting and driving This could cause failure or malfunc- 2. This device must accept any inter- conditions. tion. ference, including interference that — when it is not possible to keep . Do not alter, remove or paint the front may cause undesired operation of the vehicle at a set speed bumper. It is recommended you con- the device. tact a NISSAN dealer before customiz- CONVENTIONAL (fixed speed) — in heavy traffic or in traffic ing or restoring the front bumper. CRUISE CONTROL MODE that varies in speed FCC Notice: This mode allows driving at a speed — on winding or hilly roads For USA: between 25 to 90 MPH (40 to 144 km/h) — on slippery roads (rain, snow, This device complies with Part 15 of the without keeping your foot on the accel- ice, etc.) FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the erator pedal. following two conditions: — in very windy areas 1. This device may not cause harmful WARNING Doing so could cause a loss of interference, and vehicle control and result in an accident. 2. This device must accept any inter- . In the conventional (fixed speed) ference received, including interfer- cruise control mode, a warning ence that may cause undesired chime does not sound to warn operation. you if you are too close to the FCC Warning vehicle ahead, as neither the pre- Changes or modification not expressly sence of the vehicle ahead nor approved by the party responsible for the vehicle-to-vehicle distance is compliance could void the user’s detected. authority to operate the equipment. . Pay special attention to the dis- For Canada: tance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you or a This device complies with Industry Ca- collision could occur. nada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). . Operation is subject to the following Always confirm the setting in the two conditions: ICC system display. . 1. This device may not cause interfer- Do not use the conventional ence, and (fixed speed) cruise control mode when driving under the following

Starting and driving 5-81 3. Cruise system warning light: Comes on if there is a malfunction in the cruise control system.

SSD0968 SSD1013

Conventional (fixed speed) cruise Conventional (fixed speed) cruise control switch control mode display and indica- 1. ACCELERATE/RESUME switch: tors Resumes set speed or increases speed The display is on the vehicle information incrementally. display located between the speed- 2. COAST/SET switch: ometer and tachometer. Sets the desired cruise speed, reduces 1. MAIN switch indicator: speed incrementally. Indicates that the MAIN switch is ON. 3. CANCEL switch: 2. Cruise set switch indicator: Deactivates the system without eras- Displays while the vehicle speed is ing the set speed. controlled by the conventional (fixed 4. MAIN switch: speed) cruise control mode of the ICC system. Master switch to activate the system.

5-82 Starting and driving turn the system completely off. When the ignition switch is pushed to the OFF position, the system is also automatically turned off. To use the ICC system again, quickly push and release the MAIN switch (vehicle-to- vehicle distance control mode) or push and hold it (conventional cruise control mode) again to turn it on. When the Intelligent Distance Control (I- DC) system is on, the conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode cannot be turned on even though the MAIN switch is SSD0969 pushed and held. SSD0970 To turn on the conventional (fixed speed) Operating conventional (fixed cruise control mode, turn off the I-DC To set cruising speed, accelerate your vehicle to the desired speed, push the speed) cruise control mode system. See “Intelligent Distance Control (I-DC)” (P.5-85). COAST/SET switch and release it. (The To turn on the conventional (fixed SET indicator will come on in the display.) speed) cruise control mode, push and Take your foot off the accelerator pedal. hold the MAIN switch for longer than CAUTION Your vehicle will maintain the set speed. about 1.5 seconds. . To pass another vehicle, depress the When pushing the MAIN switch on, the To avoid accidentally engaging accelerator pedal. When you release conventional (fixed speed) cruise control cruise control, make sure to turn the pedal, the vehicle will return to the mode display and the MAIN switch indi- the MAIN switch off when not using previously set speed. cator are displayed on the vehicle infor- the ICC system. . The vehicle may not maintain the set mation display. After you hold the MAIN speed when going up or down steep switch on for longer than about 1.5 hills. If this happens, manually main- seconds, the ICC system display goes tain vehicle speed. out. The MAIN switch indicator stays lit. To cancel the preset speed, use any of You can now set your desired cruising the following methods: speed. Pushing the MAIN switch again will Starting and driving 5-83 1. Push the CANCEL switch. The SET 3. Push, then quickly release the COAST/ indicator will turn off. SET switch. Each time you do this, the 2. Tap the brake pedal. The SET indicator set speed will decrease by about 1 will turn off. MPH (1.6 km/h). 3. Turn the MAIN switch off. Both the To resume the preset speed, push and MAIN switch indicator and SET indica- release the ACCELERATE/RESUME switch. tor will turn off. The vehicle will resume the last set cruising speed when the vehicle speed is To reset at a faster cruising speed, use over 25 MPH (40 km/h). one of the following three methods: 1. Depress the accelerator pedal. When System temporarily unavailable the vehicle attains the desired speed, Under the following condition, a chime push and release the COAST/SET will sound and the system control is switch. automatically canceled. 2. Push and hold the ACCELERATE/RE- . When the vehicle slows down more JVS0661X SUME set switch. When the vehicle than 8 MPH (13 km/h) below the set attains the speed you desire, release speed Warning light the switch. . When the shift lever is shifted to the N When the system is not operating prop- 3. Push, then quickly release the ACCEL- (Neutral) position erly, the chime sounds and the system ERATE/RESUME switch. Each time you . When the parking brake is applied warning light (orange) will come on. do this, the set speed will increase by . When the VDC (including the traction Action to take: about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h). control system) operates. If the warning light comes on, park the To reset at a slower cruising speed, use . When a wheel slips vehicle in a safe place. Turn the engine off, one of the following three methods: restart the engine, resume driving and 1. Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the then perform the setting again. vehicle attains the desired speed, If it is not possible to set or the indicator push the COAST/SET switch and re- stays on, it may indicate that the lease it. system is malfunctioning. Although the 2. Push and hold the COAST/SET switch. vehicle is still driveable under normal Release the switch when the vehicle conditions, have the vehicle checked. It slows down to the desired speed. is recommended you visit a NISSAN

5-84 Starting and driving INTELLIGENT DISTANCE CONTROL (I-DC) (if so equipped) dealer for this service. absent-minded driving, or over- WARNING come poor visibility in rain, fog, or other bad weather. Decelerate Failure to follow the warnings and the vehicle speed by depressing instructions for proper use of the I- the brake pedal, depending on DC system could result in serious the distance to the vehicle ahead personal injury or death. and the surrounding circum- . stances in order to maintain a Always drive carefully and atten- safe distance between vehicles. tively when using the I-DC sys- . tem. Read and understand the Always pay attention to the op- Owner’s Manual thoroughly be- eration of the vehicle and be fore using the I-DC system. To ready to manually decelerate to avoid serious injury or death, do maintain the proper following not rely on the system to prevent distance. The I-DC system may accidents or to control the vehi- not be able to decelerate the cle’s speed in emergency situa- vehicle under some circum- tions. Do not use the I-DC system stances. except in appropriate road and . This system only brakes and traffic conditions. moves the accelerator pedal up- . This system is only an aid to ward to help assist the driver to assist the driver and is not a maintain a following distance collision warning or avoidance from the vehicle ahead. Accelera- device. It is the driver’s responsi- tion should be operated by the bility to stay alert, drive safely driver. and be in control of the vehicle at . The I-DC system does not control all times. vehicle speed or warn you when . As there is a performance limit to you approach stationary and the distance control function, slow moving vehicles. You must never rely solely on the I-DC pay attention to vehicle operation system. This system does not to maintain proper distance from correct careless, inattentive or vehicles ahead.

Starting and driving 5-85 . The I-DC system automatically decelerates your vehicle to help assist the driver to maintain a following distance from the vehicle ahead. Manually brake when deceleration is required to maintain a safe distance upon sudden braking by the vehicle ahead or when a vehicle suddenly appears in front of you. Always stay alert when using the I-DC system. . If the vehicle ahead comes to a stop, the vehicle decelerates to a standstill within the limitations of the system. The system will can- JVS0913X cel with a warning chime once it The system is intended to assist the driver judges that the vehicle has come to keep a following distance from the to a standstill. To prevent the vehicle ahead traveling in the same lane vehicle from moving, the driver and direction. must depress the brake pedal. If the radar sensor detects a slower moving vehicle ahead, the system will reduce the vehicle speed to help assist the driver to maintain a following distance. The system automatically controls the throttle and applies the brakes (up to approximately 40% of vehicle braking power) if necessary. The detection range of the sensor is approximately 650 ft (200 m) ahead.

5-86 Starting and driving personal injury or death. . When the vehicle ahead detection indicator light is not illuminated, system will not control the vehicle or warn the driver. . Never place your foot under the brake pedal. Your foot may be caught when the system controls the brake. . Depending on the position of the accelerator pedal, the system may not be able to assist the driver to release the accelerator pedal appropriately.

The I-DC system brakes and moves the accelerator pedal upward according to the distance from and the relative speed of the vehicle ahead to help assist the driver in maintaining a following distance. The system will decelerate as necessary and if the vehicle ahead comes to a stop, JVS1100X the vehicle decelerates to a standstill. However, the I-DC system can only apply Indicators (on the vehicle information I-DC SYSTEM OPERATION display) up to approximately 40% of the vehicle’s Dynamic driver assistance switch total braking power. If a vehicle moves into the traveling lane ahead or if a Center multi-function control panel WARNING vehicle traveling ahead rapidly decelerates, the distance between vehicles Failure to follow the warnings and may become closer because the I-DC instructions for proper use of the I- system cannot decelerate the vehicle DC system could result in serious Starting and driving 5-87 quickly enough. If this occurs, the I-DC system will sound a warning chime and blink the system display to notify the driver to take necessary action. See “Approach warning” (P.5-89).

SSD0997

System set display with a vehicle ahead smoothly as necessary. If the vehicle System set display without a vehicle ahead comes to a stop, the vehicle ahead decelerates to a standstill within the The I-DC system helps assist the driver to limitations of the system. keep a following distance to the vehicle . If the driver’s foot is on the accelerator ahead by braking and moving the accel- pedal, the system moves the accelerator pedal upward in the normal driving erator pedal upward to assist the condition. driver to release the accelerator pedal. When a vehicle ahead is detected: When brake operation by the driver is The vehicle ahead detection indicator required: comes on. The system alerts the driver by a warning When the vehicle approaches a vehicle chime and blinking the vehicle ahead ahead: detection indicator. If the driver’s foot is on the accelerator pedal after the warn- . If the driver’s foot is not on the ing, the system moves the accelerator accelerator pedal, the system acti- pedal upward to assist the driver to vates the brakes to decelerate 5-88 Starting and driving switch to the brake pedal. Approach warning the side of the road. This may cause the NOTE: If your vehicle comes closer to the vehicle I-DC system to decelerate or accelerate . The stop lights of the vehicle come ahead due to rapid deceleration of that the vehicle. The radar sensor may de- on when braking is performed by vehicle or if another vehicle cuts in, the tect these objects when the vehicle is the I-DC system. system warns the driver with the chime driven on winding roads, narrow roads, . When the brake operates, a noise and I-DC system display. Decelerate by hilly roads or when entering or exiting a may be heard and/or vibration may depressing the brake pedal to maintain a curve. In these cases you will have to manually control the proper distance be felt. This is not a malfunction. safe vehicle distance if: ahead of your vehicle. . The chime sounds. Overriding the system: Also, the sensor sensitivity can be af- . The vehicle ahead detection indicator The following driver’s operation overrides fected by vehicle operation (steering blinks. the system operation. maneuver or driving position in the lane) . The warning chime may not sound in or traffic or vehicle condition (for example, When the driver depresses the accel- some cases when there is a short dis- erator pedal even further while the if a vehicle is being driven with some tance between vehicles. Some examples damage). system is moving the accelerator are: pedal upward, the I-DC system control . of the accelerator pedal is canceled. When the vehicles are traveling at the same speed and the distance be- . When the driver’s foot is on the accelerator pedal, the brake control by the tween vehicles is not changing . system is not operated. When the vehicle ahead is traveling faster and the distance between ve- . When the driver’s foot is on the brake pedal, neither the brake control nor hicles is increasing . the alert by the system operates. When a vehicle cuts in near your vehicle . When the Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) system is set, the I-DC system The warning chime will not sound when will be inactive. your vehicle approaches vehicles that are parked or moving slowly. NOTE: The approach warning chime may sound and the system display may blink when the radar sensor detects objects on the side of the vehicle or on Starting and driving 5-89 tance switch again to turn off the I-DC system. The I-DC system switch indicator will turn off. The system will start to operate after the vehicle speed is above approximately 3 MPH (5 km/h). The dynamic driver assistance switch is used for the I-DC, I-LI (if so equipped) and I-BSI (if so equipped) systems. When the dynamic driver assistance switch is pushed, the I-LI and I-BSI systems will also turn on or off simultaneously. The I- DC system can be individually set to on or off on the center display using the center multi-function control panel . If the system is set to off, the system will not turn on even if the dynamic driver assistance switch is pushed to on. To set the system to on or off on the center display, see “How to enable/disable the I-DC system” (P.5-91). When the conventional (fixed speed) JVS1101X cruise control mode is operating, the I- DC system will not operate. (To use the I- I-DC system switch indicator (on the TURNING THE I-DC SYSTEM ON/OFF DC system, turn the conventional (fixed vehicle information display) speed) cruise control mode off, then push To turn on the I-DC system, push the Dynamic driver assistance switch the dynamic driver assistance switch .) dynamic driver assistance switch on Center multi-function control panel the steering wheel after starting the For details about the conventional (fixed engine. The I-DC system switch indicator speed) cruise control mode, see “Intelli- in the vehicle information display will gent Cruise Control (ICC)” (P.5-63). appear. Push the dynamic driver assis- When the engine is turned off, the system

5-90 Starting and driving is automatically turned off.

JVS1043X SSD0994 HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE I-DC I-DC SYSTEM DISPLAY AND INDICA- SYSTEM TORS Perform the following steps to enable or The display is located between the speed- disable the I-DC system. ometer and tachometer. 1. Push the SETTING button . 1. I-DC system switch indicator: 2. Touch [Driver Assistance]. Indicates that the dynamic driver 3. Touch [Forward Assist]. assistance switch is ON. 4. Touch [Distance Control Assist] to turn 2. Vehicle ahead detection indicator: the system ON/OFF. Indicates whether it detects a vehicle in front of you. 3. I-DC system warning light (orange): The light comes on if there is a malfunction in the I-DC system.

Starting and driving 5-91 I-DC SYSTEM LIMITATIONS . The system may not detect the ways stay alert and avoid using vehicle in front of you in certain the I-DC system when it is not road or weather conditions. To recommended in this section. WARNING avoid accidents, never use the I- DC system under the following The radar sensor will not detect the Listed below are the system limita- conditions: following objects: tions of the I-DC system. Failure to . operate the vehicle in accordance — On roads with sharp curves Stationary and slow moving vehicles with these system limitations could — On slippery road surfaces . Pedestrians or objects in the roadway result in serious injury or death. such as on ice or snow, etc. . Oncoming vehicles in the same lane . . This system will not adapt auto- — On off-road surfaces such as Motorcycles traveling offset in the matically to road conditions. Do on sand or rock, etc. travel lane not use the system on roads with The following are some conditions in — During bad weather (rain, fog, sharp curves, or on icy roads, in which the sensor cannot detect the snow, etc.) heavy rain or in fog. signals: . The I-DC system will not apply — When rain, snow or dirt adhere . When the snow or road spray from brake control while the driver’s to the system sensor traveling vehicles reduces the sensor’s foot is on the accelerator pedal. — On steep downhill roads (fre- visibility . . As there is a performance limit to quent braking may result in When excessively heavy baggage is the distance control function, overheating the brakes) loaded in the rear seat or the luggage room of your vehicle never rely solely on the I-DC — On repeated uphill and down- system. This system does not hill roads correct careless, inattentive or absent-minded driving, or over- — When towing a trailer or other come poor visibility in rain, fog, or vehicle other bad weather. Decelerate . In some road or traffic conditions, the vehicle speed by depressing a vehicle or object can unexpect- the brake pedal, depending on edly come into the sensor detec- the distance to the vehicle ahead tion zone and cause automatic and the surrounding circum- braking. You may need to control stances in order to maintain a the distance from other vehicles safe distance between vehicles. using the accelerator pedal. Al- 5-92 Starting and driving SSD0252

The detection zone of the sensor is limited. A vehicle ahead must be in the detection zone for the system to operate. A vehicle ahead may move outside of the detection zone due to its position within the same lane of travel. Motorcycles may not be detected in the same lane ahead if they are traveling offset from the center- line of the lane. A vehicle that is entering the lane ahead may not be detected until the vehicle has completely moved into the lane. If this occurs, the system may warn you by blinking the system indicator and sounding the chime. The driver may have to manually control the proper distance away from vehicle traveling ahead. Starting and driving 5-93 SSD0253

When driving on some roads, such as winding, hilly, curved, narrow roads, or roads which are under construction, the sensor may detect vehicles in a different lane, or may temporarily not detect a vehicle traveling ahead. This may cause the system to work inappropriately. The detection of vehicles may also be affected by vehicle operation (steering maneuver or traveling position in the lane, etc.) or vehicle condition. If this occurs, the system may warn you by blinking the system indicator and sounding the chime unexpectedly. You will have to manually control the proper distance away from the vehicle traveling ahead. 5-94 Starting and driving SSD0996 SYSTEM TEMPORARILY UNAVAIL- ABLE Condition A: Under the following conditions, the I-DC system is automatically canceled. The chime will sound and the I-DC system switch indicator will blink. The system will JVS0892X not be able to be set. Warning light and indicators . When the VDC system is off (To use Dynamic driver assistance switch the I-DC system, turn on the VDC, then push the dynamic driver assistance switch.) For details about the VDC system, see “Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system” (P.5-133).

Starting and driving 5-95 . When the VDC or ABS (including the Action to take: traction control system) operates If the I-DC system warning light (orange) . When the SNOW mode switch is ON comes on and the warning message (To use the I-DC system, turn off the appears, stop the vehicle in a safe place, SNOW mode switch, then turn on the place the shift lever in the P (Park) dynamic driver assistance switch .) position and turn the engine off. When For details about the SNOW mode the radar signal is temporarily inter- switch, see “SNOW mode switch” (P.2- rupted, clean the sensor area of the front 46). bumper and restart the engine. If the . When the 4WD shift switch is in the 4H warning message continues to be dis- or 4L position (for 4WD models) played, have the I-DC system checked. It is . When the radar signal is temporarily recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer interrupted for this service. Action to take: . When driving on roads with limited JVS0482X When the conditions listed above are no road structures or buildings (for ex- longer present, turn the system off with Condition B: ample, long bridges, deserts, snow fields, driving next to long walls) the dynamic driver assistance switch . Under the following conditions, making it Action to take: Turn the I-DC system back on to use the impossible to detect a vehicle ahead, the system. I-DC system is automatically canceled. When the above conditions no longer exist, the I-DC system will resume auto- The chime will sound, the I-DC system matically. warning light (orange) will come on and the “FRONT RADAR OBSTRUCTION” warning message will appear in the vehicle information display. . When the radar sensor area of the front bumper is covered with dirt or is obstructed

5-96 Starting and driving under normal conditions, have the vehicle checked. It is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

SSD0999 JVS0913X SYSTEM MALFUNCTION SYSTEM MAINTENANCE Condition: The sensor for the I-DC system is When the I-DC system is not operating located below the front bumper. properly, the chime sounds and the The I-DC system is designed to automa- system warning light (“CRUISE” orange) tically check the sensor’s operation. When will come on. the sensor is covered with dirt or is Action to take: obstructed, the system will automatically be canceled. If the sensor is covered with If the warning light comes on, park the ice, a transparent or translucent vinyl bag, vehicle in a safe place. Turn the engine off, etc., the I-DC system may not detect restart the engine, and turn on the I-DC them. In these instances, the I-DC system system again. may not be able to decelerate the vehicle If it is not possible to set the system or properly. Be sure to check and clean the the indicator stays on, it may indicate sensor regularly. that the system is malfunctioning. To keep the I-DC system operating prop- Although the vehicle is still driveable erly, be sure to observe the following: Starting and driving 5-97 AUTOMATIC EMERGENCY BRAKING (AEB)

. Always keep the sensor area of the compliance could void the user’s front bumper clean. authority to operate the equipment. WARNING . Do not strike or damage the areas For Canada: around the sensor. This device complies with Industry Ca- Failure to follow the warnings and . Do not cover or attach stickers or nada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). instructions for proper use of the similar objects on the front bumper Operation is subject to the following AEB system could result in serious near the sensor area. This could cause two conditions: injury or death. failure or malfunction. 1. This device may not cause interfer- . The AEB system is a supplemen- . Do not attach metallic objects near ence, and tal aid to the driver. It is not a the sensor area (brush guard, etc.). replacement for the driver’s at- This could cause failure or malfunc- 2. This device must accept any inter- tention to traffic conditions or tion. ference, including interference that responsibility to drive safely. It . Do not alter, remove or paint the front may cause undesired operation of the device. cannot prevent accidents due to bumper. It is recommended you con- carelessness or dangerous driv- tact a NISSAN dealer before customiz- ing techniques. ing or restoring the front bumper. . The AEB system does not func- FCC Notice: tion in all driving, traffic, weather For USA: and road conditions. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the The AEB system can assist the driver following two conditions: when there is a risk of a forward collision 1. This device may not cause harmful with the vehicle ahead in the traveling interference, and lane. 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. FCC Warning Changes or modification not expressly approved by the party responsible for

5-98 Starting and driving JVS0913X The AEB system uses a sensor located below the front bumper to measure the distance to the vehicle ahead in the traveling lane.

JVS1102X Indicators and warnings (on the vehicle AEB SYSTEM OPERATION information display) The AEB system operates at speeds AEB system warning light (on the instrument panel) above approximately 3 MPH (5 km/h). Center multi-function control panel If a risk of a forward collision is detected, the AEB system will provide the first warning to the driver by blinking the vehicle ahead detection indicator in the

Starting and driving 5-99 vehicle information display and providing The automatic braking will cease under an audible warning. In addition, the AEB the following conditions: system pushes the accelerator pedal up. . When the steering wheel is turned as If the driver releases the accelerator far as necessary to avoid a collision. pedal, then the system applies partial . When the accelerator pedal is de- braking. pressed. If the driver applies the brakes quickly and . When there is no longer a vehicle forcefully after the warning, and the AEB detected ahead. system detects that there is still the If the AEB system has stopped the vehicle, possibility of a forward collision, the the vehicle will remain at a standstill for system will automatically increase the approximately 2 seconds before the braking force. brakes are released. If a forward collision is imminent and the driver does not take action, the AEB system issues the second visual (flashing) and audible warning and automatically applies harder braking. NOTE: The vehicle’s stop lights come on when braking is performed by the AEB system. Depending on vehicle speed and distance to the vehicle ahead, as well as driving and roadway conditions, the system may help the driver avoid a forward collision or may help mitigate the consequences of a collision should one be unavoidable. If the driver is handling the steering wheel, accelerating or braking, the AEB system will function later or will not function. 5-100 Starting and driving 2. Touch [Driver Assistance]. 3. Touch [Emergency Assist]. 4. Touch [Forward emergency braking] to turn the system ON/OFF. When the AEB system is turned off, the AEB system warning light (orange) illuminates. NOTE: The AEB system will be automatically turned ON when the engine is restarted. The I-FCW system is integrated into the AEB system. There is not a separate selection in the display for the I-FCW system. When the AEB system is turned off, the I-FCW system is also turned off. AEB SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

WARNING

Listed below are the system limitations for the AEB system. Failure to JVS1103X operate the vehicle in accordance AEB system warning light (on the instru- TURNING THE AEB SYSTEM ON/OFF with these system limitations could ment panel) result in serious injury or death. Perform the following steps to turn the Center multi-function control panel AEB system ON/OFF. . The AEB system cannot detect all vehicles under all conditions. 1. Push the SETTING button on the center multi-function control panel . . The radar sensor does not detect the following objects:

Starting and driving 5-101 — Pedestrians, animals or obsta- . In some road or traffic conditions, cles in the roadway the AEB system may unexpectedly push the accelerator pedal — Oncoming vehicles up or apply partial braking. When — Crossing vehicles acceleration is necessary, con- . The radar sensor has some per- tinue to depress the accelerator formance limitations. If a station- pedal to override the system. ary vehicle is in the vehicle’s path, . Braking distances increase on the AEB system will not function slippery surfaces. when the vehicle is driven at . The system is designed to auto- speeds over approximately 45 matically check the sensor’s func- MPH (70 km/h). tionality, within certain . The radar sensor may not detect limitations. The system may not a vehicle ahead in the following detect some forms of obstruction conditions: of the sensor area such as ice, — Dirt, ice, snow or other materi- snow, stickers, for example. In al covering the radar sensor. these cases, the system may not be able to warn the driver prop- — Interference by other radar erly. Be sure that you check, clean sources. and clear the sensor area regu- — Snow or road spray from tra- larly. veling vehicles. . Excessive noise will interfere with — If the vehicle ahead is narrow the warning chime sound, and (e.g. motorcycle) the chime may not be heard. — When driving on a steep downhill slope or roads with sharp curves. — When towing a trailer or other vehicle.

5-102 Starting and driving SSD0253 JVS0675X

When driving on some roads, such as the vehicle traveling ahead. SYSTEM TEMPORARILY UNAVAIL- winding, hilly, curved, narrow roads, or ABLE roads which are under construction, the radar sensor may detect vehicles in a Condition A different lane, or may temporarily not When the radar sensor picks up interfer- detect a vehicle traveling ahead. This ence from another radar source, making may cause the AEB system to work it impossible to detect a vehicle ahead, inappropriately. the AEB system is automatically turned The detection of vehicles may also be off. The AEB system warning light (or- affected by vehicle operation (steering ange) will illuminate. maneuver or traveling position in the Action to take: lane, etc.) or vehicle condition. If this When the above conditions no longer occurs, the system may warn you by exist, the AEB system will resume auto- blinking the vehicle ahead detection matically. indicator and sounding the chime unexpectedly. You will have to manually control the proper distance away from Starting and driving 5-103 Condition B Condition C Action to take: Under the following conditions, making it When the accelerator pedal actuator If the warning light (orange) comes on, impossible to detect a vehicle ahead, the detects that the internal motor tempera- stop the vehicle in a safe location and AEB system is automatically turned off. ture is high, the AEB system is automati- place the shift lever in the P (Park) The AEB system warning light (orange) cally turned off. The AEB system warning position. Turn the engine off and restart will illuminate and the “FRONT RADAR light (orange) will illuminate. the engine. If the warning light continues OBSTRUCTION” warning message will ap- Action to take: to illuminate, have the AEB system checked. It is recommended you visit a pear in the vehicle information display. When the above conditions no longer NISSAN dealer for this service. . When the sensor area of the front exist, the AEB system will resume auto- bumper is covered with dirt or is matically. obstructed Action to take: Condition D If the AEB system warning light (orange) When VDC system is OFF, the AEB brake comes on, stop the vehicle in a safe will not operate. In this case only visible place, place the shift lever in the P (Park) and audible warning operates. The AEB position and turn the engine off. Clean system warning light (orange) will illumi- the radar cover below the front bumper nate. with a soft cloth, and restart the engine. If Action to take: the AEB system warning light continues When the above conditions no longer to illuminate, have the AEB system exist, the AEB system will resume auto- checked. It is recommended you visit a matically. NISSAN dealer for this service. SYSTEM MALFUNCTION . When driving on roads with limited road structures or buildings (for ex- If the AEB system malfunctions, it will be ample, long bridges, deserts, snow turned off automatically, a chime will fields, driving next to long walls) sound, the AEB system warning light (orange) will illuminate. Action to take: When the above conditions no longer exist, the AEB system will resume automatically.

5-104 Starting and driving tion. 2. This device must accept any inter- . Do not alter, remove or paint the front ference, including interference that bumper. It is recommended you con- may cause undesired operation of tact a NISSAN dealer before customiz- the device. ing or restoring the front bumper. FCC Notice: For USA: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and 2. This device must accept any inter- JVS0913X ference received, including interference that may cause undesired SYSTEM MAINTENANCE operation. The sensor is located below the front FCC Warning bumper. Changes or modification not expressly To keep the system operating properly, approved by the party responsible for be sure to observe the following: compliance could void the user’s . Always keep the sensor area of the authority to operate the equipment. front bumper clean. For Canada: . Do not strike or damage the areas around the sensor. This device complies with Industry Ca- nada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). . Do not cover or attach stickers or Operation is subject to the following similar objects on the front bumper two conditions: near the sensor area. This could cause failure or malfunction. 1. This device may not cause interfer- . Do not attach metallic objects near ence, and the sensor area (brush guard, etc.). This could cause failure or malfunc- Starting and driving 5-105 INTELLIGENT FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (I-FCW)

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the I- FCW system could result in serious injury or death. . The I-FCW system helps warn the driver before a collision but will not avoid a collision. It is the driver’s responsibility to stay alert, drive safely and be in control of the vehicle at all times. JVS0913X The I-FCW system can help alert the driver when there is a sudden braking of a The I-FCW system uses a radar sensor second vehicle traveling in front of the located below the front bumper to mea- vehicle ahead in the same lane. sure the distance to a second vehicle ahead in the same lane.

5-106 Starting and driving JVS1104X

Vehicle ahead detection indicator (on the vehicle information display) Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) system warning light (on the instrument panel) Center multi-function control panel

Starting and driving 5-107 JVS0294X I-FCW SYSTEM OPERATION The I-FCW system operates at speeds above approximately 3 MPH (5 km/h). If there is a potential risk of a forward collision, the I-FCW system will warn the driver by blinking the vehicle ahead detection indicator, and sounding an audible alert.

5-108 Starting and driving 2. Touch [Driver Assistance]. 3. Touch [Emergency Assist]. 4. Touch [Forward emergency braking] to turn the system ON/OFF. When the I-FCW system is turned off, the AEB system warning light (orange) illuminates. NOTE: The I-FCW system is integrated into the AEB system. There is not a separate selection in the display for the I-FCW system. When the AEB system is turned off, the I-FCW system is also turned off.

JVS1103X AEB system warning light (on the instru- TURNING THE I-FCW SYSTEM ON/ ment panel) OFF Center multi-function control panel Perform the following steps to turn the I- FCW system on or off. 1. Push the SETTING button on the center multi-function control panel .

Starting and driving 5-109 JVS0295X JVS0296X Illustration A Illustration B

JVS0297X Illustration C

5-110 Starting and driving — Dirt, ice, snow or other material covering the radar sensor — Interference by other radar sources — Snow or road spray from tra- velling vehicles. — Driving in a tunnel — Towing a trailer or other vehicle . (Illustration B) When the vehicle ahead is being towed. . JVS0298X (Illustration C) When the distance to the vehicle ahead is too close, Illustration D the beam of the radar sensor is I-FCW SYSTEM LIMITATIONS — Pedestrians, animals or obsta- obstructed. cles in the roadway . (Illustration D) When driving on a WARNING — Oncoming vehicles steep downhill slope or roads with sharp curves. — Crossing vehicles Listed below are the system limita- . The system is designed to auto- tions for the I-FCW system. Failure to . (Illustration A) The I-FCW system matically check the sensor’s func- operate the vehicle in accordance does not function when a vehicle tionality, within certain with these system limitations could ahead is a narrow vehicle, such as limitations. The system may not result in serious injury or death. a motorcycle. detect some forms of obstruction . The I-FCW system cannot detect . The radar sensor may not detect of the sensor area such as ice, all vehicles under all conditions. a vehicle ahead in the following snow, stickers, for example. In conditions: these cases, the system may not . The radar sensor does not detect be able to warn the driver prop- — Snow or heavy rain the following objects: erly. Be sure that you check, clean and clear the sensor area regu-

Starting and driving 5-111 larly. . Excessive noise will interfere with the warning chime sound, and the chime may not be heard.

SSD0253

When driving on some roads, such as the vehicle traveling ahead. winding, hilly, curved, narrow roads, or roads which are under construction, the radar sensor may detect vehicles in a different lane, or may temporarily not detect a vehicle traveling ahead. This may cause the I-FCW system to work inappropriately. The detection of vehicles may also be affected by vehicle operation (steering maneuver or traveling position in the lane, etc.) or vehicle condition. If this occurs, the system may warn you by blinking the vehicle ahead detection indicator and sounding the chime unexpectedly. You will have to manually control the proper distance away from 5-112 Starting and driving Condition B SYSTEM MALFUNCTION Under the following conditions, making it If the I-FCW system malfunctions, it will be impossible to detect a vehicle ahead, the turned off automatically, a chime will I-FCW system is automatically turned off. sound, the AEB system warning light The AEB system warning light (orange) (orange) will illuminate. will illuminate and the “FRONT RADAR Action to take: OBSTRUCTION” warning message will ap- If the warning light (orange) illuminates, pear in the vehicle information display. stop the vehicle in a safe location and . When the sensor area of the front place the shift lever in the P (Park) bumper is covered with dirt or is position. Turn the engine off and restart obstructed the engine. If the warning light continues Action to take: to illuminate, have the I-FCW system checked. It is recommended you visit a If the AEB system warning light (orange) NISSAN dealer for this service. JVS0675X comes on, stop the vehicle in a safe place, place the shift lever in the P (Park) SYSTEM TEMPORARILY UNAVAIL- position and turn the engine off. Clean ABLE the radar cover below the front bumper Condition A with a soft cloth, and restart the engine. If the warning light continues to illuminate, When the radar sensor picks up interfer- have the I-FCW system checked. It is ence from another radar source, making recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer it impossible to detect a vehicle ahead, for this service. the I-FCW system is automatically turned . off. The AEB system warning light (or- When driving on roads with limited ange) will illuminate. road structures or buildings (for example, long bridges, deserts, snow Action to take: fields, driving next to long walls) When the above conditions no longer Action to take: exist, the I-FCW system will resume auto- When the above conditions no longer matically. exist, the I-FCW system will resume automatically.

Starting and driving 5-113 tion. 2. This device must accept any inter- . Do not alter, remove or paint the front ference, including interference that bumper. It is recommended you con- may cause undesired operation of tact a NISSAN dealer before customiz- the device. ing or restoring the front bumper. FCC Notice: For USA: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and 2. This device must accept any inter- JVS0913X ference received, including interference that may cause undesired SYSTEM MAINTENANCE operation. The sensor is located below the front FCC Warning bumper. Changes or modification not expressly To keep the system operating properly, approved by the party responsible for be sure to observe the following: compliance could void the user’s . Always keep the sensor area of the authority to operate the equipment. front bumper clean. For Canada: . Do not strike or damage the areas around the sensor. This device complies with Industry Ca- nada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). . Do not cover or attach stickers or Operation is subject to the following similar objects on the front bumper two conditions: near the sensor area. This could cause failure or malfunction. 1. This device may not cause interfer- . Do not attach metallic objects near ence, and the sensor area (brush guard, etc.). This could cause failure or malfunc- 5-114 Starting and driving BREAK-IN SCHEDULE FUEL EFFICIENT DRIVING TIPS

Follow these easy-to-use Fuel Efficient . Recirculating the cool air in the Driving Tips to help you achieve the most cabin when the A/C is on reduces CAUTION fuel economy from your vehicle. cooling load. 4. Drive at economical speeds and dis- During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 1. Use smooth accelerator and brake tances. km), follow these recommendations pedal application. . . to obtain maximum engine perfor- Avoid rapid starts and stops. Observing the speed limit and not mance and ensure the future relia- . Use smooth, gentle accelerator and exceeding 60 MPH (97 km/h) bility and economy of your new brake application whenever possi- (where legally allowed) can improve vehicle. ble. fuel efficiency due to reduced aero- . Maintain constant speed while dynamic drag. Failure to follow these recommenda- . commuting and coast whenever Maintaining a safe following dis- tions may result in shortened engine possible. tance behind other vehicles re- life and reduced engine perfor- duces unnecessary braking. 2. Maintain constant speed. mance. . Safely monitoring traffic to antici- . Look ahead to try and anticipate pate changes in speed permits . Avoid driving for long periods at con- and minimize stops. . reduced braking and smooth accel- stant speed, either fast or slow. Do not Synchronizing your speed with traf- eration changes. fic lights allows you to reduce your run the engine over 4,000 rpm. . Select a gear range suitable to road . Do not accelerate at full throttle in any number of stops. . conditions. gear. Maintaining a steady speed can minimize red light stops and im- 5. Use cruise control. . Avoid quick starts. prove fuel efficiency. . Using cruise control during highway . Avoid hard braking as much as possi- driving helps maintain a steady 3. Use air conditioning (A/C) at higher ble. speed. vehicle speeds. . Do not tow a trailer for the first 500 . Cruise control is particularly effec- . Below 40 MPH (64 km/h), it is more miles (805 km). tive in providing fuel savings when efficient to open windows to cool driving on flat terrains. the vehicle due to reduced engine load. 6. Plan for the shortest route. . Above 40 MPH (64 km/h), it is more . Utilize a map or navigation system efficient to use A/C to cool the to determine the best route to save vehicle due to increased aerody- time. namic drag.

Starting and driving 5-115 INCREASING FUEL ECONOMY NISSAN ALL-MODE 4WD® (if so equipped)

7. Avoid idling. . Keep your engine tuned up. . Shutting off your engine when safe . Follow the recommended scheduled WARNING for stops exceeding 30-60 seconds maintenance. . saves fuel and reduces emissions. Keep the tires inflated to the correct . Do not attempt to raise two 8. Buy an automated pass for toll roads. pressure. Low tire pressure increases wheels off the ground and shift . Automated passes permit drivers to tire wear and lowers fuel economy. the transmission to any drive or use special lanes to maintain cruis- . Keep the wheels in correct alignment. reverse position with the engine ing speed through the toll and Improper alignment increases tire running. Doing so may result in avoid stopping and starting. wear and lowers fuel economy. drivetrain damage or unexpected . 9. Winter warm up. Use the recommended viscosity en- vehicle movement which could gine oil. (See “Engine oil and oil filter result in serious vehicle damage . Limit idling time to minimize impact recommendation” (P.10-5).) or personal injury. to fuel economy. . . Vehicles typically need no more Do not attempt to test a 4WD than 30 seconds of idling at start- equipped vehicle on a 2-wheel up to effectively circulate the en- dynamometer or similar equip- gine oil before driving. ment even if the other two . Your vehicle will reach its ideal wheels are raised off the ground. operating temperature more Make sure you inform test facility quickly while driving versus idling. personnel that your vehicle is equipped with 4WD before it is 10. Keeping your vehicle cool. placed on a dynamometer. Using . Park your vehicle in a covered the wrong test equipment may parking area or in the shade when- result in drivetrain damage or ever possible. unexpected vehicle movement . When entering a hot vehicle, open- which could result in serious ve- ing the windows will help to reduce hicle damage or personal injury. the inside temperature faster, resulting in reduced demand on your A/C system.

5-116 Starting and driving See “On-pavement and off-road driving CAUTION precautions” (P.5-9) for other precautions for offroad driving. . Do not drive the vehicle in the 4HI NISSAN ALL-MODE 4WD® SYSTEM or 4LO position on dry hard sur- The all mode 4WD system provides 3 face roads. Driving on dry, hard positions (AUTO, 4HI and 4LO), so you surfaces in 4HI or 4LO may cause can select the desired drive mode accord- unnecessary noise, tire wear and ing to the driving conditions. increased fuel consumption. If the Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) warning light turns on when driving on dry hard surface roads: — in the 4HI position, shift the 4WD shift switch to AUTO. — in the 4LO position, stop the vehicle and shift the transmission lever to the N (Neutral) position with the brake pedal depressed and shift the 4WD shift switch to AUTO. If the 4WD warning light is still on after the above operation, have your vehicle checked as soon as possible. It is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. . The transfer case may be damaged if you continue driving with the 4WD warning light blinking.

Starting and driving 5-117 4WD shift procedure:

SSD1100

*1: The 4LO and 4HI indicator may flash alternately. Stop the vehicle and be sure to turn the 4WD shift switch after the transmission shift lever has been shifted to the N (Neutral) position. If the indicator keeps flashing after the 4WD shift procedure, drive slowly without abrupt maneuvers for a while. Then the indicator will illuminate or turn off. · Avoid making a turn or abrupt starts while shifting to the 4LO position. Otherwise the gears may grind, damaging the drive system.

5-118 Starting and driving *2: While changing in and out of the 4LO position, the engine must be running. Otherwise, the shift will not take place and the 4LO indicator will not be on or flashing. *3: Make sure that the 4LO indicator turns on when shifting the 4WD shift switch to the 4L position. The Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off indicator light will also turn on when 4L is selected. (See “Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system” (P.5-133).)

Starting and driving 5-119 The 4WD shift switch is used to select the gear while the 4LO and 4HI in- Use the engine brake and low 4WD mode depending on the driving dicators are blinking alternately, automatic transmission gears conditions. There are 3 types of drive the vehicle may move unexpect- for engine braking. modes available, AUTO, 4HI and 4LO. edly. . Do not operate the 4WD shift The 4WD shift switch electronically con- switch (between AUTO and 4H) trols the transfer case operation. Rotate with the rear wheels spinning. the switch to move between each mode, . AUTO, 4H and 4L. CAUTION Do not drive on dry hard surface roads in the 4HI or 4LO position. You must depress the 4WD shift switch . Never shift the 4WD shift switch Driving on dry hard surfaces in to select 4L, and the vehicle MUST be 4HI or 4LO may cause unneces- stationary and the shift lever in the N between 4L and 4H while driving. . sary noise and tire wear. NISSAN (Neutral) position when changing into The 4HI position provides greater recommends driving in the AUTO or out of 4L. traction. Avoid excessive speed, position under these conditions. as it will cause increased fuel consumption and higher oil tem- . The 4WD transfer case may not WARNING peratures, and could damage dri- be shifted between 4HI and 4LO vetrain component. Speeds over at low ambient temperatures and . When parking, apply the parking 62 MPH (100 km/h) in 4HI is not the 4LO and 4HI indicators may brake before stopping the engine recommended. blink even when the 4WD shift switch is shifted. After driving for and make sure that the 4WD shift . The 4LO position provides max- indicator is on and the ATP warn- a while you can change the 4WD imum traction. Avoid raising ve- shift switch between 4H and 4L. ing light turns off. Otherwise, the hicle speed excessively, as the vehicle could unexpectedly move maximum speed is approxi- even if the automatic transmis- mately 31 MPH (50 km/h). When driving on rough roads, sion is in the P (Park) position. . . When driving straight, shift the Drive carefully according to the road . The 4LO and 4HI indicators must 4WD shift switch to the AUTO or surface conditions. stop blinking and the 4LO or 4HI 4H position. Do not move the 4WD When the vehicle is stuck, indicator must remain illumi- shift switch when making a turn . Place stones or wooden blocks under nated or turn off before shifting or reversing. the tires to free the vehicle. the transmission into gear. If the . . Set the 4WD shift switch to 4H or 4L. shift lever is shifted from the N Do not shift the 4WD shift switch (Neutral) position to any other (between AUTO and 4H) while driving on steep downhill grades. 5-120 Starting and driving . If it is difficult to free the vehicle, jolt. This is not abnormal. repeat forward and backward move- . When the vehicle is stopped after ment to increase the movement. making a turn, you may feel a slight . If the vehicle is stuck deep in mud, tire jolt after the shift lever is shifted to N chains may be effective. (Neutral) or P (Park) position. This occurs because the transfer clutch is released and not because of a mal- CAUTION function.

. Do not spin the tires excessively. Tires will sink deep into the mud, CAUTION making it difficult to free the vehicle. . When driving straight, shift the . Avoid shifting gears with the en- 4WD shift switch to the AUTO or gine running at high speeds as SSD1048 4H position. Do not move the 4WD this may cause malfunction. shift switch when making a turn 4WD SHIFT SWITCH or reversing. . Shift the 4WD shift switch to either the . Do not shift the 4WD shift switch AUTO, 4H or 4L position, depending on while driving on steep downhill driving conditions. grades. Use the engine brake and . With the switch set to the AUTO low automatic transmission position, distribution of torque to the gears for engine braking. front and rear wheels changes auto- . Do not operate the 4WD shift matically, depending on road condi- switch with the rear wheels spin- tions encountered [ratio; 0 : 100 (2WD) ning. ? 50 : 50 (4WD)]. This results in . improved driving stability. Before placing the 4WD shift . switch in the 4H position from If the 4WD shift switch is operated AUTO, ensure the vehicle speed is while making a turn, accelerating or less than 62 MPH (100 km/h). decelerating or if the ignition switch Failure to do so can damage the is placed in the OFF position while in 4WD system. the AUTO, 4H or 4L, you may feel a

Starting and driving 5-121 . Never shift the 4WD shift switch will come on. If the indicator does between 4L and 4H while driving. not come on immediately, make sure the area around the vehicle is . Engine idling speed is high while safe, and drive the vehicle straight, warming up the engine. Be espe- accelerate or decelerate or move the cially careful when starting or vehicle in reverse, then shift the 4WD driving on slippery surfaces with shift switch. the 4WD shift switch in AUTO. . If the 4WD warning light comes on, the 4WD shift indicator turns off. 4WD WARNING LIGHT Comes on or Warning light blinks when: There is a mal- SSD1058 Illuminates function in the 4WD system 4WD shift indicator The transfer 4WD SHIFT INDICATOR Blinks ra- case oil tem- The 4WD shift indicator is displayed in the pidly perature is ab- vehicle information display. normally high The indicator should turn off within 1 The difference Blinks slowly in wheel rota- second after placing the ignition switch tion is large in the ON position. While the engine is running, the 4WD shift The 4WD warning light is located in the indicator will illuminate the position se- meter. lected by the 4WD shift switch. (See the The 4WD warning light comes on when 4WD shift procedure list shown in the the ignition switch is placed in the ON “NISSAN all-mode 4WD® system” (P.5-117).) position. It turns off soon after the engine . The 4WD shift indicator may blink is started. while shifting from one drive mode If any malfunction occurs in the 4WD to the other. When the shifting is system when the ignition switch is placed completed, the 4WD shift indicator in the ON position, the 4WD warning light 5-122 Starting and driving will either remain illuminated or blink. be engaged even if the 4WD shift . The transfer case may be da- If the 4WD warning light comes on, the switch is in AUTO or 4H. Be maged if you continue driving 4WD shift indicator turns off. especially careful when driving. If with the warning light blinking. High-temperature transfer case oil makes corresponding parts are malfunc- the 4WD warning light blink rapidly (about tioning, the 4WD mode will not be twice per second). If the warning light engaged even if the 4WD shift blinks rapidly during operation, stop the switch is shifted. vehicle in a safe place immediately. Then . Do not drive the vehicle in the 4HI if the light turns off after a while, you can or 4LO position on dry hard sur- continue driving. face roads. Driving on dry, hard A large difference between the diameters surfaces in 4HI or 4LO may cause of front and rear wheels will make the unnecessary noise, tire wear and 4WD warning light blink slowly (about increased fuel consumption. once per two seconds). Change the 4WD If the 4WD warning light turns on shift switch to AUTO and do not drive fast. when driving on dry hard surface roads: CAUTION — in the AUTO or 4HI position, shift the 4WD shift switch to . If the 4WD warning light comes AUTO. on or blinks slowly during opera- — in the 4LO position, stop the tion or rapidly after stopping the vehicle and shift the transmis- vehicle for a while, have your sion shift lever to the N (Neu- vehicle checked as soon as pos- tral) position and shift the sible. It is recommended you visit 4WD shift switch to AUTO. a NISSAN dealer for this service. . If the 4WD warning light is still on . Shifting between 4HI and 4LO is after the above operation, have not recommended when the 4WD your vehicle checked as soon as warning light turns on. possible. It is recommended you . When the 4WD warning light visit a NISSAN dealer for this comes on, the 2WD mode may service.

Starting and driving 5-123 HILL START ASSIST SYSTEM

so may result in a collision or WARNING serious personal injury.

. Never rely solely on the hill start The hill start assist system automatically assist system to prevent the ve- keeps the brakes applied to help prevent hicle from moving backward on a the vehicle from rolling backwards in the hill. Always drive carefully and time it takes the driver to release the attentively. Depress the brake brake pedal and apply the accelerator pedal when the vehicle is stopped when the vehicle is stopped on a hill. on a steep hill. Be especially care- The hill start assist system will operate ful when stopped on a hill on automatically under the following condi- frozen or muddy roads. Failure tions: to prevent the vehicle from rolling . backwards may result in a loss of The transmission is shifted to a for- control of the vehicle and possi- ward or reverse gear. ble serious injury or death. . The vehicle is stopped completely on a hill by applying the brake. . The hill start assist system is not designed to hold the vehicle at a The maximum holding time is 2 seconds. standstill on a hill. Depress the After 2 seconds the vehicle will begin to brake pedal when the vehicle is roll back and the hill start assist system stopped on a steep hill. Failure to will stop operating completely. do so may cause the vehicle to The hill start assist system will not roll backwards and may result in operate when the transmission is shifted a collision or serious personal to the N (Neutral) or P (Park) position or injury. on a flat and level road. . The hill start assist system may When the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) not prevent the vehicle from roll- warning light illuminates in the meter, the ing backwards on a hill under all hill start assist system will not operate. load or road conditions. Always (See “Warning lights, indicator lights and be prepared to depress the brake audible reminders” (P.2-10).) pedal to prevent the vehicle from rolling backwards. Failure to do 5-124 Starting and driving PARKING/PARKING ON HILLS

placed in the P (Park) position. Failure to do so could cause the vehicle to move unexpectedly or roll away and result in an accident. . Make sure the automatic transmission shift lever has been pushed as far forward as it can go and cannot be moved without depressing the foot brake pedal.

1. Firmly apply the parking brake. 2. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) SD1006MA position. 3. To help prevent the vehicle from rolling into the street when parked on a . To help avoid risk of injury or sloping drive way, it is a good practice WARNING death through unintended opera- to turn the wheels as illustrated. tion of the vehicle and/or its . . Do not stop or park the vehicle systems, do not leave children, HEADED DOWNHILL WITH CURB: over flammable materials such as people who require the assis- Turn the wheels into the curb and dry grass, waste paper or rags. tance of others or pets unat- move the vehicle forward until the They may ignite and cause a fire. tended in your vehicle. curb side wheel gently touches the . Additionally, the temperature in- curb. Never leave the engine running . while the vehicle is unattended. side a closed vehicle on a warm HEADED UPHILL WITH CURB: day can quickly become high . Turn the wheels away from the curb Do not leave children unattended enough to cause a significant risk inside the vehicle. They could and move the vehicle back until the of injury or death to people and curb side wheel gently touches the unknowingly activate switches pets. or controls. Unattended children curb. . . could become involved in serious Safe parking procedures require HEADED UPHILL OR DOWNHILL, NO accidents. that both the parking brake be CURB: applied and the transmission be Starting and driving 5-125 TOW MODE

Turn the wheels toward the side of OFF position. the road so the vehicle will move away from the center of the road if it moves. 4. Push the ignition switch to the OFF position.

SIC4474 The TOW MODE should be used when pulling a heavy trailer or hauling a heavy load. Driving the vehicle in the TOW MODE with no trailer/load or light trailer/light load will not cause any damage. However, fuel economy may be reduced, and the transmission/engine driving characteristics may feel unusual. Push the TOW MODE switch to activate TOW MODE. The indicator light on the TOW MODE switch illuminates when the TOW MODE is selected. Push the TOW MODE switch again to turn the TOW MODE OFF. TOW MODE is automatically canceled when the ignition switch is placed in the

5-126 Starting and driving SNOW MODE SONAR SYSTEM (if so equipped)

SIC4454 SSD0622 For driving or starting the vehicle on snowy roads or slippery areas, turn the . This system is not designed to SNOW mode on. WARNING prevent contact with small or To turn the SNOW mode on, push the moving objects. SNOW mode switch. The SNOW mode . The sonar system is a conveni- . The system is designed as an aid indicator light on the meter panel will ence but it is not a substitute for to the driver in detecting large illuminate. When the SNOW mode is proper parking. Always look stationary objects to help avoid activated, engine output is controlled to around and check that it is safe damaging the vehicle. The sys- avoid wheel spin. to do so before parking. Always tem will not detect small objects move slowly. To turn the SNOW mode off, push the below the bumper, and may not switch and the indicator on the meter . Read and understand the limita- detect objects that are too close panel will turn off. Turn the SNOW mode tions of the sonar system as to the bumper or on the ground. off for normal driving and fuel economy. contained in this section. Incle- . If your vehicle sustains damage ment weather may affect the to the bumper fascia, leaving it function of the sonar system; this misaligned or bent, the sensing may include reduced perfor- zone may be altered causing in- mance or a false activation. Starting and driving 5-127 accurate measurement of obsta- obstacle, the rate of the tone increases. cles or false alarms. When the obstacle is less than 11.8 in (30 cm) away, the tone will sound continuously. Keep the corner/center sensors (located CAUTION on the bumper fascia) free from snow, ice and large accumulations of dirt (do not Keep the interior of the vehicle as clean the sensors with sharp objects). If quiet as possible to hear the tone the sensors are covered, it will affect the clearly. accuracy of the sonar system. The sensitivity level of the corner/center The sonar system sounds a tone to warn sensors can be adjusted (higher or lower) the driver of obstacles near the bumper. in the Sonar settings on the center dis- When the “Interrupt Display” is turned on play. (See “Sonar settings” (P.5-128).) JVS1043X in the Sonar settings, the sonar indicator The intermittent tone will stop in 3 will also appear in the center display. (See seconds when an obstacle is detected “Sonar indicator” (P.5-129).) The system SONAR SETTINGS by only the corner sensor and the dis- To set up the sonar function to your detects front obstacles when the shift tance does not change. lever is in the D (Drive) position or N preferred settings, push the SETTING (Neutral) position. The system detects button , select the “Camera/Sonar” key both front and rear obstacles when the and then select the “Sonar” key on the shift lever is in the R (Reverse) position. center display. The system may not detect objects at Sonar: speeds above 6 MPH (10 km/h) and may When this item is turned on, the front and not detect certain angular or moving rear sonar is activated. When this item is objects. turned off (indicator turns off), the front The sonar system detects obstacles up to and rear sonar is deactivated. 3.9 ft (1.2 m) from the bumper with a FR sensor only: decreased coverage area at the outer When this item is turned on, only the front corners of the bumper. Refer to the sonar is activated. illustration for approximate zone coverage areas. As you move closer to the 5-128 Starting and driving Interrupt Display: SONAR INDICATOR When this item is turned on, the sonar With the “Interrupt Display” turned on in display will interrupt the current view to the Sonar settings, when the corner/ indicate that the obstacles are around center sensors detect obstacles near the the vehicle. bumper, a tone will sound and the sonar Sonar Sensitivity: indicator will appear in the center display . When the RearView Monitor is dis- Adjust the sensitivity level of the sonar. played, the sonar indicator will appear in Sonar Volume: the upper corner of the display . Adjust the tone volume of the sonar. The sonar indicators and indicate the position of the object and the distance to the object with its color and rate of blinking. When an object is detected, the indicator (green) appears and blinks (the tone sounds intermittently). When the vehicle moves closer to the object, the color of the indicator turns yellow and the rate of blinking increases (the rate of the tone increases). When the bumper is very close to the object, less than 11.8 in (30 cm) away, the indicator stops blinking and JVS1085X turns red (the tone sounds continuously). When the RearView Monitor is dis- Sonar display played, the colors of the sonar indicator Corner sensor indicator and the distance guide lines in the rear Center sensor indicator view indicate different distances to the RearView Monitor display object. When the is touched, the sonar will be turned off temporarily. The sonar indicator can be turned off in Starting and driving 5-129 POWER STEERING BRAKE SYSTEM the Sonar settings on the center display. BRAKING PRECAUTIONS (See “Sonar settings” (P.5-128).) When the WARNING The brake system has two separate sonar indicator is off, only a tone sounds hydraulic circuits. If one circuit malfunc- when the sonar detect obstacles. If the engine is not running or is tions, you will still have braking ability at turned off while driving, the power two wheels. assist for the steering will not work. You may feel a small click and hear a Steering will be harder to operate. sound when the brake pedal is fully depressed slowly. This is not a malfunc- The power assisted steering uses a hy- tion and indicates that the brake assist draulic pump, driven by the engine, to mechanism is operating properly. assist steering. Hydraulically-assisted brakes If the engine stops or the drive belt The hydraulically-assisted brake system is breaks, you will still have control of the designed to use a hydraulic pump driven vehicle. However, much greater steering electrically, to assist braking. If the engine effort is needed, especially in sharp turns stops, you can stop the vehicle by de- and at low speeds. pressing the foot brake pedal. However, greater foot pressure on the foot brake pedal will be required to stop the vehicle. The stopping distance will be longer. Wet brakes When the vehicle is washed or driven through water, the brakes may get wet. As a result, your braking distance will be longer and the vehicle may pull to one side during braking. To dry brakes, drive the vehicle at a safe speed while lightly tapping the brake pedal to heat-up the brakes. Do this until the brakes return to normal. Avoid driving the vehicle at high speeds until the brakes 5-130 Starting and driving BRAKE ASSIST function correctly. Abrupt braking or accelerating BRAKE ASSIST PARKING BRAKE BREAK-IN could cause the wheels to skid When the force applied to the brake pedal Break in the parking brake shoes when- and result in an accident. exceeds a certain level, the Brake Assist is ever the stopping effect of the parking . If the engine is not running or is activated generating greater braking brake is weakened or whenever the turned off while driving, the force than a conventional brake booster parking brake shoes and/or drums/ro- power assist for the brakes will even with light pedal force. tors are replaced, in order to assure the not work. Braking will be harder. best braking performance. WARNING This procedure is described in the vehicle service manual. It is recommended you The Brake Assist is only an aid to visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. assist braking operation and is not a collision warning or avoidance de- Using the brakes vice. It is the driver’s responsibility to Avoid resting your foot on the brake stay alert, drive safely and be in pedal while driving. This will cause over- control of the vehicle at all times. heating of the brakes, wearing out the brake and pads faster and reduce gas mileage. ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM (ABS) To help save the brakes and to prevent the brakes from overheating, reduce WARNING speed and downshift to a lower gear before going down a slope or long grade. . The Anti-lock Braking System Overheated brakes may reduce braking (ABS) is a sophisticated device, performance and could result in loss of but it cannot prevent accidents vehicle control. resulting from careless or dangerous driving techniques. It can help maintain vehicle control dur- WARNING ing braking on slippery surfaces. Remember that stopping dis- . While driving on a slippery sur- tances on slippery surfaces will face, be careful when braking, be longer than on normal sur- accelerating or downshifting. Starting and driving 5-131 faces even with ABS. Stopping system helps the driver maintain steering illuminates the ABS warning light on the distances may also be longer on control and helps to minimize swerving instrument panel. The brake system then rough, gravel or snow covered and spinning on slippery surfaces. operates normally, but without anti-lock assistance. roads, or if you are using tire Using the system chains. Always maintain a safe If the ABS warning light illuminates during distance from the vehicle in front Depress the brake pedal and hold it down. the self-test or while driving, have the of you. Ultimately, the driver is Depress the brake pedal with firm steady vehicle checked. It is recommended you responsible for safety. pressure, but do not pump the brakes. visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. The ABS will operate to prevent the . Tire type and condition may also wheels from locking up. Steer the vehicle Normal operation affect braking effectiveness. to avoid obstacles. The ABS operates at speeds above 3 to 6 — When replacing tires, install MPH (5 to 10 km/h). The speed varies the specified size of tires on according to road conditions. all four wheels. WARNING When the ABS senses that one or more — When installing a spare tire, Do not pump the brake pedal. Doing wheels are close to locking up, the make sure that it is the proper so may result in increased stopping actuator rapidly applies and releases size and type as specified on distances. hydraulic pressure. This action is similar the Tire and Loading Informa- to pumping the brakes very quickly. You tion label. See “Tire and load- may feel a pulsation in the brake pedal ing information label” (P.10- Self-test feature and hear a noise from under the hood or 12). The ABS includes electronic sensors, elec- feel a vibration from the actuator when it — For detailed information, see tric pumps, hydraulic solenoids and a is operating. This is normal and indicates “Wheels and tires” (P.8-30). computer. The computer has a built-in that the ABS is operating properly. How- diagnostic feature that tests the system ever, the pulsation may indicate that road each time you start the engine and move conditions are hazardous and extra care The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) con- is required while driving. trols the brakes so the wheels do not lock the vehicle at a low speed in forward or during hard braking or when braking on reverse. When the self-test occurs, you slippery surfaces. The system detects the may hear a “clunk” noise and/or feel a rotation speed at each wheel and varies pulsation in the brake pedal. This is the brake fluid pressure to prevent each normal and does not indicate a malfunc- wheel from locking and sliding. By pre- tion. If the computer senses a malfunc- venting each wheel from locking, the tion, it switches the ABS off and 5-132 Starting and driving VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC) SYSTEM

The Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) sys- . The road may be slippery or the illuminates (for 4WD models). tem uses various sensors to monitor system may determine some action See “Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) warn- driver inputs and vehicle motion. Under is required to help keep the vehicle on ing light” (P.2-17) and “Vehicle Dynamic certain driving conditions, the VDC sys- the steered path. Control (VDC) off indicator light” (P.2-20). tem helps to perform the following func- . You may feel a pulsation in the brake The computer has a built-in diagnostic tions. pedal and hear a noise or vibration feature that tests the system each time . from under the hood. This is normal Controls brake pressure to reduce you start the engine and move the vehicle and indicates that the VDC system is wheel slip on one slipping drive wheel forward or in reverse at a slow speed. working properly. so power is transferred to a non When the self-test occurs, you may hear a . slipping drive wheel on the same axle. Adjust your speed and driving to the “clunk” noise and/or feel a pulsation in the . Controls brake pressure and engine road conditions. brake pedal. This is normal and is not an output to reduce drive wheel slip If a malfunction occurs in the system, the indication of a malfunction. based on vehicle speed (traction con- VDC warning light illuminates in the trol function). instrument panel. The VDC system auto- . Controls brake pressure at individual matically turns off. WARNING wheels and engine output to help the The VDC OFF switch is used to turn off the driver maintain control of the vehicle VDC system. The VDC off indicator . The VDC system is designed to in the following conditions: illuminates to indicate the VDC system is help improve driving stability but — understeer (vehicle tends to not off. When the VDC switch is used to turn does not prevent accidents due follow the steered path despite off the system, the VDC system still to abrupt steering operation at increased steering input) operates to prevent one drive wheel from high speeds or by careless or — oversteer (vehicle tends to spin due slipping by transferring power to a non dangerous driving techniques. to certain road or driving condi- slipping drive wheel. The VDC warning Reduce vehicle speed and be tions). light flashes if this occurs. All other especially careful when driving The VDC system can help the driver to VDC functions are off, and the VDC and cornering on slippery sur- maintain control of the vehicle, but it warning light will not flash. The VDC faces and always drive carefully. cannot prevent loss of vehicle control in system is automatically reset to on when . Do not modify the vehicle’s sus- all driving situations. the ignition switch is placed in the OFF pension. If suspension parts such position then back to the ON position. When the VDC system operates, the VDC as shock absorbers, struts, warning light in the instrument panel When the 4L position is selected with the springs, stabilizer bars, bushings flashes so note the following: 4WD shift switch, the VDC system is and wheels are not NISSAN re- disabled and the VDC off indicator light commended for your vehicle or Starting and driving 5-133 are extremely deteriorated, the . If wheels or tires other than the VDC system may not operate NISSAN recommended ones are properly. This could adversely used, the VDC system may not affect vehicle handling perfor- operate properly and the VDC mance, and the VDC warning light warning light may illuminate. may illuminate. . The VDC system is not a substi- . If brake related parts such as tute for winter tires or tire chains brake pads, rotors and calipers on a snow covered road. are not NISSAN recommended or are extremely deteriorated, the VDC system may not operate properly and the VDC warning light may illuminate. . If engine control related parts are SIC4455 not NISSAN recommended or are extremely deteriorated, the VDC VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC) warning light may illuminate. OFF SWITCH . When driving on extremely in- The vehicle should be driven with the clined surfaces such as higher Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system ON banked corners, the VDC system for most driving conditions. may not operate properly and the VDC warning light may illumi- When the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, nate. Do not drive on these types the VDC system reduces the engine out- of roads. put to reduce wheel spin. The engine speed will be reduced even if the accel- . When driving on an unstable sur- erator is depressed to the floor. If max- face such as a turntable, ferry, imum engine power is needed to free a elevator or ramp, the VDC warn- stuck vehicle, turn the VDC system off. ing light may illuminate. This is not a malfunction. Restart the To turn off the Vehicle Dynamic Control engine after driving onto a stable (VDC) system, push the VDC OFF switch. surface. The VDC off indicator light will illuminate. 5-134 Starting and driving COLD WEATHER DRIVING

Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart FREEING A FROZEN DOOR LOCK TIRE EQUIPMENT the engine to turn ON the system. To prevent a door lock from freezing, SUMMER tires have a tread designed to apply deicer through the key hole. If the provide superior performance on dry lock becomes frozen, heat the key before pavement. However, the performance of inserting it into the key hole or use the these tires will be substantially reduced in Intelligent Key system. snowy and icy conditions. If you operate ANTIFREEZE your vehicle on snowy or icy roads, NISSAN recommends the use of MUD & In the winter when it is anticipated that SNOW or ALL SEASON tires on all four the outside temperature will drop below wheels. It is recommended you consult a 32°F (0°C), check antifreeze to assure NISSAN dealer for the tire type, size, speed proper winter protection. For additional rating and availability information. information, see “Engine cooling system” (P.8-4). For additional traction on icy roads, studded tires may be used. However, BATTERY some U.S. states and Canadian provinces If the battery is not fully charged during prohibit their use. Check local, state and extremely cold weather conditions, the provincial laws before installing studded battery fluid may freeze and damage the tires. battery. To maintain maximum efficiency, Skid and traction capabilities of the battery should be checked regularly. studded snow tires, on wet or dry For additional information, see “Battery” surfaces, may be poorer than that of (P.8-11). non-studded snow tires. DRAINING OF COOLANT WATER Tire chains may be used. For details, see If the vehicle is to be left outside without “Tire chains” (P.8-37). antifreeze, drain the cooling system, including the engine block. Refill before operating the vehicle. For details, see “Engine cooling system” (P.8-4).

Starting and driving 5-135 For four-wheel drive . Whatever the condition, drive ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (if so If you install snow tires, they must also be with caution. Accelerate and slow equipped) the same size, brand, construction and down with care. If accelerating or Engine block heaters are used to assist in tread pattern on all four wheels. downshifting too fast, the drive cold temperature starting. wheels will lose even more trac- SPECIAL WINTER EQUIPMENT tion. The engine block heater should be used It is recommended that the following when the outside temperature is 20°F . Allow more stopping distance items be carried in the vehicle during (−7°C) or lower. under these conditions. Braking winter: should be started sooner than on To use the engine block heater . A scraper and stiff-bristled brush to dry pavement. 1. Turn the engine off. remove ice and snow from the win- . Allow greater following distances dows and wiper blades. 2. Open the hood and unwrap the en- on slippery roads. . A sturdy, flat board to be placed under gine block heater cord. . the jack to give it firm support. Watch for slippery spots (glare 3. Plug the engine block heater cord into ice). These may appear on an . A shovel to dig the vehicle out of a grounded 3-wire, 3-pronged exten- otherwise clear road in shaded snowdrifts. sion cord. areas. If a patch of ice is seen . Extra window washer fluid to refill the ahead, brake before reaching it. 4. Plug the extension cord into a Ground reservoir tank. Try not to brake while on the ice, Fault Interrupt (GFI) protected, DRIVING ON SNOW OR ICE and avoid any sudden steering grounded 110-volt AC (VAC) outlet. maneuvers. 5. The engine block heater must be plugged in for at least 2 - 4 hours, WARNING . Do not use the cruise control on slippery roads. depending on outside temperatures, to properly warm the engine coolant. . . Wet ice (32°F, 0°C and freezing Snow can trap dangerous ex- Use an appropriate timer to turn the rain), very cold snow or ice can be haust gases under your vehicle. engine block heater on. Keep snow clear of the exhaust slick and very hard to drive on. 6. Before starting the engine, unplug and The vehicle will have much less pipe and from around your vehicle. properly store the cord to keep it traction or “grip” under these away from moving parts. conditions. Try to avoid driving on wet ice until the road is salted or sanded.

5-136 Starting and driving WARNING

. Do not use your engine block heater with an ungrounded electrical system or a 2-pronged adapter. You can be seriously injured by an electrical shock if you use an ungrounded connection. . Disconnect and properly store the engine block heater cord before starting the engine. Damage to the cord could result in an electrical shock and can cause serious injury. . Use a heavy-duty 3-wire, 3- pronged extension cord rated for at least 10A. Plug the extension cord into a Ground Fault Interrupt (GFI) protected, grounded 110-VAC outlet. Failure to use the proper extension cord or a grounded outlet can result in a fire or electrical shock and cause serious personal injury.

Starting and driving 5-137 MEMO

5-138 Starting and driving 6 In case of emergency

Hazard warning flasher switch ...... 6-2 If your vehicle overheats ...... 6-14 Roadside assistance program ...... 6-2 Towing your vehicle ...... 6-16 Emergency engine shut off ...... 6-3 Towing recommended by NISSAN ...... 6-17 Flat tire ...... 6-3 Vehicle recovery (freeing a stuck vehicle) ...... 6-19 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) ...... 6-3 Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) manual shifting Changing a flat tire ...... 6-4 (4WD models) ...... 6-20 Jump starting ...... 6-12 When 4WD warning light illuminates ...... 6-20 Push starting ...... 6-14 Operating procedure ...... 6-21 HAZARD WARNING FLASHER SWITCH ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE PROGRAM

In the event of a roadside emergency, . Turn signals do not work when Roadside Assistance Service is available the hazard warning flasher lights to you. Please refer to your Warranty are on. Information Booklet (U.S.) or Warranty & Roadside Assistance Information Booklet The flasher can be actuated with the (Canada) for details. ignition switch in any position. When an impact that could activate the supplemental air bags is detected, the hazard warning flasher lights blink automatically. If the hazard warning flasher switch is pushed twice, the hazard warning flashers will turn off.

SIC2574 WARNING Push the switch on to warn other drivers when you must stop or park under Do not turn the hazard warning emergency conditions. All turn signal flasher switch to off until you can lights will flash. make sure that it is safe to do so. Also, the hazard flasher warning may not blink automatically depending WARNING on the force of impact.

. If stopping for an emergency, be Some state laws may prohibit the use of sure to move the vehicle well off the hazard warning flasher switch while the road. driving. . Do not use the hazard warning flashers while moving on the highway unless unusual circumstances force you to drive so slowly that your vehicle might become a hazard to other traffic. 6-2 In case of emergency EMERGENCY ENGINE SHUT OFF FLAT TIRE

To shut off the engine in an emergency TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYS- permanently damage the tires situation while driving, perform the fol- TEM (TPMS) and increase the likelihood of tire lowing procedure: This vehicle is equipped with the Tire failure. Serious vehicle damage . Rapidly push the push-button ignition Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). It could occur and may lead to an switch 3 consecutive times in less monitors tire pressure of all tires except accident and could result in ser- than 1.5 seconds, or the spare. When the low tire pressure ious personal injury. Check the . Push and hold the push-button igni- warning light is lit and the CHECK TIRE tire pressure for all four tires. tion switch for more than 2 seconds. PRESSURE warning appears in the vehicle Adjust the tire pressure to the information display, one or more of your recommended COLD tire pressure tires is significantly under-inflated. If the shown on the Tire and Loading vehicle is being driven with low tire Information label to turn the low pressure, the TPMS will activate and warn tire pressure warning light OFF. If you of it by the low tire pressure warning the light still illuminates while light. This system will activate only when driving after adjusting the tire the vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 pressure, a tire may be flat. If MPH (25 km/h). For more details, see “Low you have a flat tire, replace it with tire pressure warning light” (P.2-15) and a spare tire as soon as possible. “Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” . Since the spare tire is not (P.5-5). equipped with the TPMS, when a spare tire is mounted or a wheel is replaced, the TPMS will not WARNING function and the low tire pressure warning light will flash for ap- . If the low tire pressure warning proximately 1 minute. The light light illuminates or Low Pressure will remain on after 1 minute. information is displayed on the Have your tires replaced and/or monitor screen while driving, TPMS system reset as soon as avoid sudden steering maneu- possible. It is recommended you vers or abrupt braking, reduce visit a NISSAN dealer for these vehicle speed, pull off the road services. to a safe location and stop the . vehicle as soon as possible. Driv- Replacing tires with those not ing with under-inflated tires may originally specified by NISSAN In case of emergency 6-3 could affect the proper operation of the TPMS. WARNING . Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol tire sealant into the tires, . Make sure the parking brake is as this may cause a malfunction securely applied and the auto- of the tire pressure sensors. matic transmission is in the P (Park) position. CHANGING A FLAT TIRE . Never change tires when the vehicle is on a slope, ice or slippery If you have a flat tire, follow the instruc- areas. This is hazardous. tions below. . Never change tires if oncoming Stopping the vehicle traffic is close to your vehicle. 1. Safely move the vehicle off the road Wait for professional road assis- and away from traffic. tance. MCE0001A 2. Turn on the hazard warning flashers. 3. Park on a level surface and apply the Blocking wheels parking brake. Move the shift lever to Place suitable blocks at both the front the P (Park) position. and back of the wheel diagonally opposite the flat tire to prevent the vehicle 4. Turn off the engine. from moving when it is jacked up. 5. Raise the hood to warn other traffic, and to signal professional road assistance personnel that you need assis- WARNING tance. 6. Have all passengers get out of the Be sure to block the wheel as the vehicle and stand in a safe place, away vehicle may move and result in from traffic and clear of the vehicle. personal injury.

6-4 In case of emergency tached to the jacking tool. If rubber sound suppressor remains on jack when vehicle is being jacked up, the vehicle will be unstable and may fall off jack stand causing serious injury of death.

3. Remove the cargo floor cover. 4. Remove the jacking tools.

JVE0219X

Getting the spare tire and tools 1. Open the liftgate. 2. Raise the cargo floor board using the handle .

JVE0422X

WARNING

When removing jacking tools, be sure the rubber sound suppressor , used to control jack stand from rattling against metal, is not at-

In case of emergency 6-5 7. Locate the oval opening above the middle of the rear bumper. 8. Place the T-shaped end of the jack rod through the opening and direct it towards the spare wheel winch assembly, located directly above the spare wheel.

SCE0916

CAUTION

Do not insert the jack rod straight as it is designed to be inserted at an angle as shown.

JVE0423X 9. Seat the T-shaped end of the jack rod 5. Securely screw to connect the T- into the T-shaped opening of the shaped end of the jack rod and the spare wheel winch. Apply pressure to extension bar as illustrated. keep the jack rod engaged in the 6. Fit the square end of the jack rod into spare wheel winch and turn the jack the square hole of the wheel nut rod counterclockwise to lower the wrench to form a handle . spare wheel.

6-6 In case of emergency center of the wheel and then lift it up into the storage area.

SCE0377 10. Once the spare wheel is completely lowered, remove the jack rod and reach under the vehicle to remove the hanging plate. 11. Carefully slide the spare wheel from under the rear of the vehicle. After preparing the spare tire, to remove the rod, pull out the rod while moving the JVE0349X rod to the right and left with the screw of the extension facing the side. CAUTION

CAUTION When storing the wheel, be sure to mount the wheel horizontally. Secur- When storing the wheel, make sure ing the wheel that is in a tilted that the hanging plate is in the position as illustrated may cause

In case of emergency 6-7 looseness and dropping of the wheel . Never jack up the vehicle more while driving. Lower the wheel on the than necessary. ground again, and make sure that . Never use blocks on or under the the hanging plate is properly set. jack. Hang the wheel again and make sure . that the wheel is held horizontally, Do not start or run the engine then store the wheel. while vehicle is on the jack, as it may cause the vehicle to move. . Do not allow passengers to stay Jacking up the vehicle and remov- in the vehicle while it is on the ing the damaged tire jack.

Carefully read the caution label at- WARNING tached to the jack body and the following instructions. SCE0875 . Never get under the vehicle while Jack-up point it is supported only by the jack. If 1. Place the jack directly under the jack- it is necessary to work under the up points as illustrated. vehicle, support it with safety stands. The jack should be used on level firm ground. . Use only the jack provided with your vehicle to lift the vehicle. Do not use the jack provided with your vehicle on other vehicles. The jack is designed for lifting only your vehicle during a tire change. . Use the correct jack-up points. Never use any other part of the vehicle for jack support.

6-8 In case of emergency NCE130 3. Install the assembled jack rod into the jack as shown. 4. Carefully raise the vehicle until the clearance between the tire and ground is achieved. 5. To lift the vehicle, securely hold the jack lever and rod with both hands SCE0876 and turn the jack lever. 2. Loosen each wheel nut one or two NOTE: turns by turning counterclockwise Before jacking up the vehicle, make with the wheel nut wrench. Do not sure the ignition switch is placed in remove the wheel nuts until the tire the OFF position. If the vehicle is lifted is off the ground. up with the engine running, the auto- leveling suspension will become disabled after 120 seconds. To reset the auto-leveling suspension, cycle the In case of emergency 6-9 ignition switch ON/OFF one time. 4. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tire touches the ground. Then, with the wheel nut wrench, tighten the wheel nuts securely in the sequence as illustrated. Lower the vehicle completely.

WARNING

. Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened wheel nuts can cause the wheel to become loose or come off. This could cause an SCE0910 accident. . Do not use oil or grease on the Installing the spare tire wheel studs or nuts. This could The full-size temporary use only spare cause the nuts to become loose. tire (if so equipped) is designed for . Retighten the wheel nuts when emergency use. (See specific instruc- the vehicle has been driven for tions under the heading “Wheels and 600 miles (1,000 km) (also in tires” (P.8-30).) cases of a flat tire, etc.). 1. Clean any mud or dirt from the surface between the wheel and hub. . As soon as possible, tighten the 2. Carefully put the spare tire on and wheel nuts to the specified torque tighten the wheel nuts finger tight. with a torque wrench. Wheel nut tightening torque: 3. With the wheel nut wrench, tighten 98 ft-lb (133 N·m) wheel nuts alternately and evenly in the sequence illustrated ( , , , , , The wheel nuts must be kept ) until they are tight. tightened to specification at all times. It is recommended that wheel nuts be tightened to speci- 6-10 In case of emergency fications at each lubrication interval. WARNING . Adjust tire pressure to the COLD pressure. . Always make sure that the spare COLD pressure: tire and jacking equipment are After the vehicle has been parked properly secured after use. Such for three hours or more or driven items can become dangerous less than 1 mile (1.6 km). projectiles in an accident or sudden stop. COLD tire pressures are shown on the Tire and Loading Information . The full-size temporary use only label affixed to the driver side spare tire (if so equipped) is de- center pillar. signed for emergency use. (See After adjusting tire pressure to the COLD specific instructions under the tire pressure, the display of the tire heading “Wheels and tires” (P.8- pressure information may show higher 30).) pressure than the COLD tire pressure after the vehicle has been driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km). This is because the tire pressurizes as the tire temperature rises. This does not indicate a system malfunction. Stowing the damaged tire and tools 1. Securely store the damaged tire, jack and tools in the storage area. 2. Close the cargo floor cover. 3. Replace the cargo floor board. 4. Close the liftgate.

In case of emergency 6-11 JUMP STARTING

To start your engine with a booster . Whenever working on or near a battery, the instructions and precautions battery, always wear suitable eye below must be followed. protectors (for example, goggles or industrial safety spectacles) and remove rings, metal bands, WARNING or any other jewelry. Do not lean over the battery when jump start- . If done incorrectly, jump starting ing. can lead to a battery explosion, . Do not attempt to jump start a resulting in severe injury or frozen battery. It could explode death. It could also damage your and cause serious injury. vehicle. . Your vehicle has an automatic . Explosive hydrogen gas is always engine cooling fan. It could come present in the vicinity of the on at any time. Keep hands and battery. Keep all sparks and other objects away from it. flames away from the battery. . Do not allow battery fluid to come into contact with eyes, skin, clothing or painted surfaces. Bat- tery fluid is a corrosive sulphuric acid solution which can cause severe burns. If the fluid should come into contact with anything, immediately flush the contacted area with water. . Keep the battery out of the reach of children. . The booster battery must be rated at 12 volts. Use of an improperly rated battery can damage your vehicle.

6-12 In case of emergency CAUTION

. Always connect positive (+) to positive (+) and negative (−) to body ground (as illustrated) — not to the battery. . Make sure the jumper cables do not touch moving parts in the engine compartment and that clamps do not contact any other metal.

JVE0485X 6. Start the engine of the booster vehicle and let it run for a few minutes. Do not allow the two vehicles to 7. Keep the engine speed of the booster WARNING touch. vehicle at about 2,000 rpm, and 3. Apply parking brake. Move the shift start the engine of the vehicle being Always follow the instructions below. lever to the P (Park) position. Switch jump started . Failure to do so could result in off all unnecessary electrical systems (light, heater, air conditioner, etc.). damage to the charging system and CAUTION cause personal injury. 4. Remove vent caps on the battery (if so equipped). Cover the battery with a Do not keep the starter motor en- 1. Remove the engine compartment firmly wrung out moist cloth to reduce explosion hazard. gaged for more than 10 seconds. If cover, if necessary. See “Engine com- the engine does not start right away, partment check locations” (P.8-3). 5. Connect jumper cables in the se- place the ignition switch in the OFF ? ? ? 2. If the booster battery is in another quence as illustrated ( position and wait 10 seconds before vehicle , position the two vehicles ( ). trying again. and ) to bring their batteries into close proximity to each other.

In case of emergency 6-13 PUSH STARTING IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS

8. After starting your engine, carefully Do not attempt to start the engine by disconnect the negative cable and pushing. CAUTION then the positive cable ( ? ? ? ). CAUTION . Do not continue to drive if your 9. Replace the vent caps (if so equipped). vehicle overheats. Doing so could Be sure to dispose of the cloth used to . Automatic transmission models cause engine damage or a vehicle cover the vent holes as it may be fire. contaminated with corrosive acid. cannot be push-started or tow- started. Attempting to do so may . To avoid the danger of being 10. Put the battery cover on. cause transmission damage. scalded, never remove the radia- . Three way catalyst equipped tor cap or coolant reservoir cap models should not be started by while the engine is still hot. When pushing since the three way cat- the radiator cap or coolant reser- alyst may be damaged. voir cap is removed, pressurized . hot water will spurt out, possibly Never try to start the vehicle by causing serious injury. towing it; when the engine starts, . the forward surge could cause Do not open the hood if steam is the vehicle to collide with the coming out. tow vehicle. If your vehicle is overheating (indicated by an extremely high temperature gauge reading), or if you feel a lack of engine power, detect abnormal noise, etc., take the following steps: 1. Move the vehicle safely off the road, apply the parking brake and move the shift lever to the P (Park) position. Do not stop the engine. 2. Turn off the heater and air conditioner. Open all the windows, move the heater or air conditioner temperature control to maximum hot and fan 6-14 In case of emergency control to high speed. 3. If engine overheating is caused by WARNING climbing a long hill on a hot day, run the engine at a fast idle (approxi- Be careful not to allow your hands, mately 1,500 rpm) until the tempera- hair, jewelry or clothing to come into ture gauge indication returns to contact with, or get caught in, engine normal. belts or the engine cooling fan. The 4. Get out of the vehicle. Look and listen engine cooling fan can start at any for steam or coolant escaping from time. the radiator before opening the hood. (If steam or coolant is escaping, turn 7. After the engine cools down, check off the engine.) Do not open the hood the coolant level in the reservoir tank further until no steam or coolant can with the engine running. Add coolant be seen. to the reservoir tank if necessary. Have 5. Open the engine hood. your vehicle repaired. It is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. WARNING

If steam or water is coming from the engine, stand clear to prevent getting burned.

6. Visually check drive belts for damage or looseness. Also check if the cooling fan is running. The radiator hoses and radiator should not leak water. If coolant is leaking or the cooling fan does not run, stop the engine.

In case of emergency 6-15 TOWING YOUR VEHICLE

When towing your vehicle, all State (Pro- . Always attach safety chains be- vincial in Canada) and local regulations fore towing. for towing must be followed. Incorrect towing equipment could damage your For information about towing your vehi- vehicle. Towing instructions are available cle behind a recreational vehicle (RV), see from a NISSAN dealer. Local service op- “Flat towing” (P.10-29). erators are familiar with the applicable laws and procedures for towing. To assure proper towing and to prevent accidental damage to your vehicle, NISSAN recommends that you have a service operator tow your vehicle. It is advisable to have the service operator carefully read the following precautions.

WARNING

. Never ride in a vehicle that is being towed. . Never get under your vehicle after it has been lifted by a tow truck.

CAUTION

. When towing, make sure that the transmission, axles, steering system and powertrain are in working condition. If any of these conditions apply, dollies or a flatbed tow truck must be used. 6-16 In case of emergency SCE0925 Two-Wheel Drive (2WD) models TOWING RECOMMENDED BY ward), as this may cause serious NISSAN and expensive damage to the Two-Wheel Drive (2WD) models transmission. If it is necessary to tow the vehicle with the front NISSAN recommends that your vehicle be wheels raised, always use towing towed with the driving (rear) wheels off dollies under the rear wheels. the ground or place the vehicle on a flat . bed truck as illustrated. When towing rear wheel drive models with the front wheels on the ground or on towing dollies: CAUTION Place the ignition in the ACC or ON position, and secure the steering . Never tow automatic transmis- wheel in a straight-ahead posi- sion models with the rear wheels tion with a rope or similar device. on the ground or four wheels on the ground (forward or back-

In case of emergency 6-17 JVE0350X Front

SCE0907 Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) models Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) models NISSAN recommends that towing dollies CAUTION be used when towing your vehicle or the vehicle be placed on a flat bed truck as Never tow 4WD models with any of illustrated. the wheels on the ground as this may cause serious and expensive JVE0351X damage to the powertrain. Rear 6-18 In case of emergency VEHICLE RECOVERY (freeing a stuck mud, etc. Never tow the vehicle 4. Slowly rock the vehicle forward and vehicle) for a long distance using only the backward. . towing hook. Shift back and forth between R (Reverse) and D (Drive). . The towing hook is under tre- WARNING . mendous force when used to free Apply the accelerator as little as possible to maintain the rocking . a stuck vehicle. Never pull the Stand clear of a stuck vehicle. hook at an angle. motion. . . Do not spin your tires at high . Release the accelerator pedal be- Always pull the cable straight out fore shifting between R and D. speed. This could cause them to from the front or rear of the . Do not spin the tires above 35 MPH explode and result in serious in- vehicle. jury. Parts of your vehicle could (55 km/h). . Pulling devices should be routed also overheat and be damaged. 5. If the vehicle cannot be freed after a so they do not touch any part of few tries, contact a professional tow- the suspension, steering, brake or ing service to remove the vehicle. Pulling a stuck vehicle cooling systems. If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud, . Pulling devices such as ropes or etc., use a tow strap or other device canvas straps are not recom- designed specifically for vehicle recovery. mended for use in vehicle towing Always follow the manufacturer’s instruc- or recovery. tions for the recovery device. Attach the tow strap to the towing hook. Rocking a stuck vehicle If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud, CAUTION etc., use the following procedure: 1. Turn off the Vehicle Dynamic Control . Tow chains or cables must be (VDC) system. attached only to the main struc- 2. Make sure the area in front and tural members of the vehicle or behind the vehicle is clear of obstruc- the towing hooks. Otherwise, the tions. vehicle body will be damaged. 3. Turn the steering wheel right and left . Use the towing hook only to free to clear an area around the front tires. a vehicle stuck in sand, snow, In case of emergency 6-19 FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE (4WD) MANUAL SHIFTING (4WD models)

This section describes the procedure for mission, etc. are very hot and manually shifting the vehicle into the 4WD CAUTION may cause a burn injury. mode (4L position) in case of an emergency. . Make sure that the parts that will Only perform this procedure in an be operated as well as related WHEN 4WD WARNING LIGHT ILLU- emergency. parts cool down before perform- MINATES If the vehicle is driven for a long ing the operation. If the 4WD warning light illuminates while period of time over a long distance . Burrs or projecting portions of driving, there may be a malfunction in the with a component detached, foreign metal components may cause 4WD system. Stop the vehicle and have material such as water, sand, etc. unexpected injury to your fingers the vehicle checked as soon as possible. It may enter from the opening and this or arms. Pay special attention in is recommended you contact a NISSAN may cause a malfunction in the regard to your safety while re- dealer for this service. (See “NISSAN all- drivetrain system. After freeing a moving and installing these mode 4WD®” (P.5-116).) vehicle that has become stuck, it is parts. Wear work gloves and pro- When the vehicle is stuck on an uneven recommended you contact a NISSAN tective arm covers. road (desert, mud, etc.) and the 4WD dealer for inspection and repair. warning light is illuminated, be sure to place the 4WD shift switch in the 4L position. If only the rear wheels are CAUTION spinning, this means that the transfer WARNING has not switched to the 4L position While removing and installing the electrically. . Ensure your safety before per- parts, prevent the removed parts forming the operations. The ve- from getting dirty with water, dirt or If this situation occurs, contact a dealer or hicle may move unexpectedly. sand. Protect the parts using a cover road assistance service for help. If an such as a clean cloth, etc. immediate service is not available, per- . Place the ignition switch in the form the following procedure to switch to OFF position, apply the parking the 4L position manually and free the brake and let the vehicle cool vehicle. down. . Do not perform the following procedure immediately after driving the vehicle. Parts such as exhaust components, the trans-

6-20 In case of emergency OPERATING PROCEDURE Place the ignition switch in the OFF position and apply the parking brake. Let the vehicle cool down before performing the following procedure.

SCE0959 SCE0960 4WD shift motor assembly 4WD shift motor harness connector 1. Check that the ignition switch is in the 2. Unlock the upper lock of the har- OFF position. ness connector of the 4WD shift motor assembly, then remove the harness connector. CAUTION 3. Cover the connector to prevent it from getting dirty, and then fasten The following procedure includes the the connector to the vehicle using a removal of the electrical system suitable rope so that the connector components. Therefore, make sure does not contact the exhaust muffler, that the ignition switch is in the OFF etc. position before proceeding.

In case of emergency 6-21 CAUTION

The connector must be fastened securely. Not doing so may result in damage to the connector due to interference with other parts.

SCE0961 SCE0962 4. Remove the 4 bolts that secure the 6. Completely insert the wrench into the 4WD shift motor using the wrench internal gear of the transfer. that is equipped in the vehicle. 7. Fully turn the wrench clockwise as 5. Remove the 4WD shift motor assem- far as it will go. This shifts the transfer bly. to the 4L position. 8. Install the 4WD shift motor assembly. Securely tighten the 4 bolts using the CAUTION wrench. Be careful not to allow the assembly to contact water, dirt or sand. CAUTION

. Do not connect the harness connector of the 4WD shift motor after the above procedure has been performed.

6-22 In case of emergency . The 4 bolts are tightened to temporarily install the 4WD shift motor so that water, dirt or sand does not enter inside the system. Therefore, they should only be tightened to the proper tightening torque. It is recommended you contact a NISSAN dealer for inspection and repair.

9. With the 4WD system in the 4L position, free the stuck vehicle. (See “Ve- hicle recovery (freeing a stuck vehicle)” (P.6-19) for details.)

CAUTION

After manually shifting the vehicle to the 4L position, it is recommended you contact a NISSAN dealer for inspection and repair as soon as possible.

In case of emergency 6-23 MEMO

6-24 In case of emergency 7 Appearance and care

Cleaning exterior...... 7-2 Cleaning interior ...... 7-5 Washing ...... 7-2 Air fresheners ...... 7-5 Waxing ...... 7-2 Floor mats ...... 7-5 Removing spots ...... 7-3 Seat belts ...... 7-7 Underbody ...... 7-3 Corrosion protection ...... 7-7 Glass ...... 7-3 Most common factors contributing to Wheels ...... 7-3 vehicle corrosion...... 7-7 Chrome parts ...... 7-4 Environmental factors influence the rate Tire dressing ...... 7-4 of corrosion...... 7-7 To protect your vehicle from corrosion...... 7-8 CLEANING EXTERIOR

In order to maintain the appearance of . Lock all doors before going your vehicle, it is important to take proper CAUTION through automatic car wash. care of it. Locking doors helps prevent To protect the paint surface, wash your . Do not use car washes that use fuel-filler door from opening and vehicle as soon as you can: acid in the detergent. Some car becoming damaged. . after a rainfall to prevent possible washes, especially brushless damage from acid rain ones, use some acid for cleaning. Rinse the vehicle again with plenty of The acid may react with some . after driving on coastal roads clean water. plastic vehicle components, caus- . when contaminants such as soot, bird Inside flanges, seams and folds on the ing them to crack. This could doors, hatches and hood are particularly droppings, tree sap, metal particles or affect their appearance, and also bugs get on the paint surface vulnerable to the effects of road salt. could cause them not to function Therefore, these areas must be regularly . when dust or mud builds up on the properly. Always check with your surface cleaned. Make sure that the drain holes in car wash to confirm that acid is the lower edge of the door are open. Whenever possible, store or park your not used. Spray water under the body and in the vehicle inside a garage or in a covered . Do not wash the vehicle with wheel wells to loosen the dirt and wash area. strong household soap, strong away road salt. When it is necessary to park outside, park chemical detergents, gasoline or Avoid leaving water spots on the paint in a shady area or protect the vehicle with solvents. surface by using a damp chamois to dry a body cover. . Do not wash the vehicle in direct the vehicle. Be careful not to scratch the paint sunlight or while the vehicle body WAXING surface when putting on or removing is hot, as the surface may become the body cover. water-spotted. Regular waxing protects the paint surface and helps retain new vehicle appearance. . Avoid using tight-napped or WASHING Polishing is recommended to remove rough cloths, such as washing Wash dirt off the vehicle with a wet built-up wax residue and to avoid a mitts. Care must be taken when sponge and plenty of water. Clean the weathered appearance before reapplying removing caked-on dirt or other vehicle thoroughly using a mild soap, a wax. special vehicle soap or general purpose foreign substances so the paint surface is not scratched or da- A NISSAN dealer can assist you in choos- dishwashing liquid mixed with clean, lu- ing the proper product. kewarm (never hot) water. maged.

7-2 Appearance and care . Wax your vehicle only after a thorough GLASS road salt in areas where it is used washing. Follow the instructions sup- Use glass cleaner to remove smoke and during winter. plied with the wax. dust film from the glass surfaces. It is . Do not use a wax containing any normal for glass to become coated with a CAUTION abrasives, cutting compounds or clea- film after the vehicle is parked in the hot ners that may damage the vehicle sun. Glass cleaner and a soft cloth will finish. easily remove this film. Do not use abrasive cleaners when Machine compound or aggressive polish- washing the wheels. ing on a base coat/clear coat paint finish may dull the finish or leave swirl marks. CAUTION Aluminum alloy wheels REMOVING SPOTS When cleaning the inside of the Wash regularly with a sponge dampened Remove tar and oil spots, industrial dust, windows, do not use sharp-edged in a mild soap solution, especially during insects, and tree sap as quickly as possi- tools, abrasive cleaners or chlorine- winter months in areas where road salt is ble from the paint surface to avoid lasting based disinfectant cleaners. They used. Salt could discolor the wheels if not damage or staining. Special cleaning could damage the electrical conduc- removed. products are available at a NISSAN dealer tors, radio antenna elements or rear or any automotive accessory stores. window defroster elements. CAUTION UNDERBODY In areas where road salt is used in winter, WHEELS Follow the directions below to avoid the underbody must be cleaned regularly. Wash the wheels when washing the staining or discoloring the wheels: This will prevent dirt and salt from build- vehicle to maintain their appearance. ing up and causing the acceleration of . Do not use a cleaner that uses corrosion on the underbody and suspen- . Clean the inner side of the wheels strong acid or alkali contents to sion. Before the winter period and again when the wheel is changed or the clean the wheels. in the spring, the underseal must be underside of the vehicle is washed. . Do not apply wheel cleaners to checked and, if necessary, re-treated. . Inspect wheel rims regularly for dents the wheels when they are hot. or corrosion. Such damage may cause The wheel temperature should be loss of pressure or poor seal at the tire the same as ambient tempera- bead. ture. . NISSAN recommends that the road wheels be waxed to protect against

Appearance and care 7-3 . Rinse the wheel to completely . Do not use an automatic car wash difficult to remove). remove the cleaner within 15 if the vehicle is equipped with . Wipe off excess tire dressing using a minutes after the cleaner is ap- bright wheels. The wheel coating dry towel. Make sure the tire dressing plied. may be damaged. is completely removed from the tire tread/grooves. . Do not use a brush to wash the . Allow the tire dressing to dry as Bright wheels (if so equipped) wheels if the vehicle is equipped with bright wheels. The wheel recommended by tire dressing manu- The bright wheels use a different coating coating may be damaged. facturer. process than typical aluminum alloy wheel and they are not plated wheels. These wheels are clear-coated and re- CHROME PARTS quire the following special cleaning. They Clean chrome parts regularly with a non- should be regularly washed with a soft abrasive chrome polish to maintain the sponge soaked in a lot of water. After finish. washing with water, wipe clean with a TIRE DRESSING dry, soft cloth and dry completely. When there is chemical or tire wax, or dirt such NISSAN does not recommend the use of as an antifreeze agent on the surface, tire dressings. Tire manufacturers apply a wash them with water as soon as possi- coating to the tires to help reduce dis- ble. coloration of the rubber. If a tire dressing is applied to the tires, it may react with the coating and form a compound. This CAUTION compound may come off the tire while driving and stain the vehicle paint. . The surfaces of the wheels use a If you choose to use a tire dressing, take different coating process than the following precautions: typical aluminum alloy wheels. . Use a water-based tire dressing. The Do not use aluminum alloy wheel coating on the tire dissolves more cleaners or abrasive cleaners to easily with an oil-based tire dressing. clean the wheels. Using such . Apply a light coat of tire dressing to cleaners could damage the wheel help prevent it from entering the tire surfaces. tread/grooves (where it would be

7-4 Appearance and care CLEANING INTERIOR

Occasionally remove loose dust from the AIR FRESHENERS interior trim, plastic parts and seats using CAUTION a vacuum cleaner or soft bristled brush. Most air fresheners use a solvent that could affect the vehicle interior. If you use Wipe the vinyl and leather surfaces with a . clean, soft cloth dampened in mild soap Never use benzine, thinner, or any an air freshener, take the following pre- solution, then wipe clean with a dry soft similar material. cautions: cloth. . For cleaning, use a soft cloth, . Hanging-type air fresheners can Regular care and cleaning is required in dampened with water. Never use cause permanent discoloration when order to maintain the appearance of the a rough cloth, alcohol, benzine, they contact vehicle interior surfaces. leather. thinner or any kind of solvent or Place the air freshener in a location paper towel with a chemical that allows it to hang free and not Before using any fabric protector, read cleaning agent. They will scratch contact an interior surface. the manufacturer’s recommendations. or cause discoloration to the lens. . Liquid-type air fresheners typically clip Some fabric protectors contain chemicals . Do not spray any liquid such as on the vents. These products can that may stain or bleach the seat materi- cause immediate damage and disco- al. water on the meter lens. Spraying liquid may cause the system to loration when spilled on interior sur- Use a cloth dampened only with water, to malfunction. faces. clean the meter and gauge lens. . Small dirt particles can be abra- Carefully read and follow the manufac- sive and damaging to the leather turer’s instructions before using air fresh- WARNING surfaces and should be removed eners. promptly. Do not use saddle soap, FLOOR MATS Do not use water or acidic cleaners car waxes, polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents or (hot steam cleaners) on the seat. This WARNING can damage the seat or occupant ammonia-based cleaners as they classification sensors. This can also may damage the leather’s natural affect the operation of the air bag finish. To avoid potential pedal interference system and result in serious perso- . Only use fabric protectors ap- that may result in a collision, injury nal injury. proved by NISSAN. or death: . Do not use glass or plastic cleaner . NEVER place a floor mat on top of on meter or gauge lens covers. It another floor mat in the driver may damage the lens cover. front position or install them up- side down or backwards.

Appearance and care 7-5 . Use only genuine NISSAN floor is properly positioned. mats or equivalent floor mats 3. Make sure the floor mat does not that are specifically designed for interfere with pedal operation. With use in your vehicle model and the ignition in the OFF position and model year. the shift lever in the P (Park) position, . Properly position the mats in the fully apply and release all pedals. The floorwell using the floor mat po- floor mat must not interfere with sitioning hooks. See “Floor mat pedal operation or prevent the pedal installation” (P.7-6). from returning to its normal position. It is recommended you see a NISSAN . Make sure the floor mat does not dealer for details about installing the interfere with pedal operation. floor mats in your vehicle. . Periodically check the floor mats to make sure they are properly installed. JVA0034X . After cleaning the vehicle interior, Front (example) check the floor mats to make Floor mat installation sure they are properly installed. Your vehicle is equipped with floor mat positioning hook(s). The number and The use of genuine NISSAN floor mats can shape of the floor mat positioning hooks extend the life of your vehicle carpet and for each seating position varies depend- make it easier to clean the interior. Mats ing on the vehicle. should be maintained with regular cleaning and replaced if they become exces- When installing genuine NISSAN floor sively worn. mats, follow the installation instructions provided with the floor mat and the following: 1. Position the floor mat in the floorwell so that the mat grommet holes are aligned with the hook(s). 2. Secure the grommet holes into the hook(s) and ensure that the floor mat 7-6 Appearance and care CORROSION PROTECTION

the seat belts, since these materials MOST COMMON FACTORS CON- may severely weaken the seat belt TRIBUTING TO VEHICLE CORRO- webbing. SION . The accumulation of moisture-retain- ing dirt and debris in body panel sections, cavities, and other areas. . Damage to paint and other protective coatings caused by gravel and stone chips or minor traffic accidents. ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS INFLU- ENCE THE RATE OF CORROSION Moisture SAI0052 Accumulation of sand, dirt and water on Bracket positions the vehicle body underside can acceler- The illustration shows the location of the ate corrosion. Wet floor coverings will not floor mat positioning hooks. dry completely inside the vehicle, and should be removed for drying to avoid SEAT BELTS floor panel corrosion. The seat belts can be cleaned by wiping them with a sponge dampened in a mild Relative humidity soap solution. Allow the belts to dry Corrosion will be accelerated in areas of completely before using them. high relative humidity, especially those See “Seat belts” (P.1-20). areas where the temperatures stay above freezing where atmospheric pollution exists, or where road salt is used. WARNING

Do not allow wet seat belts to roll up in the retractor. NEVER use bleach, dye, or chemical solvents to clean

Appearance and care 7-7 Temperature cleaner. A temperature increase will accelerate . Never allow water or other liquids the rate of corrosion to those parts which to come in contact with electronic are not well ventilated. components inside the vehicle as Air pollution this may damage them. Industrial pollution, the presence of salt in Chemicals used for road surface deicing the air in coastal areas, or heavy road salt are extremely corrosive. They accelerate use will accelerate the corrosion process. corrosion and deterioration of underbody Road salt will also accelerate the disin- components such as the exhaust system, tegration of paint surfaces. fuel and brake lines, brake cables, floor TO PROTECT YOUR VEHICLE FROM pan and fenders. CORROSION In winter, the underbody must be . Wash and wax your vehicle often to cleaned periodically. keep the vehicle clean. For additional protection against rust and . Always check for minor damage to the corrosion, which may be required in some paint and repair it as soon as possible. areas, it is recommended you consult a . Keep drain holes at the bottom of the NISSAN dealer. doors open to avoid water accumulation. . Check the underbody for accumulation of sand, dirt or salt. If present, wash with water as soon as possible.

CAUTION

. NEVER remove dirt, sand or other debris from the passenger compartment by washing it out with a hose. Remove dirt with a vacuum 7-8 Appearance and care 8 Do-it-yourself

Maintenance precautions ...... 8-2 Windshield wiper blades ...... 8-16 Engine compartment check locations ...... 8-3 Cleaning ...... 8-16 VK56VD engine ...... 8-3 Replacing ...... 8-16 Engine cooling system ...... 8-4 Rear window wiper blades ...... 8-17 Checking engine coolant level ...... 8-5 Brakes ...... 8-17 Changing engine coolant...... 8-5 Self-adjusting brakes ...... 8-17 Engine oil ...... 8-6 Brake pad wear warning...... 8-17 Checking engine oil level ...... 8-6 Brake booster...... 8-17 Changing engine oil and filter ...... 8-6 Fuses ...... 8-18 Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) ...... 8-8 Engine compartment ...... 8-18 Power steering fluid ...... 8-8 Passenger compartment ...... 8-20 Brake fluid ...... 8-9 Intelligent Key battery replacement ...... 8-21 Window washer fluid ...... 8-10 Lights ...... 8-24 Battery ...... 8-11 Headlights ...... 8-24 Jump starting...... 8-13 Exterior and interior lights ...... 8-26 Variable voltage control system ...... 8-13 Wheels and tires ...... 8-30 Drive belts ...... 8-13 Tire pressure ...... 8-30 Spark plugs...... 8-14 Tire labeling ...... 8-34 Replacing spark plugs...... 8-14 Types of tires ...... 8-36 Air cleaner ...... 8-15 Tire chains...... 8-37 Changing wheels and tires ...... 8-37 MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS

When performing any inspection or main- moving parts. . Because the fuel lines are under tenance work on your vehicle, always . It is advisable to secure or re- high pressure even when the take care to prevent serious accidental move any loose clothing and engine is off, it is recommended injury to yourself or damage to the remove any jewelry, such as you visit a NISSAN dealer for vehicle. The following are general precau- rings, watches, etc. before work- service of the fuel filter or fuel tions which should be closely observed. ing on your vehicle. lines. . Always wear eye protection WARNING whenever you work on your vehicle. CAUTION . Park the vehicle on a level sur- . If you must run the engine in an face, apply the parking brake enclosed space such as a garage, . Do not work under the hood while securely and block the wheels to be sure there is proper ventilation the engine is hot. Turn the engine prevent the vehicle from moving. for exhaust gases to escape. off and wait until it cools down. Move the shift lever to P (Park). . Never get under the vehicle while . Avoid direct contact with used . Be sure the ignition switch is in it is supported only by a jack. If it engine oil and coolant. Impro- the OFF or LOCK position when is necessary to work under the perly disposed engine oil, coolant, performing any parts replace- vehicle, support it with safety and/or other vehicle fluids can ment or repairs. stands. damage the environment. Always . Never connect or disconnect the . Keep smoking materials, flame conform to local regulations for battery or any transistorized and sparks away from fuel tank disposal of vehicle fluid. component while the ignition and the battery. This “8. Do-it-yourself” section gives in- switch is in the ON position. . Your vehicle is equipped with an structions regarding only those items . Never leave the engine or auto- automatic engine cooling fan. It which are relatively easy for an owner to matic transmission related com- may come on at any time without perform. ponent harnesses disconnected warning, even if the ignition key is while the ignition switch is in the in the OFF position and the en- A genuine NISSAN Service Manual is also ON position. gine is not running. To avoid available. (See “Owner’s Manual/Service . If you must work with the engine injury, always disconnect the ne- Manual order information” (P.10-34).) running, keep your hands, cloth- gative battery cable before work- You should be aware that incomplete or ing, hair and tools away from ing near the fan. improper servicing may result in operat- moving fans, belts and any other ing difficulties or excessive emissions, and 8-2 Do-it-yourself ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK LOCATIONS could affect your warranty coverage. If in doubt about any servicing, it is recommended you have it done by a NISSAN dealer.

JVC0965X VK56VD ENGINE 7. Fuse/fusible link holder 1. Window washer fluid reservoir 8. Battery 2. Fuse/fusible link holder 9. Radiator filler cap 3. Engine oil dipstick 10. Engine coolant reservoir 4. Power steering fluid reservoir 11. Drive belts 5. Engine oil filler cap 12. Air cleaner 6. Brake fluid reservoir

Do-it-yourself 8-3 ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM

The engine cooling system is filled at the Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or factory with a pre-diluted mixture of 50% CAUTION equivalent may damage the en- Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/ gine cooling system. Coolant (blue) and 50% water to provide . Never use any cooling system . The life expectancy of the fac- year-round anti-freeze and coolant pro- additives such as radiator sealer. tory-fill coolant is 105,000 miles tection. The antifreeze solution contains Additives may clog the cooling (168,000 km) or 7 years. Mixing rust and corrosion inhibitors. Additional system and cause damage to any other type of coolant other engine cooling system additives are not the engine, transmission and/or than Genuine NISSAN Long Life necessary. cooling system. Antifreeze/Coolant (blue), includ- . When adding or replacing cooling Genuine NISSAN Long Life WARNING ant, be sure to use only Genuine Antifreeze/Coolant (green), or NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/ the use of non-distilled water will reduce the life expectancy of the . Never remove the radiator or Coolant (blue) or equivalent. Gen- factory-fill coolant. Refer to the coolant reservoir cap when the uine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/ “9. Maintenance and schedules” engine is hot. Wait until the en- Coolant (blue) is pre-diluted to section of this manual for more gine and radiator cool down. provide antifreeze protection to details. Serious burns could be caused −34°F (−37°C). If additional freeze by high pressure fluid escaping protection is needed due to from the radiator. See precau- weather where you operate your tions in “If your vehicle overheats” vehicle, add Genuine NISSAN Long (P.6-14). Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) concentrate following the direc- . The radiator is equipped with a tions on the container. If an pressure type radiator cap. To equivalent coolant other than prevent engine damage, use only Genuine NISSAN Long Life Anti- a genuine NISSAN radiator cap. freeze/Coolant (blue) is used, follow the coolant manufacturer’s instructions to maintain minimum antifreeze protection to −34°F (−37°C). The use of other types of coolant solutions other than Genuine NISSAN Long Life

8-4 Do-it-yourself mended you visit a NISSAN dealer for Engine coolant must be disposed of this service. properly. Check your local regulations. CHANGING ENGINE COOLANT It is recommended that major cooling system repairs be performed by a NISSAN dealer. The service procedures can be found in the appropriate NISSAN Service Manual. Improper servicing can result in reduced heater performance and engine overheating.

JVM0733X WARNING CHECKING ENGINE COOLANT LEVEL . To avoid the danger of being Check the coolant level in the reservoir scalded, never change the cool- when the engine is cold. If the coolant ant when the engine is hot. level is below MIN , open the reservoir . Never remove the radiator cap or tank cap and add coolant up to the MAX coolant reservoir cap when the level. If the reservoir tank is empty, engine is hot. Serious burns could check the coolant level in the radiator be caused by high pressure fluid when the engine is cold. If there is escaping from the radiator. insufficient coolant in the radiator, fill the . Avoid direct skin contact with radiator with coolant up to the filler used coolant. If skin contact is opening and also add it to the reservoir made, wash thoroughly with soap tank up to the MAX level . or hand cleaner as soon as pos- Tighten the cap securely after adding sible. engine coolant. . Keep coolant out of reach of If the cooling system requires coolant children and pets. frequently, have it checked. It is recom- Do-it-yourself 8-5 ENGINE OIL

ing. Do not overfill . CHANGING ENGINE OIL AND FILTER 6. Recheck oil level with the dipstick. Vehicle set-up It is normal to add some oil between oil maintenance intervals or during the 1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and break-in period, depending on the se- apply the parking brake. verity of operating conditions. 2. Run the engine until it reaches operating temperature. 3. Turn the engine off and wait more CAUTION than 15 minutes. 4. Raise and support the vehicle using a Oil level should be checked regularly. suitable floor jack and safety jack Operating the engine with an insuffi- stands. cient amount of oil can damage the . engine, and such damage is not Place the safety jack stands under JVM0728X covered by warranty. the vehicle jack-up points. . A suitable adapter should be at- CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL tached to the jack stand saddle. 1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and 5. Remove the engine undercover. apply the parking brake. . Remove the bolts that hold the 2. Run the engine until it reaches oper- undercover in place. ating temperature. 3. Turn off the engine. Wait more than 15 minutes for the oil to drain back CAUTION into the oil pan. 4. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean. Make sure the correct lifting and support points are used to avoid Reinsert it all the way. vehicle damage. 5. Remove the dipstick again and check the oil level. It should be within the range . If the oil level is below , remove the oil filler cap and pour recommended oil through the open-

8-6 Do-it-yourself . Check your local regulations. Do not use excessive force. 4. (Perform steps 4 to 7 only when the 9. Refill engine with recommended oil engine oil filter change is needed.) and install the oil filler cap securely. Loosen the oil filter with an oil filter wrench. Remove the oil filter by turning it by hand. CAUTION 5. Wipe the engine oil filter mounting The dipstick must be inserted in surface with a clean rag. place to prevent oil spillage from the dipstick hole while filling the CAUTION engine with oil.

Be sure to remove any old rubber See “Capacities and recommended gasket remaining on the mounting fluids/lubricants” (P.10-2) for drain SDI2528 surface of the engine. Failure to do and refill capacity. The drain and refill so could lead to engine damage. capacity depends on the oil tempera- Engine oil and filter ture and drain time. Use these specifications for reference only. Always 1. Place a large drain pan under the 6. Coat the gasket on the new filter with use the dipstick to determine the drain plug. clean engine oil. proper amount of oil in the engine. 2. Remove the oil filler cap. 7. Screw in the oil filter clockwise until a 10. Start the engine and check for leak- 3. Remove the drain plug with a slight resistance is felt, then tighten age around the drain plug and the oil wrench and completely drain the oil. additionally more than 2/3 turn. filter. Correct as required. Oil filter tightening torque: 11 to 15 ft-lb 11. Turn the engine off and wait more CAUTION (15 to 21 N·m) than 15 minutes. Check the oil level with the dipstick. Add engine oil if Be careful not to burn yourself, as 8. Clean and re-install the drain plug necessary. the engine oil is hot. with a new washer. Securely tighten the drain plug with a wrench. . Waste oil must be disposed of Drain plug tightening torque: properly. 22 to 29 ft-lb (29 to 39 N·m) Do-it-yourself 8-7 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID (ATF) POWER STEERING FLUID

After the operation When checking or replacement is required, we recommend a NISSAN dealer 1. Install the engine undercover into for servicing. position using the bolts. 2. Lower the vehicle carefully to the ground. CAUTION 3. Dispose of waste oil and filter properly. . It is recommended that you use only Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF. WARNING Do not mix with other fluids. . Using automatic transmission . Prolonged and repeated contact fluid (ATF) other than Genuine with used engine oil may cause NISSAN Matic S ATF may cause skin cancer. deterioration in driveability and . Try to avoid direct skin contact automatic transmission durabil- SDI1765A with used oil. If skin contact is ity, and may damage the auto- made, wash thoroughly with soap matic transmission. Damage Check the fluid level in the reservoir. or hand cleaner as soon as pos- caused by use of fluids other than The fluid level should be checked using sible. as recommended is not covered the HOT range ( : HOT MAX., : HOT MIN.) . Keep used engine oil out of reach by the NISSAN new vehicle limited at fluid temperatures of 122 to 176°F (50 to of children. warranty. 80°C) or using the COLD range ( : COLD MAX., : COLD MIN.) at fluid temperatures of 32 to 86°F (0 to 30°C). If the fluid is below the MIN line, add Genuine NISSAN PSF or equivalent. Re- move the cap and fill through the opening.

8-8 Do-it-yourself BRAKE FLUID

For further brake fluid specification infor- . Do not spill the fluid on painted mation, see “Capacities and recom- CAUTION surfaces. This will damage the mended fluids/lubricants” (P.10-2). paint. If fluid is spilled, wash the . Do not overfill. surface with water. . Use Genuine NISSAN PSF or WARNING equivalent. . Use only new fluid from a sealed container. Old, inferior or contaminated fluid may damage the brake system. The use of improper fluids can damage the brake system and affect the vehicle’s stopping ability. . Be sure to clean the filler cap before removing. . Brake fluid is poisonous and should be stored carefully in marked containers out of the reach of children.

CAUTION

. Do not add brake fluid with the ignition switch in the ON position or the engine running. Doing so could make the brake fluid overfill when the ignition switch is turned off.

Do-it-yourself 8-9 WINDOW WASHER FLUID

NOTE: When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position after adding brake fluid up to the MAX line in the reservoir, the brake fluid decreases below the MAX line . This is normal. If fluid must be added frequently, the system should be checked. It is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

SDI2513 SDI2517 Check the fluid level in the reservoir. If the fluid is below the MIN line or the brake WARNING warning light comes on, add Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid or equivalent DOT 3 fluid up to the MAX line Antifreeze is poisonous and should . be stored carefully in marked containers out of the reach of children To add brake fluid: and pets. 1. Be sure the ignition switch is in the OFF or LOCK position. Fill the window washer fluid reservoir 2. Depress and release the foot brake periodically. Add window washer fluid pedal more than 40 times. when the low window washer fluid warn- 3. Open the reservoir filler cap and add ing illuminates. brake fluid up to the MAX line . (See To fill the window washer fluid reservoir, “Capacities and recommended fluids/ lift the cap off the reservoir tank and pour lubricants” (P.10-2) for the recom- the window washer fluid into the tank mended types of brake fluid.) opening. 8-10 Do-it-yourself BATTERY

. Keep the battery surface clean and Add a washer solvent to the washer for not use the window washer re- dry. Clean the battery with a solution better cleaning. In the winter season, add servoir tank to mix the washer of baking soda and water. a windshield washer antifreeze. Follow fluid concentrate and water. the manufacturer’s instructions for the . Make certain the terminal connec- mixture ratio. tions are clean and securely tightened. Refill the reservoir more frequently when . If the vehicle is not to be used for 30 driving conditions require an increased days or longer, disconnect the nega- amount of window washer fluid. tive (−) battery terminal cable to pre- Recommended fluid is Genuine NISSAN vent discharging it. Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner NOTE: & Antifreeze or equivalent. Care should be taken to avoid situations that can lead to potential battery discharge and potential no-start condi- CAUTION tions such as: 1. Installation or extended use of elec- . Do not substitute engine anti- tronic accessories that consume freeze coolant for window battery power when the engine is washer solution. This may result not running (Phone chargers, GPS, in damage to the paint. DVD players, etc.) . Do not fill the window washer 2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/ reservoir tank with washer fluid or only driven short distances. concentrates at full strength. Some methyl alcohol based In these cases, the battery may need to washer fluid concentrates may be charged to maintain battery health. permanently stain the grille if spilled while filling the window WARNING washer reservoir tank. . Pre-mix washer fluid concen- . Do not expose the battery to trates with water to the manu- flames or electrical sparks. Hy- facturer’s recommended levels drogen gas generated by the before pouring the fluid into the battery is explosive. Do not allow window washer reservoir tank. Do battery fluid to contact your skin, Do-it-yourself 8-11 eyes, fabrics, or painted surfaces. After touching a battery or battery cap, do not touch or rub your eyes. Thoroughly wash your hands. If the acid contacts your eyes, skin or clothing, immediately flush with water for at least 15 minutes and seek medical attention. . Do not operate the vehicle if the fluid in the battery is low. Low battery fluid can cause a higher load on the battery which can generate heat, reduce battery life, and in some cases lead to an DI0137MA SDI1480C explosion. Check the fluid level in each cell (Remove 1. Remove the cell plugs . . When working on or near a bat- the battery cover if it is necessary). It 2. Add distilled water up to the UPPER tery, always wear suitable eye should be between the UPPER LEVEL LEVEL line. protection and remove all jew- and LOWER LEVEL lines. elry. If the side of the battery is not clear, If it is necessary to add fluid, add only check the distilled water level by . Battery posts, terminals and re- distilled water to bring the level to the looking directly above the cell; the lated accessories contain lead indicator in each filler opening. Do not condition indicates OK and the and lead compounds. Wash overfill. conditions needs more to be added. hands after handling. 3. Tighten cell plugs . . Keep the battery out of the reach of children. Vehicles operated in high temperatures or under severe conditions require frequent checks of the battery fluid level.

8-12 Do-it-yourself VARIABLE VOLTAGE CONTROL SYSTEM DRIVE BELTS

JUMP STARTING If jump starting is necessary, see “Jump CAUTION starting” (P.6-12). If the engine does not start by jump starting, the battery may . Do not ground accessories di- have to be replaced. It is recommended rectly to the battery terminal. you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. Doing so will bypass the variable voltage control system and the vehicle battery may not charge completely. . Use electrical accessories with the engine running to avoid discharging the vehicle battery.

The variable voltage control system mea- SDI2533 sures the amount of electrical discharge from the battery and controls voltage 1. Power steering fluid pump generated by the generator. 2. Water pump 3. Alternator 4. Crankshaft pulley 5. Air conditioner compressor

WARNING

Be sure the ignition switch is in the OFF or LOCK position before servicing drive belts. The engine could rotate unexpectedly.

1. Visually inspect each belt for signs of unusual wear, cuts, fraying or looseness. If the belt is in poor condition or Do-it-yourself 8-13 SPARK PLUGS

loose, have it replaced or adjusted. It is recommended you visit a NISSAN WARNING dealer for this service. 2. Have the belts checked regularly for Be sure the engine and the ignition condition and tension in accordance switch are off and that the parking with the maintenance schedule brake is engaged securely. shown in the “9. Maintenance and schedules” section. CAUTION

Be sure to use the correct socket to remove the spark plugs. An incorrect socket can damage the spark plugs. SDI2020 REPLACING SPARK PLUGS If replacement is required, it is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. Iridium-tipped spark plugs It is not necessary to replace the iridium- tipped spark plugs as frequently as the conventional type spark plugs since they will last much longer. Follow the maintenance schedule shown in the “9. Main- tenance and schedules” section, but do not reuse them by cleaning or regapping. Always replace spark plugs with recommended or equivalent ones.

8-14 Do-it-yourself AIR CLEANER

stops flame if the engine backfires. If it isn’t there, and the engine backfires, you could be burned. Do not drive with the air cleaner removed, and be careful when working on the engine with the air cleaner removed. . Never pour fuel into the throttle body or attempt to start the engine with the air cleaner removed. Doing so could result in serious injury.

SDI2515 To remove the filter, release the lock pins and pull the unit upward . The filter element should not be cleaned and reused. Replace it according to the maintenance schedule shown in the “9. Maintenance and schedules” section. When replacing the filter, wipe the inside of the air cleaner housing and the cover with a damp cloth.

WARNING

. Operating the engine with the air cleaner removed can cause you or others to be burned. The air cleaner not only cleans the air, it Do-it-yourself 8-15 WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES

CLEANING If your windshield is not clear after using the windshield washer or if a wiper blade chatters when running, wax or other material may be on the blade or windshield. Clean the outside of the windshield with a washer solution or a mild detergent. Your windshield is clean if beads do not form when rinsing with clear water. Clean each blade by wiping it with a cloth soaked in a washer solution or a mild detergent. Then rinse the blade with clear water. If your windshield is still not clear SDI2048 after cleaning the blades and using the wiper, replace the blades. REPLACING Worn windshield wiper blades can da- Replace the wiper blades if they are worn. CAUTION mage the windshield and impair driver 1. Pull the wiper arm. vision. . 2. Push the release tab , and then After wiper blade replacement, When a washer nozzle is clogged move the wiper blade down the wiper return the wiper arm to its original position; It is recommended you see a NISSAN arm while pushing the release tab dealer if a washer nozzle is clogged or to remove. otherwise it may be damaged any malfunction occurs. Do not attempt 3. Insert the new wiper blade onto the when the hood is opened. to clean the nozzle using a needle or a wiper arm until a click sounds. . Make sure the wiper blades con- pin. Doing so may damage the nozzle. 4. Rotate the wiper blade so the dimple tact the glass; otherwise the arm is in the groove. may be damaged from wind pressure.

8-16 Do-it-yourself REAR WINDOW WIPER BLADES BRAKES

It is recommended you visit a NISSAN If the brakes do not operate properly, Under some driving or climate conditions, dealer if checking or replacement is have the brakes checked. It is recom- occasional brake squeak, squeal or other required. mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for noise may be heard. Occasional brake this service. noise during light to moderate stops is SELF-ADJUSTING BRAKES normal and does not affect the function or performance of the brake system. Your vehicle is equipped with self-adjusting brakes. Proper brake inspection intervals should be followed. For additional infor- The disc-type brakes self-adjust every mation, see the maintenance schedule time the brake pedal is applied. shown in the “9. Maintenance and schedules” section. WARNING BRAKE BOOSTER Check the brake booster function as Have your brake system checked if follows: the brake pedal height does not 1. With the engine off, depress and return to normal. It is recommended release the foot brake pedal more you visit a NISSAN dealer for this than 20 times. When the foot brake service. pedal movement (distance of travel) remains the same from one pedal BRAKE PAD WEAR WARNING application to the next, continue on The disc brake pads have audible wear to the next step. warnings. When a brake pad requires 2. While depressing the foot brake pedal, replacement, it will make a high pitched start the engine. scraping sound when the vehicle is in 3. With the foot brake pedal depressed, motion. This scraping sound will first stop the engine. Keep the pedal de- occur only when the brake pedal is pressed for about 30 seconds. depressed. After more wear of the brake pad, the sound will always be heard even 4. Run the engine for 1 minute without if the brake pedal is not depressed. Have depressing the foot brake pedal, then the brakes checked as soon as possible if turn it off. Depress the foot brake the wear warning sound is heard. pedal several times. The pedal travel distance will decrease gradually with Do-it-yourself 8-17 FUSES

each depression as the hydraulic ENGINE COMPARTMENT pressure decreases. If the brakes do not operate properly, have the brakes checked. It is recom- WARNING mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for repair. Never use a fuse of a higher or lower amperage rating than that specified on the fuse box cover. This could damage the electrical system or electronic control units or cause a fire.

If any electrical equipment does not operate, check for an open fuse. SDI2518 1. Be sure the ignition switch is pushed to the OFF or LOCK position and the headlight switch is turned to OFF. 2. Open the engine hood and remove the cover on the battery. 3. Remove the fuse/fusible link holder cover , or . 4. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller.

SDI2532

8-18 Do-it-yourself 5. If the fuse is open , replace it with a new fuse . Spare fuses are stored in the passenger compartment fuse box. 6. If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical system checked and repaired. It is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. Fusible links If any electrical equipment does not operate and fuses are in good condition, check the fusible links. If any of these fusible links are melted, replace only with genuine NISSAN parts. SDI1753 Type A (if so equipped)

SDI1754 Type B (if so equipped)

Do-it-yourself 8-19 JVM0200X SDI1754 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT headlight switch is turned to OFF. 4. If the fuse is open, replace it with a new fuse. 2. Open the fuse box lid. 5. If a new fuse also opens, have the 3. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller WARNING electrical system checked and re- . paired. It is recommended you visit a Never use a fuse of a higher or lower NISSAN dealer for this service. Spare amperage rating than that specified fuses are stored in the fuse box. on the fuse box cover. This could damage the electrical system or electronic control units or cause a fire.

If any electrical equipment does not operate, check for an open fuse. 1. Be sure the ignition switch is pushed to the OFF or LOCK position and the

8-20 Do-it-yourself INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY REPLACEMENT

fuse switch and check for an open fuse. NOTE: CAUTION If the extended storage fuse switch malfunctions or if the fuse is open, it is Be careful not to allow children to not necessary to replace the switch. In swallow the battery and removed this case, remove the extended storage parts. fuse switch and replace it with a new fuse of the same rating. How to remove the extended storage fuse switch: 1. To remove the extended storage fuse switch, be sure the ignition switch is in the OFF or LOCK position. SDI2704 2. Be sure the headlight switch is in the OFF position. Extended storage fuse switch (if so 3. Remove the fuse box cover. equipped) 4. Pinch the locking tabs found on To reduce battery drain, the extended each side of the storage fuse switch. storage fuse switch comes from the factory switched off. Prior to delivery of 5. Pull the storage fuse switch straight your vehicle, the switch is pushed in out from the fuse box . (switched on) and should always remain on. If the extended storage fuse switch is not pushed in (switched on), the “SHIPPING MODE ON, PUSH STORAGE FUSE” warning may appear on the vehicle information display (if so equipped). See “Vehicle information display” (P.2-20). If any electrical equipment does not operate, remove the extended storage Do-it-yourself 8-21 Use a cloth to protect the casing. 3. Replace the battery with a new one. Recommended battery: CR2025 or equivalent. . Do not touch the internal circuit and electric terminals as it could cause a malfunction. . Hold the battery by the edges. Holding the battery across the contact points will seriously deplete the storage capacity. . Make sure that the + side faces the bottom of the case. SDI2452 4. Align the tips of the upper and lower parts , and then push them together until it is securely closed . 5. Push the buttons two or three times to check its operation. If you need any assistance for replacement, it is recommended you visit a SDI2451 NISSAN dealer for this service. Replace the battery as follows: FCC Notice: 1. Release the lock knob at the back of For USA: the Intelligent Key and remove the This device complies with Part 15 of the mechanical key. FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the 2. Insert a small screwdriver into the slit following two conditions: (1) This device of the corner and twist it to separate may not cause harmful interference, the upper part from the lower part. and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including inter- 8-22 Do-it-yourself ference that may cause undesired operation. Note: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. For Canada: This device complies with Industry Ca- nada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

Do-it-yourself 8-23 LIGHTS

1. Front turn signal light 2. Front side marker light 3. Front map light 4. Headlight (high beam) 5. Front parking light/Daytime running light 6. Front fog light (if so equipped) 7. Headlight (low-beam) 8. Puddle light (if so equipped) 9. Step light (if so equipped) 10. Side turn signal light 11. Tail light 12. Cargo light 13. High-mounted stop light 14. Rear personal light 15. Rear side marker light 16. Stop light 17. Rear turn signal light 18. Back-up light 19. License plate light HEADLIGHTS Fog may temporarily form inside the lens of the exterior lights in the rain or in a car wash. A temperature difference between the inside and the outside of the lens causes the fog. This is not a malfunction. JVM0727X If large drops of water collect inside the lens, it is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

8-24 Do-it-yourself Replacing recommended you visit a NISSAN LED headlight: dealer for this service. If replacement is required, it is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer for this Use the same number and wattage as service. originally installed as shown in the chart. Halogen headlight bulb: The headlight (high-beam) is a semi- sealed beam type which uses a replace- able headlight (halogen) bulb.

CAUTION

JVM0823X . Do not leave the bulb out of the headlight reflector for a long The high-beam headlight can be replaced period of time. Dust, moisture, from inside the engine compartment smoke, etc. entering the head- without removing the headlight assem- light body may affect bulb per- bly. formance. . High pressure halogen gas is sealed inside the halogen bulb. The bulb may break if the glass envelope is scratched or the bulb is dropped. . Only touch the plastic base when handling the bulb. Never touch the glass envelope. . Aiming is not necessary after replacing the bulb. When aiming adjustment is necessary, it is

Do-it-yourself 8-25 EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR LIGHTS NOTE: Always check with the Parts Depart- ment at a NISSAN dealer for the latest Item Wattage (W) Bulb No. information about parts. Headlight

High-beam (Halogen) 65 H9 Low-beam* LED — Front turn signal light 28/8 7444NA Fog light (if so equipped) 35 H8 Front parking light* LED — Front side marker light* LED — Side turn signal light* LED — Rear combination light tail* LED — back-up 16 W16W stop 21 W21W side marker* LED — turn signal 21 WY21W License plate light 5 W5W Puddle light* (if so equipped) LED — Map light* LED — Rear personal light 8 — Cargo light 8 — Vanity mirror light 1.8 — Step light (if so equipped) 5 — Footwell light* (if so equipped) 1.4 — Glove box light* 1.4 — High-mounted stop light* LED —

*: It is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer for replacement.

8-26 Do-it-yourself Replacement procedures All other lights are either type A, B, C, D, E or F. When replacing a bulb, first remove the lens and/or cover.

JVM0825X Front turn signal light

SDI1679

Do-it-yourself 8-27 SDI2628 JVM0335X SDI2524 Front fog light (if so equipped) Rear combination light (turn signal and stop) Back-up light 1. Remove the screws and the bolts 1. Remove the cover by pulling it back- Remove the cover on the inside of the using a suitable tool. ward. liftgate. 2. Remove the clips and remove the 2. Remove the bolts , and gradually pry the wheel house inner cover . rear combination light whole unit outward.

8-28 Do-it-yourself SDI2525 SDI1729 SDI2032 License plate light Cargo light Vanity mirror light

SDI2031 SDI2277 Rear personal light Step light (if so equipped) Do-it-yourself 8-29 WHEELS AND TIRES

If you have a flat tire, see “Flat tire” (P.6- Tire inflation pressure outside the vehicle for inflating the 3). Check the pressure of the tires tires to the recommended COLD TIRE PRESSURE (including the spare) often and al- tire pressure. (See “TPMS with Easy Fill Tire Alert” (P.5-8).) Tire Pressure Monitoring System ways prior to long distance trips. (TPMS) The recommended tire pressure Incorrect tire pressure, including specifications are shown on the This vehicle is equipped with the Tire under inflation, may adversely Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). It Tire and Loading Information label affect tire life and vehicle hand- monitors tire pressure of all tires except under the “Cold Tire Pressure” ling. the spare. When the low tire pressure heading. The Tire and Loading In- warning light is lit and the CHECK TIRE formation label is affixed to the WARNING PRESSURE warning appears in the vehicle driver side center pillar. Tire pres- information display, one or more of your sures should be checked regularly tires is significantly under-inflated. . Improperly inflated tires can because: The TPMS will activate only when the fail suddenly and cause an vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 MPH . Most tires naturally lose air over accident. (25 km/h). Also, this system may not time. . The Gross Vehicle Weight detect a sudden drop in tire pressure . Tires can lose air suddenly when (for example, a flat tire while driving). rating (GVWR) is located on driven over potholes or other the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. cer- For more details, see “Low tire pressure objects or if the vehicle strikes warning light” (P.2-15), “Tire Pressure Mon- tification label. The vehicle itoring System (TPMS)” (P.5-5) and “Tire a curb while parking. weight capacity is indicated Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) ” (P.6- The tire pressures should be on the Tire and Loading In- 3). checked when the tires are cold. formation label. Do not load The tires are considered COLD after your vehicle beyond this ca- the vehicle has been parked for 3 or pacity. Overloading your ve- more hours, or driven less than 1 hicle may result in reduced mile (1.6 km) at moderate speeds. tire life, unsafe operating TPMS with Easy Fill Tire Alert pro- conditions due to premature vides visual and audible signals tire failure, or unfavorable 8-30 Do-it-yourself handling characteristics and could also lead to a serious accident. Loading beyond the specified capacity may also result in failure of other vehicle components. . Before taking a long trip, or whenever you heavily load your vehicle, use a tire pressure gauge to ensure that the tire pressures are at the specified level. . For additional information regarding tires, refer to “Im- portant Tire Safety Informa- tion” (US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in the Warranty Information Book- let.

Do-it-yourself 8-31 Cold tire pressure: Inflate the tires to this pressure when the tires are cold. Tires are considered COLD after the vehicle has been parked for 3 or more hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) at moderate speeds. The recommended cold tire inflation is set by the manufacturer to provide the best balance of tire wear, vehicle handling, driveability, tire noise, etc., up to the vehicle’s GVWR. Tire size — see “Tire labeling” (P.8-34). Spare tire size or compact spare tire size (if so

SDI2496 equipped) Tire and Loading Information label hicle loading information” Seating capacity: The max- (P.10-13). imum number of occu- Original size: The size of pants that can be seated the tires originally installed in the vehicle. on the vehicle at the fac- Vehicle load limit: See “Ve- tory.

8-32 Do-it-yourself 3. Remove the gauge. COLD 4. Read the tire pressure on the TIRE IN- gauge stem and compare it to SIZE FLATION the specification shown on the PRES- Tire and Loading Information SURE label. 265/70R18 240 kPa, 5. Add air to the tire as needed. If FRONT 116H 35 PSI too much air is added, press the ORIGI- P275/60R20 240 kPa, core of the valve stem briefly NAL 114H 35 PSI with the tip of the gauge stem to TIRE P275/50R22 240 kPa, release pressure. Recheck the 111H 35 PSI pressure and add or release air SDI1949 as needed. 265/70R18 240 kPa, 116H 35 PSI Checking the tire pressure 6. Install the valve stem cap. REAR 240 kPa, 1. Remove the valve stem cap from ORIGI- P275/60R20 7. Check the pressure of all other 35 PSI the tire. tires, including the spare. NAL 114H TIRE 240 kPa, 2. Press the pressure gauge P275/50R22 35 PSI squarely onto the valve stem. 111H Do not press too hard or force 265/70R18 240 kPa, the valve stem sideways, or air 116H 35 PSI will escape. If the hissing sound SPARE 265/70R18 350 kPa, of air escaping from the tire is TIRE 116M 51 PSI heard while checking the pres- 275/60R20 240 kPa, sure, reposition the gauge to 115M 35 PSI eliminate this leakage.

Do-it-yourself 8-33 height to width. 4. R: The “R” stands for radial. 5. Two-digit number (16): This number is the wheel or rim diameter in inches. 6. Two- or three-digit number (94): This number is the tire’s load index. It is a measurement of how much weight each tire can support. You may not find this information on all tires because SDI1575 SDI1606 it is not required by law. Example Example 7. H: Tire speed rating. You should TIRE LABELING Tire size (example: not drive the vehicle faster than Federal law requires tire manufac- P215/60R16 94H) the tire speed rating. turers to place standardized infor- 1. P: The “P” indicates the tire is mation on the sidewall of all tires. designed for passenger vehicles. This information identifies and de- (Not all tires have this informa- scribes the fundamental character- tion.) istics of the tire and also provides 2. Three-digit number (215): This the tire identification number (TIN) number gives the width in milli- for safety standard certification. meters of the tire from sidewall The TIN can be used to identify edge to sidewall edge. the tire in case of a recall. 3. Two-digit number (60): This number, known as the aspect ratio, gives the tire’s ratio of

8-34 Do-it-yourself 3. Two-digit code: Tire size maximum permissible in- 4. Three-digit code: Tire type code flation pressure. (Optional) Maximum load rating 5. Four numbers represent the This number indicates the week and year the tire was built. maximum load in kilo- For example, the numbers 3103 grams and pounds that means the 31st week of 2003. If can be carried by the tire. these numbers are missing, then When replacing the tires on look on the other sidewall of the the vehicle, always use a tire. tire that has the same load Tire ply composition and rating as the factory installed tire. JVM0694X material Term of “tubeless” or “tube Example The number of layers or TIN (Tire Identification plies of rubber-coated fab- type” Number) for a new tire ric in the tire. Indicates whether the tire (example: DOT XX XX XXX Tire manufacturers also requires an inner tube XXXX) must indicate the materials (“tube type”) or not (“tubeless”). 1. DOT: Abbreviation for the “De- in the tire, which include partment of Transportation”. steel, nylon, polyester, and The word “radial” The symbol can be placed others. The word “radial” is shown, above, below or to the left or Maximum permissible infla- if the tire has radial struc- right of the Tire Identification tion pressure ture. Number. This number is the greatest Manufacturer or brand 2. Two-digit code: Manufacturer’s amount of air pressure name identification mark that should be put in the Manufacturer or brand tire. Do not exceed the name is shown.

Do-it-yourself 8-35 Other tire-related terminology: . Replacement tires may have a Summer tires In addition to the many terms that lower speed rating than the fac- NISSAN specifies summer tires on some are defined throughout this sec- tory equipped tires, and may not models to provide superior performance match the potential maximum on dry roads. Summer tire performance is tion, Intended Outboard Sidewall is vehicle speed. Never exceed the substantially reduced in snow and ice. (1) the sidewall that contains a maximum speed rating of the Summer tires do not have the tire trac- whitewall, bears white lettering or tire. tion rating M&S on the tire sidewall. bears manufacturer, brand and/or . Replacing tires with those not If you plan to operate your vehicle in model name molding that is higher originally specified by NISSAN snowy or icy conditions, NISSAN recom- or deeper than the same molding could affect the proper operation mends the use of SNOW tires or ALL on the other sidewall of the tire, or of the TPMS. SEASON tires on all four wheels. . (2) the outward facing sidewall of For additional information re- Snow tires an asymmetrical tire that has a garding tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety Information” (US) or If snow tires are needed, it is necessary to particular side that must always “Tire Safety Information” (Cana- select tires equivalent in size and load face outward when mounted on a da) in the Warranty Information rating to the original equipment tires. If vehicle. Booklet. you do not, it can adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle. TYPES OF TIRES All season tires Generally, snow tires will have lower speed ratings than factory equipped tires WARNING NISSAN specifies all season tires on some and may not match the potential max- models to provide good performance all imum vehicle speed. Never exceed the year, including snowy and icy road con- . When changing or replacing tires, maximum speed rating of the tire. ditions. All Season tires are identified by be sure all four tires are of the ALL SEASON and/or M&S (Mud and Snow) If you install snow tires, they must be the same type (Example: Summer, All same size, brand, construction and tread on the tire sidewall. Snow tires have Season or Snow) and construc- better snow traction than All Season tires pattern on all four wheels. tion. A NISSAN dealer may be able and may be more appropriate in some For additional traction on icy roads, to help you with information areas. studded tires may be used. However, about tire type, size, speed rating some U.S. states and Canadian provinces and availability. prohibit their use. Check local, state and provincial laws before installing studded

8-36 Do-it-yourself tires. Skid and traction capabilities of addition, drive at a reduced speed. Other- studded snow tires, on wet or dry sur- wise, your vehicle may be damaged and/ faces, may be poorer than that of non- or vehicle handling and performance may studded snow tires. be adversely affected. TIRE CHAINS Tire chains must be installed only on Use of tire chains may be prohibited the rear wheels and not on the front according to location. Check the local wheels. laws before installing tire chains. When Never install tire chains on the full-size installing tire chains, make sure they are temporary use only spare tire (if so the proper size for the tires on your equipped). vehicle and are installed according to Do not use tire chains on dry roads. the chain manufacturer’s suggestions. Driving with tire chains in such conditions Use only SAE Class S chains. Class “S” can cause damage to the various me- chains are used on vehicles with re- chanisms of the vehicle due to some SDI1662 stricted tire to vehicle clearance. Vehicles overstress. that can use Class “S” chains are designed CHANGING WHEELS AND TIRES to meet the SAE standard minimum clearances between the tire and the Tire rotation closest vehicle suspension or body com- NISSAN recommends rotating the ponent required to accommodate the use of a winter traction device (tire chains tires every 7,500 miles (12,000 km). or cables). The minimum clearances are (See “Flat tire” (P.6-3) for tire repla- determined using the factory equipped cing procedures.) tire size. Other types may damage your As soon as possible, tighten the vehicle. Use chain tensioners when recommended by the tire chain manufac- wheel nuts to the specified torque turer to ensure a tight fit. Loose end links with a torque wrench. of the tire chain must be secured or Wheel nut tightening torque: removed to prevent the possibility of 98 ft-lb (133 N·m) whipping action damage to the fenders or underbody. If possible, avoid fully load- The wheel nuts must be kept ing your vehicle when using tire chains. In tightened to the specification at Do-it-yourself 8-37 all times. It is recommended that be replaced. wheel nuts be tightened to the . specification at each tire rotation The original tires have built- interval. in tread wear indicators. When wear indicators are visible, the tire(s) should be WARNING replaced. . . Tires degrade with age and After rotating the tires, use. Have tires, including the check and adjust the tire spare, over 6 years old pressure. checked by a qualified tech- . Retighten the wheel nuts nician, because some tire when the vehicle has been SDI1663 damage may not be ob- driven for 600 miles (1,000 vious. Replace the tires as km) (also in cases of a flat 1. Wear indicator necessary to prevent tire tire, etc.). 2. Wear indicator location failure and possible perso- . Do not include the full-size mark nal injury. temporary use only spare Tire wear and damage . Improper service of the tire (if so equipped) in the spare tire may result in ser- tire rotation. WARNING ious personal injury. If it is . For additional information necessary to repair the regarding tires, refer to “Im- . Tires should be periodically spare tire, it is recom- portant Tire Safety Informa- inspected for wear, cracking, mended you visit a NISSAN tion” (US) or “Tire Safety bulging or objects caught in dealer for this service. Information” (Canada) in the the tread. If excessive wear, . For additional information Warranty Information Book- cracks, bulging or deep cuts regarding tires, refer to “Im- let. are found, the tire(s) should portant Tire Safety Informa- tion” (US) or “Tire Safety 8-38 Do-it-yourself Information” (Canada) in the the same size and you are only possible. It is recommended you Warranty Information Book- replacing 2 of the 4 tires, install visit a NISSAN dealer for these let. the new tires on the rear axle. services. Placing new tires on the front . Replacing tires with those not axle may cause loss of vehicle originally specified by NISSAN Replacing wheels and tires control in some driving condi- could affect the proper operation When replacing a tire, use the same size, tions and cause an accident and of the TPMS. personal injury. tread design, speed rating and load . The TPMS sensor may be da- . carrying capacity as originally equipped. If the wheels are changed for any maged if it is not handled cor- (See “Specifications” (P.10-7) for recom- reason, always replace with rectly. Be careful when handling mended types and sizes of tires and wheels which have the same off- the TPMS sensor. wheels.) set dimension. Wheels of a differ- . ent off-set could cause prema- When replacing the TPMS sensor, ture tire wear, degrade vehicle the ID registration may be re- WARNING handling characteristics and/or quired. It is recommended you interference with the brake visit a NISSAN dealer for ID registration. . The use of tires other than those discs/drums. Such interference recommended or the mixed use can lead to decreased braking . Do not use a valve stem cap that of tires of different brands, con- efficiency and/or early brake is not specified by NISSAN. The struction (bias, bias-belted or ra- pad/shoe wear. See “Wheels and valve stem cap may become dial), or tread patterns can tires” (P.10-8) for wheel off-set stuck. adversely affect the ride, braking, dimensions. . Be sure that the valve stem caps handling, ground clearance, . Since the spare tire is not are correctly fitted. Otherwise the body-to-tire clearance, tire chain equipped with the TPMS, when a valve may be clogged up with dirt clearance, speedometer calibra- spare tire is mounted or a wheel and cause a malfunction or loss tion, headlight aim and bumper is replaced, the TPMS will not of pressure. height. Some of these effects function and the low tire pressure . Do not install a damaged or may lead to accidents and could warning light will flash for ap- deformed wheel or tire even if it result in serious personal injury. proximately 1 minute. The light has been repaired. Such wheels . For Two-Wheel Drive (2WD) mod- will remain on after 1 minute. or tires could have structural els, if your vehicle was originally Have your tires replaced and/or damage and could fail without equipped with 4 tires that were TPMS system reset as soon as warning. Do-it-yourself 8-39 . The use of retread tire is not construction and tread pattern. The tire Spare tire recommended. pressure and wheel alignment should Since the spare tire is not equipped with also be checked and corrected as neces- . For additional information re- the TPMS, when a spare tire is mounted sary. It is recommended you visit a (TEMPORARY USE ONLY or conventional), garding tires, refer to “Important NISSAN dealer for this service. Tire Safety Information” (US) or the TPMS will not function. “Tire Safety Information” (Cana- Wheel balance Spare tire (FULL-SIZE TEMPORARY USE da) in the Warranty Information Unbalanced wheels may affect vehicle ONLY spare tire) (Applies ONLY to vehi- Booklet. handling and tire life. Even with regular cles equipped with P275/50R22 or use, wheels can get out of balance. P275/60R20 tires): Therefore, they should be balanced as Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) models Observe the following precautions if the required. full-size temporary use only spare tire Wheel balance service should be per- must be used, otherwise your vehicle CAUTION formed with the wheels off the vehicle. could be damaged or involved in an Spin balancing the wheels on the vehi- accident. . Always use tires of the same type, cle could lead to mechanical damage. size, brand, construction (bias, For additional information regarding tires, bias-belted or radial), and tread refer to “Important Tire Safety Informa- WARNING pattern on all four wheels. Failure tion” (US) or “Tire Safety Information” to do so may result in a circum- (Canada) in the NISSAN Warranty Infor- . The full-size temporary use only ference difference between tires mation Booklet. spare tire should be used for on the front and rear axles which emergency use. It should be re- will cause excessive tire wear and Care of wheels placed with the standard tire at may damage the transmission, See “Cleaning exterior” (P.7-2) for details the first opportunity to avoid transfer case and differential about care of the wheels. possible tire or differential da- gears. mage. . ONLY use spare tires specified for . Drive carefully while the spare tire the 4WD model. is installed. Avoid sharp turns and abrupt braking while driving. The If excessive tire wear is found, it is vehicle driving performance may recommended that all four tires be re- be affected when driving on wet placed with tires of the same size, brand, or snow covered roads.

8-40 Do-it-yourself . When the spare tire is installed, the following systems may not CAUTION work correctly. — Tire Pressure Monitoring Sys- Do not use tire chains on the spare tem (TPMS) tire. Tire chains will not fit properly and may cause damage to the vehi- — Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) cle. System . Periodically check spare tire inflation pressure. Always keep the spare tire inflated to the pressure specification shown on the Tire and Loading Information label. For Tire and Loading Information label location, see “Tire and Load- ing Information label” in the index of this manual. . With the spare tire installed do not drive your vehicle at speeds faster than 70 MPH (112 km/h). . When driving on roads covered with snow or ice, the spare tire should be used on the front wheels and original tire used on the rear wheels (drive wheels). Use tire chains only on the two rear original tires. . Do not use the spare tire on other vehicles. . Do not use more than one spare tire at the same time.

Do-it-yourself 8-41 MEMO

8-42 Do-it-yourself 9 Maintenance and schedules

Maintenance requirement ...... 9-2 Maintenance schedules ...... 9-7 General maintenance ...... 9-2 Additional maintenance items for severe Scheduled maintenance ...... 9-2 operating conditions ...... 9-7 Where to go for service ...... 9-2 Standard maintenance ...... 9-7 General maintenance ...... 9-2 Standard maintenance ...... 9-8 Explanation of maintenance items ...... 9-2 Maintenance under severe driving Explanation of scheduled maintenance items...... 9-5 conditions ...... 9-10 Emission control system maintenance...... 9-5 Maintenance log ...... 9-11 Chassis and body maintenance ...... 9-6 MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENT GENERAL MAINTENANCE

Some day-to-day and regular mainte- SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE During the normal day-to-day operation nance is essential to maintain your vehi- of the vehicle, general maintenance The maintenance items listed in this should be performed regularly as pre- cle in good mechanical condition, as well section are required to be serviced at as its emission and engine performance. scribed in this section. If you detect any regular intervals. However, under severe unusual sounds, vibrations or smells, be It is the owner’s responsibility to make driving conditions, additional or more sure to check for the cause and have it sure that the scheduled maintenance, as frequent maintenance will be required. checked promptly. In addition, it is re- well as general maintenance, is per- WHERE TO GO FOR SERVICE commended you visit a NISSAN dealer if formed. If maintenance service is required or your you think that repairs are required. As the vehicle owner, you are the only one vehicle appears to malfunction, have the When performing any checks or mainte- who can ensure that your vehicle receives systems checked and serviced. It is re- nance work, closely observe “Mainte- the proper maintenance. You are a vital commended you visit a NISSAN dealer for nance precautions” (P.8-2) of this manual. link in the maintenance chain. this service. EXPLANATION OF MAINTENANCE GENERAL MAINTENANCE NISSAN technicians are well-trained spe- ITEMS General maintenance includes those cialists and are kept up to date with the items which should be checked during latest service information through tech- Additional information on the following normal day-to-day operation. They are nical bulletins, service tips and training items with “*” is found in the “8. Do-it- essential for proper vehicle operation. It is programs. They are completely qualified yourself” section of this manual. your responsibility to perform these pro- to work on NISSAN vehicles before work Outside the vehicle cedures regularly as prescribed. begins. The maintenance items listed here should Performing general maintenance checks If your vehicle is involved in a collision, it is be performed from time to time, unless requires minimal mechanical skill and recommended that you ask your NISSAN otherwise specified. only a few general automotive tools. dealer where the nearest NISSAN Certified Doors and engine hood: Check that all These checks or inspections can be done Collision Center is located, or go to http:// collision.nissanusa.com. doors and the engine hood, operate by yourself, a qualified technician or, if you properly. Also ensure that all latches lock prefer, a NISSAN dealer. You can be confident that a NISSAN securely. Lubricate hinges, latches, latch dealer’s service department can perform pins, rollers and links if necessary. Make the service needed to meet the mainte- sure that the secondary latch keeps the nance requirements on your vehicle. hood from opening when the primary latch is released. When driving in areas using road salt or

9-2 Maintenance and schedules other corrosive materials, check lubrica- normal highway speeds, wheel balancing Automatic transmission P (Park) me- tion frequently. may be needed. chanism: On a fairly steep hill, check that Lights*: Clean the headlights on a regular For additional information regarding tires, your vehicle is held securely with the shift basis. Make sure that the headlights, stop refer to “Important Tire Safety Informa- lever in the P (Park) position without lights, tail lights, turn signal lights, and tion” (US) or “Tire Safety Information” applying any brakes. other lights are all operating properly and (Canada) in the NISSAN Warranty Infor- Brake pedal: Check the pedal for smooth installed securely. Also check headlight mation Booklet. operation. If the brake pedal suddenly aim. Windshield: Clean the windshield on a goes down further than normal, the pedal Road wheel nuts (lug nuts)*: When regular basis. Check the windshield at feels spongy or the vehicle seems to take checking the tires, make sure no wheel least every six months for cracks or other longer to stop, have your vehicle checked nuts are missing, and check for any loose damage. Have a damaged windshield immediately. It is recommended you visit wheel nuts. Tighten if necessary. repaired by a qualified repair facility. It is a NISSAN dealer for this service. Keep the floor mat away from the pedal. Tire rotation*: Tires should be rotated recommended that you have a damaged every 7,500 miles (12,000 km). windshield repaired by a NISSAN dealer, or Brakes: Check that the brakes do not pull a NISSAN Certified Collision Center. To the vehicle to one side when applied. Tires*: Check the pressure with a gauge locate a collision center in your area, refer Parking brake: Check the parking brake often and always prior to long distance to http://collision.nissanusa.com. trips. If necessary, adjust the pressure in operation regularly. The vehicle should be all tires, including the spare, to the Windshield wiper blades*: Check for securely held on a fairly steep hill with pressure specified. Check carefully for cracks or wear if they do not wipe only the parking brake applied. If the damage, cuts or excessive wear. properly. parking brake needs adjusted, it is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer for Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Inside the vehicle this service. transmitter components: Replace the The maintenance items listed here should TPMS transmitter grommet seal, valve Seats: Check seat position controls such be checked on a regular basis, such as as seat adjusters, seatback recliner, etc. to core and cap when the tires are replaced when performing scheduled mainte- due to wear or age. ensure they operate smoothly and that all nance, cleaning the vehicle, etc. latches lock securely in every position. Wheel alignment and balance: If the Accelerator pedal: Check the pedal for Check that the head restraints move up vehicle should pull to either side while smooth operation and make sure the and down smoothly and that the locks (if driving on a straight and level road, or if pedal does not catch or require uneven so equipped) hold securely in all latched you detect uneven or abnormal tire wear, effort. Keep the floor mat away from the positions. there may be a need for wheel alignment. pedal. If the steering wheel or seat vibrates at Maintenance and schedules 9-3 Seat belts: Check that all parts of the seat NOTE: spected. It is recommended you visit a belt system (for example, buckles, an- Care should be taken to avoid situations NISSAN dealer for this service. (See “Pre- chors, adjuster and retractors) operate that can lead to potential battery dis- cautions when starting and driving” (P.5- properly and smoothly, and are installed charge and potential no-start condi- 4) for exhaust gas (carbon monoxide).) securely. Check the belt webbing for cuts, tions such as: Fluid leaks: Check under the vehicle for fraying, wear or damage. 1. Installation or extended use of elec- fuel, oil, water or other fluid leaks after the Steering wheel: Check for changes in the tronic accessories that consume vehicle has been parked for a while. Water steering conditions, such as excessive battery power when the engine is dripping from the air conditioner after use free play, hard steering or strange noises. not running (Phone chargers, GPS, is normal. If you should notice any leaks DVD players, etc.) Warning lights and chimes: Make sure or if gasoline fumes are evident, check for that all warning lights and chimes are 2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/ the cause and have it corrected immedi- operating properly. or only driven short distances. ately. Windshield defroster: Check that the air In these cases, the battery may need to Power steering fluid level* and lines: comes out of the defroster outlets prop- be charged to maintain battery health. Check the level when the fluid is cold, with erly and in sufficient quantity when oper- the engine off. Check the lines for proper Brake fluid level*: Make sure that the attachment, leaks, cracks, etc. ating the heater or air conditioner. brake fluid level is between the MAX and Windshield wiper and washer*: Check MIN lines on the reservoir. Radiator and hoses: Check the front of that the wipers and washer operate the radiator and clean off any dirt, insects, Engine coolant level*: Check the coolant leaves, etc., that may have accumulated. properly and that the wipers do not level when the engine is cold. streak. Make sure the hoses have no cracks, Engine drive belts*: Make sure that no deformation, rot or loose connections. Under the hood and vehicle belt is frayed, worn, cracked or oily. Underbody: The underbody is frequently The maintenance items listed here should Engine oil level*: Check the level after exposed to corrosive substances such as be checked periodically (for example, parking the vehicle on a level spot and those used on icy roads or to control each time you check the engine oil or turning off the engine. Wait more than 15 dust. It is very important to remove these refuel). minutes for the oil to drain back into the substances, otherwise rust will form on Battery*: Check the fluid level in each cell. oil pan. the floor pan, frame, fuel lines and around It should be between the MAX and MIN Exhaust system: Make sure there are no the exhaust system. At the end of winter, lines. Vehicles operated in high tempera- loose supports, cracks or holes. If the the underbody should be thoroughly tures or under severe condition require sound of the exhaust seems unusual or flushed with plain water, being careful to frequent checks of the battery fluid level. there is a smell of exhaust fumes, im- clean those areas where mud and dirt mediately have the exhaust system in- may accumulate. For additional informa- 9-4 Maintenance and schedules EXPLANATION OF SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE ITEMS tion, see “Cleaning exterior” (P.7-2). The following descriptions are provided For recommended fuel, lubricants, Windshield washer fluid*: Check that to give you a better understanding of the fluids, grease, and refrigerant, refer to there is adequate fluid in the reservoir. scheduled maintenance items that “Capacities and recommended fluids/ should be regularly checked or replaced. lubricants” (P.10-2) of this manual. The maintenance schedule indicates at which mileage/time intervals each item EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAIN- requires service. TENANCE In addition to scheduled maintenance, Drive belts*: your vehicle requires that some items be Check engine drive belts for wear, fraying checked during normal day-to-day op- or cracking and for proper tension. Re- eration. Refer to “General maintenance” place any damaged drive belts. (P.9-2). Engine air filter: Items marked with “*” are recommended Replace at specified intervals. When driv- by NISSAN for reliable vehicle operation. ing for prolonged periods in dusty condi- You are not required to perform main- tions, check/replace the filter more tenance on these items in order to frequently. maintain the warranties which come with your vehicle. Other maintenance items Engine coolant*: and intervals are required. Replace coolant at the specified interval. When applicable, additional information When adding or replacing coolant, be can be found in the “8. Do-it yourself” sure to use only Genuine NISSAN Long section of this manual. Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equivalent with the proper mixture. (Refer to NOTE: “Engine cooling system” (P.8-4) to deter- NISSAN does not advocate the use of mine the proper mixture for your area.) non-OEM approved aftermarket flush- NOTE: ing systems and strongly advises against performing these services on a Mixing any other type of coolant or the NISSAN product. Many of the aftermar- use of non-distilled water may reduce ket flushing systems use non-OEM ap- the recommended service interval of proved chemicals or solvents, the use of the coolant. which has not been validated by NISSAN. Maintenance and schedules 9-5 Engine oil and oil filter: Exhaust system: . Brake pads and rotors Replace engine oil and oil filter at the Visually inspect the exhaust pipes, muffler . Brake linings and drums specified intervals. For recommended oil and hangers for leaks, cracks, deteriora- . Brake lines and hoses grade and viscosity refer to “Capacities tion, and damage. Tighten connections or . Differential, transmission and transfer and recommended fluids/lubricants” replace parts as necessary. case oil (P.10-2). Propeller shaft(s): . Steering linkage Evaporative Emissions Control Vapor Check for damage, looseness, and grease . Propeller shaft(s) and front drive Lines*: leakage. shafts . Check vapor lines for leaks or looseness. In-cabin microfilter: Engine air filter Tighten connections or replace parts as . Clutch housing drain (AWD only) necessary. Replace at specified intervals. When driving for prolonged periods in dusty condi- Fuel lines*: tions, replace the filter more frequently. Check the fuel hoses, piping and connec- Steering gear and linkage, axle and tions for leaks, looseness, or deterioration. suspension parts: Tighten connections or replace parts as necessary. Check for damage, looseness, and leakage of oil or grease. Under severe driving Spark plugs: conditions, inspect more frequently. Replace at specified intervals. Install new Tire rotation: plugs of the type as originally equipped. Tires should be rotated every 7,500 miles CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE (12,000 km). When rotating tires, check for Brake lines and cables: damage and uneven wear. Replace if Visually inspect for proper installation. necessary. Check for chafing, cracks, deterioration, Transmission fluid/oil, differential oil: and signs of leaking. Replace any deterio- Visually inspect for signs of leakage at rated or damaged parts immediately. specified intervals. Brake pads and rotors: Off-road maintenance: Check for wear, deterioration and fluid Check the following items frequently leaks. Replace any deteriorated or da- whenever you drive off-road through maged parts immediately. deep sand, mud or water: 9-6 Maintenance and schedules MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES STANDARD MAINTENANCE

To help ensure smooth, safe and eco- . Operating in hot weather in stop-and- The following tables show the standard nomical driving, NISSAN provides two go “rush hour” traffic. maintenance schedule. Depending upon maintenance schedules that may be . Extensive idling and/or low speed weather and atmospheric conditions, used, depending upon the conditions in driving for long distances, such as varying road surfaces, individual driving which you usually drive. These schedules police, taxi or door-to-door delivery habits and vehicle usage, additional or contain both distance and time intervals, use. more frequent maintenance may be re- up to 120,000 miles (192,000 km)/96 . Driving in dusty conditions. quired. months. For most people, the odometer . Driving on rough, muddy or salt After 120,000 miles (192,000 km)/96 reading will indicate when service is months, continue maintenance at the needed. However, if you drive very little, spread roads. . same mileage/time intervals. your vehicle should be serviced at the Towing a trailer, or using a camper or regular time intervals shown in the sche- car-top carrier. dule. NOTE: After 120,000 miles (192,000 km)/96 For vehicles operated in Canada, both months, continue maintenance at the standard and severe maintenance same mileage/time intervals. items should be performed at every ADDITIONAL MAINTENANCE ITEMS interval. FOR SEVERE OPERATING CONDI- TIONS Additional maintenance items for severe operating conditions; should be performed on vehicles that are driven under especially demanding conditions. Additional maintenance items should be performed if you primarily operate your vehicle under the following conditions: . Repeated short trips of less than 5 miles (8 km). . Repeated short trips of less than 10 miles (16 km) with outside temperatures remaining below freezing.

Maintenance and schedules 9-7 STANDARD MAINTENANCE Abbreviations: I = Inspect and correct or replace as necessary, R = Replace, L = Lubricate MAINTENANCE OPERATION Miles × 1,000 MAINTENANCE INTERVAL Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, (km × 1,000) 7.5 15 22.5 30 37.5 45 52.5 60 67.5 75 82.5 90 97.5 105 112.5 120 whichever comes first. Months (12) (24) (36) (48) (60) (72) (84) (96) (108) (120) (132) (144) (156) (168) (180) (192) 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 78 84 90 96 Air cleaner filter NOTE (1) R R R R Automatic transmission fluid NOTE (2) Brake fluid$ RR R R Brake lines and cables II II I I I I Brake pads and rotors$ II II I I I I Drive belts NOTE (3) I* I* I* I* I* Engine coolant* NOTE (4)(5) Engine oil & oil filter$ RRRRRRRRRRRR R RRR EVAP vapor lines & Fuel lines I* I* I* I* Exhaust system$ II I I Fuel filter NOTE (2) In-cabin microfilter RR RR R R R R Intake & exhaust valve clearance NOTE (6) Intelligent Key battery IRRRR Propeller shaft & drive shaft boots (4WD models)$ II II I I I I

Propeller shaft grease (4WD models) L L L L L L L L Spark plugs NOTE (7) Replace every 105,000 miles (168,000 km) Steering gear and linkage, axle and suspension parts$ II I I Tire rotation NOTE (8) Transfer fluid & differential gear oil See NOTE (9) I I I I I I I I

9-8 Maintenance and schedules NOTE: Maintenance items with “$” should be performed more frequently according to “Maintenance under severe driving conditions” (P.9-10). (1) If operating mainly in dusty conditions, more frequent maintenance may be required. (2) Periodic maintenance is not required. (3) After 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 48 months, inspect every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 12 months. Replace the drive belts if found damaged. (4) First replacement interval is 105,000 miles (168,000 km) or 84 months. After first replacement, replace every 75,000 miles (120,000 km) or 60 months. (5) Use only Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equivalent with proper mixture ratio of 50% antifreeze and 50% demineralized or distilled water. Mixing any other type of coolant or the use of non-distilled water may reduce the life expectancy of the factory fill coolant. (6) Periodic maintenance is not required. However, if valve noise increases, inspect valve clearance. (7) Replace spark plug when the plug gap exceeds 0.053 in (1.35 mm) even if within specified replacement mileage. (8) Refer to “Tire rotation” under “General maintenance” (P.9-2). (9) If towing a trailer, using a car-top carrier, or driving on rough or muddy roads, change (not just inspect) oil at every 20,000 miles (32,000 km) or 24 months. *: Maintenance items and intervals with “*” are recommended by NISSAN for reliable vehicle operation. The owner need not perform such maintenance in order to maintain the emission warranty or manufacturer recall liability. Other maintenance items and intervals are required.

Maintenance and schedules 9-9 MAINTENANCE UNDER SEVERE DRIVING CONDITIONS

The maintenance intervals shown on the Maintenance item Maintenance opera- Maintenance interval preceding pages are for normal operating tion conditions. If the vehicle is mainly oper- Brake fluid Replace Every 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or 12 ated under severe driving conditions as months shown below, more frequent mainte- Brake pads & rotors Inspect Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 nance must be performed on the follow- months ing items as shown in the table. Engine oil & oil filter Replace Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 Severe driving conditions months . Repeated short trips of less than 5 Exhaust system Inspect Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months miles (8 km). . Propeller shaft & drive shaft Inspect Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 Repeated short trips of less than 10 boots (4WD models) months miles (16 km) with outside temperatures remaining below freezing. Steering gear & linkage, axle & Inspect Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 suspension parts months . Operating in hot weather in stop-and- go “rush hour” traffic. . Extensive idling and/or low speed driving for long distances, such as police, taxi or door-to-door delivery use. . Driving in dusty conditions. . Driving on rough, muddy, or salt spread roads. . Towing a trailer, or using a camper or car-top carrier Maintenance operation: Inspect = Inspect and correct or replace as necessary.

9-10 Maintenance and schedules MAINTENANCE LOG

7,500 Miles (12,000 km) or 6 Months 15,000 Miles (24,000 km) or 12 Months 22,500 Miles (36,000 km) or 18 Months